Se nr rar na ry — +
a = PaMysTc Pear
= = eee
AP TS. gt ey bh ~ 2 ge aie ek ee nea ate ee
= Reet Beo-e Grteinotes eee Batt: Bete ~
eee ree eee ee ~
~ ~ ee Rete mo) a gee
| + iyi CAR GaN WS ay wane LIBRARY
Sg NEW. YOR!
ig tonite
Sut Le TIN OT ie
Southern California
Academy of Sciences
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
Vou. XLIX January-ApRrit, 1950. Part 1
CONTENTS
PAGE
NOTE ON A HYNARCTID’ BEAR FROM THE MIDDLE PLIOCENE
OF CHIHUAHUA, MEXICO
Chester Stock - = = - = - = 4 4S S
\FOSSIL ARTHROPODS OF BRITISH COLUMBIA
Dwight Pierce
5. A New Deposit of Lignite - - -
6. Fossil Spider Silk - -
7. A Carabid from Lynn Creek Tiedite.
8. The Genus Donacia in British Columbia Lignite
THE ALLOTYPE OF THRASSIS AUGUST SQNE
G. F. Augustson - - = -
A NEW SPECIES OF STENOCHARIS GROSSBECK AND TRANSFER
OF THREE RELATED SPECIES ae THE oan
Hahn W. Capps - - 3 = i
NATURAL HISTORY OBSERVATIONS ON PROPHYSAON ee
Tevet G. COOPER), WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO AMPU-
Cadet Hand and William Marcus Ingram = - = = |
A REMARKABLE NEW SPECIES OF MARINE ISOPOD, )».ERICH-
SONELLA CRENULATA N. SP., FROM NEWPORT BAY, CALI-
FORNIA. j
Robert James Menzies | - = - = = - =
Issued July 20, 1950
(CAS
Ome
Dr.
”
er -
Southern™ C3 alifornia
Academy of Sciences
OFFICERS anp DIRECTORS
SS
ae
. William L. Lloyd be ~ in z = = President
. Louis C. Wheeler - - ‘= = e F irst Vice President
. Sherwin F. Wood - - - - ~ Second Vice President
. Kenneth BH. Stager - - = - “ - - Secretary
W. Dwight Pierce - - - - - - - Treasurer
. John A, Comstock a - - - Hditor
r, Lloyd M. Martin and Mr. R. Mark Rys an te ‘Ags? ts to Secretary
Dr. A. Weir Bell Mr. Theodore Payne
Dr. John A. Comstock Dr. W. Dwight Pierce
Dr. John Herman Mr. Kenneth EH. Stager
Dr. Hildegarde Howard Dr. Louis C. Wheeler
Dr. William L. Lloyd Mr. Russell S. Woglum
Dr. Sherwin F.. Wood
ADVISORY BOARD
Dr. H. J. Andrews Dr. Philip A, Munz
Dr. J. Stanley Brode Dr. Chester Stock
Mr. Fred E. Burlew Dr. R. H. Swift
Dr. Preston Kline Caye Mr. Russell S. Woglum
Dr. Howard R. Hill Mr. Arthur Woodward
SECTION OF AGRICULTURAL SCIENCHS
Mr. Russell S. Woglum, Chairman
ANTHROPOLOGICAL SECTION
Mr. Arthur Woodward, Chairman
BOTANICAL SECTION
Miss Bonnie Templeton, Ohairman
SECTION OF CHEMICAL SCIENCES
Mr. Jos. B. Ficklen III, Chairman
SECTION OF HARTH SCIENCES
Dr. John Herman, Chairman
SECTION OF HEALTH AND SANITATION
Dr. Irving Rehman, Chairman
SECTION OF JUNIOR SCIENCES
Mr. Carroll L. Lang, Chairman
SECTION OF PHYSICAL SCIENCES
Dr. Preston Cline Caye, Chairman
SECTION OF ZOOLOGICAL SCIENCES
Dr. Raymond C. Osburn, Chairman
FINANCE COMMITTEE
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, Chairman
Mr. William Currie, Auditor Dr. John A. Comstock
Dr. John Herman
PROGRAM COMMITTEE
Dr. Louis C. Wheeler, Chairman Dr. Sherwin F. Wood
HOSPITALITY COMMITTEE
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, Chairman
COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATION
Dr. John A. Comstock, Chairman
Hildegarde Howard Dr. Philip A. Munz Dr. A. Weir Bell
COMMITTEE ON CONSERVATION
Dr. Sherwin F. Wood, Chairman
Mr. Theodore Payne Mr. Carroll L. Lang
Prof. J. Stanley Brode Dr. John A. Comstock
OFFICE OF THE ACADEMY
Los Angeles County Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, Calif.
Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences
VOLUME 49 = - = = - - = EAR Teale an)
NOTE ON A Hy®=NARCTID BEAR FROM THE MuIpDLE PLIOCENE
or CHIHUAHUA, MEXICO
By CHESTER STOCK
The continental deposits exposed along the margins of the
Valley of the Rio Papigochic, western Chihuahua, Mexico, have
yielded a large and varied mammalian fauna of the Hemphillian
stage of the Pliocene. Elements of the fossil assemblage have
been described, and an extended report by Dr. John F. Lance on
the fossil horses of the region is now in press.
At least two locality names have been applied to the Chihua-
huan middle Pliocene occurrences. Rincon was the first designa-
tion and was replaced subsequently by Yepomera, a more de-
sirable place name for this faunal horizon, particularly because
Rincon had been used for a stratigraphic formation or member.
From the Yepomera Pliocene is now recorded a hyznarctid bear.
Hy2NARCTOS CF SCHNEIDER! Sellards
The description of the material is afforded principally by two
upper molars, M7 and M2, No, 3533 Calif. Inst. Tech. Vert.
Paleont. Coll. shown in Plate 1. The specimens were collected
in the Arroyo Huachin, at Rincon, Chihuahua, locality 275, Calif.
lnnsia MiceheaViert, Paleont.
Comparison of the Chihuahuan specimen with known’ North
American species of the genus is based on M7. This tooth in No.
3533 is similar in size to that of Hyenarctos schneidert from the
Bone Valley Pliocene, Florida. According to Frick’ the latter
tooth came from the same excavation at Brewster, Florida, that
yielded the type mandible of Hyenarctos schneideri. No. 3533 is
slightly smaller than the comparable tooth in H. gregoryi Frick
from the Mt. Eden beds of California. These relationships in
size are shown by the following comparative measurements
of M17.
Chihuahua Florida California
Anteroposterior diameter ...... 28.6 29.8 30.6
Greatest transverse diameter... 29.6 30.2 32.2
In No. 3533 a cingulum is feebly indicated along the outer
side. A well defined ledge occurs, however, in front of the base
of the paracone. The crown narrows very slightly anteriorly in
transverse width. This tooth bears three roots of which the inner
is by far the largest. Of the two roots above the outer half of
the crown, the posterior is larger than the anterior.
1Pyieck, C., The Hemicyonine and an American Tertiary bear. Bull. Amer. Mus.
Nat. Hist., vol. 56, art. 1, fig. 26a, pp. 63, 75, 1926.
1
LIBRARY
NEW. YORK
BOTANICAL
GARDEN
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
Fortunately, M2 of each side is present. This is the first time
that the second upper molar of a North American species of
Hyenarctos has become available, thus permitting comparison
with Old World forms. As in M/, the crown of M2 bears three
roots, and the inner root is the largest of the three. The crown
contracts in transverse width across the metacone, and expands 1n
anteroposterior diameter behind the hypocone to form a small
talon. The latter projects slightly farther backward than in M2
of either H. sivalensis from the Siwalik beds of India or H, im-
signis from Montpellier, France. It is not at all so well developed
as in the Indian or American species of /ndarctos.
The external cingulum is better developed at the base of the
paracone in this tooth than in M7. The ridge forming the proto-
cone is long; the hypocone is a small, but distinct cusp. A cin-
gulum is present along the base of the protocone.
Measurements (in millimeters) of M2 in No. 3533 are: an-
teroposterior diameter normal to anterior side and parallel to
inner border 27.5; greatest transverse diameter normal to inner
side and across paracone 31.4.
The present material represents the second occurrence of
hyenarctid bears known from the later Tertiary of Mexico.
Freudenberg figured and described a large lower carnassial from
the brown coal of Tehuichila near the boundary between the
states of Hidalgo and Vera Cruz. Freudenberg’ thought the
specimen resembled Hycnarctos. Frick referred this tooth to
the latter genus. While the tooth is 5 millimeters longer than
that in the type of H. schneideri, it is only a trifle wider.
Contribution No. 542,
Division of the Geological Sciences,
California Institute of Technology.
oe eS. : = 4
PLATE 1
Hycnarctos cf. schneideri Sellards. No. 3533 Calif. Inst. Vert.
Paleont. Coll., right M/ and M2, occlusal view, natural size. Yepomera,
Middle Pliocene, Chihuahua, Mexico.
2Freudenberg, W., Geol. u Pale. Abhand., N. F., vol. 9, p. 205, pl. 3, fig. 2, 1910.
2
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
FOSSIL ARTHROPODS OF BRITISH COLUMBIA
By W. Dwicut PIERCE
ewe DEPOSIT OF LIGNITE
On September 1, 1949, Mr. Walter MacKay Draycot pre-
sented the writer with a lot of black shaly Interglacial lignite,
much more solidly compressed, consisting of plant material with
almost no fine silts, as compared with that from Lynn Creek. It
was collected along the Seymour River which enters Vancouver
channel just east of Lynn Creek; at a point 8 miles from the
mouth and at an altitude of 450 feet.
One of the characteristics throughout this shale was the large
number of shining black seeds, resembling insect chitin, and en-
tirely different plant remains from those in the Lynn Creek lig-
nite. These will be reported on later by a paleobotanist.
A few insect remains were obtained, and will be considered
in this series of articles.
6, HPOSSIUE, SIU SIME
The most surprising find of all in the Seymour River lignite
was five little silken egg cases, and I was inclined to think that
these might be the oldest examples of silk in existence, until I read
Dr. McCook’s chapter on Ancestral Spiders and Their Habits, in
his great monograph on “American Spiders and Their Spinning
Work,” 1890 (vol. 2 :446-469), in which he cites eleven specimens
of cocoons from the Oligocene shales of Florissant, Colorado;
Green River, Wyoming; and Quesnel, British Columbia. These
had been given the name Aranca columbie Scudder (1878), which
McCook in 1880 assigns to the Theridiidze, and Scudder (1890)
agrees. These were oval in shape and most of them hung by a
pedicel.
Following the Scudder plan the new cocoons are named in a
general genus to indicate the probable family.
SALTICUS SEYMOURI, new species
Five silken cocoons, semi-lenticular, cut straight across and
open on that side; measuring 4.16 x 3.0 mm., 3.52 x 2.40 mm.,
S640 250mm, 3.28 «x 2/4 mm., and 3.04 x 1.92 mm. Two of
them contained round masses, probably crushed eggs. The silk
is very closely woven, and of a creamy or straw color. My as-
sumption is that the spider remains in the case with her egg ball.
The case does not consist of two layers united at edges, but is a
one piece pocket sac, open at one side, and hence most likely to
belong to a small Salticid. The Gnaphosidz and Thomiside make
lenticular cases with the two layers united at the edges.
3
BULLETIN, So. Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
7. A CARABID FROM LYNN CREEK LIGNITE
A fine pair of elytra belonging to the genus Notiophilus was
recovered from Interglacial lignite, collected along Lynn Creek,
North Vancouver, British Columbia, by Walter MacKay Draycot
in October 1946. These elytra had such characteristic sculpture
that | felt there could be no doubt as to their generic position, but
Was three years in discovering that,
The genus Notiophilus belongs to the North Temperate Re-
gions and in America occurs as 17 species, most of which are
unicolorous. Three species have a yellowish to brownish longi-
tudinal vitta, which also characterizes these new elytra.
H. C. Fall monographed the genus in Psyche 13:79-92, in
1906; and Thomas Lincoln Casey reviewed it in Memoirs on the
Coleoptera 9:139-143, in 1920. These texts leave only N. syl-
vaticus Eschscholtz, N. nemoralis, Fall, and N. semiopacus Esch-
scholtz with which to compare our specimens. The first two are
characterized by a broad and entire yellow lateral vitta occupying
the lateral interstriz; and semiopacus has a dull lateral vitta,
which may be entire, or distinct only toward the apex. Fall does
not give any cue of difference in sculpture or texture of the vitta
from the remainder of the surface.
The only other character by which an elytron in this genus
can be determined by keys or descriptions, is the number of an-
nulate setigerous punctures or fovez near the apex of the elytra.
No mention is made of the presence of such punctures elsewhere
on the elytra, although they are present in the various species of
the genus.
N. sylvaticus and N. nemoralis have two such punctures or
fovee near the apex, and semiopacus has three, rarely two or
four, while the new species has six or seven more or less dis-
cernible annulate punctures near the apex, and in addition has
three at the base, and five others scattered on the disc. Since
semlopacus is the only species with more than two apical punc-
tures, the new material was compared with California specimens,
and is unquestionably different. In semiopacus there are two
short diagonal strize joining the sutural stria. In vancouveri
these strize are abbreviated, the first to two punctures, the second to
four and a basal annulate vitta. Furthermore the surface of the
elytron in semiopacus is not deeply wrinkled in the vitta, but of
same surface level, although the sculpture is reticulate around all
strize and smooth in the radial and cubital areas.
Checking from distributional standpoint, N. nemoralis is
known only from New England; N. sylvaticus occurs in the
coastal belt from Southern Mendocino County, California,
through Oregon, Washington, Vancouver and British Columbia,
to Sitka and Kenai, Alaska, from sea level to over 5000 feet on
Mt. Rainier. N. semiopacus occurs in Oregon and California to
4
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
San Diego. The two Western species are readily separated by
frontal characters, which of course are not available to us. On
present evidence then, vancouveri 1s a distinct species belonging
near sylvaticus and semiopacus.
NOTIOPHILUS VANCOUVERI new species
Described from a pair of elytra from Interglacial lignite from
Lynn Creek, North Vancouver, British Columbia, found by
Walter MacKay Draycot. Length of elytron 3.40 mm., breadth
1.00 mm. Color shining black with a brownish median vitta aris-
ing basally in the cubital area, at the center of the disc including
all medial and cubital striz, and at apex reaching radial striz.
Texture of the black areas shining smooth; of the vitta, soft,
longitudinally wrinkled, minutely reticulate, and much thinner
than the black areas.
A characteristic of Notiophilus, Leistus, Nebria, and Pelophila
is that the elytra are margined at base. This character has not
been correlated with modern morphology. $
The so-called basal margin is the plica basalis or basal fold of
Snodgrass, and extends from the base of radius to the vannal
fold. It is usually concealed by the prothorax. In this material
the axillary region is a broad basal margined band, representing
the second axilla, behind which is the third axilla to which vannus
and jugum are attached. The first axilla, to which the costa is
attached, is seen only on the underside. In the dorsal view
(Plate 2, figure 1) just a narrow portion of the vannus, which
clasps the body, can be seen.
The costa is only glimpsed at base above (Plate 2, figure 1),
but beneath, it extends as a reinforcing brown rib to the apex
(Plate 2, figure 3) ; while the subcosta forms the sutural margin
and is black.
The radius is a punctate stria against the subcostal rim. Two
short radial veins, R. and R; are represented by 2 and 4 punctures
and R, has an annulate puncture at base. The radial interspace
is broad and smooth, impunctate and as wide as the entire medial
and first cubital area, which in the center is colored brownish.
The first four longitudinal punctate strie, which were called by
Fall strie 4, 5, 6, 7, constitute the four branches of medius, with
a basal annulate puncture separating the first two (M,, M.) from
the last two (M;, M,). Mz; has two discal annulate punctures.
Three cubital striz are present. The first two include the base of
the brown vitta and extend to the impunctate apical area; first
cubital has an annulate puncture at middle; the third cubital is
indicated basally by a few punctures and an annular puncture,
and thence is faintly indicated by punctules on the otherwise
smooth cubital and cubital-postcubital interspace. Postcubitus
arises from a basal annular puncture and has another near base,
and extends at the edge of the vannal fold to its terminus.
5
49, Part 1, 1950
Vol.
SCIENCES
or
ACADEMY
BULLETIN, So. CALIF.
‘ploy TeuueA— AA ‘SnuuvA—A ‘wnsnlf—p {eysooqns—Og ‘vjsoo—D ‘apts Jepun ‘owes ofl “¢ ANNOY
‘ploy jeuueA— JA ‘SnuUuvA—A ‘WNIsTWelI—yYy -ploy yesne—Afr “MOTA [B19}e[ ‘OWTBS OY,L “Z AWNSIY
‘ploy [euueA— A ‘snuuUvA—A ‘STTeBSeq noyd—qqd ‘¥}S00—-D “UMOIG 9JBTNOTJaI “WJOS— J
SyoR[q Ssululys qyJoous—g| UOIJATA WOT JO MOIA [eSIOp ‘adI1aTq Waanoouna snprydoYyON “T AXOOTH
6 ULV Id
¢ =p t
JAW
beecaeee®
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
Hence in the old terminology the elytron is 11-striate with
the 2nd, 3rd, and 10th abbreviate.
The apical fourth of the elytron in the brown soft zone is
more or less smooth, with one large and three faint annulate
punctures representing first medius and three representing fourth
medius (Fall’s 7th stria).
The vannus is vertical, broadest in basal fourth (Plate 2,
figure 2), and thence gradually narrowing to its terminus at about
apical tenth. A tiny infold at base beneath represents the jugum,
which very narrowly folds over the edge of vannus as shown in
Figures 2, 3.
Sma ecENUS DONACIA IN; BRITISH COLUMBIA
LIGNITE
T. D. A. Cockerell in 1927 described Donacia connelli from
Cordova Bay lignite, but since then Mr. Draycot has found much
material in the genus.
The beautiful, graceful beetles of the genus Donacia in the
Chrysomeloidea, occur upon the leaves and stems of water lilies,
arrowhead, pond-weed, skunk cabbage, pickerel weed, reeds,
sedges, and other water-loving plants, and hence are semiaquatic
in habit. The larve live on the outside of the submerged roots
and obtain their air through the tissues of the host plant. When
ready to pupate they enclose themselves in silken cocoons attached
to the plant.
This genus is characteristic of Interglacial lignites . across
North America, and the writer has much material on hand for
future reports from other areas.
DonactA (DoNACIA) DRAYCOTI new species
Received November 1, 1946 from Walter MacKay Draycot,
collected in banks of Lynn Creek, North Vancouver, B. C., in
interglacial lignite.
Holotype (LC 74), three fragments of a brilliant blue green
elytron; length about 4.7 mm., width 1.68 mm.; ratio 2.809:1.
Striz (ten in number) consist of elongate punctures, but striz
not impressed, separated by 0.12 to 0.14 mm.; transverse wrinkles
very close, short, continue across strie, anastamosing, and curv-
ing; both marginal interspaces smoother. On under side punc-
tures represented by oval tubercles, wrinkling less evident; ten
rows of tubercles are distinct.
In addition Mr. Draycot obtained material in 1945, 1946, and
1947; and on September 1, 1949 the writer visited Mr. Draycot,
accompanied by Mrs. Pierce, Mr. Carroll Lang, and Miss Ruth
Scherfee, and we were joined by Dr. John E. Armstrong, and his
assistant Mr. W. L. Brown of the Geological Survey of Canada,
7
BULLETIN, So. CALIF, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
the party picking up considerable matrix from which further ma-
terial was obtained.
_ The brilliant blue fragments of this species were found in all
lots received; and the paratype series consists of fragments
Numbered: LO 4, 9; 11) 12,13; 15, 17, 19, 20;p2ipeea eee, 20;
28, 66, 70, 78, 105, 112, 120, 141, 143, 145, 14s, aiszeiiney. 1162,
169, 174, 197, 206, 211, 213, all of a brilliant deep blue to bluish
black. But there were other specimens with identical sculpture,
which must be considered as black, and these are also included as
paratypes of draycoti, numbered LC 5, 6, 10, 18, 26, 27, 31, 63,
84, 88, 93, 113, 142, 164, 166, 168, 191, 210, 220.
The elytra are characterized by ten strial rows of punctures,
which are so obscured dorsally by the dense, irregular transverse
rugosity that they are easily overlooked. These transverse ridges
are short, anastamosing with those of other lines, and exist sev-
eral between successive punctures of the striz. There is no
definite pattern to them. The pleurites of the specimens with blue
elytra are black.
Donacta (DONACIA) CORDOV, new species
When Dr. Cockerell described in Canadian Entomologist (59 :-
303-304, 1927), the discovery of the deposit of interglacial lig-
nite at Cordova Bay, near Victoria, Vancouver Island, he de-
scribed Donacia connelli with elytra smooth between striz, and
referred other material to D. pompatica Scudder, of Scarboro,
Ontario interglacial lignites, which is described as having punc-
tured striz rather deep ,and the whole surface transversely wrin-
kled at the punctures; color bluish purple, deep violet, or dark
metallic green. The writer has not seen Cockerell’s Cordova Bay
material, but has four fragments of a Donacia taken by Walter
MacKay Draycot, from the same site. These do not in any wise
fit either the description or the Scudder illustration of Donacia
pompatica, but are rather of the type of D. draycoti.
The holotype of D. cordove (CB5) is a pair of elytra, crushed
on the matrix, color bluish purple; length 6.0 mm., breadth of
single elytron 1.76 mm.; ratio of length to width 3.409:1. The
outer margin of the elytra is bright metallic green. While strial
punctures can be detected, they are obscured by the more promi-
nent transverse wrinkling.
Paratype CB 7 and CB 8 are fragments of the same type of
elytron with identical coloring; while paratype CB 6 is blue
green in color.
DonaciA (DONACIA) LYNNI, new species
From Lynn Creek interglacial lignite collected by Walter
MacKay Draycot 1945, 8 miles northeast of Vancouver City.
Holotype LC 16; paratype LC 14. Length of holotype elytron
7.04 mm., width 2.64 mm.; ratio 2.666:1; distance between striz
8
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
0.24 to 0.26 mm.; ten striz; color black; striz deep and sharp
cut, interspaces roundingly and deeply wrinkled transversely.
Paratype length of elytron 8 mm.
COMPARATIVE MEASUREMENTS OF Fossit DONACIA
‘ a7 * Ratio
Donacia sp. Loeality perce eon Color eee Ne L av ee Other Data
ynni Pierce} Lynn Cr. LC 14 Black 8.00 Paratype
Vancouver, LC 16 Black 7.04 |2.64 |2.666 |Holotype
B.C.
longatula |Fort Riv. Shining Toe) NB 3.295 |Type
Scudder | Hadley, piceous .
Mass.
ordove P. |Cordova B. |CB5 Bluish 6.00 |1.76 |3.409 |Holotype
13. Gy purple
onnelli Cordova B. Green 5.00 |1.50 |3.333 |Type
Cockerell
ompatica |Scarboro, Metallic 5.00 {1.45 |3.448 |Type
Scudder Ontario green
raycoti P. | Lynn Cr. LC 74 Blue green (4.7 1.68 {2.809 |Holotype
©) 277 Black 4.40 |1.60 Cast
LC 31 Black 1.592 Paratype
LC 15 Deep blue |4.48- |1.52 |2.947 |Paratype
LC 162 |Deep blue [4.40 |1.52 /|2.894 |Partial pair
LC 143 |Deep blue |4.16-+/1.52
LC 141 |Deep blue 1.52
LC 4 Blue 4.40 |1.52 |2.894
LC 63 Black 1.52 |Cast
LC 10 Black 4.48 /|1.44 {3.111
LC 197 |Deep blue 1.44
LC 152 |Deep blue 1.44
LC 66 Deep blue 1.44 Cast
LC 11 Deep blue 1.44
LC 9 Deep blue 1.44
LC 93 Black 1.44
LC 113 =|Black 4.40 |1.28+
LC 168 |Black 4.24 Inside
LC 70 Deep blue /4.16
LC 138 Deep blue {4.00 /1.20-++
LC 28 Deep blue {3.60 /1.60 |2.25 /|Inside
arioides Sangamon R. Metallic 3.85 11.50 |2.056
Wickham |Mahomet, I1I. blue
Aria Scarboro, Deep blue- |3.2+ |1.4
Scudder Ontario | black
Thus on size and ratios the new species separate from the de-
scribed species. When the other materials at hand are studied a
key to the sculpture will also separate them adequately.
9
BuLLetin, So. Caniv. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
THE ALLOTYPE OF THRASSIS AUGUSTSONI
Hubbard, 1949 (Siphonaptera )
G. F, AUGUSTSON
During the early part of 1949 the writer was fortunate in
obtaining a small series of fleas taken from Nelson Ground Squir-
rels by Mr. A. C. Hawbecker, Mammalogist, Fresno State Col-
lege. The host animal was collected in Fresno County, California,
near the town of Mendota.
At approximately the same time, Dr. C. A. Hubbard, made a
similar collection further south in Kern County. The fleas in
this collection were males only, a species new to science, and
described by Dr. Hubbard in the Bulletin of the Southern Cali-
fornia Academy of Sciences, Vol. XLVIII, 1949, Part 2.
Due to the effort of Mr. Hawbecker, the writer was able to
obtain another series 6f these fleas in which a number of females
were present that are herein described.
THRASSIS AUGUSTSONI Hubbard
Allotype female
Heap: Frontal tuberele high, accuminate ; preantennal region
with two rows of bristles, the upper row with three bristles, the
uppermost bristle the longest, middle bristle close to the upper-
most, lower row of two bristles set along genital margin; eye
elliptical, heavily pigmented; maxillz sharply accuminate: labial
palpi five segmented, extending slightly beyond fore-coxe; post-
antennal region with two large bristles along margin of antennal
groove, ten to twelve small sete also present along margin; row
of long bristles on second segment of antenne.
Lecs AND THORAX: - Ponotal ctenidia with 19 spines; outer
surface of fore-femur with many fine bristles; thin bristles on
inside of mid- and- hind-coxz from base to apex. Fifth tarsal
segments with five pairs of lateral plantar bristles.
ABDOMINAL SEGMENTS: Abdominal tergites with two rows of
bristles; tergal teeth present on segments I to IV; three ante-
pygidial bristles, the lower two longer than upper bristle; style
short, twice as long as greatest width, with two lateral bristles ;
sternite X angulate, with many large bristles; sternite VII with
distinct sinus, variable as in other members of genus, upper lobe
1Manager, Madera County Mosquito Abatement District, Madera, California
10
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
flat, smaller than lower, with four bristles in a row; spermatheca
globular, the arm swollen distally.
ALLotyPE: A female collected by A. C. Hawbecker, 11 miles
east of Llanada, San Benito County, California, January 22, 1950,
from Citellus n. nelsom, deposited with the U. S. National Mu-
seum, Washington, D. C.
PARATYPES: Fourteen females collected as above and re-
tained in writer’s collection.
Remarks: As Dr. Hubbard indicated (ibid) this flea is close
to Thrassis gladiolis, difference noticeably in finger and VIII ster-
nite in the males (mislabeled as IX sternite in holotype descrip-
tion). Female identification can be made only on a close com-
parison of the spermatheca and sternite VII of both species.
PLATE 3
Thrassis augustsoni Hubbard, allotype, sternite VII and spermatheca.
BULLETIN, So. Canir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
a NEW SPECIES OF STENOCHARIS GROSSBECK
AND TRANSFER OF THREE RELATED
SPECIES TO THE GENUS
(Lepidoptera : Geometridee )
sy HAHN W. Capps
Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, Agricultural Research Administration,
United States Department of Agriculture
The only species heretofore assigned to the genus Stenocharis
has been its type, permagnaria Grossbeck.’ In addition to the
new species described herein, three Mexican species, Coenocharis
cormfrons Dyar, C. hoplitaria Dyar,’ and C. rhadinaria Dyar,’
which properly belong in Stenocharis are hereby transferred to it.
The new species, arizonensis, is closest to rhadinaria.
STENOCHARIS ARIZONENSIS, new species
Male (pl. 4, fig. 3)—Antenna bipectinate. Frons strongly
produced. Tongue well developed. Labial palpus with third seg-
ment short (one-half as long as second), porrect or drooping.
Fore tibia unarmed. Hind tibia with two pairs of spurs; without
hair pencil. Body color grayish with an intermingling of brown
and fuscous. Forewing ground color grayish with three brownish
uneven lines, the lines often with a zig-zag appearance, indistinct
near costa, stronger posteriorly ; posterior transverse line usually
broader and more clearly defined than anterior and median trans-
verse lines ; a rather conspicuous brownish area bounded by veins
2 and 4. Hind wing gray-brown with the brown predominate in
area between discal cell and outer margin; post medial line nar-
row, evenly curved, poorly defined. Under surface of fore and
hind wings without conspicuous markings.
Alar expanse 35-40 mm.
Genitalia (pl. 4, figs. 1, la).—Uncus simple, hooklike, flat-
tened, dilated and slightly bifid distally. Gnathos narrow with a
simple, short, apical hook. Harpe, simple, unarmed, elongate.
Anellus with sclerotization of lateral arm constricted near mid-
dle, effect hingelike; upper portion of arm conspicuously en-
larged, toothlike in shape. Aedeagus (fig. la), slender, strongly
attenuate distally ; without cornuti.
1Bul. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 31: 400-401. 1912. Barnes and MecDunnough, Check
List of the Lepidoptera of Boreal America, No. 4536, 1917. McDunnough, Check List
of the Lepidoptera of Canada and the United States of America (Part I, Macrolepid-
optera), No. 4581, 1938.
2Proc. U. S. Natl. Mus., 47: 390, 1914.
2Proc. U. S. Natl. Mus., 42: 92, 1912.
4Proc. U. S. Natl. Mus., 51: 30, 1916.
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
PLATE 4
EXPLANATION OF PLATE
Fic. 1. Male genitalia with edeagus removed, ventral view.
Fic. la. Aedeagus.
Fic. 2. Female genitalia, ventral view.
Fic. 3. Male adult.
Fie. 4. Female adult.
Photographs by Dr. José Oiticica Filho.
BULLETIN, So. Canter, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
Female (pl. 4, fig. 4),—Antenna slightly serrate. Similar
to male in maculation but with the colors less contrasting and
coloration of hind wing more uniform.
Alar expanse 37-43 mm,
Genitalia (fig. 2) with a rather narrow sclerotized band along
lower margin of genital opening; a well-defined incomplete collar-
like structure slightly below genital opening; ductus seminalis
from ductus bursz near base of collar; signum a small disklike
plate with serrate projections (3 teeth).
In U. S. National Museum, No. 59498.
Type.
Allotype.—In Los Angeles County Museum.
Paratypes.—In Los Angeles County Museum, American Mu-
seum of Natural History, and U. S. National Museum.
Type locality—Hereford, Arizona.
Remarks: The type series composed of five males in collection
of U.S. National Museum from the Barnes Collection; one male
from the American Museum of Natural History via Dr. McDun-
nough; and two males and two females from the Los Angeles
County Museum via Lloyd M. Martin. Specific data on labels as
follows: ¢ Type, Hereford, Ariz., C. R. Biederman Coll., Barnes
Collection ; 9 Allotype, Madera Canyon, Santa Rita Mts., South-
ern Ariz., Aug. 3, 1947, collected by Dr. J. A. Comstock and
Lloyd M. Martin and also two male and two female paratypes
with same data except collecting dates (1 g July 2,13 Aug. 2,
and 1 @ Aug. 7). Other paratypes as follows: 1 g, Ariz., Fred’k.
Lemmer Collection, No. 2, Barnes Collection; 1 g, Paradise,
Cochise) €or, Anizs (july), Barnes, Collection iyeealmenlee,
Ariz: Bs Collection, 6-20-09, Barnes Collection weer Oct
26), Barnes Collection; 1g, Chiricahua Mts., No, 12) J. A:
Grossbeck Collection.
14
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
NATURAL HISTORY OBSERVATIONS ON PROPHY-
SAON ANDERSONI (J. G. COOPER), WITH
SPECIAL REFERENCE TO AMPUTATION
By Capet HAND AND WILLIAM Marcus INGRAM
Mills College, California
Little is known of the natural history of California slugs,
and especially of the genus Prophysaon which possesses the re-
markable ability of tail amputation. Natural history work was
undertaken in the hope that some plausible phenomenon might be
forthcoming to show why P. andersoni (J. G. Cooper), the local
representative of this genus, amputates its tail. Collections and
field observations were made in two areas of Oakland, Cali-
fornia; these were Redwood Park and Montclair. The natural
range of P. andersoni is listed by Pilsbry (1948) from California
to Alaska.
This study has been carried on for a period of one and one-
half years, during which time fifty-three slugs were collected in
the two above named areas. These two areas show a marked
resemblance to one another in that a stream runs through each
and the tree association is the coastal redwood, Sequoia semper-
virens Endl., and the California bay, Umbellularia californica
Nutt. Occasional willows are found along the stream banks, and
a small stand of eucalyptus is found, in addition, in the Redwood
Park area. The shrubby plants consist largely of poison oak and
berry vines. Numerous lower plants also occur such as ferns,
liverworts and mosses, particularly along the stream bank, as well
as numerous fungi. One of the more obvious fungi was Tricho-
loma terreum Fr, which occurred in large numbers in the stream
bed in Redwood Park before the rainy season set in. During the
rainy season the clay soil of these areas is well saturated and very
cohesive; in dry periods a thick dust forms on the surface of
the soil.
The first collections were made in October, 1948, after several
rains had thoroughly soaked the soil. At the time slugs were col-
lected both under cover and in the open. The cover especially
preferred by P. andersom during the rainy season seems to be in
such places as beneath sprung bark of the California bay and
eucalyptus, under sequoia logs, brush piles and in the eucalyptus
trash that accumulates under such trees. In the open slugs were
taken from discarded newspapers and cardboard, and were found
crawling on the trunks of eucalyptus and bay trees. After the
original collection in October, trips were made periodically until
15
BULLETIN, So. Canir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. | Part i, 1950
January, 1949, when the writers were not able to find slugs after
thorough searches. This dearth of slugs continued until April,
1949, when field trips were discontinued.
Field trips were resumed in September, 1949, with good suc-
cess, when twelve specimens were collected in Redwood Park.
Other trips added more specimens without difficulty throughout
October 1949, when collecting was suspended. The ground in
September and October was very dry; a dusty surface being
present. The main stream was not running and was devoid of
water pools until the middle of October when a storm filled
few stream bed concavities with standing water. During these
months no slugs were found under the bark of trees or around
their bases in leaf debris piles which were thoroughly dry. Ex-
amination of the stream bed, however, revealed fat individuals
of Prophysaon anderson had sought the last possible moisture
reservoir, the moist areas on the bottom under rocks. In all
cases where these slugs were taken from the stream bed they
were found clinging to the clay soil and not to the rock that coy-
ered them. Sandy areas of the stream bottom were apparently
avoided by this slug even though moisture and rocks were avail-
able in such areas. In the areas during the observation period it
was noted that during dry periods w vhen the stream bed lacks
running water that the slug seeks its shelter. During the first
rains W vhen the stream starts to accumulate water the slugs move
from the bottom of the bed to the area of the banks. With heavier
and more steady rains the slugs move even farther from their
summer locale, finally to return to it as moisture becomes less and
less available.
Slugs collected in the field were transported to the laboratory
where they were maintained in terraria. In terraria slugs fed upon
lettuce, potatoes, carrots, and on three species of mushrooms,
Tricholoma terreum, Agaricus campestris Fr. and Pholiota pre-
cox Fr. The importance of fungi in the diet of P. andersoni is
not known, but of the several foods offered to this slug the fungi
were the most readily accepted and devoured.
Several writers have shown interest in the ability of this slug
and other members of the genus Prophysaon to amputate the
posterior region of the body. Raymond (1890) and Pilsbry and
Vanatta (1898) imply that amputation may or not take place in
Prophysaon andersoni; for example Raymond (1890) states, “In
August, 1888, I collected on one occasion about a dozen examples
of Prophysaon andersoni J. G. Cp., near the San Jose reservoir,
above Lexington, Santa Clara County. While taking measure-
ments of living specimens, before putting them in alcohol, [ no-
ticed in several a contraction about two-thirds of the length from
the head. This appeared as an indented line completely encircling
16
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
the body. Upon handling the slugs to examine this phenomenon
more closely, the line became deeper, and in the case of two
specimens the tail dropped off, almost as readily as the ray of the
so-called ‘brittle’ starfish.’ Pilsbry and Vanatta (1898) remark,
“Nearly all full grown alcoholic specimens of P. andersoni,
foliolatum, and coerulewm show a well defined impressed line
around the tail, or occasionally the tail has actually been ampu-
tated.” These authors further state, “Dissection shows that the
body cavity does not extend beyond the point of excision, or but
very little beyond; the remainder of the tail being occupied by
very spongy vesicular connective tissue.”
Hemphill (1890) also was interested in this phenomenon of
amputation which he reported to occur spontaneously in a speci-
men of P. fololatum. He placed a specimen showing a constric-
tion around its tail in a box of wet moss and twenty-four hours
later found it had amputated. He reported that the “. . . tail piece
had as much vitality as the other part of the animal...” This
specimen was sent to Binney, who (1892) reported that when he
received the slug that the front piece was in good health, but that
the “ ... tail piece was in an advanced state of decomposition.”
Ingram (1948) reported no cases of amputation in Proply-
saon anderson after what seems to have been severe and un-
natural treatment. He starved his slugs, dropped them into 3%
formaldehyde, and his “. . . slugs were pinched from time to time
with forceps, shaken in a closed container, dropped on a wooden
floor from a height of five feet and pricked with a scalpel with-
out throwing off the posterior body region.”
Pilsbry (1948) in a summarizing paragraph makes the follow-
ing remarks: “Everyone observing living prophysaons has no-
ticed their faculty for amputating the tail. Many specimens show
an impression extending obliquely around the tail . . . During
examination the furrow deepens, and the tail may drop off in
the hand. More frequently it comes off in the drowning jar. On
examination it appears that the visceral mass does not extend
beyond the point of excision, the body cavity beyond being occu-
pied by a spongy, vesicular mass of connective tissue. Is excision
of the tail followed by regeneration? Probably so, but we do not
know. Ina considerable number, I have seen no definite evidence
of new outgrowth. It is a question for those who can observe
them in the field, or better, keep them in captivity.”
It is quite clear then, that beyond recognizing that Prophysaon
andersom (J. G. Cooper) and other members of the genus can
amputate their tails, little is known. No natural stimulus to ampu-
tation is suggested in the literature, and it appears in some cases
that amputation either cannot be accomplished at all or only with
Ue
BULLETIN, So. CAtiIr. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
difficulty. It is to this problem that the authors devote the rest of
this report.
Mere handling did not induce amputation in P. andersoni in
the experience of the writers. Therefore it was decided to try
running a dissecting needle completely through the tail at a point
behind the amputation line in an attempt to cause amputation.
This was done and to the writer’s satisfaction amputation fol-
lowed. After the needle had been run through the tail of the slug,
the slug was suspended on the needle and the time from penetra-
tion to amputation was recorded with a stop watch. Of the slugs
tested 5 amputated on the first trial. The times recorded were 7,
14, 14, 15 and 29 seconds, or an average of 15.8 seconds.
The slugs tested did not amuptate in every case on a single
thrust and a second piercing was necessary to cause amputation.
The table below presents this data.
= Time suspended Time for amputation
Slug Number without amputation after second stimulus
il, 3 minutes 30 seconds
2. ¥ 5 minutes 40 seconds
3. 2 minutes 22 seconds
4, 6 minutes 10 seconds
5. 4 minutes 23 seconds
The average time required for amputation by these five slugs
on the second stimulus was 25 seconds.
With one slug a third trial was necessary, the first two having
failed to cause amputation. This slug was suspended 3 minutes
on each of the two unsuccessful trials, and 20 seconds was re-
quired for amputation to take place on the third trial. Still an-
other slug required a total of 5 stimuli before amputation was
induced. The four unsuccessful trials lasted 2, 3, 4 and 4 min-
utes, while 20 seconds were taken on the fifth thrust to complete
amputation.
To see if amputation could be induced consistently with a
single stimulus, a more severe stimulus was used. This consisted
of cutting through the tail about halfway between the amputation
line and the tip with a scalpel. Seven slugs were treated in this
manner with the following results: two slugs in a semicontracted
condition were cut and required 29 and 47 seconds respectively
to amputate; in four other cases moving slugs were cut and these
required 5, 12, 19 and 34 seconds to amputate. The first of these
four was pinned to the table by the scalpel, and it may have been
that the unusually short amputation time (5 seconds) was due to
leverage applied by this slug against the pinned tail. With the
seventh slug the tail was cut cleanly away, but amputation had
not occurred after 25 minutes. The results of this group of seven
trials show that the more severe stimulus gives a greater number
18
BULLETIN, £0. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
of amputations with a single trial (6 out of 7) than the stiumlus
with the needle where only 5 out of 12 amputated on a single
thrust.
In considering all of the data above it appears that there are
different abilities to amputate. In some cases a single thrust
through the tail with a needle is sufficient to cause amputation,
while in some two thrusts are required, or it may take as many
as five trials to actually cause autotomy.. When a stronger stim-
ulus is applied, such as actually cutting off part of the tail, autot-
omy is almost sure to follow with a single stimulus, although the
time required varies from individual to individual. This suggests
that a certain threshold of stimulation must be reached before
amputation is possible, and that this threshold varies from speci-
men to specimen. Certainly there is an obvious difference from
slug to slug which may correlate with the fact that some authors
have reported ease of amputation (Raymond, 1890; Hemphill,
1890) and others (Ingram, 1948) have been unable to induce
amputation even with severe handling.
In losing the tail the following details were readily observed.
Constriction begins rapidly at the sides of the body at the ampu-
tation line. This constriction runs up over the dorsum and is by
then also strongly marked on the sole. The sole is the last area
to actually amputate, the amputation of the body occurring first
and the sole following immediately. In amputating, the constric-
tion gets deeper and deeper until it suddenly has cut the body
into two portions.
Serial sections were prepared of the posterior half of four
Prophysaon andersoni in an attempt to discover the mechanism
of amputation; both cross and longitudinal sections were pre-
pared. At the area where amputation occurs, as judged by the
position of the amputation line, some special structures were
found which can only be explained as part of the amputation
mechanism. At the site of the amputation line and extending in-
ward to the body cavity there occurs a sheet of vacuolated cells
which completely surround the body of the slug. Figure 1 illus-
trates the appearance of the amputation line on a slug, while
figure 2 is a diagram constructed from longitudinal sections show-
ing the vacuolated cells. It was found that immediately anterior
and posterior to this sheet of vacuolated cells there is a region
which apparently is devoid of longitudinal muscle fibers. This
region appears to consist of only circular muscle cells; the por-
tion anterior to the vacuolated cells is about twice as thick as the
portion posterior to these cells. Another structure discovered in
the longitudinal sections was a muscular sac, which is attached
to the body wall at a number of points, and which bounds the
viscera posteriorly. Figure 2 shows that this sac takes its origin
19
BULLETIN, £0. Canter. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
largely anterior to the sheet of vacuolated cells, but that some of
its fibers are attached posterior to that point.
The role played in the process of amputation by the various
structures mentioned above seems to be as follows: The sheet of
vacuolated cells extending round the body of the slug acts as
an abscission layer. The circular muscle cells immediately an-
terior and posterior to the vacuolated sheet may function in the
constriction of body which leads to tail amputation. The circular
muscle cells anterior to the abscission layer, by their sphincter-
like action, also appear to be those that keep the posterior region
of the body tightly closed after amputation (figure 5). The mus-
cular sac which is found enclosing the viscera may have a dual
function. When the slug is fully extended some viscera extend
posteriorly beyond the amputation line: if amputation were to
occur with the slug in this condition it might well cut off some
of its viscera as well as lose body fluids. The muscular sac ap-
pears to definitely function as a device for pulling in the viscera
if they are left outside the body cavity at the time of amputation.
In one instance, a mass of liver tissue about 3 mm. in diameter
was actually left outside the body at the time of amputation; this
mass was subsequently slowly withdrawn into the body, pre-
sumably by the action of the muscular sac.
Following amputation it was of interest to discover that the
amputated tail was able to crawl about freely, and at a speed
which was somewhat slower than that of an entire slug. If an
amputated tail was placed upon a smooth surface, such as the
table top, it proceeded to crawl for as far as six inches before it
toppled to its side. The path taken by the tail piece was always
erratic. Once the tail had fallen off its locomotor surface it could
not right itself. If a tail, which had fallen over, was righted it
again crawled as before. This unusual vitality of the amputated
tail was noted by Hemphill (1890)
The tail piece showed no ability of regeneration. In several
cases where the amputated tails were placed ; in terraria they were
found in a decaying condition within 24 hours. Figure 3 shows
a freshly amputated tail in lateral view. The face of the ampu-
tated piece corresponds to the location of the sheet of vacuolated
cells found in the longitudinal sections and also to the amputa-
tion line visible on the intact slug. Figure 4 shows an anterior
view of an amputated tail piece. It should be noted that the
wound has not closed here as it has on the body (figure 5). At
the time of amputation the posterior area of the body wall of the
slug closes tightly at the point of amputation and becomes highly
puckered. After amputation the foot of the body contracts to
form a notch at its termination as is shown in figure 6. At the
time of amputation small quantities of mucous are secreted from
the amputated area.
20
BULLETIN, £0. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
Pilsbry and Vanatta (1898) have reported that the body cavity
did not extend beyond the point of amputation or but little be-
yond. We, however, have found that the body cavity always ex-
tends beyond the point of amputation, providing that the area
posterior to the muscular sac described above can be called a body
cavity. This space is indicated by the depression seen in the face
of the amputated tail (figure 4) and by the space posterior to the
muscular sac in figure 2. The amputated tail, as reported by
others, consists to a great extent of a spongy vesicular connec-
tive tissue.
Six slugs which had amputated their tails were placed in a
terrarium for further study. Fourteen days after amputation
_the slugs were carefully examined; each slug still showed a defi-
nite puckering at the point of amputation. The puckering was
less pronounced than it had been at the time of amputation, but
there was no sign of the growth of a new tail. Gentle probing of
the puckered area indicated that healing had taken place to the
extent that the body cavity was well sealed. The posterior of the
foot was still indented. After 30 days 2 of the slugs died; the 4
remaining slugs still showed a small puckered area, while 3
showed a small indentation at the termination of the foot. The
fourth slug now had a very small new tail. No sign of a new
amputation line was visible. At the end of 52 days only 3 slugs
remained alive. Each of these had lost all signs of the puckered
area which had once marked the point of amputation, and each
possessed a small new tail. These tails were not demarked from
the body by a visible amputation line. They were readily dis-
tinguishable, however, as new tissue by the fact that the soles of
the new tails were a dark gray rather than the characteristic
white of a slug that had not undergone tail amputation. The new
tissue of the tails was approximately 4 mm. long and tapered very
rapidly to a point. The last of the three surviving slugs died on
the 74th day; up to this time a new amputation line was not ob-
served.
A second lot of six slugs that had amputated their tails were
placed in a terrarium in the hope that they could be kept alive
longer than the above lot, and also be induced to grow not only
a new tail but an amputation line as well. At the end of 38 days
each of these slugs lost the puckered area and the notch at the
end of the foot. One slug died on the 51st day and a second on
the 60th. At the end of 72 days each of the four remaining slugs
had a new tail which was 5 mm. long. Again, the regenerated
tails were a dark gray on the sole rather than the white of the
rest of the foot. Two slugs died on the 79th day and another on
the 84th. At 97 days the last surviving slug was examined and
was found to have a well developed tail and a clearly developed
amputation line as well. The appearance of this slug at that time
21
BULLETIN, £0. CaLivr. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
is shown in figure 7. The tail from the amputation line to the tip
was 7 mm. long. It was observed that the gentle slope from the
amputation line to the tip of the tail which characterizes slugs
that have not amputated tails was missing. Instead the new tail
was rather abruptly joined to the body piece. The new amputa-
tion line occupied a much more vertical position than it does in
normal slugs where it slopes obliquely forward up the body. Thus
as suggested by Pilsbry (1948), Prophysaon andersomi can re-
generate a new tail. This slug died on the 107th day before an
attempt was made to see if it could amputate a second tail and
again regenerate another.
Of the 53 Prophysaon andersoni collected in this study, three,
at the time of collection, had already lost their tails. In each
slug amputation had occurred long enough previous to their col-
lection so that the amputated area was well healed. In two of the
slugs a new tail about 3 mm. long was present, while in the third
the tail was 8 mm. long and a new amputation line was present.
A needle was run through the tail of the slug with the 8 mm. long
tail and amputation followed in 17 seconds. Thus it is indicated
that Prophysaon axdersont may regenerate a new tail and an
amputating mechanism as well.
From the condition of the three slugs mentioned above it
appears that amputation occurs in nature in Prophysaon ander-
som, although its cause or utility to the slug is unknown. In
seeking to find a cause for tail amputation in this slug in the field
we decided to investigate the relationships between the slug and
some of its associates. The animals that were found in close
association with P. andersoni that might possibly cause tail
amputation were especially noted with the thought in mind that
aggressive predators might seize the slug by the tail: thus, ampu-
tation might function in leaving the tail for the predator while
the slug crawled away to survive. In September and October of
1949 the following vertebrates were noted in close association
with P. andersoni: salamanders, Triturus torosus (Rathke),
Batrachoceps attenuatus attenuatus (Escholtz), Aneides lugubris
lugubris (Hallowell), Ensatina escholtzii (Gray) ; the frog, Hyla
regulla Baird; and the garter snake, Thamnophis ordinoides
atratus (Kennicott). Two predatory invertebrates, the carniv-
orous snail Haplotrema minimum (Ancey) and the beetle Scaphi- |
notus sp. were also closely asscoiated with Prophysaon. Other |
mollusks that were found in slug areas that are not typically |
predatory were the giant western slug, Ariohmax columbianus |
(Gould) and a large native land snail, Helminthoglypta arrosa
holderiana (Cooper). The writers sought to determine if a food
relationship exists between certain of the above animals and P.
anderson in terraria.
Slugs were placed in terraria with Triturus torosus, and in no
22
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
case did the salamanders accept the slugs as food. The slugs were
kept with this species of salamander for a two-week period.
When garter snakes, Thamnophis ordinoides atratus, were
placed with Prophysaon they showed almost immediate interest
in the slugs, and each ate a slug, swallowing it tail first. In one
case the snake was killed and the slug removed about ten minutes
after it had been swallowed. The slug was found in the snake’s
stomach where it was alive and writhing actively. This slug had
not amputated its tail, nor did it subsequently. The slug recovered
completely and was later used in another experiment. A second
snake that had swallowed a slug was opened at the end of 17
hours, and the slug removed. This slug was dead, but again the
tail had not been amputated.
The carnivorous snail, Haplotrema minimum, found in con-
siderable numbers in the areas inhabited by Prophysaon, was
paired in single pint jar terraria with Prophysaon. As controls
single specimens of Prophysaon were isolated in similar jars.
Five slugs amputated their tails when confined as above with
Haplotrema, while the control slugs did not. In two instances
amputation occurred within 24 hours of the initiation of the ex-
periment, but there was no sign of injury to either the tail or
body of the slug. In a third case amputation did not occur until
the third day at which time the slug was found in an amputated
condition, and no sign was found of the tail. In a fourth case
amputation occurred in 4% hours, and not only had the tail been
eaten, but the head as well had been devoured so that the viscera
were exposed. In the fifth case the tail was amputated and eaten
within 24 hours; 24 hours later the entire slug had been eaten.
It was observed that when Haplotrema and Prophysaon were
placed together, that Haplotrema attacked the Prophysaon by bit-
ing at them. This biting always stimulated the slug to move away
from the snail. It was noted that a contracted slug would begin
to move with the first bite, whereas pinching a contracted slug
with forceps seldom would cause it to move. When Haplotrema
struck at Prophysaon, the slug exuded a light creamy mucous,
but this did not seem to cause the snail to cease striking. The ex-
tent to which Haplotrema feeds on Prophysaon in the field is not
known, but in the laboratory this snail can cause amputation in
Prophysaon.
A similar situation seems to exist between P. andersoni and
the beetle, Scaphinotus sp., as with Haplotrema and the slug. Two
slugs were isolated with separate beetles, and in each case ampu-
tated their tails. The amputated tails were eaten by the beetles.
Scaphinotus did not kill the slugs although they were kept to-
gether for six days.
23
BULLETIN, £0. CALir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
exactly how amputation functions in Prophysaon is not
known. We can speculate that this ability is an escape mechan-
ism, and as such has been of some selective advantage to this par-
ticular group of slugs. The writers have shown above that ampu-
tation occurs in nature (3 out of 53 specimens), and also that cer-
tain natural predators can induce amputation in the laboratory.
It appears that the ability to amputate would be of value to
Prophysaon when it is attacked by relatively slow moving preda-
tors such as Haplotrema in that the amputated tail might satiate
the appetite of the predator and at times allows the slug to craw]
away unnoticed,
Noting the close relationship of this slug to moisture, we asked
if this slug could not conceivably use its rather spongy tail as a
moisture reservoir to hold it over dry periods, perhaps amputat-
ing its tail after all moisture had been withdrawn. To test this idea
a slug was placed in a desiccating chamber using anhydrous
calcium chloride as a desiccating agent. In the first test 50 grams
of CaCl were used, and at the end ‘of 24 hours the slug was com-
pletely dried out but had not amputated. A second test was made
in which only 5 grams of CaCl were used, but again at the end of
24 hours the slug was dead and had not amputated the tail. This
time the slug was leathery, rather than hard and dry at the end
of the first experiment. It is not felt that these were conclusive
experiments, and further work on desiccation might reveal a
desiccation-amputation relationship.
SUMMARY
1. In the Oakland area the slug Prophysaon andersom is com-
monly found in redwood-bay associations
N
This slug seems highly dependent upon water in that it 1s
found only i in damp - places. These damp places may be under
the bark of living or dead trees, in moist leaf piles, under
rocks in damp stream beds, or out in the open if the ground
is damp.
3. Several mushrooms were readily fed upon by this slug.
4. Amputation can be induced artificially in P. andersom by
thrusting a needle through its tail or by severing a part of
the tail.
ont
P. andersoni possesses several special structures which are
interpreted as functional parts of the amputation mechanism.
These consist of a sheet of vacuolated cells surrounding the
body at the amputation line which act as an abscission layer.
Anterior and posterior to the abscission layer there is an area
of circular muscle cells that apparently function in body con-
striction which results in amputation. The anterior set of
circular muscle cells also appear to function in keeping the
24
BULLETIN, £0. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
posterior end of the body tightly closed after amputation. A
sac-like muscular sheet that encloses the viscera posteriorly
and divides the body cavity into an anterior, visceral cavity,
and a posterior, caudal cavity. This muscular sac appears to
function in pulling the viscera into the visceral cavity at the
time of amputation.
6. A question of Pilsbry (1948), “Is excision of the tail followed
by regeneration?’, is definitely answered. After amputation
P. andersoni can regenerate a new tail.
7. Several potential predators of P. andersoni were found living
in close association with it. Of the ones tested, only the snake,
Thamnophis ordinoides atratus, the snail, Haplotrema mini-
mum, and the beetle Scaphinotus sp. accepted this slug as food
in the laboratory. Of these predators, only the snail and beetle
caused P. anderson: to amputate its tail in the laboratory.
8. Amputation may be of some advantage to P. andersoni in that
if this slug is attacked by a rather slow moving predator such
as the snail the slug can amputate its tail, leaving the tail to
satiate the appetite of its foe while it crawls away.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The authors thank Mr. Frank Ranzoni, Department of Bot-
any, University of California for the identification of the mush-
rooms mentioned in this paper. Credit is due Miss Jane Wetzel
of the Department of Zoology of Mills College for the prepara-
tion of the serial sections upon which a part of this study is based.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
BINNEY, W. G.
- 1892. A fourth supplement to the fifth volume of the terrestrial air-
| breathing mollusks of the United States and adjacent terri-
tories. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., vol. 22:4, pp. 81-82.
HEMPHILL, HENRY
1890. The Nautilus, vol. 3:11, p. 126 (reference is included in a foot-
note by T. D. A. Cockerell, On the generic position of Arion
foliolatus, Gould).
INGRAM, WILLIAM M.
1946 Mollusk food of the beetle, Scaphinotus interruptus (Men.). Bull.
So. Calif. Acad. Sci., vol. XLV:1, pp. 34-36.
1948. Terraria observations on Prophysaon andersoni (J. G. Cooper).
The Nautilus, vol. 62:1, pp. 17-19.
RAYMOND, W. J.
1890. Why does Prophysaon shed its tail? The Nautilus, vol. 4:1, p. 6.
PILSBRY, H. A. and KE. G. VANATTA
1898. Revision of the North American slugs: Binneya, Hemphillia,
Hesperarion, Prophysaon, and Anadenulus. Proc. Acad. Nat.
SGil, JPovey jo, 424
PILSBRY, H. A.
1948. Land mollusca of North America (North of Mexico). Acad.
Nat. Sci. Phila., Monograph 3, vol. 2:2, p. 680.
25
BuLLeETIN, So. Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
BN lS
SS Ce aegis
= Ppgciiecaels APT Ss CO
a ae
2
PLATE 5
EXPLANATION OF FIGURES
Fic.1. Lateral view of Prophysaon andersoni showing amputation line |
as it appears externally. j
Fic. 2. Longitudinal section through the posterior part of the body to |
show the vacuolated cells of the abscission layer. Liver mass section /
is at right, then muscle sheath that caps the viscera posteriorly, ©
then the cavity of the tail to the left. On either side of the vacuolated q
cells smooth muscle cells are indicated by relatively dense stipling. ©
26 |
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
PLATE 6
.
Fic.3. Lateral view of an amputated tail, showing to the right the cavity
of the tail and the shelf ventral to it.
1e.4. Anterior view of an amputated tail looking into the cavity.
71G.5. Posterior view of a slug’s body after the tail has been amputated
showing its puckered appearance.
Li)
-]
BULLETIN, So. CAnir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
PLATE 7
Fic. 6. Diagram in ventral view of Prophysaon after amputation show-
ing notch in foot below puckered area. E
Fic. 7. Lateral view of a Prophysaon andersoni that has regenerated a
new tail and a new amputation line.
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
A REMARKABLE NEW SPECIES OF MARINE ISOPOD,
ERICHSONELLA CRENULATA N. SP., FROM
NEWPORT BAY, CALIFORNIA*
Rospert JAMES MENZIES
The collections of the Allan Hancock Foundation have re-
cently been enriched by three specimens of an idotheid isopod, the
gift of Mr. J. Laurens Barnard, who collected them from the
marine plant Zostera, at Newport Bay, Orange County, Cali-
fornia. The specimens appear to represent the first record of the
genus Erichsonella from the Pacific Coast of North America. It
is true that Boone (1923, pp. 154-155) described Erichsonella
pseudoculata from Laguna Beach, California; however, it seems
evident from the description that her species does not belong in
the genus. The following species then apparently represents the
only known species belonging to Erichsonella from the North
American Pacific Coast.
ERICHSONELLA CRENULATA new species
Plates 8 to 10
Holotype. Male, length 23.0 mm., width at widest part of
}second perzon somite 3.0mm. A.H.F. No. 492.
| Allotype. Ovigerous female; length 17.0 mm., width 3.0 mm.
}A.H.F. No. 492a.
Figured paratype. Male; length 20.0 mm., width 2.2 mm. A.
Hi. F. No. 492b.
Iagnosis. First frontal lamina (projecting lamina between
first antennz and below frontal margin) bifid; second frontal
‘lamina widely concave at distal margin. Dorsum of cephalon
)with a conical, apically tri-tuberculate elevation. Eyes subovate.
jLateral margins of perzeon projecting at epimeral areas giving
\body a crenulate appearance. Pleotelson widest near distal end;
posterolateral angles each with a small depression; distal medial
‘projection of pleotelson evenly rounded.
|
Character of body. Entire animal very elongate, about 8 times
vas long as wide. Color in alcohol a light brownish green.
Cephalon. Median frontal margin almost straight; antero-
Wlateral areas projecting distally farther than medial frontal
*Contribution from The Allan Hancock Foundation.
|
BULLETIN, £0. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
margin. First frontal lamina bifid, extending forward about one
half the length of the first article of the first antenna. Second
frontal lamina (the projection ventral to the first frontal lamina )
does not extend forward beyond the first frontal lamina. Third
frontal lamina not visible in dorsal view. Eyes subovate, located
on lateral margin and slightly swollen laterally. Dorsum of
cephalon with a conical, apically trituberculate elevation.
Pereon. Somites of perzeon in general smooth, lacking swol-
len supralateral projections; lateral margins extended laterally
at epimeral areas. Epimeral plates visible in dorsal view on
somites 2-7 inclusive. First somite shortest (as measured on mid-
line), fourth somite longest, about two and three-fourths times
the length of first and one and one-half times the length of sev-
enth somite. An elevated tubercle is conspicuous in the mid-
dorsal line at the posterior margin of somites 1-5 inclusive.
Pleon. Composed of a single somite with possibly two very
indistinct lateral incisions on either side indicating somite separa-
tion in the proximal one third of the pleon. Postero-lateral area
flaring, conspicuously wider than anterolateral area. Postero-
lateral angles each with a small depression; distal margin of
pleotelson projecting, evenly rounded. Distal apex of uropod |
pointed, a single ciliated seta present on inner surface at disto- —
medial joint of first article.
First antenna. Composed of four segments; first and third |
segments subequal in length, third one and one-half times the —
length of second, fourth segment slightly longer than second and —
bearing the usual filamentous sete on its medial margin.
Second antenna. Exceeds one half the body length. Peduncle
composed of five segments; first segment very short, second and
third segments subequal in length, fourth segment the longest, |
two times the length of third, fifth segment about two thirds the —
length of fourth. Flagellum composed of a single clavate seg-—
ment which exceeds the fourth peduncular segment in length.
Mavxilliped. Palp with four articles; only one coupling hook |
present on each endognath.
First pair of maxille. Composed of two lobes; apex of outer
lobe with 14 setze, that of inner lobe with 3 stout ciliated sete and —
two smaller simple sete.
Second pair of maxille. Composed of two lappets; outer lap-—
pet bilobed, apex of each lobe with 7 denticulate setz; inner
lappet apex with 14 sete.
Mandible. Left mandible incisor with 4 teeth, lacina with 3.
teeth, setal row with about 11 sete, molar process tubular, toothed
30
BULLETIN, So. CaLtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
on outer edge, with over 10 spinulate sete in setal mass. Right
mandible incisor with 4 teeth, lacinoid seta with 2 teeth (outer
edge), setal row with 10 sete, molar process with fewer but
larger teeth than left, over 17 spinulate sete in setal mass of
molar process.
Penis. Composed of a medially cleft plate appearing as two
separate pieces. Pieces distinctly fused at base.
Pleopods. Exopod of first pleopod margined with plumose
sete, endopod with plumose sete on lateral margin and apex.
Exopod of second pleopod with plumose sete on lateral margin
and apex, endopod with plumose setz at apex only: male stylus
exceeds distal extent of exopod but does not extend beyond the
plumose sete of exopod. Third, fourth, and fifth pleopods with
both branches fleshy, lacking plumose sete.
First pereopod. In general lacks heavy, stout sete. Carpus
with one stout seta on inferior margin. Dactyl bi-unguiculate.
Seventh pereopod. Lacks stout sete. Dactyl bi-unguiculate.
Sexual dimorphism. Ovigerous female specimen considera-
ably widened laterally at the pereeon somites concerned with
narsupium development.
Type locahty. Upper Newport Bay, Orange County, Cali-
fornia. Clinging to the blades of the marine plant Zostera. No-
vember 20, 1949. Collector Mr. J. Laurens Barnard.
Remarks. The proposed new species differs from Erichson-
ella attenuata (Harger) (Richardson, 1905, p. 400-401), which
pf the known American species it most closely resembles, in hav-
ng the dorsum of the cephalon provided with a conical eleva-
ion, a pleotelson conspicuously widened distally, and a bifid
first frontal lamina. In FE. attenuata the cephalic area lacks a
tonspicuous elevation, the pleotelson is distally scarcely wider
an the proximal part, and the first frontal lamina is simple and
‘cuminate.
LITERATURE CITED
OONE, P. L., 1923. New Marine tanaid and isopod Crustacea from Cali-
fornia. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, vol. 36, pp. 147-156.
ICHARDSON, H., 1905. A monograph on the isopods of north America.
Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 54, 727 pp.
i
]
|
]
BuLLetrn, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950 |
PLATE 8
32
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
PLATE 9
33
BuLLetin, So. Canir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
PLATE 10
34
BULLETIN, So. CALiIr. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 1, 1950
PLATE 8
Explanation of Figures
ERICHSONELLA CRENULATA 0. SD.
(Paratype, Male)
Entire animal, dorsal view.
Terminal article of first antenna.
Cephalon, dorsal view.
Cephalon, lateral view.
Siete ae
Magnification: C and D with scale same as for C; others as in-
dicated.
PLATE 9
Explanation of Figures
ERICHSONELLA CRENULATA Nl. SD.
(Paratype, Male)
Seventh perexopod.
First pereopod.
Tip of stylus of second pleopod.
First maxilla.
Left mandible, terminal portion.
. Penis.
Tip of uropod, inner surface.
Wn ein — Jinn he
(Teme tC) se
ae
.
Magnification: A, B, G, scale same as for A; D, E, F, scale same as
for D; C as indicated.
PLATE 10
Explanation of Figures
ERICHSONELLA CRENULATA 0D. sp.
(Paratype, Male)
. Second maxilla.
. Maxilliped.
Magnification: As indicated by scale.
BULLETIN of the SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY of SCIENCES
Published by the Academy at Los Angeles, California
Subscription—$2.00 per year
Free to Life Members and Unlimited Annual Members
of the Academy (Annual Membership Fee $5.00)
Address all communications to KENNETH E. STAGER
Care of Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7, Calif., U. S. A.
PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The Academy has published to date the following:
PROCEEDINGS, 1896 to 1899. Six numbers—Vol. 1, Nos. 1 to 6.
MISCELLANEOUS BULLETINS issued under the imprint of the Agri-
cultural Experiment Station, 1897 to 1907. Ten numbers.
All issues of the above are now out of print.
Bulletin of the
Southern California Academy of Sciences
Began issue with Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1902. Issued ten numbers.
{n 1902; nine numbers in 1903, 1904, 1905; three numbers in 1906. Issued
two numbers annually from 1907 to 1919, both inclusive (except 1908—_
one issue only). Issued four numbers (January, May, July and October) i
in 1920.
The 1921 issues are: Vol. XX, No. 1, April; Vol. XX, No. 2, August;
Vol. XX, No. 3, December.
The 1922 issues are: Vol. XXI, No. 1, March; Vol. XXI, No. 20
September. f
The 1923 issues are: Vol. XXII, No. 1, March; No. 2, July.
The 1924 issues are: Vol. XXIII, No. 1, January-February; No. 2))
March-April; No. 3, May-June; No. 4, July-August; No. 5, September.
October; No. 6, November-December.
From 1925 to 1948, including volumes XXIV to XLVII, three numbers”
were published each year. These were issued as No. 1, January-April;
No. 2, May-August; No. 3, September-December, for each volume. i
I
MEMOIRS
Vol. 1, 1938. Vol. 2, Part 1, 1939. Voi. 2, Part 2, 1944. Vol. 3, partlf
1947. Vol. 3, Part 2, 1949. |
PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
For Sale at the Appended Prices
BULLETIN: To
Members
Complete set, Vols. 1 to 41, bound..............
(Incomplete set) Vols. 8 to 338, bound ............
SVC SmINO Baer ettnlt (Allee Birks a vevravielis cave! she io s6) wea leselictaiacereveneties 125
ommend SARI), lay acer eslel aaiCcl sie: o eve! etstielo bier le:joe, a7eueiete 8 25
Seman MMC PETG) (ipo makevess afer sxe. cudiia’e susie # ae eiaislaiele Sroba arene 25
semen Ppt eierore le LL) () Sie ecg icles iraye ie o:<0, 5) lalevontn: ay etlelielee.ni sie 1.00
acca Sommerer eat) (Vie a oes Bea oe ella Wwilehere susveusi's ese) aueie.% 1.00
aman ©) Semabrectiem | mae) Neerartshaice aikelorev'ss aneisicelierleve) ave voters eievelcce essiore 2.00
i Pee aL eter cic ay a Sa ove: aicarie sate. fo..s 'a)evareuel aia. ahe40.8 89 .15
sal) uemansetmere OULU se a aslo ga. biwileite vel ch'eventetel Gee ereiate 1.00
ame IL) amram cacaamie 2 PIO Lapras oh ns avo) a ahi eidni'a\ ayia ac ecel/eden scistinisl estes 2.00
ade |b mcrae Pea OVI STO cha: 520 Sus vaiietiay'el sh ove:lovaliel e/evsi(ove enelle ois tela 1.00
bam Cemeaeeitner 2 LOM GR ee rac ss tele oie ‘ain ai eteileete eile! aleve swvele/erete As)
came Mn ore OMIS i iaccrcclocsrey cise) Sle ieloleleleitcl are alle oe ie)-eis elise 1.59
amet) emm ccoeet Pes 1} 9) 2) (Vi sretvas seers eer che, sie oniioliss sje ce eeleilee evevereyerere .50
ote Peete 4 ell), (Na Metre ccPeys (cxcei's) Sicue, Sieielisiel ess eiei aiaisielsrsieieie 50
cbf Meme INO OI Meche Siac eda e 28S icy aceva\reve Glleue-ailei a: eval eis eile 1.00
on Sen eee (Gue ODA (EACH) \. «eee aie cieteorsr .35
© Od 5 BS By OAD NCE Sea oe en so enamacbon .385
ee 2 REE PLO.) sc allcveieie\e cis ororeesccls ee i doueretolasy attleiste rp
CMG, ils 2 aA (Eel) ssogocu SSO iaG ace ec .35
nei Pamela rer el AS) (CAC) * iace ei oieversnco grad avec see 5)
cle Omen ee 9 COACH) Ki a icterciesvereysieieie euecis ees. 383
| BO; dy By By DSB (GE Ne) apo ceccas sHiana nee .35
: to Mel OS 2° ICCACI i Ge eaie is Sikuue s eecee .oD
ee emer Sel O83. (CACM): secede ss abceeass BS)
SS en Ome OSA M(CACHHN) I cic cvetsitiens ave ctw se cece .35
| ac eae Oro Om ai (CAC): 2, hecc\evsaley srcvawbnele wars 35
Bo e273, 1936° (ACh). oe see ween een es 26
Me GMnnente 2. 3 1937 (CaCh) 2.6 c59. ec case ee ee 635
Bs TB Bien ays (Ck Vel al) Yikes Sisto aio aadrosia ei oierocics 35
eC ele roal 9S9) (CCA) asi ctve te Sealine 6 tera 3 35
eae O mere So RPLLO A (ais circlicn crayons & a\/e.t6 ss ieee eer sia) uai'si eg el's0) 35
ane) Sea eee aie oy 1 OAT GAIT)! 4 os a Sexteve s: casi cuece! eters .35
cere ene nro OA Dia (KGa CH)): Jam s/s) cy eyo a- cesar eer s aces 35)
ee member nese 943 (CACH): 4) stints bie-siec ao eie/e os .35
emma rss NOFA (ACH) eid ceeue cube eperers fb erace .30
Aen eee OL OAD: (GACH) scsiici cian ci cloa sean deserts .05
aed ele eo NO4AGr COACH) —Aosek eek Sains sie a ee 3D
aa Ola LOFT (EACH) aie o8.5 ook ctaanets .85
eA edema 23, OAR: (GACH) ais weitecsis cn sed ener ac 35
alo emilee Zr n: 9:49). (CAC) ir seas eiccarsescnd@ o/s. sous)
(Continued en next page)
37
To Non-
Members
$150.00
80.00
50
50
.00
2.00
2.00
4.00
1.50
2.00
4.00
2.00
1.50
3.00
1.00
1.00
2.00
PUBLICATIONS (continued)
MEMOIRS To To Non-
Members Members)
VOL LOSS — paper COVE siecerera eve ete cle oicieielcuenenenantle $2.00 $4.00 |
oes oh bound in black fabrikoid ........... 3.00 5.00 |
Sip ncn SS printed on one side of paper ....... 3.00 5.00 —
Son cient f printed on one side of page (bound) 4.00 6.00 |
Wolk, 74, IN, il; ave —joeyaeve Cone Goococoocdoud00oN 1.25 2.50 |
paar ramy Ail Aneta Tae bound in black fabrikoid.... 2.25 8.50
rei erie tees “s printed on one side of page . 1.75 3.50
oy SS See 2, LOL —DaWeEr KCOMERS craic ncn eee 15 1.50
SA See ol 9 47 paper COVE ra eee eee 1.00 2.00 ©
SS 2 1949——naper iCOMeruro oc 1.00 2.00 |
Co-operating Organizations
Lorquinia—Vols. 1, 2 (all published)...bound $1.50, unbound $1.00
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA GEOLOGY AND LOS ANGELES
DUALS Mala Sats. MRS EnUll Sooo ob od OGIZi NOUN Gea sero cio1-)-) iie
Southwest Science Bulletin, May 5, 1920 (all published),
chiefly Entomological, i colored) plates saoeee eee eee 1.00
Check-list of the Recent Bivalve Mollusks (of N. W. Coast of
Am. from the Polar Sea to San Diego), W. H. Dall ..... 1.00
FLORA OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA by Anstruther David-
son and George L. Moxley, 452 pp., 1923..............0- 2.50
Reprints:
Check-list of the Lepidoptera of Boreal America. Superfami-
lies Sphingoidea, Saturnioidea and Bombycoidea (printed
on one side of page only, to allow of additional notes),
Wm. Barnes and Foster H. Benjamin, 1927 .............. $ .50
The Cacti of the Pyramid Peak Region, Dona Ana County,
News Mexicoe a:93i27 hy Re MoOSben Siac) cee nee .29
Check-list of the Macrolepidoptera of Canada and the United
States of America by Dr. J. McDunnough, 1938, printed on
white bristol board, one side of page (without index)
suitable for labels. To Academy members, $1.50. To non-
saleidall loves ena oI eAG PIERCE eG BENS oon don 0000 4.00 3.00
A List of the ANTS OF CALIFORNIA with notes on their
habits and distribution. 44 pages, 3 plates, by Arnold Mallis 50
A Check List of the HELICOID SNAILS OF CALIFORNIA,
32 pages, from Henry A. Pilsbury’s Monograph, by Wm.M.
IMNeram sees Ss BS aoa edwin geet SO See .50
Contributions from the Los Angeles Museum—CHANNEL
ISLANDS BIOLOGICAL SURVEY. Papers 1 to 33. Bound 3.00
AppRESSs ALL INQUIRIES TO
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Care KENNETH E. STAGER)
Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7, Calif., U. S. A.
38
|
|
Miscellaneous, Publications of Affiliated or
The work of the Southern California Academy of Sciences is carried
on entirely through the generosity of private citizens, who are suf-
ficiently interested in the advancement of education and cultural
endeavor to donate funds or make bequests to the Academy. As a
guide, in the matter of bequests, for those who plan to further this
program, the following forms are suggested:
Form of Legacy
To be used when it is desired to leave the Academy any personal
roperty, such as money, stocks, bonds, works of art, or other objects
f value.
I give and bequeath unto “Southern California Academy of
ciences,” of the City of Los Angeles, the sum Of....--........2022....eeceeeeeeeeeneeee
ollars: To have and possess the same unto the said “Southern Cali-
ornia Academy of Sciences,” its successors and assigns, to the uses,
ispositions and benefits thereof forever.
Form of Devise
To be used when it is desired to leave real estate to the Academy.
I give and devise to “Southern California Academy of Sciences’
fepnemCibymoteMbos: AMPeCleS:, (cc... csc ee rae setae hee esheets
ere describe the property or ground rent..............-----.---------2-2--20--eeeeeeeeeeee ).
gether with the appurtenances, in fee simple, and all policies of
surance covering said premises, whether fire, title or otherwise, free
om all taxes: To have and to hold the same unto the said “Southern
alifornia Academy of Sciences,” its successors or assigns forever.
39
REPRINTS: Contributors of articles accepted for publication in
the Bulletin should order reprints, if desired, when they return
galley proof to the Editor. They may be ordered through the
Editor at the following rates, from the McBride Printing Co.,
_ 415 East Eleventh Street, Los Angeles, Calif., the contributor
paying for all his reprints.
PRICE LIST OF REPRINTS
~ (WITHOUT COVERS)
~ 4pp. Spp. 12pp. 16pp. 20pp. 24pp. 28pp. 32pp.
~ 50 copies. $3.75 $5.75 $850 $10.25 $11.75 $1350 $1600 $17.00
re 450 7.50 6 IIS" A275 © 15.005 17:25, 20.252 2150
epee 525-2 925.1300 15.25 - 18.25 21100 | 2450 -...26.00
Be os 600° 11.00 15.25 17.75. 2150. 24.75 28.75 30.50
- 720) eas 6.75 S1295~ 717.50". 20:25 - 24.75.‘ ~ 2850 33.00. 35.00
Bie we 750° ~1450: ) 19.95.2275 - 2800-3225. 37.25... 39:50
Covers: 50 for $2.00—additional covers 1c each.
California State Sales Tax to be added if delivered within the state.
vo
Distinctive
ms. NITING
Books ® Catalogs @ Broadsides
\Stationery and Office Forms
‘McBRIDE PRINTING CO.
Pi CAME PRO'S pecia 2 O45
Tac EANS |e EVEN PE. Sok.
\“Since 1879” boss Anig eles. 125 . Cali.
oe
eg
BULLETIN OF THE
Southern California
Academy of Sciences
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
=e! Le eS se
Mow. XLIX May-Aucust, 1950 Part 2
CONTENTS
THE EAR OF SALAMANDERS
- William A, Hilton
MITES OF THE GENUS NEOPHYLLOBIUS
BO APMGGTELOL a... ys Saka eee Pa wae DOs
ALLERGIC SENSITIVITY TO THE SALIVA
OF THE WESTERN CONE-NOSED BUG
SRET WAM He WOOds sos) (resi ae ey RL
Z Issued October 18, 1950
Southern California
Academy of Sciences
OFFICERS and DIRECTORS
Dr. William L. Lloyd . = 1h - PY President —
Dr. Louis C. Wheeler fi “ ” = as First Vice President —
Dr. Sherwin F.. Wood - - - ~ Second Vice President |
Mr. Kenneth E. Stager - - - - « - - Secretary —
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce = ~ - be - - - Treasurer —
Dr. John A, Comstock - - - - - - - - Hditor
Mr. Lloyd M. Martin and Mr. C. Mark Ryan - Agss’ts to Secretary |
Dr. A. Weir Bell Mr. Theodore Payne
Dr. John A. Comstock Dr. W. Dwight Pierce
Dr. John Herman Mr. Kenneth E. Stager
Dr. Hildegarde Howard Dr. Louis C. Wheeler
Dr. William L. Lloyd Mr. Russell S. Woglum
Dr. Sherwin F’.. Wood
ADVISORY BOARD
Dr. H. J. Andrews Dr. Howard R. Hill
Dr. J. Stanley Brode Dr. Homer P. King
Mr. Fred E. Burlew Dr. Philip A. Munz
Dr. Preston Kline Caye Dr. Chester Stock
Dr. R. H. Swift
SECTION OF AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES
Mr. Russell S. Woglum, Chairman
ANTHROPOLOGICAL SECTION
Mr. Robert M. Ariss, Chairman
BOTANICAL SECTION
Miss Bonnie Templeton, Ohairman
SECTION OF CHEMICAL SCIENCES
Mr. Jos. B. Ficklen III, Chairman
SECTION OF EARTH SCIENCES
Dr. John Herman, Chairman
SECTION OF HEALTH AND SANITATION
Dr. Irving Rehman, Chairman
SECTION: OF JUNIOR SCIENCES
Mr. Carroll L. Lang, Chairman
SECTION OF PHYSICAL SCIENCES
Dr. Preston Cline Caye, Chairman
SECTION OF ZOOLOGICAL SCIENCES
Dr. Raymond C. Osburn, Chairman
FINANCE COMMITTEE
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, Chairman
Mr. William Currie, Auditor Dr. John A. Comstock
Dr. John Herman
PROGRAM COMMITTEE
Dr. Louis C. Wheeler, Chairman Dr. Sherwin F. Wood
HOSPITALITY COMMITTEE
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, Chairman
COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATION
Dr. John A. Comstock, Chairman
Dr. Hildegarde Howard Dr. Philip A. Munz Dr. A. Weir Bell
COMMITTEE ON CONSERVATION -
Dr. Sherwin F. Wood, Chairman ,
Mr. Theodore Payne Mr. Carroll L. Lang
Prof. J. Stanley Brode Dr. John A: Comstock
OFFICE OF THE ACADEMY
Los Angeles County Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, Calif.
H
wl
si
Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences
Dipole PART 2, 1950
THE HEAR OF SALAMANDERS
By Witt1AM A. HiLTon
Department of Zoology, Pomona College
In the adult the auditory capsule 1s completely enclosed by the
primary skeleton which becomes almost entirely bone, although
there are some differences in different groups as: well as in different
ages and sizes. On the dorsal surface of the skull there may be con-
vex ridges marking the position of the semi-circular canals of the
internal ear although this is far from being true of all species, espe-
cially those where the skull is particularly heavy with the develop-
ment of thick bony ridges. The ventral and anterior surfaces of the
capsules are usually smoother. On the posterio-lateral surface,
directed somewhat ventrally is a large circular to ovoid opening in
the capsule, the fenestra vestibuli, but the position and form of this
differs greatly in different groups. The margin of this opening ts
surrounded by membrane or cartilage and the operculum or colu-
mella or both, often of bone, sometimes cartilage, fits into this open-
ing. The lateral wall of the capsule is attached to the suspensorium
by as many as three parts. The medial wall of the bony capsule,
between it and the cranium has a number of foramina:
F. PERILYMPHATICUM, for the passage of the perilymphatic duct
to the cranial cavity. It is quite large and more caudal than the next.
FoRAMINA ACUSTICA, for the passage of branches of the audi-
tory nerve. There may be three openings but in some cases one or
more are so sunken as to give the appearance of one or two. In the
interior of the bony part of the ear of Triturus examined there were
two openings, each in a little elevated area near the floor of the
capsule.
FoRAMEN ENDOLYMPHATICUM, for the endolymphatic duct,
from the capsule to the cranium. This is dorsal to the auditory
nerve openings and much smaller than the others mentioned.
F. post-oTIcuM, is not concerned with the ear although its open-
ing is on the inner caudal end of the otic-exoccipital bone. It is for
the passage of the 9th and 10th cranial nerves.
The otic capsules in the otic-exoccipital bone are well joined with
the cranium, but with remains of the parachordal plate in some at
least. At the capsule region ventrally, the two sides may be joined
by the posterior hypochordal. cartilagenous commissure and at the
anterior end by a narrow cartilagenous bar, the crista retrosellaris.
41
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
In this way forming a posterior fenestra basicranialis and in front
a larger anterior fenestra basicranialis, both covered by the basis-
phenoid bone and parts of others.
Dorsally the capsules are joined by the narrow tectum synoticum
cartilage. A ring in the occipital region often remains largely car-
tilage, but the deeper parts of the condyles become bone and unite
with the ear capsules.
The caudal face of the otic-exoccipital region shows the condyles
with their articular surfaces cartilage, sometimes a part of the
opercular-columella region, the foramen magnum and two pairs of
smaller foramina; the outer opening of the f. post-oticum, between
the condyle and opercular-columella opening and the f. faciale ; the
former for the 9th and 10th cranial nerves and the latter for the
7th cranial.
In most adults the ear is inclosed in the otic-exoccipital bone on
each side, but in some adults, such as Necturus, the otic region has
a rather large central cartilagenous capsule with separate bony ele-
ments as follows:
On each side a pro-otic, at the cephale lateral region, an opis-
thotic at the caudo-lateral margin of the capsule and the exoccipital
at the median caudal margin.
Internally the pro-otic contains the anterior portion of the mem-
branous labyrinth, the canal for the anterior vertical semicircular
canal with its ampulla and the anterior portion of the horizontal
semicircular canal. The opisthotic has two bony canals in the dorsal
wall for horizontal and vertical semicircular canals with ampullz ;
the membranous vestibule contains the large otolith.
Within the ear capsule the anterior septum circulare is often a
bony pillar and shelf, partly joining the roof to the mesial wall of
the capsule. Other septa related to the canals are not so well devel-
oped. In viewing the bony cavity when much of the dorsal wall has
been removed the following features present themselves:
A strong bridge of bone from the mesial wall to the dorsal roof.
At the outer end of this last at the bottom of the capsule and toward
the outside, a little of the large opercular opening may be seen.
Ventral to the inner end of the bridge a tube-like elevation of bone
open at each end. These two foramina were all that could be seen —
of the passages for the auditory nerve although three openings were
seen within the cranium. This was determined by running very fine
hairs through the foramina from one side to the other. A shallow
shelf of bone on the cephalic and on the outer margins of the capsule
a little below the dorsal surface, in which semicircular canals rest.
A mound in the caudal wall inside, representing a partial support
for the posterior canal. In the floor of the capsule in addition to the
olfactory nerve foramina is the more caudal opening for the ductus
perilymphaticus. The smaller opening for the endolymphatic duct
is more dorsally placed, near the mesial shelf. On the outer side
42
BULLETIN, So. Canir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
there is a foramen from the caudal part of the outer shelf to the
more ventral space below and not far from the opercular foramen.
Upon opening the ear cavity from below and viewing the inte-
rior from the other direction or toward the dorsal wall the following
may be seen:
In the middle of the mesial side and toward the dorsal surface
is the broad bony bridge from the mesial to the dorsal wall. At
the caudal end a sharp projection may indicate something of a
caudal shelf. Laterally a thin bony shelf appears like a tube with a
foramen through its caudal border. In addition to this last in a
solid chore where the mesial bridge joins the dorso-lateral well is a
small deep foramen of unknown function. It.may be for the pas-
sage of a blood vessel.
According to Harrison’s interpretation, 1902, the perilymph is
restricted to a definite region and the remaining space between
labyrinth and capsule is occupied by perilymphatic tissue which
becomes especially dense about the labyrinth.
The largest space containing the perilymph is the spatum saccu-
lare, a large sac lateral to the sacculus and largely ventral to the
horizontal canal, filling the whole lateral half of the capsule, in close
relation to the membrane which closes the fenestra vestibule and
operculum. The wall separating this perilymphatic space from the
internal labyrinth at the sacculus is very thin. Leading off from the
saccular sac of the perilymph is the ductus perilymphaticus, a rather
wide tube almost as great in diameter as one of the semicircular
canals. It passes toward the middle line, mesial to the posterior
canal and the sinus posterior of the utriculus to emerge on the
median side of the labyrinth, dorsal to the lagena and pars basilaris
and ventral to the pars neglecta of the endolymphatic structures.
It then turns ventrally and passes to the cranial cavity through the
apatura ductus perilymphaticus in the median ventral wall of the
capsule. According to Harrison, within the cranium it expands into
a small saccus perilymphaticus. Within the ear capsule two small
outgrowths occur just proximal to the point where it enters the
cranial cavity ; the recessus partis neglecta, in intimate contact with
the pars neglecta, the wall between the two being very thin and a
smaller diverticulum, the recessus partis basilaris, in close relation
to the pars basilaris of the inner labyrinth, with a very thin wall
between the two.
The three regions of the perilymphatic sac, that is neglecta,
basilaris and sacculus where the membrane separating the perilymph
from the endolymph is very thin, are spoken of as “tympanal areas”
by Harrison. He suggests that through them vibrations received by
the perilymph from the operculum are transmitted to the endo-
lymph. Such vibrations are supposed to set the otolithic crystals in
‘motion in the sacculus and lagena which affect the sensory hairs of
the cells covering the maculz acustice and so to the auditory nerve.
43
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
The endolymphatic parts of the ear are: semicircular canals with
ampulle, utriculus, sacculus, lagena, pars basilaris, pars neglecta
and ductus endolymphaticus.
The posterior semicircular canal is the shortest and the most
nearly circular. It is vertical, extending in a posteriolateral direc-
tion, arising frdm the pars superior utricull, just behind the anterior
canal, and after almost a completely circular course it re-enters the
utriculus in its posterior portion, just below the origin of the hori-
zontal canal. The ampulla of this posterior vertical canal is at the
ventral end. The anterior vertical canal arises from the sinus supe-
rior utriculi close to the posterior canal and runs in an anterolateral
direction. It bends sharply ventrally to join the dorsal side of the
recessus utricull, with its ampulla at the anterior end of the canal.
The horizontal canal, or external canal, arises from the pars pos-
terior utriculi between the two ends of the posterior vertical canal.
The anterior end bends about and enters the recessus utriculi close
to the anterior canal, with the ampulla at the anterior end.
The utriculus is a wide tube extending over the medial part of
the sacculus. The broad superior sinus is its most dorsal ae
which gives rise to the anterior and posterior semicircular canals
its anterior end dips vertically to the recessus utriculi or the ex-
panded portion which is joined by the ampullz of the anterior ver-
tical and the horizontal canals. The canalis utriculo-sacculus is a
small opening between the two parts of the membranous labyrinth.
This is at the base of the utriculus below the sinus superior. From
its mesial wall the pars neglecta is said to extend.
The sacculus is a disc-shaped sac, flattened ventro-mesially and
containing otolith granules. It is connected to the saccus endolym-
phaticus by means of the endolymphaticy duct. It also opens into
the utriculus by the utriculo-saccular duct mentioned above, and
into the lagena and pars basilaris. Its very thin lateral wall sepa-
rates it from the spatium sacculare.
The ductus endolymphaticus starts from the dorso-mesial part
of the sacculus close to the canalis utriculo-saccularis and passes
dorsally medial to the utriculus, close to its wall between the origin
of the two vertical canals. It passes through the skull at about the
level of the sinus superior utriculi into the cranial cavity where it
expands into the saccus endolymphaticus.
The lagena is small oval sac opening from the median side of
the sacculus, near its caudal margin. Within is an otolith.
The pars basilaris is a small dorso-mesial evagination of the
lagina opposite its opening into the sacculus.
The sensory areas in the internal ear are: the criste in the
ampulle of the semicircular canals, the macule acustica recessus
utriculi, described by Retzius on the floor of this recess, the macule
acustica sacculi on the mesial wall of the sacculus and the m. a.
neglecta on the dorsal wall of the pars neglecta, the sensory macula
44
BULIETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
in the pars basilaris on much of its surface and the macula of the
lagens on its mesial wall.
The auditory nerve leaves the acustico-facial ganglion caudially
and enters the auditory capsule by three foramina. In some these
are not distinct, one, sometimes two, openings being evident, but in
some cases where examined more closely three foramina might be
seen in the depths of a common pit. There are three divisions of
the nerve:
1. The ramus anterior which supplies the recessus utriculi and
the cristee of the ampullz of the anterior vertical canal and the
horizontal canal.
2. The ramus medianus to the sacculus.
3. The ramus posterior to the crista of the posterior vertical
canal, to the lagena, the basilaris and the neglecta.
In a Triturus examined, but two openings were found for the
auditory nerve within the bony capsule although three openings
appeared on the brain side of the bone.
The above rather general account is from Triturus and Sala-
mandra.
The ear capsule differs somewhat in the adults of different
groups.
In Salamandride I found conditions in Salamandra much as
described above. In Triturus torosus, some specimens at least had
butone opening from the cranial cavity for the auditory nerve
branches, although two or three might be seen in the depths of the
pit, but only two were found in the otic cavity. The anterior semi-
circular septum or bridge from the mesial wall to the dorsal side
of the capsule is well developed. The lateral septum is indicated by
a rather wide bridge of bone with a foramen through its wall ven-
trally. The posterior septum is barely indicated by ridges and de-
pressions in the bone. There was little cartilage except about the
operculum.
In Ambystomidz examined, the mesial bridge is well formed,
the lateral shelf well developed. There were five openings from the
otic capsule to the brain cavity. In large A. tigranum both larve
and adult, there was considerable cartilage in the lateral wall and
about the operculum. There was much less cartilage in the otic
region of Dicamptodon adults examined.
In members of the family Hynobiidee, Salamandrella and Hyno-
bius, but three foramina for the auditory nerve and the perilym-
phatic duct were found. The mesial bridge was found well devel-
oped with a fairly broad lateral shelf. There was a small area of
cartilage in the mesial wall of some and a moderate amount about
the opercular opening.
In Cryptobranchus and Necturus there was very little bony
material for bridges or shelves. All of the dorsal and much of the
|
45
BULLETIN, So. Canive, ACADEMY OF SCteNcHS XS 49, Part 2, 1950
mesial walls were cartilage with five foramina leading into the
cranial cavity.
In Siren, there was very little indication of bridges or shelves
for the support of the semicircular canals and very little cartilage
except about the rear There were only two openings, one
of which is double, for the ductus perilymphaticus and the auditory
nerve, but in the caudal medial margin there were two leading into
each other which penetrated the cranium whose use was not de-
termined.
In Amphiumide, the mesial bony ridge is present but narrow,
the other supports for the semicircular canals were rather narrow.
There were five openings into the cranium; for the ductus endolym-
phaticus, d. perilymphaticus and the three for the 8th nerve. In
addition a pocket or foramen of unknown meaning extends from
the cephalic margin toward the optic region but did not seem to
penetrate the orbit.
In Plethodontidz in no case were more than four openings
found from the otic capsule into the cranial cavity. There was little
cartilage except abont the opercular opening. There were minor
variations in the position, development and number of bridges or
shelves for the support of the semicircular canals. Some of the
variations were as follows:
In Stereochilus, a well-developed median and a larger lateral
one. In Boletogrolssa leprosa, the medial bridge is almost cephalic
in position, with a lateral shelf. In Pseudotriton there is a well-
developed mesial and lateral bridge. In Hydromantes, little indica-
tion of a lateral shelf or bridge but two divisions of the mesial. In
Hemidactylum, mesial well-developed bridge, little indication of a
lateral shelf or bridge. In Desmognathus quadrimaculatus, mesial
and lateral bridges well developed. In Plethodon cinereus, well-
formed mesial and lateral bridges. In Ensatina well-developed
mesial and lateral bridge and shelf with a narrow bone from one to
the cthers.
The above description applies to the bony inclosure of the mem-
branous labyrinth of the semicircular canals. Usually when there
are no bony shelves and bridges on the outer and inner sides above, |
these are formed in cartilage, sometimes with slight support from —
the bony inner wall of the capsule.
The blood supply to the internal ear is quite marked: The pos-
terior division of the cerebral carrotid artery has small branches
which unite to form a median basilar artery which runs along the ©
middle line of the medulla. From this last an auditory branch is
given off on each side. Each of these on each side divides into at |
least two branches which follow the branches of the auditory nerve —
into the interior of the bony capsule and supply the perilymphatic
and the endolymphatic membrances. Capillary networks are espe-
cially marked near the three ampulle and parts of the sacculus and
46
BULLETIN, So. Caniv. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
utriculus. The lagina and pars basilaris have less abundant blood
supply than the median wall of the sacculus and the pars neglecta.
Blood apparently leaves the capillaries of the internal ear by way
of a vessel following the ductus endolymphaticus through into the
cranial cavity to join the plexus of the fourth ventricle of the brain.
The columella and operculum have been described in earlier
papers. The former is especially developed in larval and aquatic
forms and connected with the suspensorium. In Siren it 1s asso-
ciated with the branchial region. In more definite land forms the
operculum is usually more evident with a plate of cartilage or bone
which appears to fill the fenestra vestibuli. It is usually attached to
the edges of the auditory capsule opening by dense membrane and
is probably developed from the wall of the ear capsule. It is attached
to the shoulder girdle by a muscle which has been called M/. oper-
cularis.
According to Dunn 41, this is not homologous with the muscle
recognized by Gaup as levator scapule superior pars opercularis in
the frog. However, it is convenient to call it the opercularis muscle
although its derivation is not the same among salamanders where
the muscular connection between operculum and shoulder girdle is
made either by the entire levator scapule or by a slip from the
cucullaris major.
It differs in size and form in different species. For instance, in
Cynops and Triturus it is very broad and largely attached to car-
tilage, in Ambystoma opacum it is broad and entirely attached to
the cartilage of the shoulder girdle. In both of these it is very broad
at the scapular attachment. In Plethodon and Desmognathus it is
attached near the glenoid fossa to bone and in each case is very
long and narrow.
In the development of the internal ear, before hatching the
auditory capsule is a simple sac. In some cases it is pointed some-
what dorsally, suggesting the ductus endolymphaticus. This is not
obvious in all although prominent in many. Apparently the early
connection with surface epithelium is not always retained and the
ductus endolymphaticus comes to be a new structure which is often
not marked until quite a late stage in the ear development.
In later stages, the simple auditory capsule becomes slightly sac-
culated before sacculus, utriculus and semicircular canals are more
than suggested. The perilymphatic space and sac begins as a lateral
outgrowth from the common body of the sacculus and utriculus.
The semicircular canals are formed very early by partial sepa-
rations from the sacculo-utricular capsule, more evident first on the
latero-dorsal side, but shallow pockets show the beginnings of all
three about the time of hatching or a little before, when the sac-
culus and utriculus are not sharply differentiated.
Sensory spots are early recognized by regions of thickened
epithelium, first mesially and ventrally. First the cells in these areas
47
BULLETIN, SO. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
are longer, then two layers are formed; a condition which may be
retained to the adult although often the sensory spots have five or
more layers of cells. In any case the central surface cells come to
have a different ap pearance and some of them develop hairs or cilia
on their inner surfaces. Aside from the sensory areas which de-
velop in the utriculus wall, several places in the sacculus and in the
three ampullze of the semicircular canals, the wall of the mem-
branous labyrinth remains a single layer of cuboidal or flatter cells.
They may be very flat in the ductus endolymphaticus in the adult
and in the perilymphatic membrances. The walls of all but the last
may be strengthened by a rather dense basement membrane and
loose connective tissue cells. The pars basilaris and the pars neg-
lecta may have two or more layers of cells in their central areas.
In all the specimens examined the pars basilaris seemed much less
important than the pars neglecta as judged by structure, nerve sup-
ply and blood supply.
SOME CONCLUSIONS
1. There are from three to five foramina in the auditory capsule
for the passage of two to three branches of the auditory nerve, the
ductus perilymphaticus and the ductus endolymphaticus. In addi-
tion there are some special blood vessel foramina in Siren and in
the shelf of the lateral canal in Triturus and some others.
2. The opercular muscle differs greatly in different genera,
being long and slender in some, shorter and triangular in others,
with slightly different attachments to the shoulder girdle.
3. The blood enters the ear capsule by two or three blood ves-
sels which accompany branches of the auditory nerve.
4. The blood leaves the internal ear along the ductus endolym-
phaticus to join the network over the medulla oblongata.
5. The blood vessels form the most marked networks about the
ampullze, in the sacculus and in the pars neglecta.
6. The perilymphatic membrane in places has a network of two
levels of blood vessels, especially on the dorsal side.
7. The pars basilaris and the lagina have far less marked blood
supply than the main part of the sacculus and the pars neglecta.
8. According to the nerve supply and the blood supply as well as
structure the pars neglecta is far more important than the pars
basilaris.
9. The sensory spots in utriculus, sacculus, semicircular canal
ampullz and pars neglecta have the best blood supply, and nerve
supply. The lagena has a good nerve supply but not as good a blood
supply as the other spots mentioned above.
10. The ear develops at different rates in different species and
in individuals of the same species. The ductus endolymphaticus
48
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
may not be well marked until later stages. The sacculus and utric-
ulus may be indicated early without wide separation for some time.
Semicircular canals may be indicated quite early before really sepa-
rated from the common sac. The perilymphatic space shows in the
beginning as an outgrowth from the common, but somewhat saccu-
lated, otic capsule.
11. The senscry areas are early indicated by thickenings of the
epithelium of the capsule, first ventrally, then mesially, then as
spots in utriculus and the region of future ampulle. After a thick-
ening of the cell areas by enlargement of the cells, two or more
layers develop with some hairs or cilia forming on the surface of
more central cells of each patch.
12. In general before hatching the internal ear is not greatly
differentiated. The balancers or cirri originate near the auditory
capsules and remain until the ear is quite well developed, or when
the hind legs begin to be evident or a little later. Usually before
the hind legs are functional the ear is much like the adult.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
DEMSTER, W. T.
1930. The morphology of the amphibian endolymphatic organ. Jour.
Morph. and Phys. v. 1, pp. 71-125.
Dunn, E. R.
1922. The sound-transmitting apparatus of Salamanders and the
Phylogeny of Caudata. A. Nat. v. 56, pp. 418-27.
1941. The opercularis muscle of salamanders. Jour. Morph. v. 69,
pp. 207-215.
FRANCIS, E. T.
1934. Anatomy of the Salamander. Oxford Press, pp. 294-300.
Fucus, H.
1907. Ueber die Entwicklung des Operculums der Urodelen und des
Distelidiums einiger Reptilien. Verh. Anat. Ges. Ver. 21, pp.
8-34.
HARRISON, H. S.
1902. On the perilymphatic spaces of amphibian ear. Intern. Mo-
natsch. f. Anat. u. Physiol. Bd. 19, pp, 221-61.
HitTon, W. A.
1948. The internal ear of salamanders. Jour. Ent. and Zool. v. 40,
No. 4, pp. 95-99.
1949. The sound transmitting apparatus of salamanders. Herpeto-
logica. v. 5, pp. 33-44.
KINGSBURY, B. F.
1903. The columella auris and nervus facialis in Urodela. Jour.
Comp. Neurol. v. 18, pp. 13-34.
KinGsBury, B. F. and REED, H. D.
1908. The columella auris in Amphibia. Anat. Rec. v. 2, pp, 81-91,
1909. The columella auris in Amphibia. Ana. Rec. v. 2, pp, 549-626,
1909. The morphology of the sound transmitting apparatus in Am-
phibia. Science. N.S. v. 39, p. 716.
KUHN, A.
1880. Ueber das hautige Labyrinth der Amphibia. Arch. f. mick.
Anat. Bd. 17, pp. 479-558.
49
BULLETIN, So. Catirv. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
OKAJIMA, K.
1906. Zur Anatomy des inner Gehororgans von Cryptobranchus
japonicus. Ant. Heft. Bd. 32, pp. 2383-253,
Reep, H. D.
1909. Systematic relations of the Urodela as interpreted by a study
of the sound-transmitting organs. Science N. S. v. 29, p. 715.
1920. The morphology of the sound-transmitting apparatus in cau-
date Amphibia and its phylogenetic significance. Jour. Morph.
v. 38, pp. 325-375.
RETZIUS, G.
1881. Gehororgan der Wirbelthiere. I Gehororgan der Fische und
Amphibien. Biol. Unters, Stockholm.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES
PLATE 11
Views of the interior of the bony ear capsules of salamanders. The
medial side is at the top of the page; the upper foramen is for the duc-
tus endolymphaticus, the other two, three or four are for the entrance
of two or three branches of the auditory nerve and for the ductus peri-
lymphaticus. The dotted area represents the cavity. A bony bridge is
shown on one or both sides. Only bone is indicated, but in many cases
some cartilage forms a part of the mesial wall and lateral sides sup-
plementing the bony shelves to partly inclose the two more dorsal por-
tions of the semicircular canals, on the outside and on the inside above.
The cephalic end is to the left in all the figures. Scale equals 1 mm.
1. Dicamptodon. 2. Boletoglossa. 38. Ambystoma. 4, Hydromantes,
5. Desmognathus. 6. Ensatina. 7. Salamandrella. 8. Hynobius. 9.
Stereochilus. 10. Amphiuma. 11. Aneides. 12. Siren. 13. Crypto-
branchus. 14. Necturus.
PLATE 12
1 and 2. Cranial views of auditory area showing foramina leading
to the internal ear and some others. 1. Triturus. 2. Ambystoma.
3, 4 and 5. Inside views of the bony capsule of Triturus.
3. From above looking into cavity, lateral side down, mesial up.
Three foramina shown for auditory nerve branches and ductus peri-
lymphaticus. A bit of the dorsal roof is left with mesial bony bridge
and the dark area at the center position of the opercular opening.
3. Similar view as the last more tipped showing lateral shelf with its
foramen, three openings for the auditory nerve and ductus perilym-
phaticus and above the opening for the ductus endolymphaticus.
5. View looking into the dorsal inner surface of the bony capsule, show-
ing two partial bony canals for semicircular canals and two foramina
in the lateral shelf. Scale, 1 mm.
6-9. Opercular muscles in 6. Amblystoma. 7. Desmognatus. 8. Ple-
thodon glutinosus. 9. Cynops and Triturus.
10. Opercular connection with branchial arch in a young siren.
Blood and nerve supply to parts of the internal ear.
PLATE 13
1, 2,3. Dorsal lateral and mesial views of the membranes labyrynth
of Triturus. 4. Blood supply to pars neglecta and three neighboring
regions, enlarged. 5. Nerve and blood supply to utriculus and two
ampullae.
6. Two layers of blood vessels in the dorsal part of the perilymphatic
50
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
PLATE 11
51
BuLLETIN, So. CaAntir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950 |
sac in adult Amphiuma. 7. Chief nerves and entering and leaving blood
vessels in the saccular region of Siren.
PLATE 14
1-6. Dissections of membranous labyrinth of Triturus.
1. Side view of membranous capsule of a 9 mm. unhatched embryo.
2. Top view of a 12 mm. just hatched larva, view from above. It is
really one sae but partly divided. Mesial side to the right. The utricu-
lus on this side. 3.13 mm. larva, view from above utriculus at the right
with suggestions of semi-circular canals. 4. Mesial view of the last,
showing sacculus below, ductus endolymphaticus with utriculus arched
above. 5 and 6. Similar views of a 14 mm. larva. Line equals 1 mm.
7. Section of wall of membranous labyrinth; cuboidal lining cells,
basement membrane, small blood vessel with a blood corpuscle and
connective tissue cell 8. Section of the wall of ductus endolymphaticus
in adult. Secale for 7 and 8 equals one hundredth mm.
9. Longitudinal section through pars neglecta, ductus perilymphati-
cus and at the bottom pars basilaris. 10. Longitudinal section through
the center of the pars neglecta. This and 9, from young Desmognathus
fusca about 40 mm. long. Scale for 9 and 10, one hundredth mm.
13 to 18. Reconstructions of ears of larval salamanders, caudal
views, somewhat diagramatic, especially 18. Dorsal side up, mesial side
to the left. Lateral extensions in 15 and 16 part of the utriculus. The
more ventral or lower extension to the outside or to the right, begin-
nings of the perilymphatic sac. 19. Triturus of 11 mm. 14. Amby-
stoma maculatum about 13 mm. length. 15. A. Tigranum of 20 mm.
Lateral lobe beginning of utriculus 16. A. maculatum of 15 mm. 17.
Desmognathus fusca before hatching. Upper outgrowth utriculus,
lower perilymphatic sac. 18. Triturus of 14 mm. lateral outgrowths of
utriculus above, perilymphatic sac below. Suggestion of semicircular
canals diagramatic.
19. Section of Necturus of 20 mm. showing three ear parts with
ductus endolymphaticus leading into brain cavity.
13 to 19 scale equals one-tenth mm.
PLATE 12
or
bo
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
S Chg
PLATE 13
53
BULLETIN, So. Carnie. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
Y an
’
h go>
a -
@
PLATE 14
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
MITES OF THE GENUS NEOPHYLLOBIUS
By E. A. McGRreEGor
Mites of the genus Neophyllobius in the past have been included
in the family Tetranychide. Rather recently doubt has arisen among
a few workers, including the present author, as to the correctness
of this family placement of Neophyllobius. Little, if anything, has
been known regarding the feeding habits of these mites.
In recent correspondence, Pence? related in detail certain labor-
atory experiments with Neophyllobius mites and Latania scale
crawlers, condensed as follows: “. .. When a crawler is encoun-
tered .. . it is set upon by the mite which quickly inserts its beak
into a vulnerable spot . . . some opiate effect in quickly administered.
The crawler ... relaxes and allows its body juices to be extracted
without struggle.”
Baker,” in recent correspondence, expressed doubt that Neo-
phyllobius belongs in the Tetranychide. He believes that these
mites belong in the Stigmeeidze “in the broad sense.’ Baker states
that observations on several undescribed genera have caused him
to undertake a re-examination of the mite complex embracing
Raphignathide, Stigmzeide, and Caligonellide. The available in-
formation seems to justify the transfer of Neophyllobius from the
family Tetranychide to the family Stigmzeidz, which is here done.
GENUS NEOPHYLLOBIUS Berlese
Neophyllobius Berlese, 1886, Acari dan. Piante colt., p. 19.
GENERIC CHARACTERS. (Female.) Body small, compressed dor-
soventrally, rotund to ovate, suture between cephalothorax and
abdomen rarely visible. Dorsal integument with striz somewhat
tortuous. Dorsal body setz peglike, lanceolate, or clavate, obscurely
to conspicuously setose, often borne on tubercles. Rostrum short,
at times hidden. Palpi short, slender, 5-segmented, without the
strong, talonlike claw on penultimate segment, but with two or
more hairs, one of which may be bladelike. Manibular plate pres-
ent; stylets needlelike, recurved basally. Legs long, exceeding the
body; segments with few hairs, mostly arising from tubercles;
patellze at times with a whiplike hair; patella I and II often with
a barely visible spine; tibiz often bearing a very minute, naillike
seta subterminally ; tarsi much shorter than tibiz, often swollen at
middle, and bearing a minute, spindle-shaped seta; duplex setz
lacking. Onychium bearing two claws, between which is a pulvillus
bearing two rows of tenent hairs. Male unknown.
GENOTYPE. NEOPHYLLOBIUS ELEGANS Berlese.
1Roy J. Pence, University of California, Los Angeles.
2E. W. Baker, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, Washington, D. C.
55
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
KEY TO SPECIES OF NEOPHYLLOBIUS
1. Patella I bearing a long, whiplike hair, as long or longer than
the tibial o isi ee ele ieee Z
Patella I with seta (or setze) much shorter than tibia [............ 3
2. Dorsum of body bearing 15 pairs of setae; whiplike hair on
patella reaching bey ond tip of tarsus—lanumant, new species
Dorsum of body bearing iM ees of sete; whiplike hair on
patella rez ricanus Banks
3. Dorsum of eek an 3 pairs of minute submedian sete ;
femora I with setee mostly longer than intervals to sete next
beyond in line—virginiensis, new species
Abdomen with none of submedian setze minute; femora I with
setee mostly shorter than intervals to setee next beyond in line
(one exception) 2.22. 4
4. Dorsal body setz clavate to obovate—floridensis, new species
Dorsal body setz not clavate to obovate........22 ee 5
on
Patellze bearing two easily visible sete, these shorter than the
segment—agrifoli@, new species
Patellze bearing a single easily visible seta, these longer than the
sepmaent o2 60s eS ne eau re 6
6. Dorsum of body with 17 pairs of sete, these rodlike, densely
bractate—teranus, new species
Dorsum of body with 15 or 16 pairs of sete, these not rodlike
or densely ‘bractate: 4.2.4.2... eee Yj
7, Hemora bearing thickly lanceolate sete += ees 8
Femora bearing linear-lanceolate sete2. 9
8. Seta on patella I three times as long as the segment; sete at
caudal margin of body blunt- tipped—mexicanus, new species
Setze on patella I about twice as long as segment; caudal setz
sharp-tipped—sierr@, new species
9. Patella I] bearing a hair nearly as long as tibia II; patella IV
bearing a hair longer than tibia 1!V—burrellis, new species
Patella II with hair only two-fifths as long as tibia II; patella
IV bearing a hair distinctly shorter than tibia [V—summerst,
new species.
NEOPHYLLOBIUS AGRIFOLIA&, new species
Plate 15
FeMALE. Body from above rotund. Dorsum with striz mostly
transverse, but tortuous near margins. Seventeen pairs of strictly
dorsal body setz, including those along caudal margin; sete thick-
lanceolate, shortish, very conspicuously setose, each failing to reach
or barely surpassing base of seta next behind, distributed as fol-
56
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
PLATE 15
NEOPHYLLOBIUS AGRIFOLIAE, new species. 1, front of cephalothorax,
with frontal setz, palpi, etc., dorsal view; 2, tip of tarsus, lateral
view; 3, tip of tarsus, dorsal view; 4, female mite, dorsal view.
_ lows: Four submarginally along front of body; seven sublaterally
each side between coxe I and caudal margin; 6 submedian pairs
_ between coxe II and hind margin; 4 along caudal margin. Ros-
trum and palpi small. Mandibular plate oval, rounded in front.
_ One perfect and one imperfect eye cornea each side mesad of coxze
_ Il. Second segment of palpus the largest, bearing dorsally a strong,
plumose seta and laterally a smaller similar seta; last segment de-
| BT
BURLETIN, So. CALtiv. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
flexed from preceding segment (position of specimens prevented a
critical study of the “thumb“). Legs all longer than body, sparsely
provided with shortish hairs; setee on the tibiae and tarsi linear-lan-
ceolate, those on other segments subclavate and distinctly setose,
each shorter than interval to seta next beyond. Tarsi somewhat
swollen, much shorter than tibia, each bearing distally 2 strong,
simple claws, and between them a pulvillus lined on each side with
a pectinate series of tenent hairs; tarsi | and II bearing dorsodis-
tally a pair of long, non-duplex hairs, and close behind them a very
small, evidently swollen seta. Patella bearing 2 subclavate, setose
setee, shorter than the segment, and a barely visible spine. Male
not known.
TYPE MATERIAL. U.S. Nat. Museum No. 1746. One specimen,
collected by (Biles Boyden) Septyo 93s:
Type LOCALITY. South Pasadena, California.
DisTRIBUTION. Known only from type locality.
Hapitat. Live oak (Quercus agrifolia).
NEOPHYLLOBIUS AMERICANUS Banks
Plate 16
NEOPILYLLOBIUS AMERICANUS Banks, 1906, Ent. Soc. Wash. Proc.
Ye Dn MISS (We Sp ID); Jats [oie WC, 10, Stee
FEMALE. Body from above, ovate. Dorsum with 14 pairs of
linear-lanceolate sete, each longer than interval to seta next be-
hind; a pair over base of palpi; 5 along and within each lateral
margin between coxe I and IV; 7 submedian pairs on abdomen
between usual position of main suture and caudal margin; all dorsal
body setz sparsely setose. Last segment of palpus evidently with
one terminal and 3 subterminal setz; preceding segment evidently
without a claw. Legs much longer than body. Patella very short,
bearing a whiplike hair about as long as the tibia; patellee I and II
bearing also an almost invisible spine. Tarsi much shorter than
tibize, swollen near midpoint; onychium with 2 claws and between
them a pulvillus pectinate on each side. Tarsus I bearing subter-
minally a pair of long, non-duplex hairs, and near base of segment
a small, swollen sensory seta. Male not known.
TYPE MATERIAL. U.S. Nat. Museum No. 1745, March 15, 1901.
Type Locatity. Orchard, Alabama.
DistripuTion. Known only from type locality.
HapsitaT. Oak.
The foregoing description is based on sketches by E. W. Baker,
made from type specimens in the U. S. National Museum. Banks’
figure of this mite also was taken into account.
58
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
oe
[¥ iN
\
Ny
WZ
2
PLATE 16
NEOPHYLLOBIUS AMERICANUS Banks. 1, leg IV; 2, palpus; 3, onychium
with claws and pulvillus; 4, dorsum of body showing dorsal setae
and base of right legs I-IV (drawn from sketches furnished by
Baker from material in the U. S. National Museum).
NEOPHYLLOBIUS BURRELLIS, new species
Plate el7,
FemMALE. Body subovate, probably! with 16 pairs of linear,
minutely bracteolate dorsal body setz, only slightly attenuate ter-
-minally, all but the 3rd, 4th, and 5th submedian setze slightly longer
than interval to seta next behind, distributed as follows: One fron-
tal seta over each palpus ; 6 sublateral sete along each side; a fringe
of 6 shorter sete at caudal margin; probably! 6 pairs of sete along
the dorsal crista. Nearly all body and leg sete arising from tuber-
cles. Rostrum and palpi inconspicuous. Legs all longer than body,
sparsely provided with mostly shortish, linear-lanceolate hairs
(femora II, III, and IV, bearing linear, bracteolate hairs). Two
submarginal eye cornez each side just anteriolaterad of base of
:
1In the single specimen, a mass of opaque body n:aterial obscures the area where 3
_ pairs of submedian setz might otherwise be visible.
59
BuLLerin, So. Canim. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
PLATE 17
N EOPHYLLOBIUS BURRELLIS, new species. A, sublateral, abdominal seta;
B, right leg I from above.
third submarginal seta. Segment II of palpus the largest, bearing
two sete, one of which is densely setose and longer than the seg-
ment. Patellee all bearing a linear-lanceolate hair which becomes
progressively longer from patella I to IV; this hair on patella I
much Ionger than the segment, and about five-ninths as long as
tibia |; that on patella I] nearly as long as tibia I]; that on patella
ITI equalling the tibia; that on patella [V one-fifth longer than the
tibia. Patellze [ and II also with a nearly imperceptible spine. All
tibiae terminally bearing a short, naillike seta. Tarsi somewhat swol-
len, much shorter than tibiz, each bearing terminally two strong,
simple claws, between them a pulvillus which bears a double row
of tenent hairs. Tarsi I and II each bearing sub-basally a minute,
sausage-shaped seta.
TypE MATERIAL. U.S. National Museum No. 1896. A single
specimen collected by R. W. Burrell, June 13, 1949.
TYPE LOCALITY. Yakima, Wash.
DisTRIBUTION. Known only from type locality.
Hasitat. Bark of apple tree.
60
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
NEOPHYLLOBIUS FLORIDENSIS, new species
Plate 18
FEMALE. Body subovate, with 15 pairs of widely clavate to
obovate, petiolate dorsal body setz, all but the frontals much shorter
than interval to seta next behind, distributed as follows: One clav-
ate frontal seta over base of each palpus; 7 ovate-clavate submar-
ginal sete along each side; a fringe of 4 ovate-clavate setz at
caudal margin; 5 pairs of ovate-lanceolate setee along the median
crista. Nearly all body and leg sete arising from tubercles. Ros-
trum and palpi inconspicuous. Legs all longer than body, legs I and
IV the longest. Palpus with segment II the largest, bearing two
plumose setz, the longest seta longer than the segment. Legs bear-
ing relatively few linear-lanceolate to spatulate hairs, the latter
plumose. Patellz all bearing an oblanceolate, densely setose hair,
longer than the segment, but much shorter than tibia; patella I and
II bearing, in addition, an almost imperceptible spine. All tibiz
terminally with a short, naillike seta. Tarsus I and II sub-basally
with a small, clavate seta. A pair of eye cornez dorsally between
bases of coxe I and II.
TYPE MATERIAL. U.S. National Museum No. 1897. Four spec-
imens collected by D. C. Thurman, Feb. 4, 1948.
Type Locatity. Dupont Road, Duval County, Fla.
DIsTRIBUTION. Known only from type locality.
Hapitat. Spanish moss.
PLATE 18
NEOPHYLLOBIUS FLORIDENSIS, new species. A, right leg I, ventral view;
B, a dorsal, submedian seta.
61
BuLLerin, So. Caniv. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
NEOPLHYLLOBIUS LAMIMANI, new species
Plate 19
FEMALE. Body from above ovate-orbicular. Dorsum with 15
pairs of sete, including those on caudal margin; all scythe-blade
shaped, sparsely appressed setose, distributed as follows: A pair on
frontal margin between palpi, 5 submedian pairs, a pair opposite
middle of mandibular plate, one over inner end of coxz I, one each
mesad of coxe II, III, and LV, 2 each side between coxze IV and
caudal tip, 4 along caudal margin. Rostrum and palpi rather incon-
spicuous. Mandibles short, styliform, recurved basally. Palpi 5-
segmented, segment II the longest; last segment small, thumb-like,
subtended from fourth segment which bears a bladelike seta (but
no claw); “thumb” terminally with 2 sete nearly as long as the
PLATE 19
NEOPHYLLOBIUS LAMIMANI, new species. 1, front of cephalothorax with
palpi, frontal sete, mandibular plate; 2, tip of tarsus, lateral view;
3, same, dorsal view; 4, female mite, dorsal view; 5, dorsal body
seta.
62
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
segment, and 2 sub-basal sete. Mandibular plate short, ovate,
sharply rotund in front. Legs all much longer than body, legs I
and IV the longest ; legs bearing relatively few shortish, lanceolate,
minutely barbed hairs; patella of each leg with a long, whiplike hair
reaching well beyond tip of tarsus; patella I and II also bearing a
minute spine; relative lengths of segments of leg I as follows:
Coxa, 10; trochanter, 14; femur, 89; patella, 14; tibia, 85; tarsus,
35; tarsi somewhat swollen at middle. Onychium bearing 2 stout,
simple, sickle-shaped claws, and between them a pulvillus bearing
along each side a pectinate series of tenent hairs about equaling
claws. Tarsus I bearing subterminally a pair of longish, non-duplex
hairs, also a small, swollen sensory seta near base of segment.
Tibie subterminally each bearing a minute, naillike seta.
TYPE MATERIAL. Type, California Acad. Sciences, No. 5695;
paratype, U. S. Nat. Museum No. 1749.
TYPE LOCALITY. Fresno, Calif., collected by E. W. Baker.
DistrrBuTIoNn. Dinuba, Davis, Fresno and Planada, Calif.
Hasirat. Lichen on fig tree, grape and salt-grass.
NEOPHYLLOBIUS MEXICANUS, new species
Plate 20
FEMALE. Body ovate. Rostrum and palpi inconspicuous. Fif-
teen ? pairs of dorsal body setz, mostly linear-lanceolate, remotely
setose or bracteolate, distributed as follows: One frontal seta over
each palpus; 7 submarginal setz along each side; 5 ?! submedian
pairs of sete along the dorsal crista; 4 short setze on caudal margin.
The frontal, first and second submarginal sete, and the first and
last submedian sete longer than interval to base of seta next be-
hind ; other body setz shorter than this interval. Two cornez each
side immediately anterio-laterad of third sublateral seta. Second
segment of palpus the largest, bearin two lanceolate, densely setose
hairs, the inner hair longer than the segment. Legs all longer than
body. Hairs on tibize and tarsi sparse, shortish, linear-lanceolate ;
hairs on coxe and femora short, plumose. Tibiz subapically each
with a short naillike seta. Tarsi all somewhat swollen, much shorter
than tibiz; all bearing terminally two strong, simple claws, and
between them a pulvillus lined each side with a series of short tenent
hairs; tarsi I and II each sub-basally with a minute, clavate seta.
Patelle all bearing a linear-lanceolate hair; that on patella I about
two-thirds as long as tibia I, than on patella II about one-half as
long as tibia II, that on patella III nearly as long as tibia III, that on
patella IV slightly longer than tibia IV. Patelle I and II each
bearing also an almost imperceptible spine.
iThe area normally bearing the third submedian setz is opaque in the single speci-
men ; it is assumed that these sete are present.
63
BULLETIN, So. Cattr. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
PLATE 20
NEOPHYLLOBIUS MEXICANUS, new species. A, right leg I, dorsal view;
B, first submedian, dorsal seta.
TYPE MATERIAL. U. S. National Museum No. 1895. A single
specimen, collected Nov. 17, 1948, by A. Williamson.
TyPE LocaLity. “Mexico” (intercepted at Brownsville, Tex.).
DIsTRIBUTION. Known only in the above collection.
Hapsitat. Avocado budwood.
NEOPHYLLOBIUS SIERR-E, new species
mlatesZ
FEMALE. Body from above subovate, margin somewhat crenu-
late, somewhat truncate in front. Fifteen pairs of lanceolate to
spindle-shaped dorsal body setz, distributed as follows: A pair near
front margin, one over each palpal base ; two each side over coxe I;
one near margin behind each coxa II; one each over coxe III and-
IV ; two sublaterally between coxze IV and caudal end; four along |
caudal margin; five submedian pairs; all arising from tubercles, and |
longer than interval to base of seta next behind. Rostrum and palpi
short. Legs all longer than body, legs | and IV longest. Tarsi much |
shorter than tibia, somewhat swollen. Mandibular plate notched in |
front. Second segment of palpus the largest, bearing a strong, |
bladelike seta and a similar smaller seta; fourth segment without a_
hook, but bearing a strong, bladelike seta; last segment of palpi
64
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
PLATE 21
EOPHYLLOBIUS SIERRAE, new species. 1, female mite, dorsal view (only
base of legs II and III shown) ; 2, right palpus from above; 3, tip of
tarsus, lateral view; 4, a dorsal body seta.
65
BULLETIN, So. . CaLr ir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
deflexed, evidently bearing three sete near tip. Legs with sete of
last three segments linear-lanceolate; other segments with sete
mostly short, thickened at middle, each shorter than interval to seta
next beyond in line. Only one well-developed seta on patella, those
of legs I1I and IV whiplike, that on patella IV longer than tibia
IV ; hair on patella I and Il much shorter than respective tibie.
Patel: e | and II each bearing also an almost invisible spine. All
tibize each bearing subterminally a short, naillike seta. Tarsus with
onychium bearing two stout, simple claws and between them a pul-
villus with a pectinate series of tenent hairs along each side; tarsus
I bearing dorsodistally 2 long, non-duplicate hairs, and near base
of segment a short, sausage-shaped sensory seta.
Male not known.
TypPE MATERIAL. U.S. Nat. Museum No. 1801. Two specimens
collected by E. W. Baker.
Type Locatity. Camp Nelson, Calif.
DistRIBUTION. Known only from type locality.
Hapitat. Incense cedar (Libocedrus decurrens).
PLATE 22
NEOPHYLLOBIUS TEXANUS, new species. 1, dorsal body seta; 2, sensory
seta on tarsus I of female; 3, female mite, dorsal view.
NEOPHYLLOBIUS TEXANUS, new species
Plate 22
FrMALE. Body from above oval; suture between cephalothorax
and abdomen not visible; two eye cornez each side over coxe II;
striations on dorsum mostly tortuous. Rostrum small, ovate. Palpi
inconspicuous ; second segment with a very setose hair dorsally
66
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
slightly longer than the segment, and a similar smaller hair later-
ally ; third segment with a lanceolate hair above; terminal segment
with 3 or 4 small sete. Seventeen pairs of rodlike dorsal body
setee, as follows: One near front margin over base of each palpus,
2 each side over bases of legs I, one close behind eye, 1 over coxa
III, 1 over coxa IV, 1 on lateral margin just before and 1 just be-
hind trochanter III, 1 postmediad of each coxa IV, 4 along the
caudal margin, 6 submedian pairs from over the mandibular plate
to near the caudal margin; dorsal setz failing to reach, or only
slightly surpassing bases of sete next behind; dorsal body setz
and most of the leg hairs borne on small tubercles. Legs all longer
than body to front of cephalothorax, legs I almost one-half again
as long as body. Relative lengths of segments of leg I as follows:
Trochanter, 5; femur, 21; patella, 5; tibia, 24; tarsus, 9. All tarsi
swollen, each bearing dorso-terminally 2 lanceolate, non-duplex
hairs, these fully half as long as the segment; tarsi I and I] each
bearing near base a minute, sausage-shaped seta (probably a sen-
sory organ). Patella bearing middorsally a single noticeable, ob-
long-lanceolate, strongly setose hair, about twice as long as the
segment ; patelle I and II also bearing each a minute, barely visible
spine; tibize and tarsi with sparse, shortish, setose, lanceolate hairs ;
trochanters and femora bearing shortish, oblong to spatulate, setose
hairs. Tip of tarsi with 2 strong, hooked claws and a median pul-
villus, the latter bearing along each side a series of short tenent
hairs (the number difficult to observe). The male is unknown.
TYPE MATERIAL. U.S. Nat. Museum No. 1747; one female and
one larva collected Sept. 1, 1937, by L. D. Christenson.
iivercocstrmmy, dyler, dexas:
DisTRIBUTION. Known only from type locality.
Hasitat. Peach.
NEOPHYLLOBIUS SUM MERSI, new species
PlaterZ3
FeMaLe. Color cherry, with crista white. Body from above
ovate. Dorsum with striz irregular; areas embracing base of dor-
sal sete less distinctly striate, constituting the plates or shields of
some authors (see Plate 23). Fifteen pairs of linear-lanceolate,
coarsely serrate dorsal body setz, mostly longer than interval to
seta next behind, distributed as follows: A frontal seta over base
of each palpus; 7 submarginally along each side; 5 pairs of sub-
median setz ; 4 short setee subcaudally. One perfect and one imper-
fect eye cornea each side sublaterally, just in front of third sub-
lateral seta. Rostrum and palpi short, often hidden. Second seg-
ment of palpus the largest, bearing 3 lanceolate, setose sete. Legs
67
BULLETIN, So. Canir. ACADEMY OF Sciences Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
PLATE 23
NEOPHYLLOBIUS SUMMERSI, new species. Dorsal aspect of body, show-
ing dorsal setae, base of legs, and pattern of striations in the
dorsal integument.
PLATE 24
NEOPHYLLOBIUS SUMMERSI, new species. A, leg I of female; B, sub-
marginal, dorsal body seta.
68
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
all longer than body, sparsely provided with shortish, linear-lan-
ceolate hairs. Tarsi swollen, much shorter than tibize, each bearing
terminally two strong, simple claws, and between them a pulvillus
lined each side with a pectinate series of tenent hairs. Tarsi I and
II each bearing subbasally a minute, finger-shaped seta. All tibize
bearing distally a short, naillike seta. Patellz I and II each bearing
a linear, slightly thickened, setose hair, nearly twice as long as the
segment, and an almost imperceptible spine; linear hair on patella
II only two-fifths as long as tibia II; the linear hair longer on
patellz III and IV, but shorter than the tibia of these legs.
TyPrE MATERIAL. U. S. National Museum No. 1898. Four speci-
mens collected by E. Cott, January, 1948.
TYPE LOCALITY. One and one-half miles north of Davis, Calif.
DISTRIBUTION. Known only from type locality.
Hasitat. Salt grass.
NEOPHYLLOBIUS VIRGINIENSIS, new species
Plate 25
FEMALE. Body from above rotund-ovate. Dorsum with very
fine striations, mostly tortuous. Fourteen pairs of shortish dorsal
body setze, including two pairs on caudal margin, mostly rod-shaped,
coarsely serrate or bracteate margined, distributed as follows: The
longest pair subfrontally over sides of mandibular plate ; 7 submar-
ginal sete each side from coxe I back nearly to caudal sete; 4
along hind margin of body; 4 submedian pairs, the first 3 pairs
minute, the last pair longer; mostly shorter than intervals to sete
next behind. Rostrum and palpi short (deflexed and not readily
observable in specimens). Mandibular plate small, rounded in
front. Evidently one eye cornea each side, between second and
third submarginal sete. Second segment of palpus largest, bearing
a strong, setose seta dorsally, and a similar smaller seta laterally ;
penultimate segment without a claw (last segment could not be seen
properly for study). Legs all longer than body, legs I and IV the
longest ; leg setze mostly stiff, linear-lanceolate, finely setose, those
on legs I and II mostly longer than intervals to nearest setz be-
yond; tarsi much shorter than tibize, somewhat swollen at middle;
duplex sete evidently lacking; patelle very short, bearing a single
noticeable seta about as long as segment, patellee I and II bearing
also a barely visible spine ; tarsi | and II each with a spindle-shaped
sensilla dorsally near base. All tibize subdistally bearing a very
short spine. Onychium bearing 2 stout, simple claws, and between
them a pulvillus lined on each side with a pectinate series of tenent
hairs. Relative lengths of segments of leg I as follows: Coxa ?;
trochanter, 7; femur, 33; patella, 5; tibia, 33; tarsus, 14. Male not
») known.
69
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
TYPE MATERIAL. U.S. Nat. Museum No. 1748:
Type Locanity. Arlington, Virginia.
DiIsTRIBUTION. Known only from type locality.
Hapitat. Unknown.
The above description is based on one specimen each on two
slides bearing sample number I¢-7483, collected November, 1938,
by Floyd Andre.
PLATE 25
NEOPHYLLOBIUS VIRGINIENSIS, new species. 1, sensory seta borne or |
tarsi I and II; 2, female mite, dorsal view; 3, tip of tarsus, latera |
view; 4, one of the larger dorsal body setae.
70
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
ALLERGIC SENSITIVITY TO THE SALIVA OF
THE WESTERN CONE-NOSED BUG
By SHERWIN F. Woop
Life Sciences Department,
Los Angeles City College, Los Angeles 27, California
For some years the writer has been collecting data on man’s
reaction to the feeding of the western cone-nosed bug and related
species of Triatoma (Wood 1941a, 1941b, 1942a, 1942b), since
some species serve as vectors of Chagas’ disease, or American
human trypanosomiasis. Those individuals who are sensitive, or
become sensitive to the substances in the saliva of Triatoma, vary
greatly in their responses, but some individuals are made severely
ill as is indicated by two recent cases discussed below. Such imme-
diate responses are probably reactions to substances introduced
through the bloodsucking feeding habits of the insect.
A good general discussion of cone-nosed bugs in relation to man
is recorded by Dodge (1948), who reports observations of Wehrle
(1939). Additional reactions of man are discussed by Herms
(1939). Wood (1942b) recorded the reaction to the feeding of
Triatoma protracta of Mr. Fred Reynolds in 1941, who reported in
the fall of 1948 as follows: “Last summer I had a bite which
caused a condition similar to hives (urticaria or angioneurotic
edema ).”’
Through the courtesy of the Bureau of Vector Control, State
Department of Public Health, the writer was able to contact Mr.
Robert P. Allen, economic entomologist, who has collected 15 speci-
mens of Triatoma proctracta from his residence in the foothills of
he Sierra Nevada between Oct. 1, 1948, and Aug. 31, 1949. For
ais experiences with these bugs during the summer of 1949, he
reports regarding his 18 months old daughter that she “obviously
was bitten on the face by something; a large welt around the bite
eveloped ; she was ‘fussy and uncomfortable’ for a while, but not
ill; the swelling subsided and she recovered completely in a few
ours. Positive proof of the cause is lacking, but my wife saved
for me the bug which she found on the wall above the baby’s bed
soon after the symptoms were first noted.”
However, with regard to a neighbor who brought three speci-
nens of Triatoma protracta to him, he reports as follows: “Mr.
,Z was bitten four or five times on the back by something about
(100 A.M., after returning from work at midnight and retiring.
oon afterward Mrs. ‘Z’’ found a Triatoma proctracta under his
illow. The bites were not at first noticeable. His first reaction
71
BULLETIN, So, Caniv. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
was that he had been poisoned. Starting for the bathroom, he col-
lapsed and lost consciousness completely for a few minutes. He
recovered sufficiently to wall, and suffered a period of nausea and
diarrhea. Returning to bed, he experienced the following symptoms
in rapid succession: severe itching over body and especially on the
feet, skin turned red, broke out in a cold sweat, suffered recurring
chills, and temperature dropped below normal. He ‘felt dead,’ and
was unable to sleep until about 6:00 A.M. He recovered sufficiently
to go to work as usual the next evening, but did not feel well for
ten days to two weeks.”
“Mr. ‘Z’ suffered similar symptoms once previously, but had
no reason to suspect a bug bite as the cause. Mrs. ‘Z’ and two teen
age daughters report that they all have been bitten, but suffer only
local itching and swelling.”’
Through the kindness of Dr. W. Dwight Pierce of the Los
Angeles County Museum, and Mr. Norman Ehmann, entomologist
for the Los Angeles City Health Department, the writer inter-
viewed both Mr. “E” and Mrs. “V,” and saw specimens of Tria-
toma protracta Uhler collected by them.
Mr. “E,” aged 79, was able-bodied and in good health until re-
cently. He has known these insects near Palmdale, California, from
their pestiferous feeding habits since 1938. In June of 1949, fol-
lowing the bite of Triatoma protracta, Mr. “E” noted intense and
annoying itching of the palms of the hands; soles of the feet, and
the neck, after which he lapsed into unconsciousness for several
hours. The itching was followed by edema of the affected parts and
he was extremely weak for some time following this bug’s feeding
upon him.
Prior to this severe reaction, the effects were delayed 12 or more
hours, and nausea and diarrhea were noticeable accompaniments of
the discomfort produced by contact with this insect. On two pre-
vious occasions, a partial throat paralysis prevented swallowing for
some time. Mr. “E”’’s physician, Dr. H. H. Snook, adds the follow-
ing: “The symptoms were relieved by epinephrine 1:1000 adminis-
tered 3 minims at a dose 15 minutes apart for 4 doses along with 1
grain sodium phenobarbital by hypo to relieve nausea, anxiety and
nervousness. Ephedrine-aminophylline tablets were also tried but
helped some but was not very satisfactory.”’
Mrs. “V,” from near Reseda, California, noted severe itching}
of the hands, followed by a general edema of the arms and hands,
spreading gradually over the body following a “bite” on the right
forearm. The edema was accompanied by intense itching, severe)
dizziness, and nausea lasting approximately two days. The site of |
the bite on the upper surface of the arm showed a red pinpoint
72
BULLETIN, SO. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES , Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
puncture surrounded by a white wheal enclosed by a reddish ring.
The general edema of the arm spread from this point of contact
with the proboscis of Triatoma protracta.
1
Her physician, Dr. W. J. Lakey, reported the following: “This
patient was seen early on the morning of Nov. 2, 1949. She was in
bed, having arisen only to go to the bathroom when she required
support due to severe dizziness and nausea. She complained of
‘itching over the entire body, most marked on face, hands, and
thighs. She and her husband stated that there had been an infesta-
tion of black bugs about the house. Some were found in the bed-
ding and were full of blood. Examination showed a healthy appear-
ing woman of middle age. Face markedly swollen, temperature 98,
pulse 76, regular respiration 18. Eruption on the face, arms, hands,
chest and thighs was in patches of varying size, some as large as the
palm of the hand, slightly raised with pale borders. Diagnosis of
urticaria was made, minimizing the bite idea. This could have been
a foreign protein reaction or possibly a specific poison due to suck-
ing insects. Exact hour of the bite was not known. Treatment was
hypo of adrenalin 1/1000 solution, three minims. Improvement
was almost immediate, itching subsiding markedly and swelling of
face also. Benadryl was prescribed for further treatment, two cap-
sules once or twice a day.”
It is interesting to the writer that with both Mr. “E” and Mrs.
‘V” the exact time of feeding was unknown, which emphasizes the
_ack of physical discomfort from contact, or at the time of contact,
with the proboscis of the western cone-nosed bug, a bloodsucking
sect. This is well attested to by the previous contacts reported by
Wood (1941la, 1942a). Both Mr. “E” and Mrs. “V” were awak-
ened some time AFTER the bug had fed, according to their own re-
ictions to the toxic substances introduced in the saliva, or their
specific chemical responses. to possibly the foreign proteins of the
nsect’s saliva. Riley and Johannsen (1938) have noted that the
sloodsucking habit of feeding is not associated with painful bites.
Neghme (1946) has found the zrosol bomb useful for bringing
Triatoma out of hiding in houses, but the contained insecticides. do
1ot kill these bugs readily. However, Randolph (1946) reports 100
er cent mortality for one species of Triatoma in laboratory tests
vith 5 per cent DDT emulsion. Dias and Pellegrino (1948) ob-
ained good kills of Triatoma infestans with gammexane P 530,
vhereas Neghme and Roman (1948) report no “better results with
“vammexane than DDT.
BULLETIN, So. Caniv. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 2, 1950
LITERATURE CITED
Dias, E. & PELLEGRINO, J., 1948. Alguns ensaios com o “Gammexane”
no combate aos transmissares da doenca de Chagas. Brasil-Medico.
62 (18, 19, 20) : 185-191.
Dopcr, N. N., 1948. Poisonous dwellers of the desert (Santa Fe, New
Mexico, Southwestern Monuments Association), 44 pp.
Herms, W. B., 1939. Medical Entomology (3rd Ed., Maemillan, New
York), 582 pp.
NEGHME, A., 1946. The aerosol bomb as a method of determining the
Triatomiec Index in human habitations in Chagas’ disease endemic
zones. Jour. Parasitol., 32:209-210.
NEGHME, A. & ROMAN, J., 1948. Present state of Chagas’ disease sur-
veys in Chile. Amer. Jour. Trop. Med. 28 (6) : 835-839.
RANDOLPH, N. M., 1946. DDT for the control of Triatoma. Jour. Econ.
Ent. 39 (3): 419.
Ritey, W. A. & JOHANNSEN, O. A., 1938. Medical Entomology (2nd
Ed., New York, McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc.), 483 pp.
WEHRLE, LAWRENCE P., 1939. Observations on three species of Tria-
toma. Bull. Brooklyn Ent. Soe. 34 (3) : 145-154.
Woop, S. F., 1941a. New localities for Trypanosoma cruzi Chagas in
southwestern United States. Amer. Jour. Hyg., 34:1-13.
Woop, S. F., 1941b. Chagas’ Disease (Does it exist in men in Ari-
zona?). Southwestern Medicine, April, 112-114.
Woop, S. F., 1942a. Reactions of man to the feeding of Reduviid bugs.
Jour. Parasitol., 28 43-49.
Woop, S. F., 1942b. Observations on vectors of Chagas’ disease in the
United States. I. California. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. 41 (2): 61-69,
74
BULLETIN of the SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY of SCIENCES
Published by the Academy at Los Angeles, California
Subscription—$2.00 per year
Free to Life Members and Unlimited Annual Members
of the Academy (Annual Membership Fee $5.00)
Address all communications to KENNETH E. STAGER
Care of Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7, Calif., U. S. A.
PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The Academy has published to date the following:
PROCEEDINGS, 1896 to 1899. Six numbers—Vol. 1, Nos. 1 to 6.
MISCELLANEOUS BULLETINS issued under the imprint of the Agri-
cultural Experiment Station, 1897 to 1907. Ten numbers.
All issues of the above are now out of print.
Bulletin of the
Southern California Academy of Sciences
| Began issue with Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1902. Issued ten numbers
in 1902; nine numbers in 1903, 1904, 1905; three numbers in 1906. Issued
two numbers annually from 1907 to 1919, both inclusive (except 1908—
one issue only). Issued four numbers (January, May, July and October)
in 1920.
The 1921 issues are: Vol. XX, No. 1, April; Vol. XX, No. 2, August:
Vol. XX, No. 3, December.
The 1922 issues are: Vol. XXI, No. 1, March; Vol. XXI, No. 2,
September.
The 1923 issues are: Vol. XXII, No. 1, March; No. 2, July.
The 1924 issues are: Vol. XXIII, No. 1, January-February; No. 2,
March-April; No. 3, May-June; No. 4, July-August; No. 5, September-
October; No. 6, November-December.
| From 1925 to 1949, including volumes XXIV to XLIX, three numbers
were published each year. These were issued as No. 1, January-April;
No. 2, May-August; No. 3, September-December, for each volume.
MEMOIRS
| Vol. 1, 1938. Vol. 2, Part 1, 1939. Voi. 2, Part 2, 1944. Vol. 3, Part 1,
1947. Vol. 3, Part 2, 1949.
75
PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
For Sale at the Appended Prices
BULLETIN: To To Non-
Members Members
MONS ONO. CRUD 04: eke Teh crocs clo cious lolsvecciene soielolerene Kernen $ .50 1.00
Spas at HORNE OO Dy ic sreveve Vasko coon abate ie tele one ele eae 50 1.00
6, PW XUH (Marge Mone EERE ORLORIOOIEO.G OTD Oo U0 .50 1.00
tts AD MED 8) sess: snails says teers teneve ons Gladeselo ROR CIM 1.50 3.00
PB ee OAL OOO ee tetel cee teraueanticnues eon aang eeu ene 1.00 2.00
OF Dee OAO) seagate Paap orece erates reel oteusyaits keane Reed 15 1.50
Sc Oe Oe ME gL O Mn ee EU ate terens' akisisnscvs ve auietisi once ce aren hte eeme 1.50 3.00
RO er SOD QL Tee retcate, recite ect stegneyes Snote ce wots leat OORT RS 2.00 4.00
SON es SO TOM Givers eS och See eirans eicye wis eevee keke eo 15 1.50
Paihia are teeel Its i Ube et a EER UG Ras OIA oo BC 1.50 3.00
ON ce BTS OO DON barre tieaebeneves aterets hems vere tencvela stonsae tonnes 50 1.00
LO eS eA ODO. ve rnd escent ebereustorens iotek or erel eek Ore 50 1.00
SDE ie OSG DD eS Shee st Gatos ticanientehe ote chee eee 1.00 2.00
Be ee I Aa ZG NPS (CeO oc odocoonoccc 33) 15
SIDA ee MS De 3: lO 2 5 (EACH) ara late scence rocleeeeoe 5) 15
pa D sp SS tO 2 Gi ctevepayerecsns terete Geccataletoruistarcie etnet teeter 35 15
co, Osteen) ont 2, wel 270m (EACH) Mimeverelefeters FOGDOL0000.000 .3D 15
Saige we elo tone O28 (CACH))) a veteran nore 35 75
rhs, als 4s UP) ((GEWOE)) ” GoodoGoouduGddb 0000 3 «5
ef OO ee cad) tee, toner Gola ((CACH YY vciocrete cleric eros 230 15
SiOl ae 2. 3. 1982 Geach) e Qsctecitc ee 5) 75
Mere
ba by
= —
aaas
oO)
PLATE 382
96
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol.
49, Part 3, 1950
PLATE 33
97
BULLETIN, So. Canir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 3, 1950
THE DISTRIBUTION OF CALIFORNIA INSECT
VECTORS HARBORING TRYPANOSOMA
CRUZI CHAGAS
By SHERWIN F. Woop
Life Sciences Department, Los Angeles City College, Los Angeles 27, Calif.
The causative agent of Chagas’ disease or American human
trypanosomiasis, 7ryfpanosoma cruzi, is apparently widespread
throughout California wherever the western cone-nosed bug, Tvria-
toma protracta, is found. Because of greater annoyance to man by
these bugs in recent years (Wood, 1950), more specimens have
been examined in scientific laboratories. This has made possible
the recording: of several additional localities for infected bugs since
publication of the summary by the writer (Wood, 1942), as shown
in Table 1.
The Murray Canyon locality is unique in the accessibility, con-
centration and size of wood rat houses, the abundance of insects,
and the consistent occurrence of naturally infected Triatoma. In
the spring of 1935, Whitaker (1937) collected 500 adults and
nymphs of Triatoma protracta from this region which boosts the
total to 1,181 specimens known from this one area. The writer col-
lected a record number of 85 specimens from one wood rat house
in this canyon.
.
In the Eaton Canyon area near Pasadena, eight wood rat houses
were diligently searched in December of 1948 without finding a
single Triatoma. Possibly the heavy collecting of previous years,
as shown in Table 1, plus variable adverse climatic factors has re-
duced this population although the bugs may have retreated to
underground burrows as they do in summer months in parts of
Arizona, New Mexico, and Texas.
The verification of Davis’s (1943) record for Plymouth plus
the new records from LaGrange, O’Neals, Three Rivers, and Tar-
zana indicate a continuous pattern of distribution from the southern
coast inland through the great central valley of California.
Through the kind co-operation of Mr. Fred Reynolds near
Trimmer Springs, specimens of Triatoma protracta were received
as follows: 1 in ’40, 21 in ’41, 19 in ’46, and 24 in ’47, as shown in
Table 1. He reports two seen in his canyon home during the sum-
mer of 1948 and one in a neighbor’s house, whereas only three
specimens were observed in the summer of 1949.
From records supplied me by the Bureau of Vector Control,
State Department of Health, and Robert P. Allen, Economic Ento-
98
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES "s Vol. 49, Part 3, 1950
TUAIBILIS, Il
California Localities for Trypanosoma crust in
Triatoma protracta ( Uhler)
| No. of No. of No. of
A Per Cent Reference
; ewig Dee Pee Hea Tntoction and eee pled
Murray Canyon, F. D. Wood (1984)
San Diego Co. 681 453 BI 30.2 | 1932,1933,1937,1939
Eaton Canyon, S. F. Wood (1938)
Los Angeles Co. ae 170 62 36.4 | 1936,1937,1939,1946
Trimmer Springs, S. F. Wood (1942)
Fresno Co. 65 46 13 28.2 | 1940,1941,1946,1947
Griffith Park, S. F. Wood (1942)
_ Los Angeles Co. 20 20 6 30.0 | 1941,1942,1946,1950
Plymouth, Davis (1948)
Amador Co. 5 5 5 100.0 | 1946,1948,1949
Fallbrook,
San Diego Co. 316 311 94 30.2 | S. F. Wood (1944)
_ Three Rivers,
Tulare Co. 1 il 1 100.0 | 1947
_ O’Neals, S. F. Wood (1942)
[ Madera Co. 25 25 17 68.0 | 1941,1949
| La Grange,
_ Stanislaus Co. 6 6 1 16.6 | 1949
_ Tarzana,
_ Los Angeles Co. 18 18 2 11.1 | 1950
TOTALS 1314 | 1055 | 338 | 32.0
mologist, 12 Triatoma protracta were collected near LaGrange, in
addition to the specimens reported in Table 1. Four came from a
lumber pile near a house in the fall of 1948, and eight came from
a residence in the fall of 1948, and spring and summer of 1949.
Although the LaGrange, Plymouth, O’Neals, Three Rivers, and
Tarzana sources have not been studied in mammals, the morpho-
logical similarity of all parasites to other nearby sources of Trypa-
nosoma cruzi indicates their probable common identity.
The exact locations for Plymouth, Trimmer, Three Rivers, and
Fallbrock specimens are: 7 miles east of Plymouth, 3 or 4 miles
northwest of Trimmer Springs, 2 miles southwest of Three Rivers
(near “Slick Rock’’), and 5 miles southwest of Fallbrook.
99
BULLETIN, So. Canir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 3, 1950
Most of the bugs collected by the writer have been obtained in
brush pile houses of the wood rat (Neotoma spp.). The average
number of bugs found in 419 California wood rat houses was 2.6
as compared with 2.8 for 723 wood rat houses (including Califor-
ma) searched throughout southwestern United States.
Yo June, 1950, the writer has collected or received 1,571 Tvria-
toma protracta, 31 Paratriatoma hirsuta, and 1 Triatoma rubida
uhlert from California. Of 1,297 Triatoma protracta examined,
338 or 26% were found naturally infected with Trypanosoma cruzi
as compared with 32% for all bugs examined from the infected
localities alone, as shown in Table 1. From the southwestern United
States, 358 or 23.4% of 1,524 Triatoma protracta examined were
infected. Of 144 Triatoma protracta collected from human habi-
tations in southwestern United States, mostly California, 115 were
examined and 40 or 34.7% were found naturally infected.
Thus, there are at least 10 localities for recovery of Triatoma
protracta naturally infected with Trypanosoma cruzi in California.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Davis, D. J.
1943. Infection in monkeys with strains of Trypanosoma cruzi iso-
lated in the United States. Pub. Health Rep., Washington,
58 :1006-1010.
WHITAKER, B. G.
1937. The life cycle of the Californian strain of Trypanosoma cruzi
Chagas in Triatoma proctracta Uhler. (Doctorate Thesis,
Univ. of Calif. Library), 98 pp.
Woop, S. F.
1942. Observations on vectors of Chagas’ disease in the United
States. I. California. Bull. So. Cal. Acad. Sci., 41(2):61-69.
1950. Allergic sensitivity to the saliva of the western cone-nosed bug.
Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci., 49(2) : 71-74.
100
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES "* Vol. 49, Part 3, 1950
FOSSIL ARTHROPODS FROM ONYX MARBLE
By W. DwicHT PIERCE
Pe UONDRODUCTLORY NODE.
In the search for fossil insects we have perhaps been overlook-
ing what may be a fertile field—the hot springs of our western
country.
References in paleontological literature are very scarce. In
1928 Otto Schmidtgen (Verhandl. Zool-Bot. Ges. Wien 78(1).:
(35)-(39) reported on the trails of 20 kinds of insects from what
was probably the border of a pool in Permian deposits at Nier-
stein on the Rhine.
In 1929 Friedrich Zeuner ( Paleontol. Zeitsch. 11 (4) :330-339,
pl.) described a rich Miocene thermal spring lime deposit con-
taining many kinds of insects. He concluded that the animals
overcome by the fumes, dropped into the spring, became asphyxi-
ated, and were encased with lime within a few hours, before
organic decay set in. Thus a perfect preservation of form oc-
curred, second only to amber inclusion.
In the Desert Magazine of August 1946, John Hilton, artist
and desert naturalist, wrote an article “Fossils while you wait,”
describing a high pressure flow of hot water highly charged with
aragonite, forming onyx of various colors.
This water is so mineralized that insects, plants and animals
falling in it are quickly covered with fine crystals and preserved.
This well is near the Canal Road between the Chocolate Moun-
tains and the Salton Sea, 29.3 miles from Mecca, California, in
the Imperial Valley.
There are many onyx forming hot springs, especially in the
neighborhood of the San Andreas Fault, and these must be studied
to learn the steps in fossilization, and to find true fossil material.
Dr. Alexander Petrunkevitch (Amer. Jour. Science 243
(June) : 320-329, 1 pl., 8 figs. 1945) published the first records
of arthropods in American calcite deposits, based on onyx marble
from Bonner Quarry of the Southwest Onyx and Marble Com-
pany, located in a canyon the north side of Black Mesa about ten
miles southwest of Ashfork, Arizona. He included a description
of the geologic formation by Prof. Edwin D. McKee, Assistant
Director of the Museum of Northern Arizona, at Flagstaff, Ariz.
According to Prof. McKee the onyx is “post faulting,” or was
formed since the middle of Cenozoic time, that is Upper Miocene
101
BULLETIN, So. Canir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 3, 1950
or Phocene, but is deposited in cracks and faults in Permian Supai
farmation.
Evidently the Arthropods were washed into or drowned in
calcite saturated waters and thus preserved.
Dr. Petrunkevitch erected a family Calcitronidae in the Order
Schizomida, which was formerly known as the family Schizono-
tide in the Suborder Uropygi of Order Pedipalpi. The type genus
of the order is Schizomus Cook 1899 (Schizonotus Thorell 1888
preoccupied ).
The first fossil species in this new order he described as Cal-
citro fisheri. Two specimens were seen and described with draw-
ings and photographs.
Recently Mr. Fritz W. Schmidt of Long Beach handed the
writer a third onyx pen base in which were visible at different
levels six specimens, five of them belonging in the pedipalpid
arachnids, and one a primitive japygid. This last is the first record
of a fossil japygid, and the first record of any insect fossil in onyx.
2. NEW PEDIPALPIDS FROM ONYX. MARBIEE:
The onyx pen base now at hand has at the surface a very
distinct pedipalpid, and deeper in the onyx are four smaller speci-
mens probably younger forms, though possibly an entirely dif-
ferent species.
Petrunkevitch separated his Calcitro from Schizomidae on the
number of tarsal joints, the Schizomid genera Schizomus, Trithy-
reus, and Stenochrus having three tarsal joints on each of the sec-
ond, third and fourth pairs of legs; while Calcitro has five tarsal
joints on the second pair, and four each on the third and fourth
pairs. The present specimen has, as nearly as I can make out,
but two tarsal joints and metatarsus on the second, third, and
fourth pairs. On many other characters it differs generically
from Calcitro.
Since the dorsal plate is not discernible it is impossible to deter-
mine whether this has the character of Thelyphonidae or Scizo-
midae, but it seems better to temporarily align it with the Thely-
phonidae.
Genus ONYCHOTHELYPHONUS, new genus.
Type O. bonneri new species.
A thelyphonid having two last abdominal segments cylindrical,
and the preceding segment much smaller and narrower than the |
other segments; caudal appendage with seven segments. All legs
long and slender in the order 4, 1, 3, 2. Tarsal joints three in |
102
BULLETIN, So. CAtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES , Vol. 49, Part 3, 1950
first pair, and two each on the other pairs. Coxae continguous on
median line in second and third pairs, but separated by abdominal
process in fourth pair.
ONYCHOTHELYPHONUS BONNERI, new species (Figure 1 of
Plate 34.)
Type in Los Angeles County Museum Fossil Insect Collection,
No. BOQ1.
The specimen is on its back, just below the surface of the
plaque, and is complete except for the hand of the left pedipalp,
the entire right pedipalp, and the chelicera. The last, three joints
of the second right leg are broken off, but lie just beyond.
This thelyphonid differs from Calcitro fisheri in having stout, ’
short jointed pedipalpi, with a short inner apical tooth on tibia;
very small pedipalpal sternal plates; a longitudinally divided
sternum between front legs; absence of anterior apical tooth on
second coxae; first legs with three long tarsal joints; other legs
with two long tarsal joints; ninth abdominal short, much narrower
than eighth, but wider than the cylindrical tenth and eleventh seg-
}ments ; tail seven jointed.
palpal coxae to tip of tail 3.64 mm.; length of tail 0.44 mm.; base
of abdomen to base of tail 2.12 mm.; greatest width of abdomen
|
Its measurements are: total length from anterior end of pedi-
0.84.; width of last two segments 0.32 and 0.28 mm. The order
|
p|
BuLLetin, So. Carnie. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 3, 1950
of the legs is 4, 1, 3, 2. The surface of the ventral segments and
femora is closely deeply transversely pitted.
LEG MEASUREMENTS IN MM.
Appendage Coxa Trochanter Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total
Pedipalpi 0.08 0.04 0.20 0.24 0.20 missing missing:
Leg I 0.40 0.28 1.04 0.38 0.74 0.60 0.92 4.36
Leg II 0.44 0.28 0.88 0.36 0.48 0.44 0.52 3.40
Leg III 0.36 0.24 0.88 0.40 0.64 0.52 0.56 3.60
Leg IV 0.36 0.44 1.00 0.48 0.96 0.64 0.68 4.56
The other four specimens are deeper in the onyx and more
decomposed, as well as much smaller. Whether they are younger
specimens of the same creature or another species has not yet been
determined.
3. A PRIMITIVE THYSANURAN FROM ONYX
MARBLE.
Just 65 mm. from the Onychothelyphonus there is an insect
specimen belonging to the Order Dicellura, Family Japygidae;
probably the oldest fossil yet found in this order. The body is
greatly distended and largely reduced to a skin.
Genus ONYCHOJAPYX, new genus.
A japygid with simple unjointed, untoother caudal cerci, two
jointed tarsi.
ONYCHOJAPYX SCHMIDTI, new species (Figure 2 of Plate 34).
Named in honor of Fritz W. Schmidt, through whose kindness
the material came to hand.
Type in Los Angeles County Museum Fossil Insect Collection,
No. BQ 2.
The abdomen is twisted over, but the anterior portion is the
ventral aspect.
Length of specimen as curved 4.80 mm., straightened 6.32 mm.
Length of head 0.40 mm. ; antennae 1.60 mm. ; prothorax 0.48 mm. ;
mesothorax 0.72 mm.; metathorax 0.64 mm.; abdomen including
cerci 4.08 mm.; cerci 0.32 mm.
The legs are simple and of the following pattern:
Coxa I. 0.08mm. Il. O.08mm. III. O.08mm.
Femur 0.24 OLS 0.32
Tibia 0.16 0.24 0.24
Tarsus 0.16 0.16 0.16
The slender antennae are many jointed.
This insect is especially interesting because so few thysanuran
insects have ever been found fossil, and because of their fragile
nature are hardly to be expected.
104
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES eg Vol. 49, Part 3, 1950
VGN eDOMS A THING BECOME A KOSSIIE?
By W. Dwicut PIERCE
The writer has arrived at the threshold of paleontology by
the back door, having been originally asked to determine the
fragments of beetles found in the La Brea asphalt at Los Angeles.
This study has led on and on into other fields of fossil insects,
but still there hangs overhead the question—When does a thing
become a fossil? No one can give an adequate answer.
It is not a question of mineralization or petrifaction, for many
specimens are found that are unquestionably classed as fossils
and yet have not been altered in their nature. On the other hand,
by certain chemical processes we can mineralize a specimen com-
pletely and permanently in the laboratory.
It is not a question of extinction, for many specimens associ-
ated with validly designated fossils are still extant. And on the
other hand some animals and insects have become extinct in the
last century. Some insect genera extend back to the Eocene
times, with little change.
It is not a question of decomposition because the Mastodons
frozen in the Arctic ice are still in perfect flesh. Decomposition
starts within a day or two after death, except when the animal is
preserved by chemical or by ice.
When a wasp stings a spider it puts it into a perfect state of
preservation which lasts for months; how long, has not been
tested.
There is apparently some delicate little element of time in-
volved. If it is 5,000 years old it is not a fossil in the eyes of
some paleontologists, but if it is 10,000 years it may be. If it
is 100,000 years old there is no question about its being a fossil;
and yet it may look and be exactly like it was shortly after the
creature died. But should antiquity alone be a criterion for the
beginning of a science?
What is the exact minute, day, year, decade, century, or mil-
lennium at which our paleontologists will accept a specimen as in
the realm of paleontology?
If a part of an animal or plant becomes surrounded by ma-
terials which will henceforth preserve it in the same condition
for millennia of time, with pressure the only condition changing,
why is it not a fossil from the minute of such embedment? As
time rolls on, the superincumbent layers of materials will press
105
BULLETIN, So. CaLiv. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 49, Part 3, 1950
and condense the materials below, and perhaps the specimen will
gradually be pressed out of its original shape until it lies in one
plane. But it was a fossil long before that, even in the eyes of
the most strict paleontologist.
The writer has had occasion to study several types of fossil
formation and is naturally in a quandary as to what that mys-
terious hour is that takes a thing out of the realm of ordinary
biology into the realm of paleontology.
The most beautiful insect fossils known to us are those found
in Baltic amber, which was formed from the exudates of ancient
conifers and entrapped insects while it was 1n its sticky state. But
many trees today exude gums (balsam, resin, copal, damar),
that entrap ants and other insects, and when these pieces of gum
fall to the ground they become a part of the forest carpet. As
time goes on- the gum hardens and very little change will take
place ‘between the first month of hardening and centuries later.
When does gum embedment become a fossil?
Along volcanic faults hot springs often bring up water heavily
impregnated with calcite and other salts, and sometimes these
salts crystallize very quickly, especially upon insects, sticks and
other objects in the water. The specimens become saturated with
the salts, and are a part of the deposit. In time this deposit be-
comes onyx or marble. Onyx-marble has been Comunawous ly form-
ing in some areas of Arizona, California, and Baja California
since Miocene times and perhaps long before that. The preserva-
tion of insects in this onyx-marble is almost as perfect as that in
amber. Is there a time before which the specimens in onyx are
fossil, and after which they are not?
Peat is an accumulation of leaves, stems, and other plant ma-
terials in a boggy place. Insect remains are often included in the
mass. As time goes on, this material becomes packed in tightly
compacted layers. When the peat comes under additional pres-
sure such as that of a glacier or the result of a land slide, it is
even more tightly pressed to form lignite, and the same insects
are present, perhaps more crushed.
When in this gradually developing compression does peat or
lignite come into the realm of paleontology? If either is inter-
glacial it is Pleistocene, and accepted. But is it not the same and
in the same condition even if formed much later than during
Pleistocene ?
Asphalt embedment has been going on since middle Pleisto-
cene, and continues today. The insect caught in the bitumen is
often immediately submerged, although at other places may not
become completely surrounded by the material for months. After
106
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES " Vol. 49, Part 8, 1950
final complete embedding, it becomes a part of the continual
deposition of such material until there may be thousands of
layers above it. The condition of the insect fragments after the
disintegration of the soft tissues, remains constant throughout
the centuries. Do not the materials of paleontology, as concerns
bituminous embedment, start with the present day catches and
extend back in unbroken series to the earliest evidences of pe-
troleum seepage ?
In these four fields the paleontologist can study the changes in
insects from today back to the inter-glacial periods. In what
actual time do his studies enter the field of paleontology? Does
not the actual field of paleontology begin with the complete en-
casement of an object?
On November 25, 1940, Mr. G. P. Kanakoff collected a piece
of soft, clayey soil on San Nicolas Island, which had the trails of
fox, bird, tenebrionid beetles and other creatures at the margin
of a sandy beach. By 1946 this specimen was hard rock. If this
portion of beach had suddenly been covered by a different kind
of dust or soil, those trails would have been preserved, The hard-
ening process might have taken longer at this site, but the record
was imprisoned. How many years must elapse before such a
record of present day life comes into the realm of the paleon-
tologist? Does it become a fossil series of prints as soon as the
record is made permanent by imprisonment or sealing?
The introduction of ecological thinking into paleontology will
necessitate our recognition of such materials as incipient fossils.
At any rate, in the studies we are making of recent Pleis-
tocene life, we have continuous series of materials for all periods
of time, and our studies must take into account the transitions in
structure, the interventions of climatic change, and the changes
of supporting life.
107
BULLETIN of the SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY of SCIENCES
Published by the Academy at Los Angeles, California
Subscription—$2.00 per year
Free to Life Members and Unlimited Annual Members
of the Academy (Annual Membership Fee $5.00)
Address all communications to KENNETH HE. STAGER
Care of Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7, Calif., U. S. A.
PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The Academy has published to date the following:
PROCEEDINGS, 1896 to 1899. Six numbers—Vol. 1, Nos. 1 to 6.
MISCELLANEOUS BULLETINS issued under the imprint of the Agri-
cultural Experiment Station, 1897 to 1907. Ten numbers.
All issues of the above are now out of print.
Bulletin of the
Southern California Academy of Sciences
Began issue with Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1902. Issued ten numbers |
in 1902; nine numbers in 1903, 1904, 1905; three numbers in 1906. Issued
two numbers annually from 1907 to 1919, both inclusive (except 1908—
one issue only). Issued four numbers (January, May, July and October)
in 1920.
The 1921 issues are: Vol. XX, No. 1, April; Vol. XX, No. 2, August;
Vol. XX, No. 3, December.
The 1922 issues are: Vol. XXI, No. 1, March; Vol. XXI, No. 2,
September.
The 1923 issues are: Vol. XXII, No. 1, March; No. 2, July.
The 1924 issues are: Vol. XXIII, No. 1, January-February; No. 2,
March-April; No. 3, May-June; No. 4, July-August; No. 5, September-
October; No. 6, November-December.
From 1925 to 1950, including volumes XXIV to XLIX, three numbers
were published each year. These were issued as No. 1, January-April;
No. 2, May-August; No. 3, September-December, for each volume.
MEMOIRS
Vol. 1, 1938. Vol. 2, Part 1, 1939. Voi. 2, Part 2, 1944. Vol. 3, Part 1,
1947. Vol. 3, Part 2, 1949.
108
PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
For Sale at the Appended Prices
BULLETIN: TO To Non-
Members Members
WO, 85. INCa 1, IDEs GS ooecon pon comop co coldleso cones $ .50 1.00
beeen eeerata VMI) (a mravie le cea) align ah elie, vite Gueveliel aj eae sven elisisuelehs 50 1.00
eta OM HRP (Ti acta stiches) glaitacatayid paces face Geile a ueifeity ote ge ahenye 50 1.00
ine (aerial mL (VRP peices SPN oe ELLs Ee SE os av alyalnay eae oapnaae 1.50 3.00
ame eeruicnme dl we (VQ are ea ies a avalos ‘a ecole) ener sane aun ouelapeseusare 1.00 2.00
See) Prem MBEL ONIN) a ce I 5 ans sah ay sos cue cecs (lis bel'apecsuekonane elecere 15 1.50
some) oarerepareenenlmreetLC ONDE ty Sie SN SP eee aN rs ates waiesatere le 1.50 3.00
cael () Seeemccceame pet QUO op hele eae hs ont Sacto an Ging aylSuanaleneesi ae svar armas 2.00 4.00
samme emer PaCS cates 5 oct tis casa. Vso Respal wi Gtiah eva necatelarretekeneicrions 15 1.50
boeats lb PromepsetnnePMICONU Sac cer ricco veel cit te. uaaiersin cus aiients ouaaha tale ols 1.50 3.00
cadeea ls mer raneelterae sl) 2 (enon seine aire tee ee heeisennl eh dine aietioe eiehee are te 50 1.00
pasta 1A) Ratiracsmmrase Amine), () eae a 2 ay claire stay oo eta etre ssireey suelel age oder 50 1.00
soem Hse ae) 2 28 eo Seat ere sea sis Siena ts 3jeciieylei na carancuera sake 1.00 2.00
OC 2B, I By Biotls hy SIDA (Cee) aioe oases sooo ROME 75
ey, The hy Bae JES Ae (Ye) DY) en cians eer cic mie mnie .35 as)
et 2 Osea MEPL DON! rcxciecailcheildi a % eveiscazie siete s: acevaycis Suaveie ole .35 15
ae 2 Osmeaneey lime 2 ae ij: (CACN,):sicie) oie) 0. crsusrers trea eenisis 35 15
aeons ae 2nd e il O28) (CAC) scree ences els eestor i333) ; ae)
ato, Speicmemmlo ara wi O29 (GACH)! mci sre sicietate gcse se terete .35 215
BOs FE AS 4G Sip ABD bea (CENG I) bigdog Gag caeaen Sees .3D 05
anol nel Oe osenl Pou (COACH)! irisyereievaenatcsemerhclti sess .OD als)
~ BA, Il Bs BORE CCE) G6 oouc iebateneaseaccnsncseeake 3) ars)
ikon leone NOSE NC ACK) siecielec ccvarticleis eres .35 205
ot eel oe TODO A ((CACI)) <= si.ro:cteeslacesie eee oes .35 215
aro) mao o LOG! (GACH) 2 ad: c verece-cus ciate cis Ques .oD 15
~ BG, al, A Be IBY (CRN ic cocoosuesoeueodH 35 75
amon mame len rao 8i 5 (ACH) ever, «oles 6c ievenearee 35 75
~ Be, “Il, 25 Bh IB (GEN) cocogdcobucocccaKe 35 7
aD) MMM ELD Otc alcilcrsiepe wines e yeiela rear slencCelencisioraieloteus 35 ole
er een oo e941 (COACH): issuciersisicucs iss oeete ees 3) «15
el emer Sul O4 2 CACH Yi sicis seven cle wee aes os) 215
ae etalon Deo FAS: (COACIN)! vsceseeisiere eck wtgvwrate aisle oe) 15
ae eee Nis cl 44 N(CCACIN): oops ccee ues cess eStore .O9 15
mee A ene t olay 2S.) O 45) (ACH) srecereienvore isc oslo tele © oF 50m
mane Otero De Sl AG: COACH )i ise .clercine ei sore orale ovens 35 75
eat ONeealne 3s OA Tn ((CaAChiyl oc. sarees das cease: 35 75
eae Comme D3 NAR (GACH)! fais oie ese sersicnls ceetsg 35 75
mars Sareea oa AO (GACH. sedi cos even eee: 35 75
“49, i, Ay By IDO (ERIGIN)) 5 go604 aepouod0couE 35 75
(Continued on next page)
109
PUBLICATIONS (continued)
MEMOIRS To To Non-
Members Members
VO] LO SS—PADET (GOVEL vcrcieivis: vivir ssciole vicaucel shennienenere $2.00 $4.00
cana oe bound in black fabrikoid ........... 3.00 5.00
ide elt printed on one side of paper ....... 3.00 5.00
ae hte < printed on one side of page (bound) 4.00 6.00
Vole 2; Nor wu, L9S9—paper ‘COVEN aces .ccleleloneienenerery 1.25 2.50
nS eet ee ‘ bound in black fabrikoid.... 2.20 3.50
chy We jhe chan Ad printed on one side of page . nears) 3.50
f 25 0944—painer’. COVET |.) .cc eee eeueiereiee ata) 1.50
eee Dl S47—napenr COVeLu a sck cite cere 1.00 2.00
See ee 2 1949 ——pnaner COMED a. -cc) cacccie lene oncronerers 1.00 2.00
Miscellaneous, Publications of Affiliated or
Co-operating Organizations
lLorquinia—Vols. 1, 2 (all published)...bound $1.50, unbound $1.00
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA GEOLOGY AND LOS ANGELES
HAR TH QWAKHS Re Wl EDI sacs neers bound 2.50
Southwest Science Bulletin, May 5, 1920 (all published),
chiefly, Entomological, 1 ‘colored plate’ scorer 1.00
Check-list of the Recent Bivalve Mollusks (of N. W. Coast of
Am. from the Polar Sea to San Diego), W. H. Dall ..... 1.00
FLORA OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA by Anstruther David-
son and George L.. Moxley, 452 pp., 1923....2 02. cece ses 2.50
Reprints:
Check-list of the Lepidoptera of Boreal America. Superfami-
lies Sphingoidea, Saturnioidea and Bombycoidea (printed
on one side of page only, to allow of additional notes),
Wm. Barnes and Foster H. Benjamin, 1927 .............. $ .5¢
The Cacti of the Pyramid Peak Region, Dona Ana County,
INew. Mexico, 19312 Shs R. Hosbers.4- eee eee eee sao
Check-list of the Macrolepidoptera of Canada and the United
States of America by Dr. J. McDunnough, 1938, printed on
white bristol board, one side of page (without index)
suitable for labels. To Academy members, $1.50. To non-
1002900 01-) ¢: ee en ee ee ER Cio OO odd Ooo ob 3.90
A List of the ANTS OF CALIFORNIA with notes on their
habits and distribution. 44 pages, 3 plates, by Arnold Mallis 50
A Check List of the HELICOID SNAILS OF CALIFORNIA,
32 pages, from Henry A. Pilsbury’s Monograph, by Wm.M.
Tnsram } 2252.55.52 6 20 hes Sc ie etn ae ee CEE 50
Contributions from the Los Angeles Museum—CHANNEL
ISLANDS BIOLOGICAL SURVEY. Papers 1 to 33. Bound 3.00
ApDpDRESS ALL INQUIRIES TO
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Care KENNETH E. STAGER)
Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7, Calif., U. S. A.
110
Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences
Vol. XLIX, 1950
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
A Remarkable New Species of
Marine Isopod, Erichsonella
crenulata, from Newport Bay,
California
agnesez, Micrarionta -...............----
agrifoliz, Neophyllobius -...........
Allergic Sensitivity to the Sa-
liva of the Western Cone-
OSE Cee a eee ne
arizonensis, Stenocharis -.---.......
GUGUWSESON1 TUGOSSUS) 2. 22--<-.-e--2-=-
burrellis, Neophyllobius -.--.....
Chelura Terebrans Philippi........
Contributions from the Los An-
geles County Museum—Chan-
nel Islands Biological Survey
crenulata, Erichsonella -...........
Donacia cordove Pierce............
Donacia draycoti Pierce............-.
Donacia lynni Pierce..............-.-...
Erichsonella crenulata, Menzies
fioridensis, Neophyllobius -_.--....
Fossil Arthropods from Onyx
IMGT OMY, as: Ee ne ee
Fossil Arthropods of British
Columbia
lamimani, Neophyllobius -__........
mexicanus, Neophyllobius --.....
Micrarionta agnesze Kanakoff..
Mites of the Genus Neophyll-
obius
(at
Natural History Observations
on Prophysaon andersoni...... 15
Neophyllobius agrifoliz
IMIG GCS O Tes hate eee 56
Neophyllobius americanus Banks 58
Neophyllobius burrellis
MIC GC's 0 eos ee ee ee 59
Neophyllobius floridensis
MC Ghee OR 226 si ee aera 61
Neophyllobius lamimani
MCG@ReC2 One eee 62
Neophyllobius mexicanus
MC Greg ores See ae, 63
Neophyllobius sierrz
MCGRC2 Oe se SA eee 64
Neophyllobius summersi
MC Gre gore a eee 67
Neophyllobius texanus
IMCGRE2 OTe ae ee ees ee eas 66
Neophyllobius virginiensis
MC Gre & Ore sea som a eee 62
Note on a Hyenarctid Bear
from the Middle Pliocene of
Chihuahua, Mexico —.............. 1
Notiophilus vancouveri Pierce 5
Onychojapyx, n. Genus_............ 104
Onychojapyx schmidti Pierce... 104
Onychothelyphonus, n. Genus_.. 102
Onychothelyphonus bonneri
PIER Ces LS er eee 103
Prophysaon andersoni (J. C.
CO OPEN) Freee ee Sen ate rc 15
ne
Salticus seymouri Pierce............ 3
San Clemente Island, Some Ob-
servations on the Land Snails
sierree, Neophyllobius -..-........... 64
Stenocharis, A New Species of 12
Stenocharis arizonensis Capps 12
summersi, Neophyllobius -....... 67
texanus, Neophyllobius -........... 66
The Allotype of Thrassis au-
SATS USO MMe el Ue ahs ee | 10
The Distribution of California
Insect Vectors Harboring Try-
panosoma cruzi Chagas.......... 98
The Ear of Salamanders............ 41
The Occurrence of Chelura tere-
brans Philippi in Los An-
geles and San Francisco Har-
LOXOW eSpace aR Daa 90
Thrassis augustsoni Hubbard... 10
Triatoma protracta (Uhler)_ 99
Trypanosoma cruzi Chagas........ 99
virginiensis, Neophyllobius.___.__.. 69
When Does a Thing Become a
New varieties, species and genera indicated in bold face type
INDEX OF AUTHORS
ATS USO, Ce 10
Barnard, J. Laurens.................... 90
CA joOS, IANO WY) ceccc eee 12
TEla wal, Ce yolee. ops eee 15
labilicom, \Waubiguan, ZN 41
Ingram, William Marcus.............. 15
ING ISISUU a te en eee ye a 105
Kanakoff, George P..................--. 79
IVC Gorge OsTg eA yee oe ia eces eeere 55
Menzies, Robert James.................- 29
Pierce, W. Dwieght............ 3, 101, 105
Sito @kes Chie Stenger eile 1
Wood, Sherwin F...................2.. 71, 98
_ REPRINTS: Contributors of articles accepted for publication in
the Bulletin should order reprints, if desired, when they return
galley proof to the Editor. They may be ordered through the
- Editor at the following rates, from the McBride Printing Co.,
415 East Eleventh Street, Los Angeles, Calif., the contributor
_ paying for all his reprints.
Sie 3 PRICE LIST OF REPRINTS
2 (WITHOUT COVERS) -
4pp. 8pp. 12pp. 1 6pp. 20pp. 24pp. 28pp. 32pp.
~ 50 copies ..... $3.75 $575 $850 $1025 $11.75 $13.50 $1600 $17.00
moo 450). 750 10.75 -1275. 1500 172-208 21.50
Meee) =) 15.25.) 9.25 --1300 —15.25<. 18:25... 21.00. 2450: 2600
Maes 600 11.00). 15:25) 17.95. * 21.50 24.75. 28.75. 3050
er es 6D 1275 19.50 20.2 -24.15.. 28.50 33:00. 35.00
OO Si Sa 750 1450 1975: 2275 2800 3225 3725 39.50
Covers: 50 for $2.00—additional covers 1c each.
California State Sales Tax to be added if delivered within the state.
yy
Distinctive
wrEINTIT ING
Books @ Catalogs @ Broadsides
Stationery and Office Forms
| @
McBRIDE PRINTING CO.
Doo NE. bos pect 2045
Fg fo EA ST EM EVE NEMHeSS he.
“Since 1879” i ols An ge esse ) be Galt:
ee ee
BULLETIN OF THE
— Southern California
Academy of Sciences
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
CONTENTS
MITCHELL’S CAVERNS, CALIFORNIA ;
F3 K. O. Emery and W. H. Easton ‘ 4 A ‘ 3 A 1
| CONTRIBUTIONS FROM LOS ANGELES COUNTY MUSEUM—CHAN-
NEL ISLANDS BIOLOGICAL SURVEY.
No. 35. Occurrence of the False Killer Whale, Pseudorea, on the
California Coast.
Kenneth E. Stager and William G. Reeder
| A NEW SPECIMEN OF ACANTHODES MARSHI.
: Joseph T. Gregory , : B 5 i 3 4 5 a en:
A NEW BRITTLE STAR OF THE GENUS ASTROPHIURA FROM
a SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
) Fred C. Ziesenhenne
W. Dwight Pierce
GEOMETRID NOTES
John L. Sperry
Issued April 20, 1951
Southern California
dyna of Sciences
OFFICERS anp DIRECTORS
Dr. William L. Lloyd a 2 if = 4 President —
Dr. Louis C, Wheeler * - = ww - First Vice President ©
Dr. Sherwin F. Wood - - - - - Second Vice President —
Mr. Kenneth BH. Stager - - = - - - - Secretary —
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce . i. - 3 ~ - = Treasurer —
Dr. John A. Comstock - - - = Bditor —
Mr. Lloyd M. Martin and Dr, Howard R. Hill - ” Ass’ ts to Secretary —
Dr. A. Weir Bell Mr. Theodore Payne 4
Dr. John A. Comstock . Dr. W. Dwight Pierce
Dr. John Herman Mr. Kenneth E. Stager
Dr. Hildegarde Howard Dr. Louis C. Wheeler
Dr. William L. Lloyd Mr. Russell S. Woglum
Dr. Sherwin F. Wood
ADVISORY BOARD |
Dr. H. J. Andrews Dr. Howard R. Hill
Dr. J. Stanley Brode Dr. Homer P. King
Mr. Fred E. Burlew Dr. Philip A. Munz
Dr. Preston Kline Caye Dr. R. H. Swift
SECTION ‘OF AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES
Mr. Russell S. Woglum, Chairman
ANTHROPOLOGICAL SECTION
Mr. Robert M. Ariss, Chairman
BOTANICAL SECTION
Miss Bonnie Templeton, Chairman
SECTION OF CHEMICAL SCIENCES
Mr. Jos. B. Ficklen III, Chairman
SECTION OF EARTH SCIENCES
Dr. John Herman, Chairman
SECTION OF HEALTH AND SANITATION
Dr. Irving Rehman, Chairman
SECTION OF JUNIOR SCIENCES
Mr. Carroll L. Lang, Chairman
SECTION OF PHYSICAL SCIENCES
Dr. Preston Cline Caye, Chairman
SECTION OF ZOOLOGICAL SCIENCHS
Dr. Raymond C. Osburn, Chairman
FINANCE COMMITTEE
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, Chairman
Mr. William Currie, Auditor Dr. John A. Garetock
Dr. John Herman
PROGRAM COMMITTEE
Dr. Louis C. Wheeler, Chairman Dr. Sherwin F. Wood
HOSPITALITY COMMITTEE
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, Chairman
COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATION
Dr. John A. Comstock, Chairman j
Dr. Hildegarde Howard Dr. Philip A. Munz Dr, A. Weir Bell
COMMITTEE ON CONSERVATION
Dr. Sherwin F. Wood, Chairman
Mr. Theodore Payne Mr. Carroll L, Lang
Prof. J. Stanley Brode Dr. John A, Comstock
OFFICE OF THE ACADEMY
Los Angeles County Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7,
Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences
mnie Meee = = = EC US Pap. 1951
MITCHELL’S CAVERNS, CALIFORNIA
By K. O. Emery and W. H. Easton
University of Southern California
INTRODUCTION
Occasional geological field trips are made to the Mojave Des-
ert of California to offer students at the University of Southern
California training in field investigations. During several of the
trips visits were made to Mitchell’s Caverns, which proved to be
so unusual that it was thought advisable to publish an account of
the caves and of their origin. In short, an explanation is needed
to account for the present position of the caves above the water-
table, whereas the evidence indicates that the caves developed be-
low the water-table.
Mitchell’s Caverns (Fig. 4 of Plate 4) are located in the Provyi-
dence Mountains of San Bernardino County, California. They lie
at an elevation of about 4400 feet on the east slope of the central
portion of the mountains ( Fig.7).West of the caves the mountains
rise to an elevation of 6970 feet at Fountain Peak, whereas the
slope to the east descends to an elevation of only 1700 feet on the
floor of the adjoining basin (which is sometimes called Clipper
Valley). A graded road across the valley connects the caves with
the nearest settlement, Essex, 22 miles distant and on U. S. High-
way 66 about 114 miles east of Barstow.
The Providence Mountains lie more or less in the central part
of the Mojave Desert. Rainfall is scant, and although official
figures are not available, the average annual precipitation in basins
of the region is about three inches. The exceedingly sparse vege-
tation includes creosote bush, yucca, barrel cactus, mormon tea,
and associated desert species. On the other hand, evergreens on
the high part of the mountains bear witness to a greater supply
of water at high elevations.
This region has been inhabited intermittently during at least
the past 500 years by a band of desert Shoshonean Indians gen-
erally called the Chemeheuvi (“‘fish-eaters”). One of their burials
has been found in the south cave; their torches, baskets, and mats
have been noted in both caves; and a drawing is visible on the
wall of the north cave. The south cave, Tecopa, is named after
the last Shoshonean chief. The north one, El Pakiva, means
“Devil’s House”’ (Plate 1).
Vol.
SCIENCES
CaLir. ACADEMY OF
BULLETIN, So.
50, Part 1, 1951
Hinos
ONINOO] SNOILD3SS-SSOY8D
VAIMVd 13
| za
SNeIAVD
S Q0SH9 LIN
os! oo!
VINYOJINVD
“ALNNOD ONIGYYNY3E NVS
SNYZAVD S.TI3SHDLIN
“SUIOARD S, [TOYO JO SMOTIA PUS PUR ‘apls ‘uURTg
T GALWId
VAINWd 13
dWs40ud
YdOD31
N
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The writers are pleased to acknowledge the assistance of nu-
merous students at the University of Southern California during
the mapping of the caves and in investigations pertinent to the
report. Chief among these students are Messrs. R. J. Burnside,
Pee Dill aVWeokeslemen, VW i. wees W. J. lewis, El. J. Reade;
and J. F. Riccio. Dr. John C. Hazzard obligingly furnished some
material from an unpublished paper of his on the Providence
Mountains. Miss Martha Berry and Mr. Gordon Hughes have
kindly provided us with some geographical and historical material.
All persons interested in the conduct of the field work are grateful
to Mr. and Mrs. J. E. Mitchell, owners and managers of Mitchell’s
Caverns, for their courtesy, cooperation, and hospitality during
visits to the caves.
SRARIGRAP ERY
The oldest rock in the Providence Mountains is probably the
| green granite which crops out east of the caves. Elsewhere in the
| mountains 7000 feet of strata representing Cambrian, Devonian,
' and Mississippian time are known. (Hazzard, 1938). Overlying
them are 3000 feet of Pennsylvanian (?) and Permian rocks
_ which comprise the oldest strata actually cropping out in the im-
_ mediate vicinity of the caves. The locally missing portions of the
_ column have been cut out by a fault which brings the green granite
_ into contact with the cavernous limestone section. Triassic sedi-
_ ments were deposited on the Permian strata but now they are ex-
posed only northwest of Fountain Peak. (Hazzard, 1937). They
are overlain and intruded by Tertiary volcanic rocks which form
the peak proper above the caves.
Mitchell’s Caverns are developed in the lower portion of a
thick sequence of marine limestones that crop out prominently on
the mountain side for several miles north and south of the caves.
Lithologic control required by classical theory of development
of limestone caves by solution is shown in the stratigraphic section
(Plate 2). The three limestones in which the caves have formed
_ are grey, massive, dense, fine-grained, and contain only small per-
centages of chert and dolomite. Exposed strata adjacent to the
_ cave-forming limestones are impure (sandy or shaly) thin-bedded
limestones. In each instance these are less soluble, but, owing to
their thin bedding, they weather more rapidly at the surface under
desert conditions than do the cave-formers. Thus, the greater
solubility of the massive strata has led to restriction of caves to
them, whereas their greater resistance to mechanical weathering
has left them more prominent in outcrops.
Paleontologic evidence of the age of the cavernous limestones
was obtained by study of collections of fossils noted by crosses
on Plate 2. The fauna includes the particularly significant fusu-
lines Triticites californicus, Schwagerina aculeata, S. providens,
3
BULLETIN, So. Carnie. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
Saal are ‘ ¢ WEST
| [J )x et pakiva cave (et eSiice)
- MINOR STRIKE FAULT*
EAST
ENTRANCE
x
IN FEET
LIMESTONE
SCALE
DOLOMITIC LIMESTONE
SHALY LIMESTONE
SANDY LIMESTONE
cbVERED
(an T )
CHERTY LIMESTONE
FOSSIL COLLECTION
PLATE 2
Partial columnar section of the limestone strata exposed at and near _
Mitchell’s Caverns. Relative resistance to weathering is indicated by
the irregularity of the right-hand side of the column. Thicknesses
may be somewhat in error due to strike-faulting.
NCY
ww
°
SOLUBLE IN DILUTE HCL
PERCENTAGE FREQUE
16 8 4 2 \ 5S .25 125 .062 .031 016 .008 .004 .002 00!
DIAMETER IN MILLIMETERS
PLATE 3
Grain-size distribution of cave dust and percentage of insoluble residue
in each grade-size.
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES * ™ Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
S. ? multispira, Schwagerina? sp., and Pseudoschwagerina roese-
leri; the brachiopod Neospirifer condor; the large gastropod
Omphalotrochus sp. and various corals upon which later publica-
tion is intended. All species identified above are restricted to the
Permian System and therefore the limestones are somewhat in
excess of 200,000,000 years old. The section at Mitchell’s Caverns
is of the same general age as are the Permian strata studied by
Thompson and Hazzard (1946, pp. 37-40) 1% miles to the north
of the caves. It is therefore assigned to the local Bird Spring
formation, which in turn, is referable to the Wolfcamp Group of
the classic Permian of Texas.
The youngest strata in the region crop out in the escarpment
of wild Horse Mesa in the northern portion of Clipper Valley
east of the mountains (Fig. 6 of Plate 4). Dr. John C. Hazzard
informs us that the sedimentary and volcanic rocks there can be
dated as Tertiary (Miocene) by the fossil flora. He also has
demonstrated the presence of rubble of the lithologic types pres-
ent in the Providence Mountains interbedded with the volcanic
rocks of Wild Horse Mesa.
SHURE MOIRA
The structural block which forms the Providence Mountains
trends north-south. This mountain is topographically similar to
scores of others which, with the intervening and surrounding
alluvium-filled basins, constitute the Basin and Range Physio-
graphic Providence. Current geological opinion leans toward
assigning most of the ranges to normal faulting, whereby the
basins have dropped along a fault line at the juncture of each
basin and adjacent range. The floors of the basins are mantled
with alluvium which usually prevents study of the underlying bed-
rock and of the faults.
The Permian limestone of Mitchell’s Caverns is in fault con-
tact with granite several hundred feet down the slope eastward
from the caves. We recognize that the demonstration of the
structural relationship of the Providence Mountains to Clipper
Valley constitutes a sizable problem in structural geology in itself
(Baker, 1913). The problem is not discussed in detail in this
paper because we are convinced that the caves developed after the
faulting and folding of the strata.
It must be mentioned, however, that three systems of faults
exist. The first and commonest are parallel to the bedding planes.
Several of these faults were observed in the region; one of them
is in the impure thin-bedded limestones separating the east and
west entrances of El Pakiva Cave. The second type of fault is
vertical and cuts east-west across the beds. The most pertinent
one passes between Tecopa and El] Pakiva caves, coinciding with
a broad reéntrant on the flank of the mountainside. About 300
feet of lateral movement has brought the massive limestones of
D
BULLETIN, So. Canir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50; Part 1; 196
° = 1
1] t
oe eee * Fe of af nf anh
‘ Fi >. i . F RK ; (1 ‘ a . i / +4
A ' Cee oe «Ce , : :
PLATE 4 |
Ficures 4-7. Fig. 4, North entrances of E] Pakiva Cave. 5, :
and recemented drip curtain in Tecopa Cave (upper center); hori-
zontal ridges and shelves (lower half.) 6, Wild Horse Mesa east: of
Clipper Valley; lower grantic slopes of Providence Mountains in fore-
ground. 7, Providence Mountains viewed westward across Clipper
Valley: arrow indicates Mitchell’s Caverns.
a
6
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vols 50) Parte eS oil
the two main caves into alignment. Faults of the third system
are horizontal. One is exposed in the bank of the ravine below
the entrances of El Pakiva Cave, where the upper strata have
been thrust .about 300 feet eastward over the lower strata.
Various local systems of fractures and joints were observed at
the caves. Most are oblique to the fault planes.
It is difficult to determine exactly the date of the mountain-
building. The youngest sedimentary rocks certainly involved in
the uplift of the mountain are of Triassic age. These are suc-
ceeded by Tertiary (?) rhyolite which makes up the dissected vol-
canic plug, Fountain Peak. The age of this extinct volcano could
not be determined other than as post-Triassic. It may have been
active during the mountain-building. The next younger datable
strata above the Triassic are of Miocene age. These, of which
Wild Horse Mesa is formed, extend to within a few hundred
yards of the north end of the Providence Mountains, but their
structural relationship to the mountain is obscured by an inter-
vening valley.
In summary, the Providence Mountains were faulted and
folded most severely after Triassic and before Miocene times.
Minor faulting and slight warping took place after the Miocene.
CAVDS
SHAPE
Only two caves are easily accessible, but they are the largest
ones in the immediate area (Plate 1). These two main caves are
on about the same level, but a secondary chamber that is entered
through a small well and passage at the south end of El Pakiva
Cave is about 50 feet lower. El Pakiva Cave has two entrances
(Fig. 4 of Plate 4) in different strata separated by a pillar-like
mass consisting of 12 feet of impure limestone containing a minor
bedding-plane fault. The main chambers of both caves are elon-
gate and parallel with the strike of the limestone, and the sloping
sides of each cave reflect the dip of the rocks. The roof of each,
though irregular, is fairly horizontal, in contrast to the concave
floor. One or more series of small anastamosing passages in each
cave are more or less circular in cross-section with sinuous traces
in both horizontal and vertical aspects. Most outstanding of these
is one (Fig. 11 of Plate 5) within the west wall of El:Pakiva
Cave, which spirals and divides in a manner suggestive of the
canals of the human ear.
Several other caves are located within a half-mile, both north
_and south of the main cave. These are smaller, either originally
or because of natural filling. All are within the same general
stratigraphic horizon and are at the same general elevation above
sea level; therefore, they originally may have been intercon-
| nected.
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
PLATE 5
Ficures 8-11. 8, Undercut stalagmite in south end of El Pakiva Cave.
9, Stalactites along fractures in roof of El Pakiva Cave. 10, Rubble
near mouth of El Pakiva Cave. 11, Phreatic tube (diameter 2 feet)
in west wall of El Pakiva Cave.
8
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . Vol. 50; Part 1) 1951
FILL
After the period of active cave formation, filling commenced.
This took three forms: collapse breccia, dripstone, and cave
dust—listed in order of probable decreasing volume. Blocks whose
longest dimensions exceed 10 feet lie scattered about the floor,
especially near the entrances of the caves (Fig. 10 of Plate 5). In
fact, the sloping ends of the concave floors may well be the result
of the accumulation of collapse breccia from rock falls mixed
with material washed into the caves from the hillsides.
The second component of cave filling is dripstone, which
occurs as stalactites, stalagmites, columns, drip curtains, rimmed
brackets, and veneer. Dripstone is most abundant by far at the
south end of El Pakiva Cave (Fig. 9) and at the north end of
Tecopa Cave. This localization of dripstone coincides with the
small transverse (east-west) fault zone, where a higher permea-
bility to ground water is to be expected. Both the long narrow
passage and the chamber at the north end of Tecopa Cave are
almost completely lined by dripstone. In fact, that chamber was
reached by Mr. Mitchell only after blasting through several feet
of dripstone. A smaller chamber can be seen through a hole in
the drip curtain high on the back wall of El Pakiva Cave. It
seems probable, therefore, that Tecopa and El Pakiva Caves
were once continuous but that the accumulation of dripstone along
the transverse fault zone has separated them. A thin veneer of
dripstone covers most of the sloping west walls of the caves, and
smali stalagmites have grown up from that surface. Some of the
fallen blocks are partly covered by dripstone, whereas others are
barren, indicating that some blocks fell before or during, and
some fell after the time of active formation of dripstone (Fig.
10). Only two stalactites were observed to have any film or drip
of water, so it seems likely that negligible growth occurs now.
Virtually all of the dripstone is vertical; thus, structural tilt has
not occurred after deposition of the dripstone. Some of the drip-
stone has been broken, however (Fig. 5 of Plate 4), during the
late history of the caves, especially at the north end of Tecopa
Cave, where a large compound stalactite was broken off and re-
cemented by dripstone. Selective stains applied in the laboratory
showed that the dripstone consists of calcite with no aragonite or
dolomite.
A thin layer of cave dust covered the walls of the large caves
_ when they were opened, and a similar layer is still present in the
lower secondary chamber. Cave dust also forms the flat central
| part of the floor of both Tecopa and El Pakiva Caves (Figs. 8,
10 of Plate 5). An excavation in the middle of Tecopa Cave
passed through more than 30 feet of cave dust, according to Mr.
Mitchell. Samples of cave dust collected from the floor consist
of buff-colored debris of pebble, sand, silt, and clay size, together
9
BULLETIN, So. Catir,. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
with a generally small amount of organic material consisting of
seeds, nuts, stems, leaves, and rat excrement. A grain-size analy-
Sis of a composite sample collected from four localities, two in
each of the main caves, is presented in Plate 3. The percentage
of material in each size grade that was insoluble in dilute hydro-
chloric acid is also given. It is evident from the graph that the
finer components contain somewhat higher percentages of in-
soluble material, leading to the conclusion that they are natural
insoluble residue left by the acid reaction of percolating ground—
water. The larger fragments consist of insoluble siliceous remains |
of fossils and of small bits of limestone which have fallen or have |
been washed from the roof and walls.
Overall analysis of the cave dust showed that insoluble residue
averages 57 per cent by weight. Similar analyses showed that the
limestone averages 11 per cent insoluble residue, whereas the drip-
stone averages only 0.8 per cent. Concentric zonation of the drip-
stone evidently owes its origin to variations in amount of insoluble
dust trapped by the accumulating layers of calcium carbonate.
Probably most of this dust is deposited during relatively dry pe-
riods when all of the water evaporates on the dripstone, leaving
its entire load of calcium carbonate and dust. During wet periods
the flow is probably sufficient to flush most of the dust past the
dripstone to the cave floor. The water which reaches the floor can
percolate through the cave dust after depositing its load of dust
at the top surface, but it should be able to carry away most of its
load of dissolved material. This process accounts for the higher
percentage of insoluble residue in the cave dust as compared with
that in the dripstone and limestone. If one accepts the foregoing
analyses, namely that the average insoluble residue in the lime-
stone is 11 per cent and that in the cave dust, 57 per cent, one
finds that the weathering of one foot of limestone would produce
0.2 foot of cave dust. If the cave dust came only from the open
space from which limestone has been dissolved, and if this space
averages 30 feet in height plus the thickness of cave dust, then
the average thickness of cave dust produced would be 7.2 feet.
However, at present, the flat floor of cave dust comprises only
about one-fourth of the area of the cave, the rest being collapse
breccia and dripstone. If all cave dust be assumed to be concen-
trated in that area alone, the total thickness would be more than
30 feet, a conclusion which is not incompatible with the results of
the excavation in Tecopa Cave. In reality, some debris must have.
been washed into the caves, while much material was probably
carried out by escaping water, both during cave (one and at
present. In fact, the flat base of a large mass of stalagmitic drip-
stone attached to the wall in the back of El Pakiva Cave is two
feet above the floor of cave dust, proving that some cave dust has
been removed after the deposition of dripstone (Fig. 8 of
Plates5)):
10
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES , Vol. 50; Part 1) 1951
ORIGIN
Data From CAVES
The characteristics of the caves and of their environment per-
mit reasonably accurate reconstruction of their history of de-
velopment. The alignment of these caves and of others in the
vicinity in the same general beds and at the same general level
suggests that all are remnants of an early single long cave formed
in the thickest and most soluble limestone beds. Small passages
with circular cross-sections, branching pattern, and local steep
axes indicate a phreatic origin (Bretz, 1942 )—that is, that solu-
tion occurred below the water table (Fig. 11 of Plate 5). Exten-
sive rock falls and partial masking by dripstone and cave dust in
the larger chambers of each cave have generally removed or ob-
scured critial features there. After the period of cave develop-
ment, enlargement stopped abruptly as indicated by the absence of
caves at much lower levels on the mountain slope, and by the
presence of only minor evidence of vadose (that is, above-water-
table) erosion of these caves (Fig. 5 of Plate 4). The evidence
of vadose action consists of slight notching of flumes, local flatten-
ing of passage roofs, and the development of a few small hori-
zontal shelves in the walls of passages. All these features are
poorly developed.
Filling of the caves may have begun concurrently with their
excavation because the cave dust consists mostly of insoluble ma-
terial originally in the limestone. When released by solution, this
material could have been deposited on the floor of the cave and
not have been eroded by the sluggish phreatic currents. Its dep-
osition continued after the phreatic regimen and even today cave
dust is washed down the walls and the dripstone to the floor. Dur-
ing this later stage both dripstone and collapse breccia contributed
to the cave filling. Included in the debris of two completely filled
caves in the vicinity are pieces of rhyolite.
REGIONAL DATA
A striking paradox exists because the caves appear to have
been formed below the water table and yet they are now perched
high on the flanks of the mountain well above the water table
(Fig. 7 of Plate 4). Any explanation of the origin of the caves
‘must involve a method of having them once below the water
table. Only two possibilities can be entertained.
1. The caves developed before the mountain came into ex-
istence.
2. The caves developed after the mountain came into existence.
Two difficulties confront the first case. The caves lie in a
1
BULLETIN, So. Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
region of minor strike faulting and are quite close to a major
fault. It seems very unlikely that they could have survived the
application of forces necessary to deform the strata during moun-
tain building. The mechanics of the deformation require a rota-
tional motion of the block, yet there is no evidence that the caves
have been tilted, and certainly not tilted subsequent to the forma-
tion of dripstone,
We are left with the second case to consider. If the mountain
existed before the caves were formed, then some material must
have been heaped up against the side of the mountain to a level
at least as high as the upper reaches of the caves in order to pro-
vide a medium in which the water table could rise high enough
to encompass the strata in which the caves were developed. The |
only traces of basin fill higher than the present floor of Clipper
Valley are a few low mounds several miles east of the caves.
These erosional outliers of Wild Horse Mesa indicate that the
mesa was formerly much more extensive than it is now. Its for-
mer surface altitude east of and near the mountain can be approx-
imated in two ways. “If one extrapolates the surface level of the
present flat-lying southern margin of the mesa, it will be found to
lie a few hundred feet above the cave mouths. One can sight
along a level from the caves to the mesa and establish this rela-
tionship, Secondly, the slope of the mountain just above the caves —
is interrupted by a wide, much-eroded bench which forms an
irregular shoulder extending sporadically along the eastern front
of the mountain. This is believed to mark the former baselevel
of erosion of the mountain at the level of the mesa. Erosion then
and subsequently has reduced the thickness of the east wall of
Tecopa Cave to only five feet. That of El Pakiva Cave is fifteen
to thirty feet thick. The outside of both walls constitutes a steep,
barren, rocky, dip slope.
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
During the Permian (late Paleozoic Era) the ocean invaded
the region and a thick deposit of limestones was formed. After
various other advances and retreats of the seas, the region was |
subjected to a period of mountain-making sometime in the late
Mesozoic Era or possibly in the early Cenozoic Era. At this time
large-scale faulting and folding took place. Movement along one
of these faults (or zone of faults) either caused at least some of
the deeply buried (Pre-Paleozoic) granite to ride upward into
contact with the later Paleozoic limestone, or the main mass of
the Providence Mountains was thrust over the granite.
After the uplift of the mountains began, Tertiary terrestrial
sediments, including material eroded from the mountains, began
to accumulate in the basin, ending with a series of volcanic rocks.
It is supposed that the basin fill extended several hundred feet
12
BULEETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ie Viole 5 Os Pantaleo ri
above the level of the present caves. Ground water saturated the
rocks of this ancestral Wild Horse Mesa and also the neighboring
Permian rocks to a level at least as far up as the caves. Solution
of the limestone then began, with the development of sinuous
passages and other features characteristic of phreatic caves. Dur-
ing the early wide extent of the mesa the upper portion of the east
flank of the mountain was eroded westward, whereas the buried
portion was not eroded, being shielded by the strata of the mesa.
In time, erosion of the formerly extensive mesa progressed
to such an extent that the drainage system had cut back into the
mesa and allowed the ground water level to fall. With the fall of
the water table minor evidence of vadose circulation was devel-
oped in the caves.
The second cycle of cave history then began, in which drip-
stone and other filling accumulated. While this was going on, the
ravines or gullies which started earlier to develop their channels
high on the mountain above the caves, coursed over the exhumed
lower flanks of the mountain and cut deep V-shaped gorges which
now end rather abruptly at the margin of the basin. These gorges
have been cut across the earlier extensive cave, separating it into
discontinuous sections. Completely filled sections of the ancient
cave are visible on the north side of the gully across from the
mouth of E] Pakiva Cave, where they occupy the same strata as
do Mitchell’s Caverns. Elsewhere along the front, fragments or
blocks of dripstone lie in the rubble of various dry water courses,
testifying to the presence of other sections of the cave along the
mountain front. Since the partial removal of the mesa, the super-
ficial rocks have been eroded from the mountain flank, leaving
the caves very near the surface of the ground. We observed no
indication that the caves are evolving now, probably because of
the aridity of the country.
REFERENCES
Baker, C. L., 1913, The nature of the later deformation in certain ranges
of the Great Basin: Jour. Geology, vol. 21, pp. 273-278.
Bretz, J. H., 1942, Vadose and phreatic features of limestone caverns;
Jour. Geology, vol. 50, pp. 675-811.
Hazzard, J. C., 1937, Lower Triassic Rocks in San Bernardino County,
Calif. (abstract): Geol. Soc. America Proc. for 1936, p. 329.
| Hazzard, J. C., 1938, Paleozoic section in the Providence Mountains, San
| Bernardino County, California (abstract): Geol. Soc. America Proc.
for 1937, pp. 240-241.
Thompson, M. L., and Hazzard, J. C., 1946, Permian fusulinids of Cali-
fornia, Pt. III, Permian fusulinids of Southern California: Geol. Soc
America Mem. 17, pp. 37-58.
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part di, 1951
CONTRIBUTIONS FROM LOS ANGELES COUNTY
MUSEUM—CHANNEL ISLANDS BIOLOGICAL
SURVEY
No. 35. OCCURRENCE OF THE FALSE KILLER WHALE
PSHUDORCA, ON THE CALIFORNIA COAST
By KENNETH E. STAGER and WILLIAM G. REEDER
Los Angeles County Museum, Los Angeles, California
Although the false killer whale, Pseudorca crassidens (Owen)
has at times come ashore in rather large numbers at scattered
localities throughout the world, records of its occurrence along
the west coast of North and South America are few. The most
northerly record on this coast is a skull (Wash. State Mus. No.
12515), obtained from a fresh carcass in Puget Sound, Washing-
ton, on May 15, 1937_( Scheffer, 1948). The specimen previously
establishing Pscudorca as a resident of west coast waters was a
weathered skull and incomplete skeleton taken by the U. S. Fish
Commission steamer Albatross at Pichilinque Bay, near La Paz,
Lower California, on April 29, 1888 (U.S.N.M. No. 23282).
Garrood (1924), records the number of specimens in museums
as being under thirty. Therefore, in view of the rarity of its
occurrence, it 1s with considerable interest that we are able to
record a definite record of the species from the coast of southern
California. On July 10, 1949, while the writers were engaged in
field activities on San Nicolas Island, Mr. Stute, a sailor from
the naval base, called our attention to a small cetacean skull he
had discovered on the south side of the island while on a fishing
excursion to that area. Seeing our interest in the specimen, Mr.
Stute presented us with the skull, which, although evidencing
considerable weathering, was in excellent shape except for the
absence of the teeth and lower mandibles.
The skull was identified as that of Pseudorca crassidens. Sub-
sequent search through some heretofore unworked material col-
lected for the Los Angeles County Museum by Mr. Jack C. von
Bloeker Jr., on San Nicolas Island during the winter of 1940,
revealed two additional skulls belonging to this species. In an |
effort to turn up still further cetacean records for San Nicolas |
Island, Mr. Reeder returned to the island on July 23, 1949. A
systematic search along the rugged beaches and rocky exposures
of the south side of the island resulted in the collection of a fourth
skull and a number of ribs and vertebre.
In order to clarify the picture of the presence of this inter-
esting cetacean on San Nicolas Island, a brief description of the
topography of the island and the location of the collection sta-
14
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
>
4
Ps otis ©
PLATE 6
Dorsal view of skull of Pseudorca crassidens, L.A.M. 8459.
15
BULLETIN, So. Carir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
PLATE 7
Lateral view of skull of Pseudorca crassidens, L.A.M. 8459.
tions seems warranted. San Nicolas Island constitutes the outer-
most of the eight channel islands lying off the southern California
coast, and is approximately 76 miles southwest of Los Angeles
Harbor. Somewhat oval in shape, San Nicolas is 9% miles in
length and 3% miles in width, with its long axis lying in an al-
most east-west direction. The eastern tip of the island is char-
acterized by a long sand spit which extends seaward for a con-
siderable distance. All stations of occurrence of the skeletal
material of Pseudorca were along the south side of the island
and involve a length of coastline approximately 31% miles long.
The south coast of the island consists of a rapidly ascending,
highly dissected slope, which rises within a rather short distance
PLATE 8
Lateral view of skull and fused vertebre of Pseudorca crassidens,
L.A.M. 1860.
16
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 195: “
PLATE 9
Ventral view of fused group of first six cervical vertebra
of Pseudorca crassidens, L.A.M. 8458.
to the main axial ridge and sloping mesa. Three of the skulls
were found on this slope, from 75 to 300 yards from high tide
line, and at an elevation of 10 to 30 feet above the normal high
tide level. The fourth skull was found in the vicinity of an Indian
shell mound located at an inlet known as “Dutch Harbor.” The
mound itself was but 100 feet from the normal high tide line.
The skull and partial skeleton (L.A.M. 8458), collected 3 miles
west of the sandspit, were found in close proximity to a partial
skull and skeleton of the California gray whale, Rhachianectes
glaucus. Whether the two species were beached at the same time
is, of course, unknown. An unusually heavy storm could account
for their deposition above the normal high tide mark.
A characteristic of the genus Pseudorca is the fusion of the
first six or seven cervical vertebrae. An examination of the ma-
terial at hand shows this condition to exist in the three specimens
which include the cervical vertebree. In two (L.A.M. 8458 and
8459), the first six cervical vertebra are fused, while the seventh
is unattached (Plate 9). The third specimen (L.A.M. 8460),
shows anomalous development of these parts (Plates 8 and 10).
In this specimen, the entire cervical series 1s joined ; anteriorly,
also, the atlas is ankylosed rigidly to the occipital condyles by a
necrotic osteous growth, w hich has nearly obliterated the usual
joint region. Both dorsally and ventrally, however, the line of
fusion is evident as a more or less definite crack, which pene-
17
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
PLATE 10
Ventral view of occipital region of skull of Pseudorca crassidens,
L.A.M. 8460, with first eight vertebral elements fused thereto.
trates not over one-half inch into the normal joint area. Poste-
riorly, the seventh cervical vertebrze is fused on its ventral sur-
face to the first thoracic vertabra by a continuation of the
exostotic growth illustrated in Plate 10. An examination of the
ventral surface of the fused vertebral elements shows the de-
velopment of an extensive osteoma which has affected the greater
part of this region, and resulting in an ankylosed condition in
which the first eight vertebral elements are fused to, and form
an extension of, the cranium. The osteoma is formed of an ex-
ceptionally porous type of bone tissue. The variance of the anom-
alous fused vertebral series from the normal may be seen by com-
paring Plates 9 and 10. The extent of necrotic growth is easily
observed.
Undoubtedly, the movement of the animal, especially during
rapid swimming, was hampered to a great extent by this path-
ologic condition. Also, and of probably greater importance, 1s
the increased difficulty of feeding, as rapid movements of the
head would have been impossible. The fact that the animal is
18
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
adult, however, shows that the handicap did not make existence
impossible.
Reference to Table | indicates that the cranial measurements
of the four specimens here reported are very similar to those
piven by Miller (1920). Two of our specimens (L.A.M. 8459
and 8460), are larger by small increments than any of the six
skulls reported by Miller. However, the disparity is slight, and
may be due, in part, to differences in technique of measurement.
LITERATURE CITED
Brimley, H. H. The false killer whale on the North Carolina coast.
1937. Jour. Mammal., Vol. 18, No. 1, pp. 71-78.
Elliot, D. G. A synopsis of the mammals of North America and the
1901. adjacent seas. Publ. Field Museum, Zool. Series, Vol. 2, pp. 22-23.
Garrood, J. R. Two skeletons of the cetacean Pseudorca crassidens from
1924. Thorney Fen. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1924, pp. 177-193.
Miller, G. ‘S. American records of whales of the genus Psewdorca. Proc.
1920. U. S. National Museum, Vol. 57, pp. 205-207.
Moody, R. L. Paleopathology: An introduction to the study of ancient
1923. evidences of disease. Univ. of Illinois Press, Urbana, Illinois,
p. 1-557, 117 pls., 49 figs.
Scheffer, V. B. and Slipp, J. W. The whales and dolphins of Washington
1948. state with a key to the cetaceans of the west coast of North
America. Am. Mid. Nat., Vol. 39, pp. 287-289.
True, F. W. A review of the family Delphinide. Bull. U. S. National
1889. Museum, No. 36, pp. 143, 186.
19
SCIENCES
Ol
CaLir. ACADEMY
BULLETIN, So.
Borne serene eben ele nies es io to Esteeie ele Reis oes Seicianigy ele Sesser ers Sse soso ess. s8 STE kGdUIAS FO UITUST]
eee ess on ocOoiqsnold ie qipaumn so Gusied MITRE
DEG erect ete tees eters e eee e settee ee Geen eset sees ee eseeeeseesess sss -QIGTPUEUL JO UISUO] UNMIXED,
Pig ess eee See BE eels ge ele eir eeisie sis -efucs ent eee y “orqTpURUL JO DUDS Oy) MOL TIO) TeMO] JO" PUS LojaSIsOK
yoy [dasiso dba ane odes 3.3895 0509 tod do0 No dnmods eboRe Nooo an doaemasonab ogee aos eocsoc Soo nermoNcGy\o Mowe ueG
PABST ASSIS 0 FF GI SHG ISS OO VAIO SII GG ORG 90 FIFI BDO DOF OSA DSO OUI ION OG OOS SN, Teta GVA] YC WSN KN) CLUTDTUNUT | KENONT,
es)
tee oo 6SZ 19¢ 622 «OFT Cw ot ttt ALeTTxetueid JO pus 0} MOI YOO} Jeddn JO pus 1OT183S0g
SEZ CPHz Ae SHC raid Ward OZ J6L 9:9),0)9.0°0) 070. 0'9. 00°99: 21020,.0°09010 5.0) F1'0,0.0 5.010) ODDO AYO 400}. loddn Jo qyysuery
6 8 g 6 8 8 8 d Presse esse sr reer e sees MOT YIO0] Addn UL Y}901 JO LaqUINU [BIO
= | “Y “4 U "TY ‘U eal UY
IF Tal OTT OZL popes sees ee eee eee eee eee es sSSurluado [BSVU 0} JOLeyUv Jsne
‘SOLLB[[IXBVUOId JO SUISIRUL BPISINO UdIMJoq BURISTP WNUWIXeW
192 CLS Ghe $GZ PG OD DUS SSO TOD OOS DSO GOD SOOO Uy AMO ONGNE sIeuNCACa| 160) WOU
eee gee : roe Deeb e eee eee eee e eee ees eee tees ess: uapRaq OFRUIOSAT,
OFZ 91% Dees Z1zS “****sassev0id [BIIGIOBVIdNS JO S8LsuR [BIIGLOJSOd SSOIOR YIPRIIG
[bG G16 poi 006 “ors + s9sse00Id [R}TqGloRldns JO sopsue [RIUIqtoatd ssotoe YpPRII_
661 L6L CLI 98T verses SQTyoOU [VJIGIOJUL OF LOTIIIUV “TUL (9 TUNASOL JO TIPIA
FOZ BOG [ISL SOL spree ees esses ss (SOUOIOU [VIIGIOJUB) ISR 7B WNAISOL JO YIPIM
"UU «ST e 0ze [RZ ERZ COR OO: BDFD TUS: UAC Op CFEC DOs SPECLOOTOTG GNI GNSLONN jo yIsuel] WNUWIXe Jl
OG
eg ULL 896 UU (8G Petree sees esses esse ess Tiny 10 YISUSL [VSRQOTAPUOD WUNWITXR IL
mfo “MUU 8
BILLOJI[VO ‘AUNOD Bain UIA ‘puRIs] SB[ODIN ues EE EO 0: OC ROE CD OS O0 50020 ONO 0D: CSO O00 0-000 OOO 20-00, OO OOM AEA YON |
O9FS 6CFS SGES LGFS presses sees eer esses ss sss TOGTUINN UUnesnp, 4JUNOD selasuYy SsO'T
(NHMO) SNHYdCISSP YD PITOCQASd AO SLNAWHYNSVAW IVINVYO—T WIaAVi
20
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . Wok, KX), Jeeher al, asl
A NEW SPECIMEN OF ACANTHODES MARSHI
By JosepH T. GREGORY
Peabody Museum, Yale University, New Haven, Connecticut
A collection of fossils from the Coal Measures of Mazon
Creek, Illinois, recently acquired by the Los Angeles County Mu-
seum, includes a nodule containing the scales of an acanthodian
fish or “spiny shark,” 4Acanthodes marshi Eastman. This species
has previously been known only from the type specimen and a
few fragments. The specimen in the Los Angeles County Mu-
seum (No. 1353) agrees with the type in the large size of the
strongly convex, rhomboidal scales. A patch of scales about 6 by
10 cm. is preserved. Associated with these is a fin spine 47 mm.
long and a portion of another elongate, flat bone, 63 mm. long,
possibly a larger spine. {
Ikastman (1902, pp. 93-94) described two species of acantho-
d:ans from Mazon Creek. A. marshi is based upon scales of a
large individual (Yale Peabody Museum No. 2803); several fin
spines 7 to 9 cm. in length and cne smaller specimen (Y. P. M.
No. 2805) which shows the impression of the fin membrane be-
hind a spine 2!4 cm. long were referred to the species. A. beechert
was founded on impressions of two small fishes, of which the
larger (Y. P. M. No. 630) may be designated lectotype; these
are about 5 cm. long, scaleless except along the lateral! lines, and
characterized by long pelvic and short pectoral fin spines. Watson
(1937, pp. 111-112) has shown that during the growth of acantho-
dians ossification of the scales commences along the lateral lines
and spreads from them over the rest of the body. The scaleless
Ancanthodes beecheri specimens therefore are immature, and it is
possible that they represent the young of 4. marsh. Specimens
of intermediate size (Y. P. M. No. 2805, Eastman’s 1902 pl. 5,
fig. 3) support this interpretation. The fragmentary condition of
the A. marshi specimens does not permit determination of the
relative lengths of its pectoral and pelvic fin spines.
Of recent years there has been a tendency for American ver-
tebrate paleontologists to accept the opinion of O. P. Hay (1902,
p. 273) that Acanthodes Agassiz 1833 vol. 2, p. 3) 1s a synonym
of Acanthocssi‘s Agassiz 1832 (p. 149). The latter name was
published without description, illustration, or indication of any
sort, and must be regarded as a nomen nudum (cf. Neave, vol. 1,
p. 15). Acanthodes was not preoccupied when described by
Agassiz in July, 1833 (Jeannet, 1928, p. 102), so there is no rea-
son to validate the earlier name on the basis of the 1833 reference
and description. Acanthodes de Haan, a subgenus of Cancer
21
BULLETIN, So. CALIF, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
PLATE 11
Scales and fin spines of Acanthodes marshi Hastman. Los Angeles
County Museum specimen no. 1353, from Mazon Creek, Illinois.
Approximately natural size.
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 195
1
PLATE 12
Enlargement to show rhomboidal scales in portion of specimen
illustrated in Plate 11. Approximateiy X 5.
(Crustacea) was also described in 1833, but cannot be given pri-
ority over Acanthodes Agassiz as the month of publication is un-
known. At the 13th International Zoological Congress in Paris,
1948, it was agreed (Bull. Zool. Nomen! vol. 4, 224, i, 1950)
that works which contain a statement of the year bn not the
month and day of publication shall be deemed to have been pub-
lished on the last day of the last month of that year. Acanthodes,
therefore, is the valid name for the genus of placoderm fishes, its
type being A. bronni Agassiz 1833.
ID ies Hildegarde Howard, who kindly brought this specimen to
my notice, pointed out the resemblance of ‘these scales to the
Linton, Ohio, fossil Cercariomorphus parvisquamis Cope. Moodie
(1916, p. 138) notes that the largest scales of that specimen are
1 mm. in diameter, about the size of those of Acanthodes marshi.
BULLETIN, So. CALtv. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
Comparison of Moodie’s Plate 24, fig. 2 with Eastman’s illustra-
tion (1902, pl. 7, fig. 2) of A. marshi reveals the strong resem-
blance of this problematical form to acanthodian scales of which
it may consist instead of calcified cartilage, as Romer (1930, p.
137) suggested.
I am indebted to Dr. John C. Armstrong of the American Mu-
seum of Natural History for advice on the nomenclatorial
problem,
REFERENCES
Agassiz, Louis, 1832. Untersuchungea liber die fossilen Fische der Lias-
Formation. Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geognosie. Geologie, und
Petrefaktenkunde, 3, 139-149.
Agassiz, Louis, 1833. Recherches sur les Poissons fossiles, 2, Pl. 2.
Neuchatel.
de Haan, W. 1833. Fauna Japonica, auctore Ph. Fr. de Siebold. vol. I,
Crustacea.
Eastman, C. R. 1902. Some Carboniferous cestraciont and acanthodian
sharks. Harvard College, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Bull. 39,
55-99.
Hay, O. P. 1902. Catalogue and Bibliography of the fossil vertebrata of
North America. U. S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 179.
Jeannet, Alph, 1928. Les Poissons Fossiles Originaux Conservés a 1’Insti-
tute de Géologie de l'Université de Neuchatel. Bull. Société Neuch-
ateloise des Sciences Naturelles. N.S. v. 1 (=v. 52). (1927), 102-124.
Moodie, R. L., 1916. The Coal Measures Amphibia of North America.
Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 238, 222 pp.
Neave, S. A. 1939. Nomenclator Zoologicus, 1. [Zool. Soc. London. ]
Romer, A. S. 1930. The Pennsylvania Tetrapods of Linton, Ohio. Amer-
ican Museum of Natural History, Bull, 59, 77-147.
Watson, D. M. S. 1937. The Acanthodian Fishes. Philos. Trans. Royal
Society of London, B228, 49-146.
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES WO, GW, leene, I, alps
A NEW BRITTLE STAR OF THE GENUS ASTROPHIURA
FROM SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA*
By Frep C. ZIESENHENNE
Allan Haneoeck Foundation
University of Southern California
The first Astrophiura from Southern California was dredged
in 1940 and additional specimens were dredged in 1941. These
specimens were small and with limited available literature; they
were presumed to be the young of Astrophiura permia, Sladen
(Ziesenhenne, 1941, p. 117). In 1949 some larger additional
specimens were dredged with distinctive characteristics, upon
which the basis for a new species could be described. A number
of specimens were sent to Dr. Th. Mortensen, of Copenhagen,
Denmark, who recommended the description of a new species.
OPpHIOLEPIDIDe Ljungman 1867
ASTROPHIURA Sladen 1878
ASTROPHIURA MARION new species
Plate 13
Description —Disk-body diameter, 5.8 mm.; diameter of disk,
through distal edges of radial shields, 3.2 mm.; height of disk-
body, 1.5 mm.; length of free arm beyond the margin of disk-
body, 4 mm. The disk-body is pentagonal, convex upper surface
and concave under surface, interbranchial margins almost straight.
The upper arm segments are slightly elevated to form a noticeable
ridge, radially, extending to the margin of the disk-body. Between
the arm ridges the disk-body is slightly concave proximally, be-
coming straight distally at the interradial margins. The upper
surface of the disk consists of 36 large, smooth, plates; including
the radial shields. The upper side arm plates are fused, umbrella-
like, to form the distal portion of the disk-body beyond the radial
shields. The central plate is large, pentagonal, the margins are in
contact interradially with five, smaller, rectangular basal plates,
which are slightly broader than long. Distal to the basal plates is
a second series of five, rectangular interradial plates of equal or
slightly larger size. In one interradius this plate appears to be
fused with a distal plate. The third series of five interradial plates
are larger, rectangular, decidedly longer than wide; the lateral
*Contribution No. 54 of the Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern
California, Los Angeles, California.
bo
oO
rig. 1
yaaa y
oe
A ia
» Be
5 ae He
‘ ay
\, y P
} BS / Ta tte... gs
a//\\\
o,
oe
ot
NY
AAVDERUR DIE
ye
%
“Sa
4
Fig. 2
PLATE 13
Undersurface Astrophiura marione n. sp.
Uppersurface Astrophiura marione nN. sp.
Scale shown in millimeters.
26
BULLETIN, £0. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES : Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
margins are in contact with the interradial proximal margins of
the radial shields. The fourth interradial series of five plates con-
sist of exceedingly large, spear-shaped, irregularly pentagonal
plates, equal to the radial shields in size. The three proximal
margins are about one half the length of the distal lateral-margins.
The proximal margin is in contact with the distal margin of the
third series of interradials; proximal lateral margins are in con-
tact with the radial shields. The distal lateral concave margins
are in contact with the interradial margins of the long, narrow,
curved, modified side arm plates of the first proximal arm seg-
ment. Radially, and with the proximal angles barely in contact
with the central plate are the five large radial plates. The radial
plates are larger than the central plate, roughly diamond-shape,
longer than wide, proximal margins longer than the distal mar-
gins, distal margins in contact with the radial shields. All disk
plates are flat and smooth, lacking knobs or any other type of
ornamentation.
The radial shields are large, exceeded in size by the fourth,
distal-most interradial spear-shaped plate; roughly hexagonal,
longer than broad. Proximal angle is not quite a right angle;
proximal apex of each pair of shields is separated by distal mar-
gins of the radial plate. The proximal margin is the longest, in
contact with the radial and third interradial plate, distal and
distal-lateral margins short. Abradial-lateral margin is in contact
with fourth series interradial plate. Distal radial-lateral margin
is in contact with first modified side arm plate and the distal mar-
gin is in contact with this second upper arm plate. Inner margins
of the radial shields are in contact with each other for about two-
fifths of their length. The distal portion of the radial shields cover
the first upper arm plate. Beyond the disk proper, the remainder
of the disk-body is composed of upper arm plates and modified
side arm plates of the first six proximal arm segments. The side
arm plates extend interradially and the outer margin of the first
side arm plate from one radial contacts the outer margin of the
side arm plate from an adjoining radial. Side arm plates two to
six fuse in a like manner and the side arm plates become shorter
in size gradually to the sixth, which is the shortest. The distal
margin of each plate bears three, sometimes four, flat, papille,
length about three times the diameter, fused laterally, to form a
picket fence, their distal ends form the interradial margins of the
disk-body. There are thirty to thirty-eight spinelets in each in-
terradius.
The second upper arm plate is the proximal upper arm plate
visible beyond the radial shield. It is the largest of the upper
arm plates, triangular in shape, broader than long, with an obtuse
proximal angle. The third, fourth, and fifth upper arm plates are
rectangular in shape. The third and fourth are broader than long
27
BULLETIN, So. Caniv, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
and the fifth is almost square, slightly broader than long. The
sixth upper arm plate is small, diz imond-shi ape, with acute distal
and proximal angles, barely longer than wide. The sixth and
seventh upper arm plates are separated by the side arm plates.
The seventh upper arm plate is very small, triangular, and the last
upper arm plate in the series.
The first side arm plate is curved, about five times as long as
wide, outer proximal margin in contact with the large, spear-
shaped, fourth series of interradial plates; outer distal margin in
contact with corresponding side arm plate from adjoining arm for
half the length of the margin. Second to sixth side arm plates are
in complete contact with lateral margins of adjoining side arm
plates. The side arm plates gradually become shorter to the sixth
arm plate, which is only slightly longer than wide. A series of lon-
gitudinal ridges, parallel to lateral margins, is found on each side
arm plate. The number of ridges conform with the number of
spinelets on the distal margin of each plate. The free arms beyond
the disk-body are delicate, slender, cadet tapering distally,
consisting of ten abortive arm segments. The distal segment is
reduced to a terminal spine, about ‘three times the size of the arm
spines. Both upper and under arm plates, tentacle pores, tentacle
scales, and tube feet are lacking on the free arm segments. The
first and second free arm segments are short, not quite twice as
wide as long. Succeeding side arm plates become narrow and
longer distally, length more than twice the width, trumpet-shape,
wider distally, narrow proximally. Distal margin of each side arm
plate bears one, small, short, peg-like spine, about twice as long
as wide.
Oral shields are lacking. The madreporite plate is small,
roughly oval-shaped, longer than wide, with the duct opening
visible. Adoral plates not distinguishable under seventy-five power
magnification. Oral plates relatively large, longer than wide,
touching only at raised proximal ends, irregular- pentagonal,
proximal median margin straight and short, interradial margin
concave, more than twice the length of the proximal median mar-
gin. The distal margin is convex, in contact with the first under
arm plate and first pair of tentacle pores. Two adradial margins
almost straight, forming a wide obtuse angle. Jaws small, tri-
angular, proximally pointing upward into the mouth and distally
sloping away from the mouth, to contact outer margins of prox-
imal raised ridge of oral plates. The jaw is separated from oral
plates, along medlictn margins, by a triangular, membrane-covered
area. Each jaw bears at its apex a broad, flat, acute-tip, spear-
shaped tooth, longer than the length of the jaw. The tooth points
outward from the mouth. Both ‘the tooth and the jaw are com-
posed of semi-transparent plates. Oral papillze two in number,
proximal papilla is acute, flat, longer than wide, attached to the
jaw, in contact with oral plate. The second papilla is blunt, edge
28
BULLETIN, So. CaLtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES *. Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
slightly concave, about twice as wide as long, attached to the
oral plate.
Interbrachial spaces below are covered by a fine membrane
that extends distally to the modified side arm plates of the disk-
body. Imbedded in the membrane are large semi-transparent
polygonal plates, about sixteen to twenty-two in each interradial
area. The under surface of the disk-body is concave. There are
six pairs of large, conspicuous tentacle pores in each radius, prox-
imal pair largest, each pair separated from each other by an ele-
vated ridge on the under arm plates. Genital slits consist of two
large circular openings in each interradius, about the size of the
first tentacle pore, located interradially from the second tentacle
pore, about the same distance as separates the first and second
tentacle pores. In alcoholic transparent specimens, the dark
gonads extend distally to the margin of the disk-body proper.
Under arm plates are hour-glass-shaped, longer than wide, with
the central portion constricted. The distal and proximal margins
are elevated and enlarged to form a ridge, which separates the
pairs of tentacle pores. The under arm plates become progres-
sively smaller distally to the seventh under arm plate, at the mar-
gin of the disk-body, which is small, abortive, triangular in shape,
and longer than wide. The free arms beyond the disk-body lack
under arm plates. A large, single, broad, triangular tentacle
scale, longer than wide, is located on the proximal, abradial mar-
gin of the tentacle pore. The succeeding tentacle scales gradually
become smaller distally, to the sixth pore, where they are entirely
lacking.
Color.—In life, still attached to the boulder, the upper arm
plates and disk are straw-tan. Through the transparent disk the
gonads form a star-shape of a darker color, brownish-black, with
the edges of the gonads showing a tinge of brick red. Under sur-
face of disk; the buccal cavity area is almost black, due to the
mud content of the mouth. The oral plates are light gray. The
jaws are light tan. The under arm plates are straw color. The
tentacles are reddish-pink. The proximal interradius is dark
brown, almost black. The gonads seen from the under side of the
disk are brick red. The disk proper is darker than the fused side
arm plates, which are straw colored. The free arms are straw
color, semi-transparent. The color in alcohol is dark straw color;
the contents of the buccal cavity dark brown and the outline of
the tentacle pores and the tube feet light brown. The gonads are
reddish brown. Specimens dried from alcohol are white, with the
dried tube feet tan; gonads dark brown, and buccal cavity gray-
black.
Type—Holotype, A.H.F. No. E. 57; 82 paratypes.
Type locality—Holotype and twenty-five paratypes from Sta-
| tion 1988-50, 230 fms. boulders, Bank, 6 miles east of Long Point,
29
BULLETIN, So. Canir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part I, 19 51
Santa Catalina Island, California, \ugust 12, 1950; one paratype
from Station 1156-40, 230 to 380 fms. boulders. Bank, 6.5 miles
east of Long Point, Santa Catalina Island, California, July 7,
1940; eight paratypes from Siation 1306-41, 228 to 267 tms.
boulders, 7 miles east of Long Point, Santa Catalina Island, Cali-
fornia, May 3, 1941; eighteen paratypes, five now in the Zoolog-
ical Museum, Copenhagen, Denmark, from Station 1862-49, 250
to 320 fms. boulders, Bank, 6 miles east of Long Point, Santa
Catalina Island, California, July 1, 1949; eight paratypes from
Station 1989-50, 330 fms. 4.5 miles E.N.E. of Avalon, Santa
Catalina Island, California, August 12, 1950 and twenty-two para-
types from Station 1992-50, 230 to 250 fms. boulders, Bank, 6
miles east of Long Point, Santa Catalina Island, California,
August 23, 1950.
Remarks.—Vhe seventy-eight specimens in the collection from
Southern California waters range in size from 1.6 mm. to 9.5
mm. in disk-body diameter. Only one specimen, with two central
plates, differed from the symmetrical rosette arrangement of the
thirty-six disk plates. Only two of the largest specimens had
seven pairs of tentacle pores and the smallest had three pairs of
tentacle pores. The majority had six pairs of tentacle pores. Only
twenty-one specimens had three oral papilla and the largest speci-
men had only two oral papilla. The three specimens with disk-
body diameter of less than two mm. had only one free arm seg-
ment. Only eleven specimens had more than one arm spine; in
those, the two or three arm spines were on the first and second
free arm segments. The arm spines were fused to form a comb or
fence; probably a step in the development of forming the distal
marginal fence as the side arm plates are incorporated into the
disk-body. The genital slits were not observed in the smaller speci-
mens. Only a few of the larger specimens had more than ten free
arm segments, one had tw elve and another had eleven. Little is
known “about the biology of this species as it lives attached to
boulders, that have been’ dredged up from 230 to 380 fathoms of
water off the east end of Santa Catalina Island, California. The
larger boulders support the greater colonies, as high as seven speci-
mens were taken from a fifty-pound boulder. The boulders are of
basaltic rock, worn smooth, and with few marine organisms grow-
ing upon them. Since the dredge rarely fouls on the bottom and
mud is always present in the hauls, it is presumed the boulders
are scattered over the bottom and ocean currents keep the mud
from covering the rocks. In their known natural environment
the pressure varies from 612.7 to 1012.3 pounds per square inch.
Once on deck under atmospheric pressure the specimens are
sessile, and remain clinging to the rocks, even upon drying. No
motion has been observed of the free arms of freshly dredged
specimens. The concave under side makes a fine suction cup and
the large tube feet assist the brittle star to hold tightly to the
30
BULLETIN, So. CaLtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
smooth basaltic rocks. By clinging to the smooth rock, the animal
is secure from being carried away by the strong currents. The
disk-body is a strong shield of armor that prevents smaller natural
enemies from attacking the tender under side, and permits the
animal to feed within the protection of the disk-body. The feed-
ing habits are unknown. The specimens may raise the disk-body
and feed on particles carried by the ocean currents as barnacles
and oysters feed. The disk-body suggests feeding habits similar
to the abalones, limpets, and chitons that move over the surface
of the rocks. Of all the specimens examined in the laboratory, only
one had a recognized organism in the buccal cavity. The organ-
ism was a Helizoan covered with numerous outstanding glass
spicules. Besides serving as a protective and feeding space, the
concave under surface could also serve as a brood pouch, as 1S
common to other brittle stars. To date, all specimens were
dredged during the summer months and the young have not been
observed. The three smaliest specimens were fastened to the.
boulders independently, as were the larger forms.
The present species differs from Astrophiura kawamurai
Matsumoto, from the Sagami Sea, Japan by:
1. Lacking the five infrabasal disk plates and having an addi-
tional five interradial plates.
2. The infrabasals, basals, and interradial plates are not ele-
vated above the central, radials, and radial shields to form a
system of ridges.
3. The radial plate is diamond-shaped, proximal angle in con-
tact with the centrodorsal plate, while in A. kawamurai the radial
is definitely pentagonal and the proximal margin is in contact
with the infrabasal plate.
4. The modified side arm plates of the disk-body are longer,
narrower and curved, occupying a greater portion of the disk-
body, normally six and rarely seven segments within the disk-
body, compared to eight or nine in A, kawamurai,
5. The radial shields are hexagonal, straight margins, longer
than wide, median margins in full contact with each other for
two-fifths of their length. The radial shields in A. kawamurai
are rounded-triangular, curved margins, hardly touching each
other.
6. The fourth large interradial spear-shaped plate is as wide
as long. In A. kawamurai this plate is longer than wide and the
latero-distal margins are concave, more than twice the length of
the other margins.
7. The disk-body is definitely raised, convex on the upper and
concave on the under surfaces. Not at all flat as in A. kawamurai.
8. Oral papille two, rarely three to a side as compared to four
or five in A. kawamurai.
31
BULLETIN, So. Canir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
9. Because of the longer side arm plates within the disk-body,
the under surface area covered with the fine scale-imbedded mem-
brane is smaller.
10. In all but the smallest specimens the genital pores are
visible,
Astrophiura marione ditfers from Astrophiuwa cavelle, Koeh-
ler, from the Cape of Good Hope, Atlantic Ocean, by:
1. The absence of a central cluster of spinelets, bosses, knobs
or any other type or ornamentation on the primary disk plates.
«. 2. The disk area being smaller and the fused side arm plates
occupying a greater area of the disk-body. In 4. cevella@ the large
fourth interradial plate almost reaches the disk-body distal mar-
gin and a smaller portion of the under side arm plates are ex-
posed.
3. The infrabasal plate is lacking between the centrodorsal
and radial plate and there are four series of interradials as com-
pared to only three in 4. cavella.
4. The centrodorsal and radial plates are larger than the sur-
rounding plates. In 4. cavelle the centrodorsal and the surround-
ing plates are of about equal size.
5. The radial plate is diamond-shaped while in A. cavell@ it
is pentagonal.
6. The basal or first interradial is rectangular, while in A,
cavelle it is pentagonal.
7. Yhe madreporite plate is roughly oval-shape while in A.
cavelle it is pentagonal.
8. Oral papille in A, cavelle are long, narrow and acute-
pointed, three or four to each side.
9. Free arms beyond disk-body lack upper and under arm
plates.
10. Radial shields in 4. cavell@ are barely touching each
other.
The present species differs from Astrophiura permira, Sladen,
from Madagascar in the Indian Ocean by:
1. The regular, summetrical rosette arrangement of the 36
disk plates.
Absence of a central boss, knobs or other ornamentation on
the primary disk plates.
3. There is a greater area of exposed side arm plates, both
upper and under surfaces of the disk-body.
4. Absence of upper or under plates on the free arm segments
beyond disk-body.
5. The pentagonal centrodorsal and radial plates are larger.
6. The absence of the infrabasal disk plates.
32
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ", Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
7. The symmetrical upper arm plates are smaller and nar-
rower.
The present species is the first to be taken from waters of the
North American Continent and the first from Eastern Pacific
waters, which geographically separates Astrophiura marione
from the above named species.
It gives me great pleasure to name this species for Mrs. Marion
M. Hancock, wife of Captain G. Allan Hancock, Director of the
Allan Hancock Foundation, the University of Southern Cali-
fornia.
LITERATURE
Bather, F. A.
1900. A Treatise on Zoology. Part III Echinodermata.
(Edited by E. Ray Lankester) p. 238.
Bell, F. Jeffrey
1892 A Contribution to the Classification of Ophiuroids, with Descrip-
tions of some New and Little-Known Forms. Proceedings of
the Zoological Society of London. Part II. 175-183, pls. XI
and XII.
Clark, H. L.
1923. Echinoderm Fauna of South Africa. Annals of the South
African Museum. Vol. XIII, pp. 221-435, pls. VIII and XXIII.
Matsumoto, H.
1913: Preliminary Notice of a New Interesting Ophiuran (Astrophiura
kawamurai) Annotationes Zoologie Japonenses. Vol. VIII,
Part 11, pp. 225-228. pl. III.
1915. A New Classification of the Ophiuroidea with Descriptions of
New Genera and Species. Proceedings of the Academy of Nat-
ural Sciences of Philadelphia. Vol. LXVII, pp. 43-92.
1917. A Monograph of Japanese Ophiuroidea, Arranged according to
a New Classification. Journal of the College of Science. Im-
perial University of Tokyo. Vol. XXVVIII, Art. 2. pp. 1-408.
pls. 1-7, figs. 1-100.
Koehler, Rene
1915. Description d’une nouvelle espece d’Astrophiura, |’ Astrophiura
cavelle. Bulletin de L’ INSTITUT Oceangraphigue (Founda-
tion Albert ler, Prince de Monaco). No. 311, 30 Nov. 1915.
pp. 1-15. figs 1-6.
Sladen, W. Percy
1878. On Astrophiura permia, an “Echinoderm—form Intermediate
between Ophiuroidea and Asteroidea.” (Abstract). June 20,
1878. Proceedings of the Royal Society of London, Vol. XXVII,
pps. 456-457.
1879. On the Structure of Astrophiura, a New and Aberant Genus of
Echinodermata. XLV, The Annals and Magazine of Natural
History (fifth series). December, 1879. Vol. IV pps. 401-415,
pl. XX.
1879. Astrophiura permira, An Echinoderm Intermediate between
Ophiuroidea and Asteroidea. Zoologischer Anzeiger. Vol. II.
1879, pps. 10-11.
Ziesenhenne, Fred C.
1941. Some Notes on the Distribution Records of Little Known South-
ern California Echinoderms. Bulletin So. Calif. Academy of Sci-
ences. Vol. XL. Sept.-Dec. 1941. Part III. pp. 117-120.
33
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1961
FOSSIL ARTHROPODS FROM ONY X-MARBLE
4. HOT CALCAREOUS WATERS KILLINGSINSECTS
sy W. DwicuTt PIERCE
The article by John Hilton quoted in Note 1 of this series,
suggested to the writer that perhaps the well now called Hot Min-
eral, in Imperial County, California, might furnish some ideas as
to how insects become incorporated in onyx-marble.
On November 10, 1950, Dr. Raymond Jenness Barber and the
writer visited Hot Mineral which is located near the All-American
Canal Road, 37 miles southeast of Mecca, 4.5 miles easterly from
Highway No. 111, turning in at the railroad stop Frink.
This well was drilled in 1939 under direction of the United
States Reclamation Bureau. An official sign posted at the well
states that it is 305 feet deep, with a 14 inch casing. A concrete
block holds the pressure. The water flows at two cubic feet per
second. It contains 4000 parts per million of dissolved salts,
with CO, gas.
At the orifice the official temperature is 174°F. At five feet our
measurement was 170°F. The mineral crystallizes out, forming
pools of decreasing temperatures as the water flows down the
slope. At about 75 feet from the orifice the temperature at the
time of our visit was 158°F; at 150 feet it was 105°F; at about 300
feet it was 82°F; while the atmospheric temperature was 78 F.
The surface crystals are colored pink, yellow, blue, green, dark
maroon, light brown, pure white, but mostly buff. Some of the
colors are due to alge living in the water. There are many little
craters in the crystal bottom of the pools, caused by escaping gas.
Any object falling into the water becomes the center of crys-
tallization. Thus a tiny insect may be the nucleus for a beautiful
oval or circular floating disc, which grows concentrically, and
under which other crystals form until the weight causes it to fall
to the bottom. Stems become beautifully encrusted and the min-
eral replaces or modifies the tissues.
As expected we found that many insects are being killed by
the hot water. They drift in the swiftly flowing water to the mar-
gins of the pools, and each becomes the center of crystal growth.
Sometimes a thin paper-thick laver of crystals contains many tiny
midges and other small insects. In all 132 specimens of arthrop-
oda were found in the water in a short time. These represent
Araneida, Odonata (Zygoptera and Anisoptera), Ephemerida,
Psylloptera, Hemiptera (Corixidze and Notonectide), Coleoptera
(Hydrophilide, Staphylinide, and Psallidide ), Lepidoptera (Ge-
ometride ), Hymenoptera ( Vespide ), and Diptera (Chironomide,
etc) ; all winged except one spider.
The crystallization on these specimens is similar to that
formed on the millipede Parajulus lasti Pierce, which was found
34
.
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
among calcite and quartz crystals in volcanic lava at 900 feet
depth in a well at Oxnard, California (See Bull. So. Cal, Acad.
Sci. 44(1) :2).
As hot water of 110° will kill almost any insect, it is probable
that the bottom crust contains multitudes of them. These en-
crusted insects fall to the bottom as the crystal mass becomes too
heavy to float, and there they are incorporated i in the homologous
mass of crystals, which in due time under proper temperature and
pressure will become onyx-marble.
Thus we can say that the finding of winged insects in onyx-
marble will indicate that they were caught i in open flowing calca-
reous waters.
Word has been received that insect wings occur in the Mexican
onyx-marble from El Marmol, Baja California. This deposit is
formed by a hot mineral well on the side of a volcano, and the
waters flowed into a depression where a solid deposit of onyx-
marble is being mined.
Hot Mineral is on or near the San Andreas Fault.
5 PURTHER MATERIAL FROM THE BONNER ONY Ranta, 195i
PLATE 15
Figure 5. Calcitro fisheri Petrunkevitch (Specimen BQ 15), detail.
Figure 6. Calcitro fisheri Petrunkevitch (Specimen BQ 8), detail of
sternum.
Figure 7. Calcoschizomus latisternum Pierce, detail study.
Figure 8. Parajulus onychis Pierce, detail of anterior portion.
Figure 9. Parajulus onychis Pierce, detail of three abdominal segments.
45
BULLETIN, £0. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
PLATE 16
Parajulus onychis Pierce (Specimen BQ 19), length of specimen 18
mm.; uncoiled length about 39.4 mim.
9° FOSSIL, PRIMITIVE INSECLS HROMMON eS
MARBLE
The newer material lent by Mr. J. W. Fisher contains a total
of seven primitive insects, in the orders Archeognatha, Zygen-
toma, Dicellura, Rhabdura, and Phasmida.
Outside of Baltic amber no fossils in the first four orders are
known, and these insects are the first to be described from onyx-
marble. In Article No. 3 in this series Onychojapyx schnudti, in
the Japygide, was described. Four more thysanurans are now to
be added.
ARCHAZOGNATHA Boerner 1904
MACHILID. Grassi 1888
Although somewhat disintegrated by the calcareous liquid the
ordinal identity of the first specimen is certain. The Zygentoma,
or running silver fish have styli on abdominal sternites 7 to 9 or 8
to 9; while the Archzognatha, or jumping silver fish have styl
’
44
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
on segments 2 to 9. The posterior portion of the abdomen was cut
off, but 3 styli, on the second and third segments remain. Char-
acteristic of the Machilidz are the long maxillary palpi and the
thick labial palpi seen in this specimen.
This specimen (BQ 7) is white, and dorso-ventrally flattened,
rather than laterally compressed. It has no indication of scales
on the body.
ONYCHOMACHILIS, new genus
Although 9 genera of Machilidz are now living in the Ameri-
cas this species seems even more primitive, and has therefore been
set off as a new genus, possibly to be assigned to the Meinertel-
linee of Wygodzinski.
Antennal joints about twice as long as wide; maxillary palpal
joints elongate. labial palpi stout. Tarsal joints 1/2 and 3 elongate
(the diagonal separation of 1 and 2 cannot be seen); claws of
posterior tarsi large and spreading outward. Styli of second seg-
ment with a strong spine at apical third posteriorly, appearing
almost as a cleavage.
ONYCHOMACHILIS FISHERI, new species. (Figures 12, 15)
Type of genus.
Length of fragment 7 mm. from tip of antenna; of body por-
tion 5.5 mm. Color white; no scales present (they may have been
deciduous). The outlines in Figure 15 must not be considered as
exact, because of the state of preservation. A living insect-might
have looked quite differently.
The antenne are both broken, but the left one is longer. The
last joint of the left maxillary palpus is missing. Anterior left
leg has the third tarsal joint lying near by. The tarsus of the
right leg is missing. Middle left leg is entire, but only the femur
remains of the right leg. The posterior legs have been twisted, so
that the femur of the left leg appears behind the right anterior
leg; and the right posterior leg has swung over and appears on
the left side, all parts present; the last tarsal joint turned upward
presents the claws plainly.
ZYGENTOMA Borner 1904
LEPISMATID Escherich (Lepismide Lubbock 1873)
ONYCHOLEPISMA, new genus
A primitive silver fish, fossil in onyx-marble.
ONYCHOLEPISMA ARIZON, new species (Figure 14
bab tS)
Type of genus.
Fossil in onyx-marble, from Bonner Quarry, Kaibab National
45
BULLETIN, So. Canir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
PLATE 17
Figure 11. Onychocampodea onychis Pierce (Specimen BQ 26), length
of body 10.56 mm.
Figure 12. Onychomachilis fisheri Pierce (Specimen BQ 7), length of
body 5.28 mm.
Figure 13. Calcibacunculus tenuis Pierce (Specimen BQ 25), length of
specimen 8.8 mm.
Figure 14. Onycholepisma arizone Pierce (Specimen BQ 28), length of
body 8.84 mm.
46
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Pee NV Olo0 wrartelem loo
¥ GX
iC : LN
: hee res eX
ss "6 yee ONS
SAS ee CSS
REE WE was
al aie i eC. Ne
ray; fic \ \
(Co? \ KY i
ae \
i ( 7
{
r
\ |
fol
\
Ih)
tie |
|
{|
aa
- |
oH
\ <4
a
ie
|
IZE-2nn. | /
SIZE liga /2Ss
<
PLATE 18
Figure 15. Onychomachilis fisheri Pierce, detail study.
Figure 16. Plioprojapyxz' primitivus Pierce( Specimen BQ 29),length 2mm
Figure 17. Calcibacunculus tenuis Pierce, detail study,
Photographs by Lowis Athon; drawings by the author.
47
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
forest Yavapai County, Arizona, Found by J. W. Fisher. Speci-
men BO 28.
This insect 1s not well defined but has long antennie, long
caudal filaments, and two shorter caudal cerci.
Body length 8.8+ mm., antenne 3.00 mm., caudal filaments
3.2mm. width of head 0.56 mm. pro-, meso-, and metanotum 0.80
mm., abdomen at base 0.60 mm, at apex 0.40 mm.
One specimen (BQ 21) is too deep for study, but the scaly
surface is evident at one point.
Specimen BO 10, too deep for study, is either a Machilid or a
Lepismatid,
RHABDURA (Silvestri) Handlirsch 1903
CAMPODEIDAZ Westwood 1873
ONYCHOCAMPODEA, new genus
ONYCHOCAMPODEA ONYCHIS, new species (Figure 11)
Type of genus. Specimen BQO 26, fossil in onyx-marble, Bon-
ner Quarry, Kaibab National Forest, Yavapai County, Arizona.
Discovered by J. W. Fisher.
Length of body 10.56 mm., antennze 6.40 mm.
The caudal filaments are not visible.
This is much larger than any known modern Campodeid, but
unfortunately none of its characters is describable.
DICELLURA (Haliday ) Cook 1896
PROJAPYGID%, Cook 1896
PLIOPROJAPYX, new genus
PLIOPROJAPYX PRIMITIVUS, new species (Figure 16)
Type of genus. Specimen BO 29, fossil in onyx-marble, Bon-
ner Quarry, Kaibab National Forest, Yavapai County, Arizona.
Discovered by J. W. Fisher.
Length of the greatly distended body 2 mm.; head 0.16 mm.
long, 0.12 mm, wide. The antennze seem to be 13-jointed. The
caudal cerci extend sidewards and are 3-segmented.
PHASMIDA Leach 1815
BACUNCULID Brunner 1893
CALCIBACUNCULUS, new genus
CALCIBACUNCULUS TENUIS, new species (Figures 13, 17)
Type of genus. Specimen BQ 25, fossil in onyx-marble, Bon-
ner Quarry, Kaibab National Forest, Yavapai County, Arizona,
discovered by J. W. Fisher.
48
|
BULLETIN, So. CaLtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
Specimen measures 8.80 mm.; head 1.28 mm. long, 0.88 mm.
wide ; prothorax 0.88 mm. long, 0.80 mm. wide; mesothorax 2.32
mm. long, 0.80 mm. wide; metathorax 2.00 long, 0.80 mm. wide.
The posterior part of the abdomen is cut off.
This is either a young walking stick, or an unknown type of
primitive insect.
The long head, sharply narrowed behind, with no evidence of
eyes, may be considered as the differentiating generic character.
Only the base of the antennz remains. Since this species occurred
in the rocks it was very likely a blind insect.
The long thoracic segments, with legs attached posteriorly on
each, and the transverse coxz give this insect a very striking
appearance.
The types described in this article have been deposited by Mr.
J. W. Fisher, President of the Southwest Onyx and Marble Com-
pany of San Diego, in the Paleoentomological Collections of the
Los Angeles County Museum. Paleontologists will be grateful
for his far sighted generosity.
49
BULLETIN, So. Canir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
GEOMETRID NOTES
By Joun L. Sperry
Riverside, California
CHLOROSEA NEVADARIA Packard
During the last week of July 1949, which the author spent in
hospital at Enterprise, Oregon with his leg in a cast, Mrs. Sperry
took, at light, at the Lazy T Ranch on the north slope of Chief
Joseph Mt., six specimens of this rarity, all females, in excellent,
fresh condition. [Examination of these adds another character to
the nevadaria description, overlooked in the examination of worn
specimens. Dorsally on the second and third abdominal segments
appear small whitish, wedge shaped, triangular spots pointing to-
ward the thorax with the faintest or orange-yellow tinges about
the apices. This is scarcely discernible except under magnifi-—
cation. |
The genus Chlorochlamys Hulst is badly in need of revision,
but it will be necessary to examine types of the species of Prout,
Walker and Swett before this can be adequately done. However,
thanks to the kindness and careful comparisons of and by Mr.
D. S. Fletcher of the British Museum staff and Dr. Frederick
Rindge of the American Museum of Natural History the author
has been enabled to do a little of the preliminary work at this
time. It seems especially wise to clarify the status of the species
forming the volantaria-masonaria-martinaria group and to attach
a name to the common Southwestern desert species, heretofore
misidentified as chloroleucaria Gn. or volantaria Pears, by several
entomologists, including the author.
The first mentioned group is characterized by larger size (20
to 24 mm.) squamous vestiture with a tendency to mottling of
the dull olive-green ground color of the wings and waved t.a. and
t.p. lines on the primaries.
Viridipallens Hulst probably heads the group and it is more
than probable as Prout suggests (Seitz, VIII, 62) that volantaria
Pears. 1s synonymous.
Dr. Rindge, having been allowed at long last to make a slide
of the Colorado type, writes that all characters seem to be identi- |
cal with those of a paratype male of volantaria with the excep-
tion that the edeagus of volantaria appears a little longer and a
little thinner than that of viridipallens, the specimens being of
equal size. The associated female is from Arizona and is probably —
better associated with volantaria.
50
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
Volantaria Pears. and martinaria Sperry are very close in-
sofar as their maculation is concerned, volantaria is larger and
the palpi especially in the female, are much longer than in mar-
tinaria. Dr. Rindge writes that, if he has the sexes properly
associated, volantaria has a fairly large plate in the female geni-
talia, the plate in martinaria is smaller with two smaller sclerotized
pieces, posterior and lateral. Masonaria Schaus from Mexico
may be separated from the other two by its larger size and the
presence of dorsal abdominal spots, which are lacking in the
other species. In the light of this information, the Allotype of
the author’s species martinaria must be placed under volantaria
Pears. in the Sperry collection and a new Allotype (Madera Can-
yon, Santa Rita Mts., Ariz., July 31, 1947, J. A. Comstock and
Lloyd Martin, Coll.) designated.
In the Sperry collection, for the time being, the group will be
arranged as follows, volantaria Pears. being still held as a sep-
arate species pending receipt of more Colorado material.
viridipallens Hulst..... Colorado
volantaria Pears. ....S.E. Arizona
martinaria Sperry..... Southern Arizona
masonaria Schaus......Mexico
form hyperella Prout. ..Costa Rica
This leaves our common Southern California desert Chloro-
chlamys without a name and to be quite certain that this was un-
described, the author took the liberty of sending a good series to
Mr. D.S. Fletcher at the British Museum and Mr. Fletcher kindly
checked the genitalia in his usual careful and competent manner
against chlorolewucaria Gn., the type of its synonym rectilinea Zel-
ler, the type of densaria Wilk. and one of its synonyms deprivata
Wilk, a male and female type of triangularis Prout and the fe-
male type of curvifera Prout and still the California species re-
mains unmatched and nearer triangularis Prout than anything
else. On the strength of Mr. Fletcher’s careful comparisons and
my own checks against all other North American species in the
Sperry collection, | make bold to describe this Chlorochlamys
‘species from the Southwest giving it the name suggested by Mrs.
‘Sperry before her death this past summer.
CHLOROCHLAMYS HESPERIA Sp. fi.
g & @ Palpi rosy brown above, ochreous beneath, in the ¢
short, scarcely exceeding the front, in the 9 long, exceeding the
front by more than the diameter of the eye. Front garnet- -brown,
vertex warm-buff as is also the antennal shaft. In the ¢ the an-
tennal pectinations, especially proximal, flecked with dark brown.
Legs rose-brown above, buff beneath. Thorax, abdomen above
and both wings chromium-green in fresh specimens, fading
1
ol
|
)
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
through yellowish-glaucous to pale olive-buff. The upper side of
the distal half of the scale is laved with the darker green, the
proximal half being almost without a green tint and the whole
underside of the scale being a glistening gray-green, the vestiture
is rough and this accounts for an occasional specimen with darker
median area. The costa of the primaries is broadly warm-buff
with a rose-brown tinting on the extreme edge. There is a narrow
dorsal band of warm-buff extending the entire length of the ab-
domen and the underside and the lateral tufting of the ¢ and most
of the last four 9 abdominal segments, both above and beneath,
are light to warm-buff, as is also the maculation of the wings. All
are Ridgway colors.
Forewing: T.a. line from costa at 1/3 out, perpendicular to
costa to cell, curving in the cell until perpendicular to inner
margin at 2/5 out. The line is 1/4 mm. wide and distinct,
slightly larger at costa; t-p. line from costa at 2/3 curving inward
to vein 5 thence nearly straight to inner margin at 4/5 out from
base, t.p. line slightly wider than t.a. and the triangular inception
at costa is over 1/2 mm. wide. There is a narrow, light buff,
terminal line at the base of fringe and the fringe is light green
proximally and light buff distally. There is no discal dot.
Hindwing: ‘T.a. line absent; t.p. line crosses the wing in a
flat curve from costa to inner margin 2/3 out from base. No
discal dot; fringes as in primaries.
Beneath, both wings a shining, light grey-green. The basal
area of primaries somewhat darker. The costal warm-buff band
is rosier at the base than above, t.p. lines of primaries and sec-
ondaries showing dimly through as does the very narrow, termi-
nal, light buff line. Fringes as above; no discal dots on either
wing. Expanse ¢ 13-16 mm.; 9 15-18 mm.
Holotype g Borrego, California, Feb. 27, 1950, Grace H. &
John L. Sperry, coll. and in the collection of Grace H. & John L.
Sperry.
Allotype 2 Tub Canyon, Borrego, California, April 7, 1949,
same collectors and in the Sperry collection.
Paratypes: It seems best to designate a rather large number
of these and to distribute these widely. They comprise 119 7 16
2 from Borrego or Tub Canyon, Borrego, California (the lo-
calities are 4 anilles, @ apart ) taken by Grace H. & John L. Sperry
or by Noél Crickmer mostly in March and April but with one
October and several November records otherwise from Feb. 26
to June 30, 1945 to 1950. Also specimens from nearby parts of the
Colorado and Mojave deserts of California taken by Grace H.
& John L. Sperry as follows: 7 g Split Rock Tank, May 19 to
31193803 a, 1S 7 12m. south of ‘Cave’ Spr Maygo 959 aie
Rock Spr., May 13, 1937; 3 ¢ Split Mt. Canyon, Apr. 12, 1939;
52
|
| BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
ZS 2 2 Providence Mts., May 10, 11, 1936; 1 ¢ 1 2 Morongo Val-
fey, May 13, 1937;1 ¢ Ivanpah Mts., July 27, 1935; 1 g 1 9 Mexi-
EamevViells July 7, 1937; 1 9 Indio, Mar. 25, 1941- 1 © Bullion
Mis; Apr. 6, 1934, also 19 Hidden Valley, May 19, 1946;
Melander and 2 9 Bouquet Canyon, Aug. 6, 1938, Westerland.
These will be distributed to the Los Angeles County Museum,
California Academy of Science Museum, U. S. National Museum,
British Museum, French National Museum, Canadian National
Museum, American Museum of Natural History, Museum of
Comparative Zoology, Nova Scotia Museum of Science, and col-
_lections Crickmer, Bower, Buchholz and Sperry.
The g genitalia are similar to the genitalia of chloroleucaria
Gn. but the cluster of spines at the tip of the needle-like edeagus
are cone shaped and robust, whereas those of chloroleucaria are
flat and appressed at the apex of the organ. In the ? chloroleu-
_caria has a rather large, heavily sclerotized plate, in hesperia the
plate is much smaller.
Since 1938 there has been in the Sperry collection a small
series of an unknown Chlorochlamys from South Florida, it was
one of those things one is always going to work up and never
does, but receipt of a series of this same insect from my friend
Mi. ©. P. Kimball of Rochester, N. Y. taken by him in Sarasota
County, Florida provided the necessary incentive and Mr. D. S.
Fletcher kindly compared these with specimens in the British
Museum and states it 1s Chloropteryx paularia Moeschler and
that, as there 1s no apparent production of the wings at vein 6 of
the forewings and vein 4 of the hindwings and as the genitalia
are congeneric with Chlorochlamys it follows that paularia is, as
Prout suggested (Seitz, VIII, 63) probably better placed in the
genus Chlorochlamys. The author believes that this is a new rec-
ord for this species in the United States and that it should be
added to our check list.
DREPANULATRIX ELLA Hulst
Receipt of a single g¢ specimen which is very probably this
species from Mr. Edward C. Johnston of Seattle again stirs in-
terest in this elusive insect. It was taken in Brooks Mem. Park,
south of Yakima, Wash. on May 30. It is about the size of
bifilata Hulst (30 mm.) and the ground color of the forewings is
an orange buff rather heavily irrorate with brownish fuscous, the
hind wings lighter. T.a. line from 1/4 out, narrow, distinct, per-
pendicular to costa to cell then curving smoothly to inner margin
at 1/3; median line indicated, subparallel, at 1/3 on costa fading
Out in cell. Tp. line heaviest of the lines, from costa at 2/3
smoothly curving across the cell then nearly straight to inner mar-
gin at 2/3. No lines on secondaries. Distinct discal dots on all
53
BULLETIN, So. Caniv, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 1, 1951
wings outside the median line of primaries. Terminal black dots
on veins, both wings.
In the ¢ genitalia the valve are narrower and less hairy than
in bifilata and bear small hairy pads at the base of the costa, the
uncas is also narrower and the two spines on the yesica have
rounded spots at their tips. In the Sperry collection ella Hulst is
now carried as a good species as are also incidentally verdiaria
Gey rindgearia Sperry, and ruthiaria Sperry, as the author
does not consider that sufficient evidence has as yet been pre-
sented to warrant the placing of these in synonymy or as forms of
another species.
SNOWIA WALTONARIA Sperry
Among many interesting species received by the author in
the Spring of 1950 through the kindness of Mr. Chester A.
Thomas of Zion and Bryce ‘National Parks there was a single 9
of Snowia montanaria Neum. As the author’s series of this
species was made up-entirely of males this specimen allowed the
making of a slide of the female genitalia and the definite placing
ot Azelina waltonaria Sperry (Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci, XLVITII,
10, 1949) in the genus Snowia Neumoegen.
PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
BULLETIN:
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
For Sale at the Appended Prices
(Continued on next page)
55
To
Members
Ts TOOL esc Sie nao cee narra asl $ .50
Bs WOO yo Srereeeeesecreerene ais eigen eer 50
DMS Ogi aicy ccater scifi Nial lcd es aVah see atitennaweeseain twice 50
pllmnmpaL ES) () Syste ciey Seca cc utcall gna tac vanes waive icile oe say oe. ea O ea 1.50
TL, “TOO t itas circa eee aoc tac ar era 1.00
mel (eee edcere ee atew at eee sy tae can aec ay aca eeeeee aieite 75
TL, -SUG)TIS persed eek Os Sars eee ce ence wee ne er are 1.50
Os TUDE ieee leds ges SOenr Rare Srene Penner eee Leas 2.00
MON Gitrekay ters Mus vatshatcneln Sie OTe ewSScore ee raote ao
rem ONS Veah es shi teencin ists te cerebavens A cores ener a 1.50
iL, DRY caeatlo oe OOO oils Gece oidieee arena 50
iL, ISD so conbomtoacuechs 5 oodsadnaddD o 50
rea OD per cteare reer ai riser atedl sioevay ay anal caseueron aes 1.00
I Be By GG. IAS (GRE) SG go ncbdeocboD 3)
I, Bp Gy. JASE (CEO i) Wosinn aeolian sae aoe 35
SNL GS Giaievacts es siete mec tonelletan wnevoravensueie sueeiaue .35
Po lO Oil (CCACH is. ccvelersatiers eevee cle ecco ahs 35
MPG ero nel O28) ((CCACH) 2 se rasebereyewisuere celle sovelene 85
eel G 2 OC ACH): ora orc ievereve new eoneene evans 3
Ul, By By WS (EACN) conscoconcdbosogos 35
eo eon OS2 (EACH)! eve ersscu niece ata avarensievs a3)
2S hel 93 Sis COACH) hac acrsretsncee seis ccace stews .85
Uy ag Oly BUD BEES (CEN a ra tisantoolve n aiico bat 3)
ily Ap 6) THR (GAIN) Gooouccomoudano050 .35
Poo eG SGN (OACH la evere ais sieetve-s entre ecererare 130
IL Sp (GEA) Ae gp o eu ooo oOoEsO OG 35
lL, Hy diy BBE (CHO) SdcoodonuacGocn0Os 185
il, 2, 8h WOR) “CEAGIN)) Gogoccsoccocngodur .05
SoM OA Osis cccvere latate eter eel cle laters asia ro manatee wi .00
eo OA: (Ceaehi) sca ceriei es isa ois ciels POO)
1 Ae Oy DIE (GEA) Soa aconobonebn aun .00
eo el OA ay (GACH) mespersveciela srsicuecsra cece: 100
eames 94 4 eA Chia zune wer aeusdecn we eens 5)
iL, 2, By OA) (GHC) socool bouvec0guude £05
IL, 45 ai, JIE (GRO) ooonccsdonconsouue 30
Pelee tal OA (CAH) moan neers aeieciarn ee 35
eo ese OA Si (EACH) Wee. ects esru sukecineaee .30
Mp itn Oi, SU) (EEKGIN) Gog oacmcec es emedeooe 30
IL oils LEON (GEICIN)is oan Goseere bloc Bota .35
To Non-
Members
1.00
1.00
1.00
3.00
2.00
1.50
3.00
4.00
1.50
3.00
1.00
1.00
2.00
75
aa) ea} oS
on
“I
1) BS) BS) GS A |
On Sa, ea Sq Bay Payee E
oy OY or on
Ou
PUBLICATIONS (continued)
MEMOIRS To To Non-
Members Members
Voli ly U9S8S—papersCOVer® weicie ciecwre ccc ee cleis s nlvneneine $2.00 $4.00
See tial bound in black fabrikoid ........... 3.00 5.00
Seed © ha printed on one side of paper ....... 3.00 5.00
as = printed on one side of page (bound) 4.00 6.00
Vol. 2; No. 2) 19389—paper (Cover 10)... «bterererterels 1.25 2.50
Go Oe were bound in black fabrikoid.... 2.25 3.50
a sae ea a printed on one side of page . 15 3.50
2, L944—naper COVER aoc.c ace ose c.ccissacios coc 35 75
iho Semele Oe1929) (Gach) os. < o-ececeesece ccs BH 8
ams OMemato me Oe TO21 (each). she csccs cclc eee 135 £75
meSMecmete 2361939 (each). o.256. dss eae es 135 £75
ae eons 19S3°(CACH) a's es acca ess ciel ce 135 75
eeeceemcm (he Pee 1994. (each) «..20.c.06cetecsccces 135 75
ao permet ro: 1935 (ach): cc sc0 cs kaectcns dees 135 £75
sans hme? 3 986 (each). f.cc..c.osdooecses 135 15
ao Omron 6 O37 (each): oso eccces.cc8 aoe o's * 35 15
emoieucmeten? 9° 1988-(Cach) oss cade sccee cesses 35 £75
emo Semester? 3. 1939 (Cach). .s-ccds neue sees soe 35 75
See Meee D 4 Oh ck. hsiclovavasevessicls 'eé'c. cre vsleie. edule « 35 75
ae Omens 26 1941) (Each) sos es. 925 /-13.00" 15.2: 182° 21.00. 2450 26.00
eee GOO 1100 15.25. 17.15. 2150) 24.75. 28.75. 3050
eee 6.091275." 17:50. 202 (24.75; 2850. 33.00,: 35.00
eee 84.50") 1450.19.15) 2275. 28.00 © 32.25. 3725. 3950
Covers: 50 for $2.00—additional covers 1'%4c each.
California State Sales Tax to be added if delivered within the state.
vp
Distinctive
Be INIING
_ Books @ Catalogs ® Broadsides
Stationery and Office Forms
©
ae DE PRINTING CO.
PROWEs «PRos pect 2045
Force AS 17.2 EVE Nim Bas We
“Since 1879” Los Angeles 15, Calif.
ve)
wi
‘
,
ity
LIBRARY
EW YORK
ULLETIN OF THE ™umeu
i BARDEN
Southern California
Academy of Sciences
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
SEPTEMBER-DECEMBER, 1951 Part 3
CONTENTS
12)
THE OLFACTORY SYSTEM OF ota a ee ou
William A. Hilton P 119
BATRACHOSEPS PACIFICUS IN SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
Charles H. Lowe Jr., and Richard G. Zweifel . ... 4 Aeila Was)
HE ISOPOPAN GENUS JAIS (CRUSTACEA)
R. J. Menzies and J. Laurens Barnard . . ‘ 186
D Q ISCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW SPECIES OF MARINE GAGtPopons
FROM WEST MEXICO AND COSTA RICA
Leo George Hertlein and A. M. Strong i é 152
ON Wendell O. Gregg. f 4 i i 156
FOUR Sis Laie canaemens GEOMETRID nee APPARENTLY TON.
_ DESCRIB
aad a L. Sperry Bite . a)
20 FRAGILITY FACTOR FOR TRYPANOSOMA CRUZI IN EXPERI-
MENTAL CHAGAS’ DISEASE
! Sherwin F. Wood . Sey ¢ : ‘5 a : ‘. “ - 164
HAT SIGNIFICANCE DEPTH?
Seah Pha CvOrr yy) ts a ie 5 F 7 3 . ' . 167
IMPEULSWORTH HADUBY 5 ee he ele AND
Issued December 27, 1951 |
Southern California
Academy of Sciences |
OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS
Dir. Leas OD AWHEGLER iy i cece’ cele aie era's re
DY SBOGTWUL YU WOOK) pierce duwiasens
Mr, kt0shell Bar- WORMS: 6K ie tide’
EET GAO WLC: Wheat Rah s withe,fle vim Uther evunb'e ere aie
DP Wi DWI PIOlCG seis tek dic's Vin cjeress teem
DIY; -AROBT (8S AOS LOG err, sais, oe wieie’w ha 06
Wir SAO MES UR PUI Saree aleidielesaierete:a.di%e!s
Miss Bonnie Templeton..............e0-
Dr, A. Weir Bell
Dr. John A. Comstock
Dr. Howard R. Hill
Dr. Hildegarde Howard
Dr. William L, Lloyd
Dr. Sherwin F. Wood
ADVISORY BOARD
Dr. H. J. Andrews
Dr. J. Stanley Brode -
Mr. Fred E. Burlew
Dr. Preston Kline Caye
Miss Bonnie Templeton
SCIENCE SECTIONS
Section of Agricultural Sciences
Mr. Claude A. Richards, Chairman
Anthropological Section
Mr. Robert M. Ariss, Chairman
Botanical Section
Dr. George R. Johnstone, Chairman
Section of Earth Sciences
Dr. Hildegarde Howard, Chairman
STANDING COMMITTEES
Finance
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, Chairman
Sherwin F. Wood, Auditor
Mr. O. R. Angelillo
Dr. John A. Comstock
Mr. Russell S. Woglum
Program
Dr. Louis C. Wheeler, Chairman
Hospitality
Mrs. Donald Drake, Chairman
OFFICE OF THE ACADEMY
Los Angeles County Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, California
o ersle.via'e kita e]ép ane feiteiedd comune? Cote
viele obeys elosbis ie eae . First Vice President
<0 biel & ie 6 bly ole vieaate Second Vice President
cjonn ware, pibegiatvierere Okan UE veces secs sNCCTELQTEE
3 EAA Se path er ee secveccsvason sd TCQSUTERE
wo oP oars joao oo eeu U Wislgis cp ively ail A
cle baie oksdis enya tena Membership Secretary
Dr. Philip A. Munz
Mr. Theodore Payne
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce
Dr. Louis C. Wheeler
Mr. Russell S. Woglum
Dr. Homer P, King
Dr. Irving Rehman
Mr. Kenneth E. Stager
Dr. R. H. Swift
Section of Health and Sanitation
Dr. Irving Rehman, Chairman
Section for Junior Scientists
Section of Physical Sciences
Dr. Homer P. King, Chairman _
Section of Zoological Sciences ng
Dr. Howard R. Hill, Chairman —
Publication ss
Dr. John A. Comstock, Chairman
Dr. Hildegarde Howard ;
Dr. A. Weir Bell
Dr. Philip A. Munz
Conservation
Mr. Carroll Lang, Chairman
Membership 4
Dr. Irving Rehman, Chairman
Library ‘ ;
Dr. Howard R. Hill, Chairman —
Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences
Remi OMEe = = = PART Ba 1951
THE OLFACTORY SYSTEM OF TAILED AMPHIBIA
By WiLi1AM A. HILTON
Department Zoology, Pomona College
The nasal capsules of salamanders have rather large chambers
more or less protected by cartilage and bone. In the Proteidz and
Sirenidz there is no bone dorsally, but in varying degrees the
other families have capsules largely covered over and above with
bone as well as cartilage. Usually a small area about the external
openings are free from cartilage. In many, especially members
of all families but Proteide, Sirenide and Amphiumide, two
rather distinct regions are found in each olfactory chamber; the
main portion or cavum nasi and a lateral, the sinus lateralis nasi.
In the last the ductus naso-lateralis opens. In many the sinus
lateralis is lined with ciliated epithelium.
Seydel °95, named a gland mesial to the sinus lateralis and
under the cavum nasi as Jacobson’s gland. Mihalkovics ’98, con-
sidered this absent from salamanders, but concludes that the
sinus lateralis which he calls recessus maxillaris, has a similar
function of testing the external air current, that is, the structures
are analogous, but not homologous with a true Jacobson’s organ.
Hinsberg, 1901, in the development of Triton came to the con-
clusion that a patch of sensory epithelium homologous with Jacob-
son’s organ, arises medially and moves to a position lateral to the
internal nares before this opening is completed. In this way the
lateral position is a specialization of Urodela. Zuckerkandl, 1910,
agrees in general with the last, but because of the nerve supply
does not believe in homology with higher vertebrates. Bruner,
1914, agrees with Seydel as to the location of Jacobson’s organ
and Herrick, 1914, from the nerve supply does believe that this
organ is present in Urodela. Von Navratil, ‘26, does not agree
with Seydel’s homology of the lateralis nasi. Kurepina, ’27,
claims the existence of a primary oronasal groove between the
nose and the mouth, therefore: there can be no lateral shifting of
Jacobson’s organ.
In general then it is agreed that the sinus lateralis is the func-
tional equivalent of Jacobson’s organ, used for testing water
currents,
The external nasal openings may differ in size as well as
form. In adult Siren they are elongate slits and also to some de-
gree in Necturus. In adult Amphiuma they may be a little more
elongate, perhaps more oval than slit-like. In most of the others
the openings are circular to oval, the appearance somewhat modi-
fied by their activity. In the Plethodontide the openings are from
119
BuLLeTIN, So, CALIF, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
circular to oval, always with a groove reaching from the nasal
opening through the upper lip.
The nares differ greatly in size; not always correlated with
the size of the animal. Some small species of Plethodon, Batra-
choseps or Desmognathus may have openings not more than .2
mm. across, but in some species of the genus, Thorius, even
smaller than these other plethodonts, the size of the nostrils is
comparatively and actually very great. A head 1 mm. long might
have a nostril .5 mm, across, about as large as the eye area in the
same animal. In Amphiuma, large adult, the opening was 2 mm.
PLATE 36
Olfactory capsules of salamanders. Scale equals one mm. All but 2,
views into the chamber after the removal of the dorsai wall, showing
the surface of the ventral mucous membrane. Folds of the olfactory
mucous membrane shown in all but 2 and 3.
1. Necturus. 2, Upper view of the olfactory capsule of Necturus,
cartilage areas stippled. 3, Salamandella. 4, Triturus torosus. 5, Crypt-
obranchus. 6, Siren. 7, Amphiuma.
120
BULLETIN, 'So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
"s
in its greatest diameter, but a large adult Dicamptodon where the
nostril was circular or nearly so it was 2 mm, in diameter.
In all salamanders examined, but members of the Proteide,
Sirenide and Amphiumide, where the nasal openings are circular
to oval in outline, as far as examined in the living condition or
suggested by preserved specimens of almost all species, the nostril
seems to be closed largely from one side by the enlargement of
an extensive lateral plug, due to the fact that the anterior rim is
practically fixed in position, without movement when the opening
is shut off from the exterior. This apparatus has been described
in Salamandra by Bruner in 1896 and 1901. He describes three
smooth muscles, one constrictor, two dilators. The M. constrictor
naris bounds the caudal edge of the opening in little more than a
semicircle, its ends being inserted on the anterior wall of the
nasal fenestra on the cupullar cartilage portion of the nasal cap-
sule. The M. dilator naris arises from the posterior border of the
nasal fenestra, from the cart. retro-narina and passes forward to
the caudal border of the nasal opening, being inserted into the
constrictor muscle and the tissue binding it in the wall of the nasal
opening. He also recognizes the M. dilator accessorius from the
lateral border of the fenestra narina, from cartilage of the cap-
sule and from the maxilla, to be inserted into the caudo-lateral
margin of the nostril, deep in the fibers of the constrictor muscle,
after taking an oblique course.
After the examination of this structure in a number of ex-
amples from all families, I can confirm these results in general,
especially in these salamanders with circular or nearly circular
openings and with the lateral nasal plug or operculum which
closes the opening. This includes in general all families but
Proteide, Amphiumide and Sirenide where the nostrils are more
slit-like. In these last I did not find a lateral plug clearly indi-
cated and the constrictor muscle was nearly if not entirely about
the nasal opening with many fine fibers of a retractor function
not limited to one side of the slit-like opening. Also in all those
which J examined with a well-marked nasal plug I failed to con-
vince myself that there was a distinct accessory oblique muscle.
The glands of the nasal region differ somewhat in various
species. In almost all, in the mid-dorsal area between the olfactory
sacs there is a large median gland which in some cases seems to
have communication with the olfactory area. In some salaman-
ders, especially members of the Plethodontide there are large
glands either side of the nasal areas on top of the bone, with one
or more ducts leading to the margin of the nostrils. Sometimes
these extend back to the orbit and may have openings there but
of that I could not be certain. Sometimes this gland or group of
glands just under the skin and above the skull extend out laterally
as part of the gland described or as more or less separate structure
with its secretions also passed to the margin of the nasal opening.
In addition to these there are glands in the nasal capsule in many
121
BuLLerin, So. Canir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 38, 1951
forms. They were seen in almost every species that I have ex-
amined, Francis ’34 gives them for Salamandra, which might be
considered typical, as follows:
The glandula nasalis externa situated above the sinus lateralis
nasi within the fenestra narina very near the opening of the
ductus naso-lacrimalis into the nasal capsule.
The glandula nasalis interna, practically surrounding the
cayum nasi within the nasal capsule. It keeps the olfactory epi-
thelium moist.
According to Bruner ’01, the muscles of the nostril are re-
lated to the glandula nasalis externus in such a way as to force
the secretion out with the closing of the nasal opening.
It is possible that a poorer development of this last gland is
correlated with the development of the external skull gland which
supplies secretion to the nasal opening in Plethodontide. I have
not seen this gland described before and so far have not seen it
except in several but not all the genera, but especially in Pletho-
don, Eurecea, Batrachoseps and a few others of the family. As
the word external is used in connection with another structure,
the term superficial gland might be applied to it.
The inner surface of the nasal chamber has the mucous mem-
brane sometimes smooth, in others quite complexly folded. AI-
though there is much individual variation and some differences
of appearance depending upon the method of preparation for ex-
amination the following is true:
The mucous membrane of the interior of Necturus is usually
complexly folded with long high, diagonal folds. In Crypto-
branchus nearly cross folds are found on the ventral surface. In
Siren the folds are irregularly cross and longitudinal. In Amphi-
uma the folds quite well fill all the ventral surface of the mucous
membrane, diagonal to longitudinally disposed with small lateral
branches from the folds. In some Salamandridz both longitudinal
and diagonal folds may be found, but in all cases examined they
were not prominent and in some the lining of the chamber was
almost smooth. In the other specimens examined representing
four families the mucous membrane was quite smooth.
In this description the lower surface has been described; the
inner side of the upper side of the chamber is usually similar but
not so marked as to ridges and folds.
The olfactory epithelium in many cases is very thick with
many layers of nuclei. In certain especially prepared specimens
long bipolar nerve cells were found scattered among the other
long slender cells.
In general the development of the nasal capsule is as follows,
following the condition in Ambystoma more closely than any
other. This is based upon the study of dissections and serial sec-
tions of different stages and upon the work of Higgins 1920, who
made wax plate reconstructions of various early stages.
The skeleton of the nasal area is a little later in the formation
122
BULLETIN, ‘So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
2» *%
of a cartilagenous capsule than the development of the otic cap-
sules. The first indication of nasal pits is also well after the eyes
are conspicuous with lens and cup. The olfactory pits develop
rather slowly in stages before hatching and are at first mere shal-
low depressions in little flattened discs of thickened epithelium.
The cavity slowly enlarges and extends out laterally and caudally.
The penetration into the oral chamber comes about the time the
eartilagenous trabecule are in evidence; a little before or a little
after depending upon the species. At first the ends of these
trabeculz are not enlarged but before long they flatten out and
form lateral parts, the crista trabecule. Sometime later these
ends of the trabeclze unite across the middle line to form a flat
plate, the planum basale. At about this time isolated dorsal carti-
lages on each side, the columna ethmoidalis are formed as longi-
tudinal rods dorsal to the basal plate. With later growth of these
isolated rods they become fused with the trabeculz on each side
in the crista trabecule while the ethmoid columne are also united
across the midlle line in the narrow pons ethmoidalis. In a later
stage, almost all parts become broader, the region of the bridge
12 pb fen pt 1 13
a
pt
PLATE 37
Olfactory, cartilagenous skeleton of immature salamanders, largely
after Higgins. All from above but 16; c,; cupula; ce, columna ethmoidalis;
er t, crista trabecule; ct, cornu trabecule; ce p, cephalic processes;
cr, circumnaral ring; en, external nares; fen pt, fenestrated process;
fon, foramen orbito-nasalis; pa, processus antrorbitalis; pb, planum
basale; pe, pons ethmoidalis; pt, planum tectale; pv, planum verticale;
pp, ptergoid processes; t, trabecula; le, lamina externa.
1-7. Stages in the development of Ambystoma. 1, about 10 mm.
2,11 mm. 3, 20 mm. 4, 25 mm. 6,55 mm. 7, Young adult.
8 and 12, Necturus, 30 and 45 mm. 9 and 13, Salamandra, 38 mm.
and young adult. 10, 15 and 14, Amphiuma. 11 and 16, Cryptobr anchus,
5 weeks, and three months. 16 from below.
123
BULLETIN, So. CALIF, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3 , L951
becomes the platum verticale with the foramen nasalis internus
formed at the apex of the median part on each side near the
median nasal incision. The platum tectale is a narrow lateral ex-
tension of the columna ethmoidalis and is now quite broad. There
is also a lateral projection from the trabecule, in front of the
eyes, of the process antrorbitalis which at first 1s somewhat by
itself, one on each side, but later joined in with the olfactory
cartilage. At such a stage the olfactory capsules are nearly in-
closed dorsally and ventrally; dorsally by the platum verticale
and ventrally by the broader platum basale. Very soon the cap-
sule is quite complete and the internasal space between the two
capsules becomes more marked with the narrowing of the platum
verticale. In an early stage a number of foramina and frontinel-
les are found, some remains of older ones, some new. The ex-
ternal nares are marked on each side and near the fenestra infra-
conchalis, at the caudal end on each side dorsally. In a later
stage, much like the adult, large characteristic dorsal and yentral
fontanelles are evident.
On the dorsal side in addition to the external nares are the
fenestra infra-conchalis, the foramen orbito-nasalis on each side.
In Salamandra maculosa a cephalic process develops from the
planum verticale and also in early stages there is a fenestra
ethmoidalis, neither of which are shown in Ambystoma, but the
latter is found in Triton. The stages shown by Higgins for
Triturus viridescens, one of which is an adult have less marked
dorsal fenestra than I found in any adults of several species of
this genus.
In Cryptobranchus, the nasal capsule is not formed until about
two weeks from the time of hatching. At about five weeks,
slender trabeculz unite at the middle line in a small planum ba-
sale, differing from other salamanders in that the dorsal surface
_is convex and bears a median swelling which may be the be-
ginning of the planum verticale. Its cephalic edge is straight, its
caudal region extended backward. The planum tectale on each
side is broad, covering dorsal and lateral parts of the olfactory
sac. The cornu trabecule on each side instead of being broad is
narrow. From each trabecule there is a lateral backward extend-
ing process which Higgins considers the antrobital, but it bends
backwards without anterior projection to the pterygoquadrate.
In a later stage the planum basale and verticale support the olfac-
tory lobes with the capsules united by a broad planum basale
without a median caudal lobe. The cornu trabeculz is now united
to the anterior extension of the broad planum tectale. The bar of
cartilage extending from the trabeculze backwards has extended
back to unite with the anterior end of the pterygo-quadrate bar
which extends back to the otic region. This unique condition rec-
ognized by Higgins in Cryptobranchus is similar to that found by
Wiedersheim in Ranodon, but according to Higgins is lost in
adult Cryptobranchus and } “Megalobatricus.
124
BULLETIN, ‘So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
0.0.
0: IG
\ H
=>
Ron cr
V0.
jh)
v
PLATE 38
Olfactory parts of salamanders. Scale equals 1 mm. in 6, 7, 8, 12, 13,
14 and A-H. Scale equals one-tenth mm. in 1-5. Scale equals one
micron in 9 and one hundredth mm. in 10.
1-5. Various sections of the olfactory region on one side of Des-
mognathus fuscus of 30 mm. total length. Mucous membrane fine stip-
pling; cartilage wider stippling; bone darker.
6. Superficial gland of Plethodon glutinosus, larger opening.
7. Same of Eurecea gutolineata.
8. Same of Batrachoseps.
9. Olfactory mucous membrane from Necturus, showing epithelium,
125
Buiterin, So. Cari. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol, 50, Part 3, 1951
[ found no indication of it in adult Cryptobranchus but I did
see it ina larval Cryptobranchus which was probably older than
the last stage described by Higgins, judged from the other parts
of the larva.
In Necturus there is no true nasal skeleton up to about 25 mm,
total length, but at about 20 mm. the trabeculz are almost united
in one specimen which I have examined although in this there is
little expansion of their ends. In a specimen of about 30 mm. the
trabeculze are united across the middle line with the formation
of p. verticale and p. basale which form the central plate between
the trabeculz and isolated ethmoid columns are developed. In a
larva of 45 mm. the ethmoid columns begin to form fenestrated
plates, which here and in the adult are quite different from those
of other families of Amphibia. The antrorbital processes are
also evident.
In Amphiuma after the expansion of the cornu trabeculz
there is a narrow connection across the middle line just below
these expansions. From the trabecule farther back lateral ex-
tensions run forward ending 1n two projections, the inner repre-
senting the ethmoid column, the outer the lamina externa,
A little later the narrow connection from side to side becomes
broader to form the planum basale and the forward ends of the
crista trabeculze or rather lateral and forward extensions from it
form rings of cartilage, a special condition in Amphiuma. In a
specimen of about 80 mm, total length, a circumnasal ring men-
tioned in the last stage is marked, the c. etmoidalis is very slender,
the p. basale is broad, the p. antrorbitalis larger. At this early
stage the large dorsal fontanelle is evident, and the ventral fonta-
nelle is even more marked. In the adult there are a number of
changes: the dorsal surface has two fontanelles dorsally, one
quite small and the large one ventrally located; the p. basale has
changed in form and more slender elements are fused in. the
capsule.
So far as they have been followed the olfactory skeletons of
the Plethodontidz in young and older stages do not differ greatly
from the general plan of development.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 38
blood vessel at the side, connective tissue below and cartilage below
this. Cells in dark olfactory nerve cells.
10. Cross section of olfactory region of a small Siren. This shows
cartilage, bone, mucous membrane with inner glands at the right.
12. Diagram of olfactory muscles, after Bruner from Salamandra.
Deep shading nasal cavity.
13. Nasal muscles of Desmognathus.
14. Diagram of the probable muscular arrangement in Amphiuma,
Siren and Necturus. Nasal opening light.
A-H. Nasal openings of various forms, scale 1 mm. for all. A, Siren.
B, Ambysytoma. C. Cryptobranchus. D, Hynobius. H, Triturus. F
Amphiuma. G, Necturus. H, Plethodon, more enlarged than the rest.
126
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bawden, H. H.
1894. The nose and Jacobson’s organ with especial reference to
Amphibia. Jour. Comp. Neurol. v. 4, pp. 117-152.
Beard, J.
1889. The nose and Jacobson’s organ. Morph. Jahrb. Bd. 2, pp.
577-646.
Bruner, H. L.
1896. Ein neuer Muskelapparat zum Schliessen und Offnen der
Nasenlocher bei den Salamandriden. Anat Anz. Bd. 12, pp.
Dilan
1901. The smooth facial muscles of Anura and Salamandra. Morph.
Jahrb. Bd. 29, pp. 3817-64.
1914. Jacobson’s organ and the respiratory mechanism of amphib-_
jans. Morph. Jahrb. Bd. 48, pp. 157-65.
Burckhardt, R.
1891. Untersuchungen an Hirn und Geruchsorgan von Triton und
Ichthyophis. Zeit. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. 52. pp. 369-403.
Cope, E. D.
1889. The Batrachia of North America. Bull. 8. 'S. Nat. Mus. no. 34.
Herrick, C. J.
1921. The connections of the vomero-nasal nerve, accessory olfactory
bulb and amygdala in Amphibia. Jour. comp. neurol. v. 23, pp.
213-280.
Higgins, G. M.
1920. The nasal organs of Amphibia. Il]. biol. momog. v. 6, pp. 1-90.
Hinsberg, A.
1901. Die Entwicklung der Nasenhole bei Amphibien Arch. £. mikr.
Anat. Bd. 58, pp. 411-482.
Kurepina, M.
1927. Entwicklung der primaren Choanen bei Amphibien. II Teil,
Urodela. Rev. Zool. Russe. T. 8, pp. 28-30.
Mihalkovics, V. von
1898-9. Nasenhohle und Jacobson’sches Organ. Anat. Hefte, 34-5 Hft.
Bd. 11, Hft. i, 2. pp. 1-100, 101-7.
Navratil, D. von
1896. Ueber das Jacobson’sche Organ der Wirbeltiere. Zeit. schr. ges.
Anat. Abt. 1. Bd. 81, pp. 648-56.
Seydel, O.
1895. Ueber die Nasenhohle und das Jacobson’sche Organ der Am-
phibien. Morph. Jahrb. Bd. 23, pp. 453-543.
Wiedersheim, R.
1887. Das Kopfskelet der Urodelen. Morph. Jahrb. Bd. 3, pp. 352-448.
459-548.
Zukerkandl, H.
1910. Ueber die Wechselbeziehung in der Ausbildung des Jacob-
son’schen Organ und des Riechlappens nebst Bermerkungen
ueber das Jacobson’schen der Amphibien. Anat. Hefte I, Bd. 41,
pp. 1-73.
127
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. AG. ADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol, 50, Part 3, 1951
SYMPATRIC POPULATIONS OF BATRACHOSEPS
ATTENUATUS AND BATRACHOSEPS
PACIFICUS IN SOUTHERN
CALIFORNIA
By Cuarctes H. Lowe, Jr. and RicHarp G, ZweEIreEt*
The species vs. subspecies problem concerning the plethodontid
salamanders Batrachoseps attenuatus and B. pacificus has not
been adequately resolved due to lack of sufficient information con-
cerning populations of these forms where they co-exist in southern
California. During the past few years we have investigated sev-
eral areas in southern California and Baja California with this
problem in mind and recently have obtained additional evidence
concerning the probable specific distinctness of these forms. In
the present paper we are concerned with the problem of the spe-
cific or subspecific status of the salamanders and shall in addition
discuss some of the several distinctive populations which occur
within each entity.
B. attenuatus and B. pacificus are clearly morphologically dis-
tinct. B. pacificus attains a larger size and possesses proportional
differences, the most conspicuous of which are longer limbs and
larger head. They are equally distinct in coloration as well as in
size. B, attenuatus has greater intensities of melanic pigmenta-
tion and greater development of guanophores on all surfaces.
There is great variation in the amounts of guanophores present
in each, but we have observed a constant and absolute difference
in the distribution of these cells in the southern California popu-
lations which we have studied. Whereas both possess bluish or
whitish guanophores distributed over the ventral surfaces as
small (0.1 to 0.2 mm. in diameter), single cells, they are of much
greater abundance in B. attenuatus in which form they are equally
abundant on the ventral surface of the tail as on the other ventral
surfaces. In B. pacificus they are less abundant in general and
absent or virtually absent from the mid-ventral surface of the tail.
As there are from approximately 100 to as many as 300 of these
light cells on the ventral surface of the tail of B. attenuatus, this
character is particularly useful in segregating the two forms when
alive, inasmuch as it is dichotomous. However, this difference is
by no means requisite to distinguish between the two entities once
their total and marked differences are understood.
*Department of Zoology, University of Arizona, and Museum of Vertebrate
Zoology, University of California.
128
pent a
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
2+ %y
Berry Campbell (1931) described an overlapping occurrence
of B. attenuatus and B. pacificus in Los Angeles County, Cali-
fornia, and concluded that they represented distinct species since
they maintained their morphological distinctness where he found
them side by side and under the same boards which afforded
cover. Bishop (1943) and Hilton (1946) subsequently treated
B. pacificus and its races as subspecies of B. attenwatus. Stebbins
and Lowe (1949), however, followed Campbell in the suggestion
that these forms are distinct species.
In a letter (January 5, 1950), Dr. Campbell kindly provided
the authors with excellent directions for finding the spot where
he first found the two salamanders together as reported in 1931.
Using these instructions, on January 19, 1950, we were able to find
both species living together at the same spot where they were first.
observed approximately 20 years before. Here the two forms
maintain their characteristic morphological differences, no inter-
mediates being found. This locality is in a residential district at
Monterey Road and Palm Avenue in South Pasadena, Los An-
geles County, California.
In March, 1949, we collected both B. attenuatus and B. pa-
cificus within one mile of one another in similar habitats along
the foothills of the Santa Ana Mountains in Orange County, Cali-
fornia. In attempts to find both forms at the same locality and if
possible under the same rocks or logs, we returned to this area in
December, 1949, and in March, 1950, and succeeded on both
occasions in finding individuals of both species under the same
rock at 4.7 miles southeast of Irvine Park, Orange County, Cali-
fornia, Plates 40 and 41 show the habitat of B. pacificus and B.
attenuatus at this locality. Over 100 B. attenwatus and no B.
pacificus have been collected under logs, chips of bark, and rocks
on the ground under the canopy of the live oaks (Quercus agri-
folia) lining and growing in the narrow drainageway. All 15 of
the B. pacificus and six B. attenuatus were found under logs and
rocks which were out in the open on the grass covered substratum
without tree shade, including the rock shown in Plate 41. Here
individuals of B. pacificus were found under rocks and logs near
or in the mouths of holes made by the pocket gopher (Thomomys
botte). One large adult escaped down a gopher hole when its
covering rock was turned.
B. pacificus was taken only at the foot of the grass-covered
hills, whereas the majority of B. attenuatus were found higher
up and in the immediate vicinity of the oak-canopied drainage-
way. We found the adults of both B. pacificus and B,. attenwatus
under two of the rocks (approximate size 26’x 32°x11”) at the
base of the hill and in the open a few feet from the shade of the
oaks. In this area the two salamanders remain well segregated
into two different effective environments and they overlap with-
out evident gene exchange where the habitats adjoin. In the
129
BuLLetin, So. CALie, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 8, 1951
effective environment of the smaller, more worm-like B. attenu-
aftus, numerous earth-worm holes, as well as crevices in the soil
about the roots of the trees, are available for the salamanders as
dry season (summertime) retreats. In the effective environment
of the larger and less numerous P. pacificus, holes made by the
pocket gopher are available and are used for access to more suit-
able conditions when the ground surface is uninhabitable. In
this connection, it may be pertinent to remark that in several
years of field experience with these and other western salaman-
ders, we have never found evidence that the salamanders them-
selves burrow in the soil, yet they must retreat beneath the surface
of the ground or into other moisture sufficient places during the
dry summer season.
At another nearby locality, 13.3 miles southeast of Irvine
Park, we found both species a few yards from one another be-
neath and within fallen live oak logs under live oak woodland
canopy varying from 50 percent to 75 percent. At this locality
some B. pacificus show very slight, though more than usual re-
semblance to B. attenuatus in guanism of the dorsal surfaces,
while B. attenwatus oceurring sympatrically here with B. pacificus
show no B. pacificus characters. This suggests the possibility of
introgression of B. attenuatus genes into B. pacificis at this area
of geographic contact. If introgression has occurred, it is sug-
gested that it may have been only one way, 1.e. from the smaller
B. attenuatus into the larger B. pacificus.
An interesting interiorly located population of Batrachoseps
was found in 1949 at five miles southeast of Redlands, San Ber-
nardino County, by Mr. Kenneth S. Norris of Los Angeles. This
population, while obviously resembling B. pacificus, shows some
tendency in the direction of B. attenuatus. In March, 1950, an
additional series of twelve specimens was collected from this
locality and studied while alive; the data thus obtained are sum-
marized in Table 1. In order to provide a better basis for the
understanding of these data, a more detailed comparison of the
pigmentation of an adult B. pacificus and an adult B. attenuatus
from the area of sympatry in Orange County (4.7 mi. SE Irvine
Park) is presented below. In view of the similarity of the Red-
lands population to B. pacificus, and because it is well isolated
interiorly from the nearest B. attenuatus known to us, we are of
the opinion that it represents a geographic variant of B. pacificus
rather than the alternative of a hybrid population with introgres-
sion of B. attenuatus genes into B. pacificus. Neither interpreta-
tion, however, vitiates the concept that B. pacificus and B. attenu-
atus are distinct species.
Batrachoseps pacificus —Coloration—Ground color of upper
surfaces light pinkish-brown from tip of snout to tip of tail,
lighter on legs and feet. Melanophores form a continuous net-
work (e, g. mid-dorsally) surrounding oval-shaped, gray colored
130
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
areas immediately surrounding gland orifices. All upper surfaces
including legs and feet with sparse scattering of small (0.1-0.2
mm. diameter) bluish or grayish-white guanophores; approxi-
mately 90 on head and neck, 150 on body and 50 on tail. In addi-
tion to these larger whitish guanophores there is a second and
more abundant type (which may not be true guanophores) which
is generally smaller and colored either sparkling gold, yellow, or
orange. These do not form a conspicuous dorsal band (as in
attenuatus) but are occasionally clumped to form small reddish
or brown-orange patches which are most conspicuous on the tail.
Ground color of lower surfaces lighter, being faint pinkish-brown.
Melanophores tend to be separated as individual cells rather than
as a continuous network as on upper surfaces which are darker.
Ventrally, guanophores are pale in color and less abundant; 7 in.
throat area, 21 on abdomen, none on tail. Dorsolateral and lateral
body areas have greatest abundance of guanophores. Jris with
good scattering of sparkling orange and yellow guanophores in
upper half and with 3 or 4 small flecks in lower half.
Batrachoseps attenuatus—Coloration.—Ground color of up-
per surfaces black to blackish-brown; intensity of melanic pig-
mentation most reduced on legs and feet. Melanophores (e. g.
mid-dorsally) do not form an apparent network encompassing
grayish oval-shaped areas, but appear solid black both macro-
scopically and microscopically under low powers of magnification.
Higher powers of magnification reveal an essentially network
arrangement of melanophores surrounding lighter areas at the
orifices of the glands. Small (0.1-0.2 mm. diameter) individual
bluish guanophores are distributed more or less evenly over the
dorsal surfaces ; approximately 55 on head and neck, 90 on body
and 40 on tail. They are more deeply blue colored and somewhat
less abundant on upper surfaces than in B. pacificus. The second
type of sparkling gold and yellow colored guanophores are vastly
more abundant than in B. pacificus and form a dorsal band or
suffusion from tip of snout to tip of tail. They occur in reduced
abundance on lateral surfaces of body where they are separated
from the main dorsal band by irregular dorso-lateral stripes of
dark ground color. The ground color of the lower surfaces is
lighter, being blackish to blackish-brown. Melanophores form a
dense network not unlike the dorsal surface of B. pacificus. Small
bluish guanophores present are darker blue (possibly because of
darker underlying ground color) and much more abundant than
in B, pacificus; approximately 360 on head and neck, 700 on ab-
domen and 300 on tail. Jris with a good scattering of sparkling
light yellow guanophores in upper half and 3 or 4 small flecks in
lower half.
In addition to the sympatric populations now known from
both Los Angeles and Orange Counties, Campbell (op. cit.) has
reported that both B. attenuatus and B. pacificus occur together on
131
BuLLetin, So. Catir,. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
Santa Cruz Island, Santa Barbara County, California (Plate 39).
Mr. John Hendrickson of Berkeley, California, has recently con-
firmed the presence of both species on this island and has kindly
allowed us to mention this discovery. B. attenuatus is known
from no other channel island. Insular populations of B. pacificus
are known on Santa Catalina, Santa Cruz, San Miguel and Ana-
capa Islands off the coast of southern California. Both Bishop
(op. cit.) and Hilton (op. cit.) have included Santa Barbara Is-
land within the range of B. pacificus, but this is unlikely since
they cite no specimens and none was collected there during the
course of the Los Angeles County Museum Channel Islands Bi-
ological Survey. The “northern group” of islands (not including
Santa Barbara Island) is frequently referred to as the “Santa
Barbara Islands.” This situation is a source of confusion con-
tributing to the probably erroneous reference of batrachoseps to
the meager fauna of Santa Barbara Island, which so far as is
known includes only one reptile (Xantusia riversiana) and no
amphibians.
As now known, the mainland distribution of B. Pacificus is
within the drainage syStems of the Los Angeles, San Gabriel and
Santa Ana Rivers and, roughly, is the southern California coastal
plain. Locality records range from near the ocean (Long Beach)
north to the edge of the San Gabriel Mountains and northeast
(interiorly) to the variant population reported herein at five miles
southeast of Redlands. In contradistinction, Batrachoseps atten-
watus in southern California is found in the foothills and moun-
tain canyons (Upper Sonoran Life-zone), usually associated with
live oaks and/or chaparral. B. pacificus, inhabiting more level
areas which are lower zonally, overlaps B. attenwatus in areas
where the transition from mountains to plain is made less abrupt
by the presence of a belt of low foothills. At other places, as
along the south edge of the San Gabriel Mountains, the line of
demarkation may be quite sharp.
To summarize, we have found B. attenuatus and B. pacificus
in the same habitats in Orange County, California, and have con-
firmed Campbell’s report that they co-exist in Los Angeles
County, California. In both counties, embracing nearly the entire
latitudinal mainland distribution of the restricted species B. pa-
cificus, individuals of each entity may be found under the same
cover such as rocks and boards. Both species maintain their dis-
tinctive identities although breeding populations occur side by
side. Thus it appears, so far as our present information goes, that
B. attenuatus and B, pacificus represent two closely related but
distinct species.
A new geographic variant of B. pacificus, significantly dis-
tinct from the known remainder of this highly geographically
restricted species is reported from five miles southeast of Red-
lands, San Bernardino County, California. This population shows
132
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
"a
a degree of intermediacy in characters of B. pacificus and B.
attenuatus. The possibility that it represents a former introgres-
sion of genes of B. attenuatus into B. pacificus is discussed. Re-
gardless of whether this population (or others) represents intro-
gression or whether it represents geographic variation within B.
pacificus as is suggested, it does not vitiate the concept that two
distinct entities are involved, each representing an approximately,
if not completely, closed genetic system.
x BATRACHOSEPS ATTENUATUS
© BATRACHOSEPS PACIFICUS
aay? SSeS ® SYMPATRY
‘
> '
=
'
'
1 venTuRA co
'
'
!
'
'
‘
’
x
rons,
J ORANGE CO. NF
SAN OIEGO CO.
gS sanral catala
SAM MICOLAS
An CLEWENTE
PLATE 39
PLATE 40
Buttetin, So. Carir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 8, 1951
EXPLANATION OF PLATES ON PAGE 133
Plate 39. Distribution of Batrachoseps in southern California. All
records for B. pacificus represent specimens examined by the authors.
B, attenuatus records include literature records.
Plate 40. Live-oak woodland-grassland habitat of Batrachoseps atten-
uatus and B. pacificus 4.7 mi. SE Irvine Park, Orange Co., California.
B, pacificus was found only in the uncanopied grassy area in the fore-
ground. B. attenuatus occurred abundantly in the drainageways shaded
by live oaks (Quercus agrifolia) and sparingly in the open, grassy area,
Plate 41. Close-up view of the large rock (26”%x32”’x11”), shown in
foreground of Plate 40, under which individuals of both B. pacificus and
B. attenuatus were found.
LITERATURE CITED
Bishop, S. C.
1943. Handbook of salamanders (Ithaca, Comstock Pub. Co.), xiv +
555 pp., 1 pl., 144 figs., 56 maps.
Campbell, B.
1931. Notes on Batrachoseps. Copeia, No. 2: 131-134.
Hilton, W. A.
1946. Contributions from the Los Angeles County Museum Channel
Islands Biological Survey, No. 32—Distribution of the genus
Batrachoseps, especially on the costal [sic] islands of southern
California. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci., 44: 101-129, 5 pls.
Stebbins, R. C. and C. H. Lowe, Jr.
1949. The systematic status of Plethopsis with a discussion of speci-
ation in the genus Batrachoseps. Copeia, No. 2: 116-129.
Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
BULLETIN, ‘So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
z)
yuepunqge
ssorT
él —N
snoyiond UL SB )
2} VIPSULII}UL G
(7X91 998)
od} , SNOYOe_,,
GL —N
snayind UL SB 9
‘o}eIPIUII}UL 9
goeyans
[epneoqns-prur
woIy JWOSqV
[rey Jo dry uo
A[UO JUDSOIg
6. = N
(0°%S-0°0F)
be 0 + OV PP
6—N
(0°3r-0' FE)
820 + 8ELE
(soTyUNOdD osuUvIO
pue sojesuy soT,)
snoyrvond °F
(AJUNOD OUTpPIvUIOg URS
‘spuv[pey WS ‘Tu g)
snoyvnd °F
CCN (soTjUNOD 9sUvIO
(7x07 908) jyuepundy (0°68-G28) pue se[esuy SorT)
yuepunqy eddy ,.snyenuoe}ty,, €l'0 = P0'9E SNYDNUWALWD *F
NYAGLVd SUTOMAON VN) SUALANITILW NI
NINWIQW TVLOL
HIOMdON VAD TVSUOd
IvdNvorgdns
TLLONAT INWASLAONS
LXHL FHL NI Gassnosid SNOILVINdOd 1O NOSTYVd WO) 2] ATAV I
LL
135
BULLETIN, So. Canter, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
THE ISOPODAN GENUS JAIS (CRUSTACEA) *
By R. J. Menzies and J. LAurENS BARNARD
Research Fellows
Allan Hancock Foundation
INTRODUCTION
The genus /ais contains very small asellote isopods which are
found in association with isopods of the family Sphzromidze.
None of the species which we have seen was collected from outside
of this association and we believe that reports of Jais alone, with-
out a sphzeromid, are possibly in error (Chilton, 1892, pp. 266- 267).
We have had occasion to observe /ais californica (Richardson) on
Spheroma pentodon Richardson, where they were found on the
dorsum, ventral surface, and between the leaf-like pleopods. A
few were found on the sides of the burrows occupied by the host.
Initially this project had as its purpose only the redescription
of Jais californica (Richardson). This, Richardson had placed in
the genus Janiropsis. Since Vanhoffen (1914, pp. 530-531), Mo-
nod (1926, pp. 13-14), and Nordenstam (1933, p. 179) were of
the opinion that only one species existed in the world, e.g., Jais
pubescens (Dana), it became necessary for us to procure speci-
mens of J, pubescens with which to compare the Californian
species. Specimens of J. pubescens, including some samples which
had been examined by Bovallius, the author of the genus Jais,
were sent to us by Dr. Karl Lang of the Swedish State Museum
in Stockholm, and we offer our gratitude to him and the Swedish
State Museum for the privilege they so generously extended. The
work was carried out under the auspices of the Allan Hancock
Foundation in the laboratory of Dr. John S. Garth to whom we
extend our thanks for the use of facilities and equipment,
In the paper we redescribe Jais pubescens (Dana), consider
I, californica (Richardson) a valid species, and present the de-
scription of a new species from the Philippine Islands and Singa-
pore.
GENERIC REMARKS
When Bovallius (1887, p. 50) described the genus Jais he did
not designate a type species. He did mention two species: the
first was his own, J. hargeri, and this he described in detail; the
second, J. pubescens (Dana), he assigned to the genus with some
doubt because of differences between Dana’s description and his
=Contribution No. 90 from The Allan Hancock Foundation, The University of
Southern California, Los Angeles 7, California.
136
BULLETIN, ‘So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
specimens, and because some omissions made by Dana made him
uncertain whether it belonged to his new genus. Bovallius did
not see Dana’s material collected at Nassau Bay, Tierra del Fuego,
from Spheroma, and which as far as we know has been destroyed.
Bovallius’ species was collected from the Strait of Magellan, but
no mention was made as to whether it was taken from a sphzero-
mid. From certain of Dana’s figures (not his description which is
inaccurate in a few important details) and from Bovallius’ de-
scription it appears that both were dealing with the same species.
This supposition was made very early by Stebbing (1900, pp. 548-
549) who made exceptional allowances for errors in Dana’s fig-
ures and descriptions which we did not feel worth accepting until
we had examined specimens from the type localities. We have
seen specimens from both localities (from sphzromids) and as
far as we can tell only one species is represented. The type of J.
hargeri is apparently lost for good because the vial which should
have contained it had a species of asellote so different from J.
hargeri (fide Bovallius) that Dr. Lang suggested (in letter) that
an exchange had probably occurred at some time and a specimen
belonging to a different genus substituted. Certainly, there is no
way to clear up the confusion at this late date.
Only two important errors appear in the original description
of the genus. First, a small although evident rostrum does exist
and second, the dactyls of the perzeopoda are not all triunguicu-
late. The dactyls of the first pair are biunguiculate, having the in-
ferior claw bifid, exactly as figured by Dana. As in several genera
of the Asellota, the dactyls of the other perzeopoda are triungui-
culate.
Genus [ats Bova.L.ius, 1887
Type specres.—lAts Harcert Bovyallius, 1887—J#RA PUBESCENS
Dana, 1852.
Diagnosis —(modified after Bovallius.) Eyes present, each
consisting of two facets. First antenna with six articles. Second
antenna without a scale. Epimeral plates visible in dorsal view on
all pereeonal somites. Lateral margins of pereonal somites not
deeply incised, borders setiferous. Apex of male first pleopod not
widely expanded laterally. Third pleopod without plumose sete
on endopod. Dactyls of first pereeopods with two claws; those of
others with three claws. First two articles of maxillipedal palp as
wide as endite; apical three articles much narrower than endite.
Mandible with a triarticulate palp and with an evident, elongate,
apically blunt molar process.
Composition.—Nierstrasz (1941, pp. 287-288) appears to be
the most recent writer to treat this genus. He records two species,
I. pubescens (Dana) including the var. longistylis Chilton (Chil-
137
BuLietin, So, Catrr, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
ton, 1912, p. 131), and J. hargeri Bovallius as belonging to the
genus and remarks, “Beide Formen sind wahrscheinlich identisch,
und weil keine anderen Arten von /Jais bekannt sind, hat dann die
einzige Art eine sudlichcircumpolare universelle Verbreitung.”
This remark, which clearly is in accord with prior opinion con-
cerning the distribution, we feel is partly incorrect. It is conceiv-
able that J. pubescens (Dana) is a circumpolar antarctic species
but from the evidence we have seen it is improbable that the spe-
cies is universally distributed. Most of the references to the spe-
cies J. pubescens are notes on occurrence. Usually no additional
figures or description are given. This is probably because of the
belief that only one species existed and hence nothing further
was needed. We prefer to place mere references to the species
from localities far removed from the type locality in a list of spe-
cies inquirende. The collection and study of material from the
localities referred to might assist in the correct assignment of the
disputed synonyms to their proper species.
A KEy TO THE SPECIES OF THE GENUS [AIS
1. Inferior (accessory) claw of dactyl of first perzeopod bifid.
prec Shale o at ranche eet ash con ages uate sede At are Cat eto a pubescens (Dana)
1. Inferior claw of dactyl of first perzeopod simple, not bifid... .2.
i)
»Masalliped with three coupling’ hooks. = 5-3 5= eee er
DuPage ere cae ks es lhe ch Pes Pa californica (Richardson).
eS)
/Maxilliped with two coupling hooks.. ©. 3/7. ae eee
SO ee ic Fate Eke eros aoSist Rater My nha singaporensis new species.
IAIS PUBESCENS (Dana)
Plates 42-43
SynonyMs.—-Je@ra pubescens Dana, 1852, p. 744, atlas, pl. 49,
figs. 9a-d—Beddard, 1886, pp. 19-20, pl. II, figs.
6-10.
Tais Hargeri Boyallius, 1886, pp. 50-51.
Tais pubescens (Dana).—Bovallius, 1886, pp. 51-
52.—Stebbing, 1900, pp. 549-551—Chilton, 1909,
pp. 649-650.—Vanhoffen, 1914, pp. 530-531.—
Stephensen, 1927, p. 356— Monod, 193la, p. 13.—
Nordenstam, 1933, pp. 177-179, fig. 41—Nierstrasz,
1941, pp. 287-288.
Diagnosis.—First antenna about one seventh as long as body
and one fifth as long as second antenna. Second antenna more
than two thirds as long as body; flagellum with twenty-six ar-
138
| BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
ticles. Maxilliped with two coupling hooks. Perezonal somite 4
overlaps the borders of somites 3 and 5. Perzonal sete moder-
ately developed. Inferior claw of dactyl of perzopods one to
seven bifid. Lateral subapical processes of sympod of male first
pleopods diverging, subacute, each with a laterally located notch;
medial processes triangulate, provided with four marginal sete.
Pleotelson longer than wide, posterior border evenly rounded.
PLATE 42
Iais pubescens (Dana). a, toto, adult female. 6b, maxilliped. c, apex of
male first pleopods. d, apical parts of left mandible. Figures with similar
magnification (indicated by mm. scale); a; b; ¢, d.
BULLETIN, So, CAnir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
Uropod one third as long as pleotelson, endopod as long as pe-
duncle, exopod shorter than endopod. Operculum of female pyri-
form, with a truncated process on posterior edge.
Type locality—Nassau Bay, Tierra del Fuego (Dana, 1852,
p. 744).
Material cramined.—We have examined the material men-
tioned by Nordenstam (1933, p. 179) from the Falkland Islands,
PLATE 43
Iais pubescens (Dana). a, male second pleopod. b, male fourth pleopod.
c, uropod ‘and apex of telson. d, male third pleopod. e, dactyl of first
pereopod, female. f, operculum of female. g, first antenna. h, dactyl of
seventh pereopod, female. Figures with similar magnification: a, d, g;
NES Oy (Me
140
—
=
BULLETIN, ‘So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
Magellan Straits, and Tierra del Fuego. This material was col-
lected by the “Eugenie” Expedition, the Swedish Expedition to
Tierra del Fuego, and the Swedish Antarctic Expedition.
Remarks.—For reasons given earlier we believe J. hargeri
Bovallius to equal J. pubescens (Dana). Stebbing (1900, p. 549)
was also of this opinion but it seems he was too liberal in supply-
ing J. pubescens with synonyms. We prefer to place some of his
synonyms ina species inqurende list. One species, J/@ra antartica
Pfeffer (1887, pp. 134-136, pl. 7), belongs to Neojera ( Norden-
stam, 1933, pp. 187-189) and not to Jais.
Distribution.—Iais pubescens (Dana) appears to be an Ant-
arctic circumpolar species, having been taken at the following lo-
cations: Falkland Isls., Tierra del Fuego and vicinity (Norden-
stam, 1933). Kerguelen (Beddard, 1886; Vanhoffen, 1914),
Auckland and Campbell Isls. (Chilton, 1909; Monod, 1931la), and
Tasmania (Stephensen, 1927).
TAIS CALIFORNICA (Richardson)
Plates 44-45
SYNONYMS.—JANIROPSIS CALIFORNICA Richardson, 1904a,
pp. 223-224.—1904b, pp. 666-667.—1905,
p. 455, figs. 507-508.
Diagnosis—First antenna about one sixth the length of the
body and nearly three tenths as long as the second antenna. Sec-
ond antenna about six tenths the length of the body; flagellum
with twenty four articles. Maxilliped with three coupling hooks.
Perzonal somite 4 overlapping the border of somite 3 but over-
lapped by the border of the fifth somite; perzeonal sete moder-
ately developed. Inferior claw of dactyl of pereeopods one to
seven simple, not bifid. Lateral subapical processes of sympod of
male first pleopod not diverging laterally, lateral margins smooth;
medial processes subtriangulate, provided with 5 marginal sete.
Pleotelson wider than long, posterior border medially produced
into a lobe. Uropod slightly more than one half as long as
pleotelson; rami subequal in length, twice as long as peduncle.
Operculum of female wide, with a small, rounded, medial process
on distal margin.
Types.—These have been lost, according to Dr. Fenner A.
Chace, Jr., Curator of Marine Invertebrates at the United States
National Museum, Washington, D. C.
Type localty.—Sausalito, California, collected by Dr. Ritter
and party (Richardson, 1905, p. 455).
141
Buriterr, So. Cartier, ACADEMY or SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
Material examined.—Hamlet, Tomales Bay, Marin County,
California, August 18, 1948, coll. R. J. Menzies, in excess of 50
specimens from Spheroma pentodon Richardson and the burrows
of Spheroma in submerged wood,
Distribution—Tomales Bay to Sausalito, San Francisco Bay,
Marin County, California,
Remarks.—Assuming that our material and hers are conspe-
cific, Richardson’ S description of the species is incorrect in several
details. Some of these are corrected in the above diagnosis but a
few additional remarks are needed. The eyes are compound and
not simple; the margins of the pleotelson are not smooth, but are
covered with numerous setée; all perteopods except the first have
triunguiculate dactyls.
PLATE 44
Iais californica (Richardson). a, toto, female. b, maxilliped. c, first
maxilla. Magnification as indicated by mm. scale.
142
BULLETIN, ‘So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
This species differs from the others belonging to the genus in
having very long uropods and in having three coupling hooks on
each maxilliped.
One adult male was 2.7 mm. long and 1.0 mm. in greatest
width. Richardson gave no measurements,
PLATE 45
Iais californica (Richardson). a, second maxilla. 6, first antenna. c,
female operculum. d, second antenna. e, male first pleopods. f, seventh
pereopod. g, male second pleopod. h, male third pleopod. i, left man-
dible. k, first pereopod. Figures with similar magnification: a, b, e, i,
IS C, if 9; h, k; dL.
143
BuLLETIN, So. CALIF. Aca ADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
[AIS SINGAPORENSIS, new species
Plates 46-50
SyNONYMs.—None.
Diagnosis. —First antenna short, about one fifth the length of
the body and one third as long as the second antenna. Second
antenna slightly less than two thirds as long as body; flagellum
with twenty articles. Maxilliped with two coupling hooks. Perz-
onal somite 4+ overlaps the border of somite 3, but 1s overlapped
on its posterior border by the fifth somite. Inferior claw of dac-
tyls of perseopods one to seven simple, not bifid. Lateral subapical
processes of sympod of male first pleopods not diverging, medial
processes with rounded, slightly acute, apices; each with five to
eight marginal sete. Pleotelson slightly wider than long, apical
process rounded, very noticeable. Uropod one half to one third
as long as pleotelson, rami subequal in length, longer than pedun-
cle. Female operculum wide, with a pronounced apical lobe.
Types.—Holotype male, length 1.7 mm., width 0.7 mm. Allo-
type, ovigerous, length 2.3 mm., width 0.85 mm. Thirty paratypes.
Six paratypes donated to the Swedish State Museum and six do-
nated to the Allan Hancock Foundation. The other types have
been returned to the Raffles Museum, Singapore.
Type locality.—Seletar and Ponggel, Singapore Island, May-
June, 1950, types, on Spheroma sp., collected by the Raffles Mu-
seum and lent to the writers by Dr. Tweedie, carcinologist.
Material examined.—(exclusive of types). Dungun, Treng-
ganu, east coast of Malaya, December, 1950, 3 males, 12 females,
on Spheroma sp., collected by the Department of Forestry, Raf-
fles Museum collection.
Sungei, Patani, Kedah, Malaya, February, 1951, 2 males, 21
females, on Spheroma sp., collected by the Department of For-
estry, Raffles Museum collection.
Dagatdagatan Saltwater Experiment Station, near Manila,
Luzon, Philippine Islands, December 12, 1949, 96 specimens, col-
lector Mr. Manuel Tiglao, Philippine Bureau of Fisheries.
Remarks.—The specimens from Singapore (Plates 46-47) and
those from the Philippine Isls. (Plates 48-50), as the figures indi-
cate, are very different in some respects. Specimens from Dungun
and Sungei, Malaya, which we received from Dr. Tweedie, pos-
sessed characteristics intermediate between the two. This pos-
sibly indicates that a “rassenkreis” involving two or possibly more
subspecies is represented. Without further material we do not
feel it advisable to establish subspecies. We are, however, rea-
sonably certain that only one species is inv olved. This species
resembles J. californica (Richardson) in having long uropods and
in having a simple inferior claw on the dactyls. of the perzeopods.
It differs conspicuously from /. californica in having only two
coupling hooks on each maxilliped.
144
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
PLATE 46
Tais singaporensis Menzies and Barnard, n. sp., paratype. a, toto, female.
b, first antenna. c, uropod. d, apex of first male pleopods. e, operculum
of female. Figures with similar magnification: a, e; b, c; d. (Sing-
apore).
SEP CIES Se IN@OUIRE NDAs
1. Jera nove-zealandie Chilton, 1883, p. 189 (Lyttelton Harbour,
New Zealand).
2. lais neo-zealanica (Chilton), Thomson, 1889, p. 265 (Auck-
land Harbour, New Zealand).
145
BuLbLerin, So. Catie, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 8, 1951
3. Jais pubescens (Dana), Thomson, 1893, p. 59 (New Zealand).
4. lais pubescens (Dana) var, longistyhs Chilton, 1912, p. 131
( Malborough Sound and Hawkes Bay, New Zealand, also from
Sydney Harbour).
es
oe
PLATE 47 |
Iais singaporensis Menzies and Barnard, n. sp., paratype. a, dactyl and
propod of seventh pereopod. b, male second pleopod. c, maxilliped. d,
dactyl and propod of first pereopod. All figures with similar magnifica-
tion. (Singapore).
|
,
[
146
BULLETIN, ‘So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
PLATE 48
Iais singaporensis Menzies and Barnard, n. sp. a, toto, male. 6b, fourth
pleopod, female. c, female operculum. d, second pleopod of male. Fig-
ures with similar magnification: a, c; b, d. (Philippine Isls.).
147
BULLETIN, So. Canir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
5. lais pubescens (Dana).
Chilton, 1892, pp. 266-267 (New Zealand) ; 1925, p. 319 (New
‘Zealand ).
Barnard, 1914, pp. 435-436, pl. XX XVII (Table Bay, South
Africa) ; possibly not Jas.
Monod, 1931, p. 1 (Douala Bay, Cameroun).
Stebbing, 1904, p. 10 (Negombo, Ceylon) ; 1917, p. 446 (Dur-
ban Bay, South Africa).
PLATE 49
Iais singaporensis Menzies and Barnard, n. sp. a, seventh perzopod.
b, right mandible. c, first pereopod. d, male first pleopods. All figures
with similar magnification. (Philippine Isls.).
148
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES | Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
| LITERATURE CITED
| Barnard, K. H.
1914. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa. 3. Addi-
tions to the marine Isopoda, with notes on some previously in-
completely known species. Ann. So. African Museum. 10 (16),
part XI, 325a-442, pls. XXVII-XXXVIII.
Beddard, F. E.
1886. Report on the Isopoda collected by H. M. S. Challenger during
the years 1873-76. in: Rep. Sci. Res. Voy. H. M. S. Challenger,
Zool., 17, pp. 1-175, pls. I-X XV. London.
Bovallius, C.
1886. Notes on the family Asellide. Bihang Kongl. Svenska Veten-
skaps-Akademiens Handlingar. /1 (15), part 2, pp. 1-54.
Chilton, C.
1883. On two new isopods. Trans. & Proc. N. Zealand Inst., 15 (15),
pp. 188-190, pl. XXIIa.
1892. Notes on some New Zealand Amphipoda and Isopoda. Trans.
| & Proc. N. Zealand Inst., n. ser., 7, 24 (18), pp. 258-269.
1909. The Crustacea of the subantarctic islands of New Zealand.
Subantarctic Islands of New Zealand, art. XXVI, pp. 600-671, 19
text figs., Wellington, New Zealand.
1912. Miscellaneous notes on some New Zealand Crustacea. Trans. &
Proc. N. Zealand Inst., n. issue, 44 (11), pp. 128-135.
1925. Some Amphipoda and Isopoda from the Chatham Islands. Rec.
Canterbury Museum. 2(5), pp. 317-320.
Dana, J. D.
1852. Crustacea: in U. S. Expl. Exped. (Charles Wilkes). Part 2,
Philadelphia, C. Sherman, editor, pp. 691-1018. (Atlas, 1855,
96 pls.).
Hale, H. M.
|
|
1929. The crustaceans of South Australia. Part 2. Handbooks of the
flora and fauna of South Australia, pp. 201-380. Jvlelaviele, Brit-
ish Guild. (Not seen by writers.)
Monod, Th.
1926. Tanaidacés, isopodes et amphipodes. Rés. Voyage de la Belgica
en 1897-99. Rapports Scientifiques. Zoologie Exped. Antarctique
Belge. pp. 1-67, 61 figs..
1931la. Tanaidacés et isopodes sub-antarctiques de tle collection Kohl-
Larsen du Senckenberg Museum. Senckenbergiana. 13(1), pp.
|
10-30.
1931b. Sur quelques crustacés aquatiques d’Afrique (Cameroun et
Congo). Rev. Zoologie et Bot. Africaines. 2/(1), pp. 1-36, 24
text figs.
Nierstrasz, H. F.
1941. Die Isopoden der Siboga-Expedition. IV. Isopoda Genuina.
Siboga-Exped., Monographie XXXIId, pp. 235-308, 66 text figs.,
EK. J. Brill, Leiden.
Nordenstam, A.
1933. Marine Isopoda. in: Further Zool.Res. Swedish Antarctic Exped.
1901-1903. 3 (1), pp. 1-284, 2 pls., 78 text figs.
Pfeffer, G.
1887. Die Krebse von Stid-Georgien. I. Jahrbuch Hamburg wissensch.
Anstalten. 4, pp. 43-150, pls. I-VII.
149
Butietin, So, Cari, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
0.05
PLATE. 50
Iais singaporensis Menzies and Barnard, n. sp. a, uropod. 6b, maxil-
liped. c, first antenna. d, left mandible. All figures with similar mag-
nification, (Philippine Isls.).
150
BuLietin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. | Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
Richardson, H. EH.
1904a. Isopod crustaceans of the northwest coast of North America.
Harriman Alaska Exped., Crust., X, pp. 213-230, New York.
1904b. Isopod crustaceans of the northwest coast of North America.
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 27, pp. 657-671.
1905. A monograph on the isopods of North America. Bull. U. S. Nat.
Mus., 54, 727 pp.
Stebbing, T. R. R.
1900. On come crustaceans from the Falkland Islands collected by
Mr. Rupert Vallentin. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., pp. 517-568, pls.
XXXVI-XXXIX.
1904. Gregarious Crustacea from Ceylon. Spolia Zeylanica (Colombo
Museum, Ceylon). 2, part 5, (1), pp. 1-29, 6 pls.
1917. The Malacostraca of Durban Bay, Ann. Durban Museum. 7, part
5, (22), pp. 485-450, pls. 22-238.
Stephensen, K.
1927. Crustacea from Auckland and Campbell Islands. Papers from
Dr. Th. Mortensen’s Pacific Exped. 1914-1916. XL. Vidensk.
Medd. fra Dansk Naturh. Foren. 83, pp. 289-390, 33 text figs.
Thomson, G. M.
1889. Notes on, and recent additions to, the New Zealand crustacean
fauna. Trans. & Proc. N. Zealand Inst., n. ser., 4, 21 (31), pp.
259-268, pls. 13-14.
1893. Notes on Tasmanian Crustacea, with descriptions of new spe-
cies. Papers & Proc. R. Soc. Tasmania. pp. 45-76.
Vanhoffen, E.
1914. Die Isopoden der deutschen Siidpolar-expedition 1901-1903.
Deutsche Stidpolar-Exped. 1901-1908. 75 Zoologie VII, pp. 449-
598, 132 text figs., G. Reimer, Berlin.
BULLETIN, So. CALIF, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW SPECIES OF MARINE
GASTROPODS FROM WEST MEXICO
AND COSTA RICA
By Leo GeorGe Hertiern and A. M. StTrRoNG
Studies of west American marine gastropods in the collections
of the California Academy of Sciences have revealed the presence
of two species which appear to be undescribed. One of these rep-
resented by seven specimens, referred to the genus Acmea, was
presented to the Academy in 1942 by Mr. and Mrs. Harry R.
Turver then residing in Santa Cruz, California, now in South
Gate, California. The other species, referred to the genus Alvamia,
was presented to the Academy in 1951 by Dr. Herman W. Miller,
formerly a resident of San José de Costa Rica, now residing in
Santa Clara, Cuba. These species are here described and illus-
trated.
The photographs were made by Mr. Frank L. Rogers.
ACM-EA TURVERI Hertlein & Strong, new species
Plate 51, Figures 1, 2 and 3
Shell rather small, broadly ovate, somewhat flattened, the apex
situated anteriorly about two thirds the length of the shell; ex-
terior surface mottled grayish-green and brown, sculptured with
10 low radiating ribs which scallop the margin, the entire surface
bearing very fine concentric and radiating striz; interior with
shallow grooves corresponding to the ribs, the apex with a pale
orange spot surrounded by a narrow bluish band encircled by a
similar pale orange band, in all occupying a little less than one
half of the interior surface, the remainder, pale bluish except for
a dark border at the margin. Dimensions of the type: length, 18.3
mm.; width, 16.0 mm.; height, 4.2 mm.; apex situated 11.9 mm.
bd ’
from the posterior end.
Holotype, No. 9533 and Paratypes, Nos. 9534, 9535, 9536,
9537, Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Paleo. Type Coll., from Loc. 31653
(C. A. S.), Punta Colorado near Guaymas, Mexico; Mr. & Mrs.
Harry R. Turver colls.
The outer portion of the interior of some of the paratypes is
nearly white with the dark border reduced to dark spots in the
interspaces between the ribs.
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
There is uncertainty as to whether or not the present specimens
are referable to the genus Acmea or to Patella. The shells are
thin, with very little thickening of shell material in the apical
region of the interior. The shells of most species referred to
Acmea are ornamented with a strongly developed “owl’’-shaped
patch of color in the central portion of the interior. Such a dis-
tinct shape of the color pattern is almost completely lacking in the
present specimens.
Specimens of the new species differ from juvenile shells of
Patella mexicana Broderip & Sowerby,’ a species which has been
PLATE 51
Figs. 1, 2, 3. Acmea turveri Hertlein & Strong, new species. Holotyne,
No. 9533, Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Paleo. Type Coll., from Punta, Colo-
rado near Guaymas, Mexico. Length. 18.3 mm.; width, 16.0 mm.;
height, 4.2 mm.
Fig. 1. Side view. Fig. 2. View of interior. Fig. 3. Apical view.
Fig. 4. Alvania milleriana Hertlein & Strong, new species. Holotype,
No. 9538, Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Paleo. Type Coll., from Ballena Bay,
Costa Rica. Length, 3.8 mm.; maximum diameter, 2.1 mm.
1Patella mexicana Broderip & Sowerby, Zool. Jour., Vol. 4, No. 5, January, 1829.
p. 369. ‘‘Hab. ad littora Oceani Pacifici.’”’ “‘From Mazatlan.’’ Mexico. Reeve, Conch.
Icon., Vol. 8. Patella. May, 1855, sp. 1, pl. 1, fig. 1—Pilsbry, Man. Conch., Vol. 13,
1891, p. 108, pl. 31, figs. 59, 60, 61, 62.
153
Butietin, So. Cane. ACADEMY OF Ser IENCES Vol. 50, Part 8, 1951
recorded as occurring from the Gulf of California to Paita, Peru,
in that they are thinner, broader in proportion to the length, in
that they are sculptured with fewer ribs and in possessing a dark
border on the margin of the interior,
The shell of the species here described as new differs from
that of Acmea conus Grant’ in that the shell is flatter, it lacks
minor ribs in the interspaces between the major ribs, the central
portion of the interior is not thickened with shell material and the
orange and blue coloration of the interior is quite different from
the dark coloration of 4. conus or A. scabra Gould.’
This species is named for Mr. Harry R. Turver of South Gate,
California.
ALVANIA MILLERIANA Hertlein & Strong, new species
Plate 51, Figure 4
Shell very small, elongately ovate, white; nuclear whorls two
and one half, well rounded, smooth; postnuclear whorls four,
well rounded, with distinct sutures; principal sculpture consists
of strong, equal, spiral cords of which two appear on the first
postnuclear whorl, increasing to six on the penultimate whorl, in
the interspaces between these cords many fine axial riblets appear
but do not cross the summit of the ridges; periphery and base well
rounded and sculptured similar to the spire with equally spaced
cords and riblets; aperture oblique with the posterior angle ob-
tuse, outer lip thickened, inner lip stout, strongly curved, reflected
over and appressed to the base. Dimensions of the type: length,
3.8 mm. maximum diameter, 2.1 mm.
Holotype, No. 9538, Calif. Acad. Sci. Dept. Paleo. Type Coll.,
from a beach in the corner of Ballena Bay, Costa Rica, where the
western end of the inner shore line turns toward the open sea; Dr.
Herman W. Miller collector.
The sculpture of the shell of this species is not typical of the
genus Alvania but the general character of the shell would seem
to justify placing it in “this genus at least for the present. One
west American species, originally described as Rissoa albolirata
*Acmea cona Test, in Light, Lab. & Field Test in Invert. Zool. (Stanford Univ.
Press: Assoe. Students Store, Berkeley, 1941; pl. 12, figs. 20, 30; pl. 13, fig. 3; pl.
14, figs. 5, 6.-—(Grant) Test, Nautilus, Vol. 58, No. 3. January, 1945, p. 92. ‘‘The
type series is a group of 20 specimens taken personally at Point Fermin. San Pedro,
California.’’ Range. Point Concepcion, California, to Cape San Lucas, Lower Cali-
fornia, and the Revillagigedo Islands, Mexico.—Test, Nautilus, Vol. 58. No. 4, April,
1945, p. 144. [Correction of specific name “‘cona”’ to ‘‘conus.’’ |
3Patella (Lottia?) seabra Gould. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. 2, July, 1846,
p. 152. ‘‘Hab. San Francisco.” California.
Patella spectrum Nuttall, in Jay, Cat. Shells, ed. 3 (Wiley & Putnam: New York),
1839, p. 39. ‘‘Upper California.’”’ [Name only].—Reeve, Conch. Icon.. Vol. 8, Patella,
January, 1855, sp. 76, pl. 29, figs. 76a, b. “‘Hab. Upper California.”—Pilsbry, Man.
Conch., Vol. 13, 1891, p. 14, pl. 1, figs. 7, 8, 9 (as Aemeza spectrum).
154
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
Carpenter, with somewhat similar sculpture, was placed by
Bartsch in the genus Alvania. The species here described as new
differs from Carpenter’s species in that the spire is much lower
and the axial riblets are less numerous.
This species is named for Dr, Herman W. Miller, of Santa
Clara, Cuba, who collected the type specimen.
4Rissoa albolirata Carpenter, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 8, Vol. 18, p. 477,
June, 1864. Reprint in Smithson. Miscell. Coll., No. 252, 1872, p. 216. ‘‘Cape St.
Lueas.”’ Lower California.—Bartsch, Proce. U. S. Nat. Mus. Vol. 41, No. 1863, 1911,
p. 338, pl. 29, fig. 6 (as Alvania albolirata).—I. S. Oldroyd, Stanford Univ. Publ.
Univ. cer Geol. Sci., Vol. 2, Pt. 3, 1927, pl. 80, fig. 6 (as Alvania albolirata). (Not
in text).
155
BULLETIN, So. CALir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 8, 1951
A NEW SONORELLA FROM THE CHIRICAHUA
MOUNTAINS, ARIZONA
By WENDELL ©. GREGG
Mr. M. L. Walton and the writer made a rather hurried col-
lecting trip through southeastern Arizona in March, 1948. It was
on this trip, while passing through the foothills on the northeast
side of the Chiricahua Mountains, that we first noticed some low
granitic cliffs on the north side of the Portal-to-Paradise road
about three miles west of Portal. The rocky hillside below the
cliffs appeared to be a likely place to find land snails, but since
our time was limited, we stopped only at localities with published
collecting records.
On our return to the Chiricahuas in October of the same
year, we spent some time at this locality looking for land snails
and were rewarded by finding Holospira arizonensis (cf) emi-
grans P. & F., Thysanophora horn (Gabb), and a Sonorella
which quite obviously has been overlooked by other collectors. A
fair series of the Sonorellas were found, most of them in quite
good condition, though we failed to find any living specimens.
One year later Mr. Walton and [| revisited this place. This time
two hours at turning heavy rocks failed to reward us with living
specimens though an excellent series of snails in good condition
was collected.
In spite of the extensive collecting done in these mountains
by Pilsbry, Ferris, Daniels, and others, I fail to find any record
of collecting done at this station.
Since this Sonorella seems quite distinct from any described
form, it seems appropriate to name it at this time. It may be
known as
Sonorella neglecta new species.
Plate 52
Shell small for the genus, depressed-conic ; whorls 4 1/3, con-
vex, increasing gradually to the last whorl which expands moder-
ately and descends moderately behind the aperture; base rounded,
the umbilicus contained about 7 1/3 times in the greater diameter
of the shell. Aperture oblique, rounded-oval; peristome slightly
expanded and slightly thickened, the columellar end dilated and
covering the margin of the umbilicus. A thin parietal callus is
present.
156
BULLETIN, So. CALtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
Embryonic shell consists of 1 1/2 whorl; the apex smoothish,
followed by a radially wrinkled area which continues to the end
of the first half whorl; the next half whorl wrinkly-granulose
with forwardly descending and ascending delicate threads at reg-
ular intervals superimposed ; the last half whorl of the embryonic
shell wrinkly-granulose with elongate papille. The first neanic
whorl marked with close growth wrinkles, indistinct granulation,
and scattered papillz; the remaining whorls smooth and marked
only with fine growth strie.
Color light Sayal Brown fading to whitish around the umbili-
cus and with occasional radial whitish streaks. A peripheral
chestnut band 1 mm. in width is bordered above and below by
somewhat narrower bands lighter in color than the body of the
shell.
Maximum diameter 16.1 mm., minimum diameter 13.0 mm.,
altitude 9.2 mm., umbilicus 2.2 mm., whorls 4 1/3.
Type locality: Rocky hillside below granitic cliffs, north of
Portal-to-Paradise road about 3 miles west of Portal, Chiricahua
Mountains, Cochise County, Arizona. Altitude about 5,300 feet.
Holotype No. 5317, author’s collection. Paratypes in collec-
tions of the Los Angeles County Museum (No. 1087), S. S.
PLATE 52
Sonorella neglecta Gregg. Holotype, X 2.
(Photos courtesy Los Angeles County Museum.)
157
BULLETIN, So. Catv, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
No. 16579), M. L. Walton, and the author (Nos. 4640
?
Additional Localities: Steep rocky slope of eastern hill of low
range running west opposite mouth of Cave Creek Canyon, 100
yards west of pumping station of A.V.A. Ranch, Cochise Co.,
Arizona, May 14, 1951, M. L. and D. M. Walton, Collectors. This
locality is about 1/2 mile west of Portal and about 2 1/2 miles
east of the type locality.
A single specimen in rather poor condition, which seems refer-
rable to S. neglecta, was found on a rocky isolated hill .8 mile east
of the junction of the Whitetail Canyon road with the road to
Paradise. This is 7.1 miles west of the type locality.
The sculpture of the embryonic shell suggests relationship
with the Sonorella hachitana group. However all described forms
of that group.are considerably larger than neglecta. Snails of the
Sonorella binneyi group are generally more globose. Sonorella
bowiensis Pils. is larger, has a proportionately wider body whorl
and the whorls are more flattened above. Sonorella delicata Pils.
& Fer. is slightly larger and differs in having nearly smooth em-
bryonic whorls. However, until live snails are found and the
anatomy of the reproductive system studied, no conclusion can
be drawn as to the definite relationship with other members of
this genus.
The paratypes of neglecta are relatively uniform in size and
shape. One paratype is somewhat smaller than the others. Max-
imum diameter 13.5 mm., minimum diameter 11.8 mm., altitude
8.8 mm., umbilicus 2.0 mm., whorls 4 1/2.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Pilsbry, Henry A.
1905. Mollusca of the Southwestern States, I: Urocoptide; Helicide
of Arizona and New Mexico. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., March
1905, pp. 211-290, pls. XI-X XVII.
1939. Land Mollusca of North America (North of Mexico). Vol. 1,
Pt. 1. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Monograph 3.
Pilsbry, Henry A. and Ferris, J. H.
1910. Mollusca of the Southwestern States, IV: The Chiricahua
Mountains, Arizona. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., Feb. 1910,
pp. 44-147, pls. I-XIV.
BuLLetin, So. Canir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
FOUR SOUTH AMERICAN GEOMETRID MOTHS
APPARENTLY UNDESCRIBED
By JoHN L. SPERRY
Riverside, California
It is with a certain feeling of inadequacy that the author
undertakes this paper. During the past ten years as time has per-
mitted, the author and the late Mrs. Sperry have been working
with the lepidoptera of South and Central America and as a
multitude of information accumulates the author feels even more
that his knowledge of the Neotropical fauna is entirely inade-
quate. Nevertheless a beginning has to be made and as there are
a few among the many unknowns which seem to be definitely
undescribed, the author makes bold to give these a name and at
the same time to tender his thanks to Dr. J. F. Gates Clarke of
the U. S. National Museum who so kindly sent the species from
Chile and to Mr. D. S. Fletcher of the British Museum staff who
has so kindly checked these species for us and who is directly
responsible for much of the author’s South American Geometrid
information.
CALLIPIA BRENEMANAZ, Sp. n.
This is a bright and striking Larentid, belonging in Warren’s
subfamily Eucestiinee and closest (as Mr. Fletcher has pointed
out) to Callippia constantinaria Ober. from Peru.
Head, front, palpze and simple antenne black with a slight
brownish cast. Palpi rough scaled, porrect, about 11% the diameter
of the eye, third joint close scaled. Prothorax black, hairy, with
lateral tufts of orange hair, orange beneath. Meso and meta
thorax with latero-dorsal tufts of long tan-gray hair. Abdomen
sparsely sealed, fuscous above, black beneath with orange blotches
laterally, low on the second, third and fourth segments. Legs
gray-black, femur shortly and densely hairy. Forewings: Costa,
light pinkish cinnamon, more or less mottled with black in a strip
slightly over 1 mm. in width; rest of wing dark gray-black with
the exception of the large orange blotch, about 15 mm. x 18 mm.
which covers much of the basal and median areas. The border of
this orange area begins at the base of the wing, follows the costal
edge of the cell to vein 6, thence curves in the arc of a circle toa
point 1 mm. above vein 1, approaching to about 3 mm. from outer
margin and reaching the point above vein 1 at about that distance
from the tornus, thence back parallel to vein 1 to the base. The
159
BULLETIN, So. Canir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 8, 1951
lower edge of the cell to a point beyond vein 4 is more or less
heavily edged on both sides of the vein with black with slight ex-
cursions, especially in the 2 , out along veins 2 and 3. Fringes
short, concolorous with the ‘ale ick part of the wing; no discal dot,
Hind wings: Immaculate, dark mouse gray, fringes concolor-
ous. Diseal dot absent.
Beneath: Orange area on forewing as above, costa and apical
area above vein 6, honey yellow, merging into light cinnamon-
brown, rest of wing as above.
In the 9 the honey-yellow area more extended than in ¢@.
Hindwings have a black ground color with cream white veins and
many fine white lines arr ranged i in pairs perpendicular to the veins,
crossing and irrorating the entire wing. These fine white lines are
closely merged into an irregular bar bey ond the cell between veins
1 and 4. Above line 4 part of the black ground color is replaced
by cinnamon, giving the wing a marbled appearance. Fringes
mouse gray, discal dot absent.
Expanse ¢ 45 to 50 mm., 9 52 to 55 mm.
Holotype, ¢. Yungas del Palmar, Bolivia, 2000 m., Mar. 15,
1949 and in the Sperry collection.
Allotype, @. Same data Mar. 30, 1949 in the Sperry col-
lection.
Paratypes: 8g, 39, same locality, Sept. 1948 and Apr. and
Feb. 1949 and Chapare, Bolivia, Dec. 8, 1949 Pena coll. and in
the United States National Museum, British Museum, the Ham
collection in Enterprise, Oregon and collection Sperry.
This species is closest to constantinaria Ober. of which species
Mr. Fletcher has kindly sent me 2 ¢ ¢ for comparison. These are
easily separated, as the shape of the orange area on the forewing
differs constantly. In constantinaria this starts as in brenemane,
follows the costal edge of the cell to vein 4 then curves down to
or shortly beyond vein 2, thence along or parallel to vein 2 to the
cell and so back to the base, making a “smaller, narrower and more
angular orange area.
The author has only examined the ¢ genitalia and the acquir-
ing of 2 specimens may show this species to be a Bolivian form
of constantinaria for the g genitalia offers few good differences.
In brenemane the ampulle are shorter and chunkier and the open
Space at the base of the valve is pointed toward the spine at the
tip of the sacculus instead of being rounded as in constantinaria.
It is with deep appreciation that the author names this fine
species in honor of Mrs. Dorothy Jean Breneman Ham, of Enter-
prise, Oregon.
160
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
Artist, craftsman and scientist in her own right, she, with her
husband, Dr. Lyle C. Ham, took the author into their home and
hearts and did more than any other persons to make it possible
for him to carry on during the black days following Grace’s
passing.
The author has in the Sperry collection a single specimen of
what is probably an environmental form of Callipia constantinaria
Ober. The latter and the Bolivian specimens of brenemane are
taken at altitudes above 2000 m. This specimen is from the edge
of the jungle at a lower altitude and is distinguished by its smaller
size (44 mm. to about 52 mm. for constantinaria) the jet black
ground color of both wings as compared with the distinct brown-
ish cast of constantinaria and the shape of the lower border of the
orange area which goes from the lowest point of the curve at vein
2 directly to the base without following the vein to the cell. Ex-
panse 44 mm. The author suggests for this form the name
HAMARIA.
Holotype: g , Satipo, Peru, May 1948 Pedro Paprzyck1, coll.
and in the Sperry collection.
The author takes great pleasure in naming this bright form in
honor of Dr. C. Ham of Enterprise, Oregon. Doctor, scientist,
councilor and friend in great need.
SPARGANIA RANDALL, Sp. n.
This Chilean species looks close to the genus Anapalta, Warr.
excepting for the double zrole on the forewing and the tiny cillia
on the antenne. The 92 genitalia however places it in or close to
the genus Spargama Guenee.
Female: Palpi short 114 the diameter of the eye, porrect or
with third joint upturned, third joint close scaled, rest rough
scaled black and white. Front sandy with brown, black and white
scales. Vertex and collar white. Antenne white, ringed with nar-
row, brown bands, simple, lightly ciliate. Thoratic vestiture scales
mixed with long hairs, mostly white with black specklings. White
below. Abdomen dark dorsally with small white spots on each
segment, laterally and beneath white. Legs close scaled, mostly
white with specklings of black dots.
Forewings: The basal area, 1 mm. wide is white, the outer
edge with an outward scallop below costa and in cell. Basal band
fuscous, 1 mm. wide and followed by a slightly lighter area of the
Same size, both with irregular margins, the bands narrowing at
inner margin. The median fascia is violet fuscous and extends
on the costa to within 3 mm. from the apex, its outer edge rund
161
Butierin, So, Carnie, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 8, 1951
perpendicular to costa to vein 7 thence with a deep inward
scallop to vein 4, thence to inner margin 3 mm, in from tornus,
There is a median broken band of white in the fascia; the
upper looks like a horse’s head with the neck at the costa, short
ears toward the outer margin and nose between lines 2 and 3 be-
low the cell. The eye is a long dark discal dash. There is a tiny
white spot below vein 2 and a larger one at vein 1; a still larger
spot is centered on the inner margin. These are ringed with fus-
cous and paralleled with outer dark lines. The subterminal area
is lighter with heavy speckling of fuscous and broken parts of a
dark subterminal line, strongest near the inner margin. There is a
narrow fuscous, terminal line. Fringes white with dark mottling.
Hindwings: White, sparsely peppered with fuscous scales,
especially in subterminal area. T.p. line indicated by dim, fuscous
dots on the veins.
Fringes white. Discal dot below showing through.
Beneath: Forewings dull fuscous with outer edge of median
fascia indicated by a lightening of the scaling, subterminal area
lighter than the rest of the wing. Discal dash and terminal line
present. Fringes as above.
Hindwings white. T.p. line of fuscous scallops with points in-
ward on the veins. Discal dash strong. Fringes as above. Ex-
panse 37 mm.
Holotype 9 Pudahuel, Chile, I, 48, T. Ramirez, coll. and in
the collection of the United States National Museum.
Paratype: 9 Guayacan, Santiago Prov., Chile, 5-12, XII,
1947, Tito Ramirez, coll. and in the Sperry Collection.
It gives me fond pleasure to name this beautiful insect in
honor of my wife, Bertha Randall Minor Sperry, who, having lost
her dearest one, even as have I, still finds the courage to bring
happiness to the last years of this entomologist.
It will require more material to place this insect accurately.
The form and maculation of the wings makes it look closer to
Perizoma africana Warr. than anything else known to the author
but 6 and 7 in the hindwings are short stalked or connate and the
2 bursa, almost bilobed, places it in or close to Spargania Guenee.
SALPIS CLARKEI, Sp. n.
3 @ Palpi moderate, about 2x diameter of the eye, second
joint heavily and loosely clothed with a triangular scale and hair
tuft, third joint long, its scales appressed, mouse gray. Front
slightly bulging, clothed loosely with scales and hair, mouse gray.
162
a —
BULLETIN, So. CALIF, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
Vertex cream. Antenne simple in both sexes, not ciliate. Pro-
thorax mouse gray, meso and metathorax and abdomen light gray,
peppered with mouse gray scale tips; under side light gray.
Legs close scaled, femur light hairy.
Forewings: Bluntly subfalcate, sharper in @ outer margin
lightly and bluntly toothed a tline 6, light cream gray, peppered
sparsely with mouse-gray scales from base to discal spot, mouse-
gray beyond to outer margin.
There are traces of a broken t.a. line accentuated by dark dots
on vein | and the cell, and a dim line between costa and cell angling
backward toward the base. Discal dot distinct and annulate. T-.p.
line from 34 out on costa is marked by small dark dots on the
veins, it is subparallel to outer margin. Terminal dark dots be-
tween the veins. Fringe concolorous with outer area.
Hindwings: Cream gray, small annulated discal spot. T-p.
line, 2/3 out from base indicated by dark dots on veins, line sub-
parallel to outer margin.
Fringes concolorous.
Underside: Both wings light gray, in 9 dusted with fuscous,
dark discal dots and a line of black points terminally between the
veins. Fringes concolorous. Expanse ¢ 42 mm., 2 52 mm.
Holotype, ¢, Cajon de Maypo, Santiago Prov., Chile Cordil-
lera, El Canelo, 12-20, I, 1948 Tito Ravaniier. coll, and in the col-
lection of the United States National Museum.
Allotype: Same data and in the Sperry Collection.
This species belongs in the subgenus I of Prout although the
hind tibia of the g lacks the hair pencil and is not swollen. The
species would seem to be close to e@nea Butler but lacks the heavy
discal spots and terminal black line, the swollen hind tibia of the
male and hair pencil.
Also the margins of the wings in both sexes are only slightly
toothed.
It is indeed a great pleasure to name another fine moth in
honor of my good friend, Dr. J. F. Gates Clarke of the U. S. Na-
tional Museum, in grateful memory of many kindnesses both past
and present, extended to the author over many years.
163
BuLLeTIN, So. Canin, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
THE FRAGILITY FACTOR FOR TRYPANOSOMA
CRUZI IN EXPERIMENTAL CHAGAS’ DISEASE’
By SHERWIN F. \Voop’
Life Sciences Department
Los Angeles City College, Los Angeles 29, California
From the large number of parasite remnants seen on well pre-
pared blood smears, the writer agrees with Brumpt (1949) that
Trypanosoma cruzi is “tres fragiles.” While engaged in a study
of blood types of this trypanosome, counts were made to determine
the fragility factor for NIH Brazilian strain trypanosomes.
Clean slides were placed upon a black topped laboratory table
45 mm. beneath the nearest curvature of a blue, smooth-surfaced,
HyGrade, 60 watt light bulb in a goose neck desk lamp having a
6% inch half-globe reflector with aluminized inner surface. As
slides immediately beneath the bulb were used, others were pushed
over to replace them. Thus, the warmest slides were used as need-
ed. Laboratory thermometers placed flat upon the table with the
bulb directly beneath the light varied from 71°C to 77°C depending
upon the shape of the mercury bulb. Room temperatures at the
time these preparations were made varied from 19°C to 25°C.
Thus, the heat-fixed slides refer to those made on pre-heated slides
whereas the air-dried smears were made on slides at room tem-
perature. Actually, air-dried refers to a degree of heat which
varies from cool to very warm sensible temperatures.
Table 1 shows the comparative values for several experimental
white mice, Mus musculus, inoculated intramuscularly (left and
right gastrocnemius) with the NIH Brazilian strain. Parasite
remnants are spotted easily in Jenner-Giemsa stained smears by
the intact axoneme, near which can be found basket-like mesh-
works of the kinetoplast and nucleus. Thus, as indicated in the
table, the fragility factor of 9.9% for experiment 159 on the 23rd
day shows that 99 trypanosome remnants were found in the first
thousand parasites encountered,
Counts were made on blood smears prepared on days when
more than 500 parasites were seen in two drops of fresh tail blood
under an 18 mm. circular coverglass. Most counts of 1000 try-
panosomes, including remnants, were confined to the beginning
10 mm. of the blood smear. However, in experiment 169, the
whole smear of 286 sq. mm. yielded only 708 parasites. As noted
in the table, on one smear for experiment 165, three counts were
1This research was supported by a grant from the U. S. Public Health Service.
*Visiting Scholar, 1950-51, Division of Zoology, University of California at Davis.
164
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
made in three areas for the 29th day slides, and for experiment
181, two counts were made in two areas for the 38th day smear.
In experiments 162 and 165, the heat-fixed slides were smeared
first, whereas in experiment 181 the air-dried slides were smeared
first. The tail was clipped with a razor-sharp scalpel. The first
two drops were placed on the slides and smeared immediately.
Since thickness of the blood smear is related to fragility, measure-
ments with the calibrated fine adjustment on the heat-fixed slide
for experiment 165 revealed thicknesses of 7.5u, 5.0u, and 2.5u
for beginning, middle, and end areas, respectively.
Possibly the few seconds delay in smearing the droplet on the
heated slide in experiment 181 may account for the higher fra-
gility factors noted there. On the first half of heat-fixed slides of
experiments 162 and 165, one could assume that the percentage of
structural types found near the beginning edge of the smears
would be representative of the circulating tail blood at that par-
ticular time of the infection because of the low fragility factor.
Thin smears are best for studying detail of these structural
types but give a distorted picture of relative proportions of blood
types due to greater breakage of trypanosomes. Thick smears
preserve all types well but render them more difficult to recognize
since cytoplasmic details are obscured by the more compact body
form and less differential staining.
Although the results presented here are inconclusive, there is
some indication that heat fixation of medium thick smears con-
trols the excessive breakage of individuals of Trypanosoma cruzi
in the first half of the blood smear.
REFERENCE
Brumpt, E.
1949. Précis de Parasitologie (Paris: Masson ct Cie), Vol. 1, 1042 pp.
BuLterin, So. Canter. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
TABLE I
BLOOD SMEAR FRAGILITY FACTORS FOR TRYPANOSOMA CRUZI
(Percentage of broken trypanosomes per thousand)
Experiment Air Heat Area of Day after
Number Dried Fixed Smear Inoculation
159 9.9 Beginning 23
9.9 3.2 Beginning 21
162 2.8 Us. Beginning 29
33 0.0 Beginning 35
164 33.5 Beginning 19
Qo 0.4 Beginning 29
165 38.8 1.0 Middle 29
85.2 57.4 End 29
169 50.2 Whole (708) 28
11.2 11.5 Beginning 28
181 20.3 28.9 Beginning 34
0.4 ‘algal Beginning 38
88.5 68.6 Middle 38
166
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
WHAT SIGNIFICANCE DEPTH?
By Puir C. Orr
Santa Barbara Museum of Natural History
It is customary to record the depth at which artifacts or bur-
lals are recovered. In many field records, such “data” as: “Depth
27 inches” is included without any supplementary information to
indicate whether the surface is undergoing erosion or deposition.
Was this object originally on the surface, and has 27 inches of
deposition taken place since, or was it at a greater depth and has
erosion reduced the overburden to 27 inches? Fortunately, some
archeologists include supplementary data or when stratigraphy
is present, record materials from the various strata; but too
often, the word “stratum” is used unconsciously as a synonym for
“depth” for the reason that excavations are not of sufficient ex-
tent to expose the complete record of the change in structure.
Along the Santa Barbara coast in California are over one hun-
dren Indian middens of the Oak Grove, Hunting People and
Canalino cultures, which after one hundred years of extensive
plowing by the white man have come to have very similar physical
appearances. This appearance, typical of mounds in Southern
California coastal region, is one of low arched shell deposits on
slightly higher ground than the surrounding area. Physically, the
mounds vary in size from a few yards to a quarter of a mile, and
in depth from a few inches to ten feet. In general, they are
slightly arched, being deeper in the center and thinning out on the
edgesm (Plate 53, C))
It is natural to visualize the mounds as being essentially the
same now as when they were occupied, with the exception, of
course, of the dome-shaped grass houses. In all probability, a new
village on sterile soil did give such an appearance, but the results
of excavations of the Santa Barbara Museum of Natural History
on San Nicolas Island, and especially on Santa Rosa Island, give
us an entirely different picture of the occupancy and deposition of
a Canalino village. On the islands there has been no plowing of
the fields by white men. Only nature has contributed to the de-
struction of the original villages as left by the Indians one hun-
dred fifty to four hundred years ago. At Skull Gulch on Santa
Rosa Island, about fifty well-preserved house pits are found,
which average about forty feet from rim to rim of the circular
depressions, and range in depth from one to six feet. It is
assumed at present that this site was in use just prior to 1542 for
the reason that limited numbers of glass beads are found.
167
BULLETIN, So. CALIF, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
PLATE 53
Diagramatic cross section of three stages of South Coast middens.
a, Inhabited village. b, Abandoned village. c, Prehistoric village
leveled by erosion.
Let us picture for a moment a Canalino couple selecting the
site for their new home:
The ground is level, clay or sand, with perhaps a few broken
shells and charcoal from the nearby houses. Post holes are dug
and the supporting poles of the house erected and covered with
sea grass. Perhaps, on their anniversary, papa gave mamma a
strand of genuine Olivella beads, which for simplicity’s sake we
will refer to in Plate 54 as “A.” There comes a little Canalino
who snatches mother’s necklace and the beads are scattered. Some
are recovered, others are later swept up in the ashes and loose
dirt on the floor of the hut and thrown outside the house in a
basketful of Mytilus shells from Sunday dinner.
Years go by, during which time more Mytilus, together with
ashes, Haliotis shells, the well-gnawed femora of sea otter and
168
———————
ee ee
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
rs
S x cs i
«me center-House floor- edge ———7” Sterile
PLATE 54
Cross section of center to edge of a house pit. Dotted lines on right show
original structure of midden before the upper layers were redeposited
over the house floor (left).
sea lion, together with fish scales and bones and the refuse pile
beside the house grows, burying the few lost beads deeper and
deeper. Let us assume the baby has also grown and is now a
young woman, wearing the latest thing in neckwear imported
from Santa Catalina—genuine unmatched steatite beads—which
we will call “B.” Strings will break and a few of the lost beads
find their way to the top of the pile.
Let us hurry by another generation and assume that the
young woman who broke her mother’s “A” beads and who lost
her own prize “B” beads gives her daughter a brand new string
of clam disc beads (C) which all the girls are now wearing.
Beads have changed but strings still break and granddaughter’s
new “C” beads find their way to the top of the ever-growing pile
outside the house. To hurry by another generation, some glass
beads (D) are given to the great-granddaughter by the strange
white man, Cabrillo, and eventually some of them find their way
to the top of the pile.
If an archeologist could now section the midden, he would
find everything very orderly (Plate 54). The Late glass beads of
great-granddaughter would be on top. Further down, say 10
inches, would be granddaughter’s lost clam beads (C) while near
the middle, daughter’s steatite beads (B) would be found and
169
Butietin, So. Carnie. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 8, 1951
below them, near the bottom of the pile, mother’s Olivella (A)
would lie,
Five hundred or a thousand years is a long time and the
house has since collapsed and decayed. Mother, daughter, grand-
daughter and great-granddaughter have long since been laid in a
flexed, face-down position with appropriate blowing of smoke to
the four corners. Wind and weather have now reduced the huge
heaps of debris surrounding the old house site to a low, undulat-
ing mound (Plate 53, b.), or, if we give it time enough and add
the white man’s cultivation, it will be reduced to a low arched
mound along with the other huts of the village (Plate 53, C).
Our archeologist puts down a trench, four feet wide and per-
haps eight feet long, near the center of the heap outside the house,
and records mother’s ‘‘A”’ beads, as near the surface (Plate 54,
trench 1). He sinks another trench on the edge of the site where
the old house- stood and finds no “A” beads, but does find “B”
and “C” near the surface and “D” all the way to the bottom
(Plate 54, trench 2). He then puts down a third trench near the
center of the house (Plate 54, trench 3) and finds B, C and D
beads near the surface, C and D below them, and near the bot-
tom great-granddaughter’s D beads only. Now what does he
have? He may reason that since A, B, C and D have been found
on the surface, these are “Late’”’ traits and that as glass beads, D,
were found from top to bottom in two pits the entire site is con-
tact. Why does he find these things in this relation? Because the
original heap of debris on the edge of the house site weathers
from top down, so that the last deposited material (D) is the
first to be redeposited in the bottom of the house site. More
erosion and the replaced D “stratum” is covered over with C and
Bie otiatase
Theoretically, there is one point, at the junction of the heap
with the horizontal surface, where mixtures of the three strata
are made by secondary redeposition. As a simplified explanation,
the last object to be deposited is the first object to be redeposited,
so that the first object to be deposited will be found over the last
object but, actually, neither the original deposition nor the re-
deposition is as simple as that and the further the erosion pro-
gresses, the greater the complexity of redeposition.
So far, we have given an illustration of what might have hap-
pened in four generations in one 27-foot area only. We have not
taken into consideration at all the ever present rodent which bur-
rows deep holes through house sites and burials only to have the
next rain wash the debris from the surface down into the holes.
Nor have we considered the farmer with his plow, which may
drag artifacts for a hundred yards as well as putting a surface
piece 14 inches underground.
170
|
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
“a
Neither have we considered Mother Nature in her most vio-
lent moods when, at locality 131.137, Santa Rosa Island, for in-
stance, she eroded a camp site at a 50 foot elevation and rede-
posited it in a canyon adding, for good measure, 30 feet of sterile
soil over the deposition. Such gigantic efforts, even on the part
of Mother Nature, take a great deal of time, but in this case arti-
facts of the same original age might be found at “27 inches” or
at “27 feet.”’ Depth can be a clue to antiquity or to chronology,
but it may well be a false clue, unless we recognize that what goes
up must come down, and that which is deposited on top of the
pile may roll or be washed to a lower level.
171
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCteENCES Vol. 50, Part 8, 1951
Elsa Ellsworth Hadley
1864-1951
Mr. E. E. Hadley, paleontologist, and member of this Academy
since 1937, died at his home in Alhambra on August 8, 1951. Only
a few weeks before he had been busy at his desk in the Los An-
geles County Museum where he had served as Honorary Curator
of Paleontology since 1936.
Hadley’s parents, Jonathan Doane and Zelinda Griffith Hadley,
came of long American lineage of Quaker faith. Elza was born
in Stewart, lowa, on December 16, 1864, and was raised on the
family farm close to rich fossiliferous deposits of Carboniferous
age. As a boy of 15, young Elza began collecting fossils, but not
until a year later, from a class in physical geography, had he any
hint as to their significance. When he was 18 he began exchang-
ing fossils with other young collectors, and his study of paleon-
tology began in earnest.
Grown to manhood, Hadley married (in 1888) Maude E.
Bunche, by whom he had four children. He followed in his
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 50, Part 3, 1951
father’s footsteps as a farmer, and later, on moving to California,
became a rancher and a nurseryman. His interest in paleontology,
however, was ever present ; he never lost an opportunity to collect
or to exchange fossils.
In California, Hadley discovered several rich deposits from
which he collected a wealth of material. Most outstanding were
the fishes and plants found in the Miocene shales of El Modena
and Alhambra, which formed the bases for monographs by Dr.
David Starr Jordan and Dr. J. Z. Gilbert (on fishes), and Dr.
Ralph Chaney (plants).
Many of Hadley’s specimens were loaned to the new Los An-
geles Museum in 1913. Later, in 1936, his entire collection of
over 2500 specimens was presented to that institution. Included
in this gift were many cotypes and reverse slabs of Jordan’s types.
Hadley took an active part in several of the scientific societies
of Southern California. He was president of the Lorquin Natural
History Club in 1915 and organized its Geological Section in 1917.
In 1941 he became a charter member of the Dana Mineralogical
Club, serving on the editorial staff of the Dana Magazine until
1947. In the Southern California Academy of Sciences he was a
member of the Earth Sciences Committee for several years, and
also served loyally on the Hospitality Committee.
Mr. Hadley’s published works include a number of articles
and poems printed in Lorquinia and the Dana Magazine. He mod-
estly considered himself a collector rather than a research sci-
entist, and at one time (1917) wrote, for Lorquinia, an article on
the place of the collector in the field of science. This article
clearly reflects the spirit which all who knew Elza Hadley ob-
served in him—the spirit of never-ending wonder at the mysteries
of nature, of humility with respect to his own attainments, and a
keen desire to share his discoveries with others.
173
PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
BULLETIN:
Vol. 3, No.
TMB tc
6
a
“ g 4
“og «
“49 «
"40 «
“45, «
a
“49 «
de bs iene
“oy «
“93 «
7 ag
“95 «
“965 «
“oT «
“og «
“39
“oy «
“99 «
“93 «
“34 «
“35 «
“ 36, “
“g7 oe
“3g
“ce 39, “oe
“49 «
“4
“49 4
“43 «
“44 6
“45
“4g «
“47 «
“4g «
“4g «
, 1905
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
For Sale at the Appended Prices
HADOMOOOUOLODOUGODOUOGOOKOCUT
JOUDUCOODCUGUCOUDUODDOUUOUOGUL
UN ocagasou0odoUUKdOtUGcdOCObONOE
ercleiietsre/s\ ein oleletelelolel sheheielexe lolol Ketel teks
SGudGGOOdoUDUGODOOULUdOOOGCOKC
sKolsieieVoletototelclaleyelevatelefelsyoelolelehetenetene
ee)
ee ]
ec
Ce
ec
bo
a
’
w co
—
to -
bo
Oo
(each) inate
Re bo
VA SCE AO AO CO Deo TeOC DAIS OU OOO 00 C
UWA (GON) Eooedos ABSTOO LOG 0.0
3, 1928 (each)
ILA) (GEKA) GogooKonbeeosbodoo0c
3, 1931 (each)
19382 (each)
LOSS (each) Melci
Bad
a
ny
o i
¥
Marginella woodbridgei Hert-
leineandie Strom ees ee 80
Mitchell’s Caverns, California.. 1
Mitoura siva mansfieldi Tilden 96
Natural Hybrids Between Dud-
leya and Hasseanthus............ 57
New Gerontogenous Hydro-
TOOT ECIG IS Sy rae ee ee ee 101
Notes on the Biology of Tri-
crania stansburyi Haldeman 92
Occurrence of the False Killer
Whale, Pseudorea on the Cali-
TOUTE, (COR NS cee eee es 14
Onychocampodea new genus.... 48
Onychocampodea onychis
TESTE OSS See el 48
Onycholepisma new genus........ 45
Onycholepisma arizonae
TPT GS) co a eee eer 45
Onychomachilis new genus........ 45
Onychomachilis fisheri Pierce.. 45
Ostrea corteziensis Hertlein.... 68
Parajulus onychis Pierce.......... 41
Plioprojapyx new genus...........--- 48
Plioprojapyx primitivus Pierce... 48
Pseudorca crassidens (Owen).... 14
Salpis clarkei Sperry...............-.-
Schizomoidea new
SUP Sefer yee eee 39
Snowia waltonaria (Sperry).... 54
Some Fossil Insects from a
Nevada Hot Spring Deposit... 81
Sonorella neglecta Gregg... 156
Spargania randallze Sperry...... 161
Sympatric Populations of Ba-
trachoseps attenuatus and Ba-
trachoseps pacificus in South-
Erni © alii ori aes eee eee 128
Tagelus (Mesoplura) bourgeo-
ise) Hertlein 2 ee 73
The Bonner Onyx-marble Quar-
ry, Further Material from......
The Fossil Pedipalpi from Bon-
TOC Tas QUANT TY mre tase ee ee ee 38
The Fragility Factor for Try-
panosoma cruzi in Experi-
mental Chagas’ Disease.......... 164
The Isopodan Genus Jais
(CRS tacea))ie ee ais 136
The Olfactory System of Tailed
ANTON ONO ONE, se eer 119
Thelyphonoidea new super-
PELTON ya Seen ats ee Se 39
What Significance Depth?...._..... 167
New varieties, species, genera and families indicated in bold face type
INDEX OF
Barmandende i auTrem ses... 22--2 222. 136
Wrakerm Carl Jie ee 101
TRE YSI ONO «NYY es Eee ae mac Se 1
Emerson, William K..................... 89
JRUTO STAY,» SSS Oe ee 1
Gregg, Wendell O......................... 156
CreconmJOSeph ese 21
Hertlein, Leo George....68, 76, 152
Hilton, William A.............--......... 119
Kirkwood, Carl W.........-...---------- 99
NG AMEVIVIET: Seo ae e.3: 2. cee. 22 eo aces 81
leimslleyes Gee 992
LOW, (ClENRIES Tel. de es 128
AUTHORS
MTB YOST d, \W/ asec 92
Menzies, Robert J................- 86, 136
IMIOIPRT, LRG N 6 lect eiccccoseeoescocceeacte 57
One Pai Cre eee 167
Pierce, W. Dwight..........---...----.--- 34
Reeder, William G..............-----.... 14
Spernya Johns eee 50, 159
Stager, Kenneth W.....-...-.-..-..-....- 14
Strong AG Vier ae ees 76, 152
ATS GG Tansee Ne Seer ee ne 96
Wood, Sherwin F..............-.. 106, 164
Ziesenhenne, Fred C................--- 25
Zweifel, Richard G............-.....----- 128
“vi
—-
. REPRINTS: Contributors of articles eeageed for publication in
_ the Bulletin should order reprints, if desired, when they return
_ galley proof to the Editor. They may be ordered through the
Editor at the following rates, from the McBride Printing Co.,
» 415 East Eleventh Street, Los Angeles, Calif., the contributor
___ paying for all his reprints.
PRICE LIST OF REPRINTS
(WITHOUT COVERS)
4pp. 8pp. 12pp. I6pp. 20pp. 24pp. 28pp. 32pp.
50 copies ... $3.75 $5.75 $850 $10.25 $11.75 $13.50 $16.00 $17.00
Peete 450° 750 10.75 | 1275 15.00... 17:25. - 20.25, 21.50
150 a2! 9.2 1300) 1525: 218.25. 21.00) 2450" 26.00
Bee (6.00). 1.00) 15:25) 317.75) 21.50: 24.75 + 28.75" 3050
a 675 1275 1750 22 2475 2850 33.00 35.00
rs 300 Bee 0) 14.50 5119-1: 2295 28.00". 32.25. | 37.25. ° 39:50
Covers: 50 for $2.00—additional covers 1c each.
California State Sales Tax to be added if delivered within the state.
g
|
vs
Distinctive
mee (i NTIING
4 Books @ Catalogs @ Broadsides
_ Stationery and Office Forms
; ®
_ McBRIDE PRINTING CO.
Ph OUN E': “PROS pec 2 OS 3
415; EAS LL) -BWEW ER ible Sule
“Since 1879” lds tA nig alesse i ay (Gtal ate
.
©
BULLETIN OF THE
Southern California
Academy of Sciences
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
(uluinehinmnz ins
VoL. 51 January - Apri, 1952 Part 1
COMTENTS
A New Genus and Species Associated with
Orchids from Mexico (Lepidoptera;
Chrysaugidae). Hahn W. Capps
A New Strepsipterous Parasite of
Membracidae. W. Dwight Pierce
Iphitime and Ceratocephala (Polychaetous
Annelids ) From California. Olga Hartman
Dr. John Herman . . In Memoriam.
momerl. King and John A..Comstock.._.......-.-..2----.2- 21
Issued April 30, 1952
Southern Californie i 4
Academy of Sciences —
OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS
Dr. Lonis:'C, "Wheelete crc citessceceeesnsovestesenvetensvsusee ts vasitas een oe Rake ie
Dr. Sherwin F. “ub cei yaiere uence Pen man eS eee 2 Pre
Mr, Russell *S5° Wg Dini ik os oieses costae ics Liesat es stirnicnoe ante
Dr Howard, RSA cece. a ate ere Ae
Dr. W. Dwight Tee a
Dr. John As Goristochi i. oon esckeoneanarabuisssccangesihe See date ene
Mr. ‘Tcloyd) My Miaxtitasccce corte te lire a een no ee Sabres etvete Memby Secre
Miss. Bonnie “Termpleta sci sesi ote coy Pate ----+. Assistant to Secre
Dr. A. Weir Bell Dr. Philip AL! Munz
Dr. John A. Comstock Mr. Theoc
Dr. Howard R. Hill Dr. W. Dwight Pierde
Dr. Hildegarde Howard Dr. Louis Hi . Wheeler
Dr. William L. Lloyd Mr. Russe 5) Pgh se
Dr. Sherwin F. Wood
ADVISORY BOARD
Dr. H. J. Andrews Dr. Homene King
Dr. J. Stanley Brode Dr. Irving Rehman a
Mr. Fred E. Burlew Mr. Kenneth E. Stager oe,
Dr. Preston Kline Caye Dr. R. Hy Swift a
Miss Bonnie Templeton ike oy
SCIENCE SECTIONS ee
Section of Agricultural Sciences Section of H ealth and Sanitati
Mr. Claude A. Richards, Chairman Dr. Irving Rehman, Chairman
Anthropological Section Section of Junior Scientists.
Mr. Robert M. Ariss, Chairman Miss Gretchen Sibley, Chairman im
Botanical Section Section of Physical Sciences ©
Dr. George R. Johnstone, Chairman Dr. Homer P. King, Phatinnn: a)
Section of Earth Sciences Section of Zoological Sciences — re 2
Dr. Hildegarde Howard, Chairman Dr. Howard R. ‘Hill, Chairman
STANDING COMMITTEES
Finance Publication
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, Chairman Dr. John A. Comstock, Chai
Sherwin F. Wood, Auditor Dr. Hildegarde Howard
Mr. O. R. Angelillo : Dr. A. Weir Bell
Dr. John A. Comstock Dr. Philip A. Miia
Mr. Russell S. Woglum ¥
Conservation 7
Progam Mr. Carroll Lang, agi tad 4
Dr. Louis C. Wheeler, Chairman Membership = mere
Dr. Irving Rehman, Chairman I
Hospitality Library Se : a |
Mrs. Donald Drake, Chairman Dr. Howard R. Hill, Chairm
OFFICE OF THE ACADEMY
Los Angeles County Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, ae,
T° eta al
Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences
Mocutteeniee = 92 - = = = = = = «| Parr 1, 1952
A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES ASSOCIATED
WITH ORCHIDS FROM MEXICO
(LEPIDOPTERA: CHRYSAUGIDAE )
By Haun W. Capps
Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, Agricultural Research
Administration, United States Department of Agriculture
For several years the larvae of a chrysaugid species have been
intercepted rather frequently in shipments of orchids from
Mexico. The adults reared and submitted for identification by
inspectors of the Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantines
at the ports of Brownsville and Laredo, Texas, represent a new
species and a new genus.
POTOSA, new genus
Antenna simple or ciliate. Labial palpus upturned, not reach-
ing vertex, moderately scaled below. Frons evenly rounded.
MALE: Forewing (fig. 2) with costa slightly undulate; 11 veins
(7 united with 8), vein 2 approximate to 3, 4 and 5 stalked, 6
from upper angle of cell. Hind wing (fig. 2) with vein 3 from
slightly before angle of cell, 4 and 5 stalked; discoidals strongly
curved inward; 7 stalked with 6 from cell then diverging and
anastomosing with 8 a short distance. FEMALE: Forewing
(fig 1) with costa nearly straight; 11 veins (7 present, stalked with
§ and 9, 11 obsolescent); 4 and 5 stalked. Hind wing (fig. 1)
essentially like that of male.
Type of genus. — Potosa rufofascialis, new species.
Remarks. — Related to but separated from Dasycnemia Rago-
not! by veins 7 and 8 of the forewing (males of Dasycnemia with
vein 7 separate from 8 and those of Potosa with 7 and 8 united).
No females of Dasycnemia available for comparison.
Potosa rufofascialis, new species
MALE: (pl. 1; figs. 2, 4, 4a). — Antenna ciliate; cilia short,
length of cilia approximately equal width of antenna near base.
Third segment of labial palpus short, not more than one-half as
1Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, p. 660, fig. 25, 1897.—
Hampson, G. F.
Butvetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
long as second. Forewing: (above) reddish brown with a tinge of
rrcles transverse anterior and posterior lines brownish, rather
indistinct, concave outwardly. Transverse anterior line from costa,
distant the base about one-fourth length of wing; transverse
posterior line from costa, distant the base about two-thirds length
of wing. Basal area darker than median area.; (below) paler than
upper surface, with the light brown more intense near costa, and
the transverse and posterior lines more distinct. Hind wing:
(above) reddish brown, slightly paler than forewing; post medial
line indistinct; (below) post medial line distinct, somewhat
serrate.
Mid tibia rather heavily scaled; hind tibia less so, but tarsi
with tuftlike scales.
Genitalia (fig. 4) with harpe simple; anellus broad, deeply
incised; gnathos long, slender, distal end a short, sharp, upturned
hook; uncus short, broad; aedeagus (fig. 4a) without cornuti.
Alar expanse. — 18 mm.
FEMALE (pl. 1; figs. 3,5). — Antenna simple. Third segment
of labial palpus short, length not more than one-half that of
second. Mid and hind tibia similar to those of male, but with scal-
ing of hind tarsi fringe-like instead of tufted. Maculation similar
to male.
Gentilalia (pl. 1; fig. 3) with a narrow sclerotized band along
lower margin of genital opening; a small patch of spines slightly
below ductus seminalis; bursa copulatrix weakly scobinate.
Alar expanse. — 20 to 22 mm.
Type and paratypes. — In U. S. National Museum, No. 61425.
Type locality. — Maiz, San Luis Potosi, Mexico.
Food plant. — Orchids (plant roots ).
Material. - MEXICO: Maiz, San Luis Potosi (male type and
4 female paratypes); Antiguo Morales, San Luis Potosi (2 male
and 2 female paratypes ).
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 1
Female fore and hind wing.
Male fore and hind wing.
Female genitalia, ventral view.
Male genitalia with aedeagus removed, ventral view.
Female adult.
4
gq
Ute Co LOR
Drawings by Arthur D. Cushman, scientific illustrator of U. S. Bureau of
Entomology and Plant Quarantine.
2,
=
BuLLeETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES _ Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
Plate 1
3
Buttetin, So, Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
A NEW STREPSIPTEROUS PARASITE OF
MEMBRACIDAE
By WW. Dwicut Prerce
The Strepsiptera are an order of insects seldom seen by the
average collector, although they may be present in the very area
collected. The females are larviform, and found only in the
abdomens of other insects, with only a cephalothoracic dise pro-
truding between the segments; while the males are winged, very
erratic in flight, and seldom found.
They parasitize the primitive silver fish, grasshoppers, ants,
bees, wasps, bugs, and leaf hoppers in various parts of the world.
As I have elsewhere stated, the Aleurodoptera, Coccoptera,
Strepsiptera, and Cyclorrhaphous Diptera form an ordinal group,
Pupariata, in which the last larval skin becomes a puparium in
which pupation takes place. The head of the puparium becomes
a lid, the cephalotheca, in the Strepsiptera and Diptera, which is
pushed off on emergence.
The wing venation in the first three orders is very simple, with
no cells or cross veins. In the Strepsiptera the most primitive
forms have a short basal Costa; a marginal Subcosta; Radius 1
often broken near middle of wing, with one or two fragments of
Radial Sector beyond; Media usually free from base and extend-
ing to margin, but often broken at middle, with Media 1 always
free and anterior to the main stem; sometimes with loose frag-
ments representing Media 2, 3, and 4; Cubitus free, but usually
Cubitus 1, if present, does not reach the base; while Cubitus 2,
if present, is complete; one, two or three Anal veins.
Although the Strepsiptera have been reported from numerous
species of Homoptera of the superfamilies Fulgoroidea and
Jassoidea, there is only one published record of parasitism of the
\Membracidae. Subramaniam in 1927 described Indoxenos mem-
braciphaga, bred from Otinotus pallescens Distant, in Mysore
State, India. This was placed in the Halictophagidae.
It is now my pleasure to describe the first American parasite of
the Membracidae. Mr. Cedric R. Jordan, a graduate student at
the Texas A. & M. College, is working on the biology and control
of the three-cornered alfalfa hopper, Spissistylus festinus (Say )
( Stictocephalus f. Say ). He has found this leaf hopper parasitized
at Curtis, Louisiana, and College Station, Texas.
The abdomen of this leaf hopper is small, triangular in cross
section, and in most cases there is room for only one parasite, but
there were four hosts with two visible parasites each, one with
males, two with females, and one with a male and a female. But
on dissection, the writer found in one host 2 females, and 3 male
+t
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Te Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
puparia; in another a female and a larva. In the material sent for
study 212 and 12¢ hoppers were parasitized by 37 visible para-
sites, or, as stated above, 41 parasites in all. These consisted of
183, 222, and one larva. In all but two hosts the parasites pro-
truded from ventral segments; 12,1¢ in lstsegment;52,4¢ in 2nd
ventral; 12,146 in 2nd dorsal; 112,66 in 8rd ventral; 1¢é in 3rd
dorsal; 42,2¢ in 4th ventral; 34, 1 larva internal.
Most of the material was collected July 16, August 10, 11, and
28, 1950, at Curtis; and September 25, and 27 at College Station.
The one mature male was obtained September 27.
The characters of this insect warrant description of a new
genus in the family Halictophagidae. The wings of Halicto-
phagidae all lack Cubitus 1 and some lack Cubitus 2. The species
so far described have in no case more than 3 veins in the cubito-
anal area. The new species has Cubitus 2 and 3 anal veins.
GENUS MEMBRACIXENOS, new genus.
Halictophagidae, with seven-jointed antennae, the third to
seventh flabellately produced and covered with delicate sense
organs; special sensory organ at base of flabellum of 4th segment;
three-jointed tarsi. Head of male dorsally broadly excavate for
pronotum, but ventrally not excavate. Wing (Figure 2), with
surface covered by microtrichia; with basal Costa; marginal Sub-
costa; darkened area between Subcosta and Radius; detached
Radial Sector, and detached Media 1; Media 2 complete; Cubitus
1 missing; Cubitus 2 complete; 1st Anal extending only to middle
of wing; 2nd Anal and 8rd Anal detached at base. Abdomen
beneath (Figure 4) with 7 chitinized sternal plates.
Type — Membracixenos jordani, new species.
Membracixenos jordani, new species
(Plate 2; Figures 1-8)
Parasite of the Membracid, Spissistylus festinus (Say). Type
locality, College Station, Texas; paratype locality Curtis, Louisi-
ana. Described from 1 male (holotype); fragments of another
male, and an extracted male in poor condition; 4 male cephalo-
thecae; 11 male puparia; 2 male pupae; 14 females (including
allotype); 6 larvae; and many triungulinids; mounted upon 38
microscope slides, with additional material in 8 vials of alcohol.
Male measurements: length 1.94 mm.; breadth of head 0.573
mm.; length of head on center line 0.15 mm.; length of antennae
0.439 mm.; length of thorax 1.146 mm.; hind leg coxa 0.18 mm.,
femur 0.28 mm., tibia 0.30 mm., each tarsal joint 0.08 mm.; wing
lateral expansion width 1.4325 mm., length from costa to apical
margin 1.088 mm.; length of abdomen on side 0.955 mm.; oedeagus
0.114 mm.
BuLLETIN, So. CALir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol, 51, Part 1, 1952
Head (Plate 2; Figures 1,6) transverse, laterally stalked, bear-
ing eyes; much broader than thorax; anterior occipital margin
slightly concave; genae diagonally retreating to eyes; antennae
widely separated by the broader frontal process; dorsal base
trapezoidally emarginate for reception of pronotum. Ventrally the
unprotected mouth opening is in front of the middle of a sub-
quadrate darkened facial area; at the margins of which are set
the short acute mandibles, and two-jointed maxillary palpi. The
antennal joints terminate almost on an even line. Hofeneder’s
special sense organ can be seen indistinctly near the base of the
flabellum of the 4th segment.
The pronotum is arched forward to fit into the emargination
of the head; posteriorly it is biemarginate; laterally it is a very
narrow band to the venter. The intersegmental skin between
pronotum and mesonotum is broader than either segment.
Mesonotum is a narrow ring band with diagonal pleural strips.
The elytra or balancers are about as long as the width of the
mesonotum. The metathoacic pattern is quite normal, with key-
stone-shaped prescutum, scuti not in contact, scutellum semi-
elliptic; postlumbium transverse; postscutellum rather short, about
as wide as long. Tarsi (Figure 3) all 3-segmented; each arising
distant from the apex of the preceding.
Although the type male, which was extracted from a puparium,
does not show the oedeagus, this is distinct in another male, also
extracted, but otherwise not in good condition. These specimens
will be kept in alcohol. The terminal segment (Figure 5) is almost
vertical, and the oedeagus is a simple twice bent tube, with very
sharp apex. It is very much the shape of that of Pseudoxenos
neomexicanus, but different from all of the described Halicto-
phagidae.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 2
Membracixenos jordani Pierce
1. Adult male body, dorsal view. Length 1.9 mm.
2. Wing of male: A—Anal veins; C—Costa; Cu—Cubitus; M—Media; R—Radius;
Rs—Radial Sector; Sc—Subcosta.
3. Parts of legs: a,b—tarsus of fore leg; c—tibia and tarsus of middle leg;
c—tibia and tarsus of middle leg; d—hind leg.
Venter of male abdomen.
Terminal segment of male, showing oedeagus.
Face of male.
Cephalotheca of male puparium; Ant.—antenna; as—antennal suture;
Clp—clypeus; E—eye; Ephy—epipharynx; es—epistomal suture; Ge—gena:;
Gn—gnathocephalon; hs—hypostomal suture; Md—mandible; Mth—mouth;
Mx—maxilla; Oc—occiput; Of—occipital foramen; Pge—postgena; Poc—
postocciput; pos—postoccipital suture; Prt—pariental; Sg—subgena; Smt—
submentum; Vx—Vertex.
8. Cephalothorax of female.
TID OU
ee
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
BuLLeTiIn, So, CAtir, ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
Male cephalotheca (Figure 7): breadth 0.668 mm.; length
0.4202 mm. In form somewhat similar to that of Diozocera, but
with mentum more quadrate. The areas are designated in Figure
7. The mandibles are 2-toothed.
Female (Plate 2; Figure 8) cephalothorax 0.32 mm. long from
apex to constriction behind spiracles; greatest breadth 0.42 mm.
The body is a sac, which fits into the available space in the
abdomen of the host. The cephalothorax is very different in form
from that of Indoxenos, which is elongate, but is similar to that
of Diozocera. The mandibles are armed in the inner apex with a
curved tooth, and on the outer apical angle with a rounded tooth.
They protrude beyond the anterior margin of the head. The outer
angles of the base of the head are immediately in front of the
cephalothoracic spiracles, as in Indoxenos and Diozocera, a char-
acter by which they differ very greatly from the Stylopidae.
Triungulinid: average length 0.191 mm.; width 0.0382 to 0.047
mm. wide; thus being as long as those of Indoxenos, but very much
more slender.
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
IPHITIME AND CERATOCEPHALA ( PoLycHAErous
ANNELIDS) FROM CALIFORNIA*
By Otca HarTMAN
Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California
The purpose of this paper is to call attention to the presence
of two new marine annelids from California, belonging to two
rare genera that have remained unreported, one from the Western
Hemisphere, the other from the western part of North America.
The first, Iphitime loxorhynchi, new species, is a member of the
family LysaRETIDAE, superfamily Euntcrea; the second Ceratoce-
phala crosslandi americana, new subspecies, belongs to the family
NEREIDAE.
I am indebted to Professor and Mrs. George E. MacGinitie,
who first called my attention to the presence of annelids within
the carapace of the kelp-crab, Loxorhynchus grandis Stimpson,
and who, with Dr. C. A. G. Wiersma, collected many specimens
from Southern California. The late Dr. Shiro Okuda of Hokkaido
University, sent me specimens of Iphitime doderleini Marenzeller
from Japan, for comparsion. For the nereids I owe thanks to the
cruising staffs of the E. W. Scripps, Scripps Institution of Ocea-
nography, and the Velero IV, University of Southern California.
Anker Petersen, staff artist of the Allan Hancock Foundation, pre-
pared the illustrations for the two plates. I am especially indebted
to the Administration of the Allan Hancock Foundation for per-
mitting the study of these materials. Type specimens are deposited
in the Allan Hancock Foundation.
LYSARETIDAE Kinberg, 1865
This family is largely tropical in its occurrence. It is known
for few (possibly seven or eight) species belonging to four
genera: Lysarete Kinberg, 1865, Halla Costa, 1844, Aglaurides
Ehlers, 1864-68 and Iphitime Marenzeller, 1902. All of the species,
except those of Iphitime, are free-living and come to attain con-
siderable size; thus, Halla parthenopeia (delle Chiaje), an im-
portant fish-bait worm in some parts of the world, may come to be
90 cm (about three feet) long (Okuda, 1933, pp. 243-247).
Iphitime is known only from the branchial chambers of Crustacea,
and its representatives do not attain such great size.
Most of the lysaretids are brightly colored in life; they are
errantiate in their habitat and foraging or predaceous, attacking
lamellibranchs or other organisms by enveloping their victims
with mucous secretions. Some, when placed under unfavorable
conditions, emit a dark violet secretion (Okuda, 1933, p. 246).
The species of Iphitime are not highly colored, can be presumed
to be nestling in their habitat, and may feed only on the minute
particles of food that are carried into the branchial compartments
*Contribution No. 94 of the Allan Hancock Foundation, University of South-
ern California, Los Angeles, California.
9
BuLLetin, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
hy water currents. Nothing is known of the origin of the worm, of
its fate at ecdysis of the crab, or of its means of Hepiiiiliction.
There are no records of Iphitime having been taken outside of the
crab. Whether the species are host-specific may be doubted,
since some records (see below) indicate otherwise.
Another representative of the Eunicea, Ophryotrocha gery-
onicola ( Bidenkap ), is also an inhabitant of the branchial chamber
of a crab, Geryon tridens Kroyer, in western Europe. In this case
it has been suggested that the ‘commensal stage is possibly a modi-
lied one of the free-living Ophryotrocha puerilis (Claparede and
\letchnikow ) (see Wesenberg-Lund, 1938, p. 13).
There is no known homologous, free-living stage for species of
[phitime. The crab-dwelling individuals of this genus cannot thus
be considered to represent trapped stages of a free-living form.
Furthermore, the entire maxillary apparatus, the parapodial lobes
and setae, as well as other body parts are considerably modified
from the typical, errantiate lysaretid body.
Iphitime Marenzeller, 1902
Type I. doderleini Marenzeller, 1902
Most of the literature on Iphitime has been assembled (Fage
and Legendre, 1934, pp. 299-305). This includes descriptive ac-
counts of three species. A fourth one is herewith added. These
are:
doderleini Marenzeller, 1902, from south Japan, with host
Macrocheira kaempferi de Haan.
I. cuenoti Fauvel, 1914, from France, with hosts including
species of Portunus, Gonoplax, Macropodia and Maia.
I. paguri Fage and Legendre, 1934, from France, with hosts
including brachyuran and anomuran crabs.
I. loxorhynchi, new species, from California, with host Loxo-
rhynchus grandis Stimpson.
[phitime is characterized for havi ‘ing a greatly reduced prosto-
mium that lacks eyes. Its frontal margin has a single pair of small
ovoid antennae. The first two segments are achaetous, smooth
rings. Parapodia occur from the third segment and are entirely
uniramous. On the eversible pharynx the maxillary apparatus is
greatly reduced. When retracted it can be seen as a small dark
mass lying in about the second segment. The maxillae or dorsal
pieces consist of a pair of larger forceps, followed by a few smaller
pieces in paired tandem, numbering only a single pair, or few
more. The mandibles or ventral pieces consist of a pair of medi-
ally fused long pieces, with outer lateral wings at the anterior or
cutting edge. Parapodia consist of a pair of simple lobes between
which the setae project; there are no ventral cirri. Setae include
simple and composite ones; all are falcate. Branchiae are seg-
mental and present on most body segments; they are simple or
branched.
10
|
|
BULLETIN, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
The chief specific characters are those concerned with the dis-
tribution of branchiae, their degree of branching, the position of
the branchial base on the parapodium, and the details concerning
the_setae.
Iphitime loxorhynchi, new species
Plate 3, figs. 1-6
Many individuals come from off Corona del Mar and other
localities in southern California, from the branchial chambers of
the sheep-crab or kelp-crab, Loxorhynchus grandis Stimpson.
Length of a larger, ovigerous female individual is 60 to 70 mm;
number of segments is 200 or more. This is thus the largest of the
known species of the genus (see chart below for details). The
prostomium is a small, subquadrate lobe provided with a pair of
minute antennae at the anterior margin (fig. 1); there are no eyes
or other accessory parts. The proboscis, seen by dissection, is pro-
vided with mandibles fused medially at its distal part; their outer
margins are enlarged as a pair of thin lateral plates (fig. 6) the
dorsal maxillae include a pair of large forceps and smaller distal
pieces, the right one with four or five short teeth, the left one
smooth (fig. 6).
Branchiae are first present from the second setigerous segment
and already long but the next are half again as long. In most
instances the branchiae are simple, cylindrical processes (figs. 2,
3); in others they are somewhat branched, especially in their
distal parts (fig. 1). The main branchial stem is directed obliquely
outward. Its origin is somewhat above the superior parapodial
base.
Parapodia are lateral, consist of a dorsally directed upper lobe
(figs. 2, 3); the setae project from between their anterior and
posterior lobes. Posterior (fig. 3) resemble median (fig. 2) para-
podia except for decreasing size. All acicula and setae are pale
yellow. Typically the parapodia have 20 or more simple hooks
(fig. 4) above, about 6 similar ones below the acicula and 20 or
more composite hooks. Acicula number about 6 or more in a
parapodium; each is a slender, tapering rod. The composite hooks
(fig. 5) have an appendage that is falcate. Simple setae (fig. 4)
resemble the composite hooks but have no articulation.
In mature specimens there are lozenge-shaped ova, present
from about the seventeenth setigerous segment and continued
back to near the posterior end. The ova are very numerous and
crowded, such that they are pushed upward into the branchial
bases for about half the branchial length.
There is no color remaining in preserved individuals. In life
they may be pale red or pink, owing to the color of the blood.
There are few to many, possibly ten or more individuals from
single crab hosts, and worms are sometimes present in both
branchial chambers.
11
BuLLetin, So, CAL. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
Plate 3
i)
BULLETIN, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
The specific name of the worm refers to the generic name of
the host, Loxorhynchus grandis, Stimpson, which has a reported
range (Rathbun, 1925, pp. 198-199) of central California to Baja
California, Mexico, in depths to 68 fms. This represents the first
record of the genus Iphitime Marenzeller from the Western Hemi-
sphere. The following chart outlines the chief characteristics for
species of the genus, and gives distributional data with host
species.
NEREIDAE Blainville, 1818
In members of the family NerewaeE the eversible proboscis is
a strong, muscular organ differentiated into an oral and maxillary
ring; it terminates distally in a pair of horny jaw pieces. The areas
on the maxillary ring are numbered from I to IV, those on the oral
ring V to VIII; typically the areas are provided with structures
generically and specifically differentiated. In the great majority
the pieces are horny brown or black, called paragnaths (Nereis
and Neanthes ), or pectinae (Platynereis), or ridges (Perinereis).
In one group, Leonnates Kinberg, the pieces are horny on the
maxillary, and soft and membranous on the oral ring. In com-
paratively few genera the processes are totally lacking; such are
the genera Dendronereis Peters, Kainonereis Chamberlin, Lepto-
nereis Kinberg, Lycastoides Johnson, Lycastopsis Augener,
Micronereis Claparede, Namanereis Chamberlin and Nicon Kin-
berg. In a still smaller group of species the processes on the
proboscis are present as soft, membranous, short to long papillar
structures; they may be present on both oral and maxillary rings,
as in the genera Chinonereis Chamberlin, Dendronereides South-
ern, Laeonereis Hartman, Tylonereis Fauvel and Tylorrhynchus
Grube, or they may be present on only the oral ring, as in
Ceratocephala Malmgren.
At present, the genera characterized for the presence of soft,
membranous proboscidial processes, are rather weakly differen-
tiated and generally little known. Most of these genera have
single or few species attributed to them. Many of them are inhabi-
tants of brackish or freshwater and widely dispersed geographi-
cally. At least two, those of Tylorrhynchus and Chinonereis, are
pests in rice paddies, in eastern and southern Asia; Dendronereides
is known for a single freshwater species from India; Tylonereis
is known for only two species, both from southern Asia, and
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 3
Iphitime loxorhynchi, new species
1. Anterior end in dorsal view, x 8.5.
2. Median parapodium in posterior view, x 16.
Fig. 3. Posterior parapodium in posterview view, x 16.
4. A superior simple hook, x 1068.
5. An inferior composite hook, x 1068.
Fig. 6. Paragnathal apparatus, with mandibles and maxillae in ventral
view, x 146.
ES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
ALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENC
(
BULLETIN, SO.
“yooy e]duts suo
pue syooy e}sodwuo0s g 10 }
-
‘syooy e{duis ¢ 10 F pur
yooy sysoduiod gz moqy
ppnolor F yoge pur ‘syooy
ajduus yRuis C-— pur asiry]
QT ‘syooy eysodwiod Aur
vnotor g noqe
pue syooy IemMotor-qns a] dus
g ‘syooy e}sodwo0s QZ “rey
-notoe-vidns ey duus YZ Noqy
syuauodtuor) eipodrirg
Pep [PUOHNGLUSTIp pue SOTSTIOJOVICYO
A][BSIOp
PeHesul “WUOFRISTP ‘yzMOy
A]]v419}v] peyesul
‘peplip 0} WUOFHISIpP ‘4ysI1y
AT[VIO}LIPTUL po}os
-UI “SOqOT 6 OF YA ‘YG Wor]
ayeued =pur aydurs ‘sity
e
A][P19}V] poj}los
| -UL ‘poeplAlp 0} e{durs spuoseg
06-98
09-0G
OTE 9 SST
9IOW 10 (OT
edoiny woz [TV
snpipyusag sninsvdny
LopDAndap snun}Log
SMJSO.LIDUO] DIPOdO.LID IV;
DIDjNZuUD xvjdouor)
odomy WOlF [PV
SLYSOLIDUO] DIPOdOLIDIV
Dypjnouv xp} douory
‘dds snunjwog
oppuinbs pivyy
urvdef
MafdWavy DAJAYIOIID JY
VIUIOFILS, ULOYINOS
SIpudia snyouhysoxo'T
I9JOBIVYO pur
‘oRTyOUuRrIg jo aouasoaid Asal
syusuIsos
snoIosijas
jo toquin
APPLOO]
puv sotoods ysop{
19
OL-09
ULE UI
Yysuoe]
[eqIOL,
dIPUISI'T NY osviy
1nopvd
joann yy
youano
IO]JOZUIIL IY
Mujap}.apop
ULUIV]}Y
1youhiysoxo]
soloodg JO olny
OSOUBRIP YA awazydy JO soroedg AO} BAvYD
Ul
14
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
Laeonercis is known for perhaps half a dozen species from widely
scattered localities. Ceratocephala is known for few species (see
chart below) and all are marine though in widely scattered
geographic areas.
Key to Genera of Neremar in which the Proboscidial
Processes are soft and membranous
1. Pharyngeal processes limited to the oral ring
(soll, 2, sae JL) eA Wer Ue ape aie ee a eae aU Ceratocephala
1. Pharyngeal processes present on both oral
mbes eaves) ee 2
2. Parapodia with branchiae in the form of fila-
ments inserted below the dorsal cirrus... Dendronereides
Paatapodianwithout branchiae- 3
3. Proboscis provided with tufts of papillae..___. Laeonereis
3. These papillae single, not in tufts... +
4. Setae include spinigers and falcigers........._.. Tylorrhynchus
eerACHALCICMtInely spini@ens.=
5. Setae have an articulation that is heterogomph Chinonereis
5. Setae have an articulation that is homogomph Tylonereis
Ceratocephala Malmgren, 1867
Type C. loveni Malmgren
This genus is characterized for having a prostomium that is
proportionately wide; its frontal margin is incised between the
bases of the paired antennae; the palpi are spreading, and prosto-
mial eyes are reduced or absent. The eversible proboscis has
distal jaws that lack teeth. The maxillary ring is bare; the oral
ring has a few soft, conical processes in single, or partially double,
transverse rows. The first two parapodia are uniramous, more
posterior ones are biramous. Ventral cirri (usually) are double
in some or all segments. Setae are entirely composite spinigers,
with an appendage that is blade-like and with few or no spinelets
along the cutting edge.
The few known species are distinguished from one another
for the presence or absence of eyes, the character of the dorsal
cirrophore, and the proportionate lengths of parapodial lobes.
Since most of the species are known only from anterior, dredged
ends, a comparison of far posterior parapodia is not possible. The
occurrence of epitoky is known for at least one species, from the
Dutch East Indies.
The following species are known:
C. loveni Malmgren, 1867, from western Sweden and northeastern
America, dredged from moderate depths.
C. sibogae Horst, 1924, off the Dutch East Indies, 11 m to surface,
and more recently recorded from Littoral sands of South
America (Fauvel, 1936, pp. 24-28).
C. crosslandi (Monro), 1933, from Gorgona Island, Pacific Pan-
ama, 30 fms.
BuLLetin, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
C. borealis Wesenberg-Lund, 1950, from western Greenland, 599
and 1096 m.
Another, close to C. crosslandi Monro, has recently been recov-
ered from southern California; it is herewith described as sub-
species americana, new.
Key to Species of Ceratocephala Malmgren
|. Prostomium without CVESi i: ues Ps
|. Prostomium with 4 eyes in quadrate arrangement 3
2. Proboscis with 2 rows of soft papillae on areas
VDA Lc es a A er C. loveni
2. Proboscis with a single row of papillae on areas
VE SV TM eh icc Sa ce Seo ach d aie C. borealis
3. Dorsal cirrophore with a large triangular lobe
lateral ‘to: base of dorsal. cirnis2: i ee C. sibogae
3. Dorsal cirrophore without a triangular lobe
lateral'to baseof dorsal cimmus]. =e 4
4. Dorsal cirrus of first 2 segments simple; ventral
cimus, double throughout.) = =. eee C. crosslandi
4. Dorsal cirrus of first 2 segments double;
ventral cirrus becoming simple at about seg-
NOME SO 2s chs ele ee tA mee C. crosslandi americana
Ceratocephala crosslandi americana, new subspecies
Plate 4, figs. 1-3)
Chaunorhynchus crosslandi Monro, 1933, pp. 46-49, figs. 20 a-f
(stem species ).
There are two finds, the larger one comes from off Lower Cali-
fornia, Mexico, 29° 34’ 15” N., 115° 48’ W, in 53-54 fms, April 15,
1951, green mud; the other was dredged off La Jolla, California,
in less than 50 fms, April, 1938. Both are anterior ends; the larger
has the proboscis everted, the other has it retracted.
The larger measures 19 mm long for 16 segments and 2 mm
wide without parapodia; the smaller one measures 19 mm long
for 40 segments and is about 1 mm wide. On the everted proboscis
the distal paired jaws are translucent dark horny brown; the
cutting edge is entire. The maxillary ring is smooth; the oral ring
has transversely arranged conical processes. Areas V and VI
have one each (fig. 1). Areas VII and VIII are continuous, with a
single row of 7 soft cones; in addition there is a pair of transverse
short ridges on each side, toward the mouth and at the lateral
edges of the oral papillae (fig. 2.).
The prostomium is wider than long; it has a pair of large
frontal antennae widely separated medially. The palpi are only
slightly larger than the antennae. There are 4 dark eyes in trape-
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 4
Ceratocephala crosslandi americana, new subspecies
1. Anterior end in dorsal view, with proboscis everted, x 14.5.
Fig g. 2. Anterior end in ventral view, with proboscis everted, x 14.5.
3. Fourteenth parapodium in anterior view, x 42.5.
16
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES | __ Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
i Plate 4
17
BULLETIN, So. CALir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
zoidal arrangement; the anterior are larger and wider apart than
the posterior eyes. All have large, pale, circular lenses that cover
most of the distal disk, when seen from above. The 4 pairs of
peristomial cirri have the proportions shown in figures 1 and 2.
The first visible body ring lacks parapodia. The next 2 segments
have uniramous parapodia and thereafter the parapodia are
clearly biramous.
The dorsal cirrus of the first two segments is unique for being
double; it consists of a main dorsal branch; from its lower base
there arises a secondary cirrus that is about half as large as the
main one; this accessory dorsal cirrus is the same on both first and
second segments of both specimens, hence probably normal.
Thereafter, through a few segments, this accessory cirrus is visible
as a slight boss ; at the base of the main dorsal cirrus and gradually
vanishes.
Biramous parapodia are long, directed laterally and resemble
those in other species of the genus. The dorsal cirrus is long,
slender, distally tapering; in anterior segments it seems to arise
directly from the body* wall. In more posterior segments the
cirrophore is visible as a low base, and by segment 35-40 it comes
to be about as large as its respective notoacicular lobe. The
presetal acicular lobe is long, slender, triangular and resembles
the corresponding neuropodial one but is longer. The postsetal
lobes of both notopodia and neuropodia are broadly rounded,
short, the neuropodial surpassing the notopodial one in length
and depth (fig. 3). A similarly long inferior lobe is present at the
inferior, anterior position of the parapodium. The proportions
of these parts vary little through the first 35 to 40 segments.
The ventral cirrus is double from the first parapodium; its
upper branch is slightly longer and broader than the lower one.
Farther back it continues double but the lower branch decreases
in size so that by segment 21 the lower branch is only about half
as long as the upper one. Between segments 30 to 40 the lower
one vanishes altogether as a low knob, at the lower proximal
base of the main cirrus. It is possible that the ventral cirrus may
be single in the posterior region of the body.
Acicula are dark, slender, distally tapering; they occur singly
in the branches of the parapodia. Setae are entirely composite,
spinigerous, with the appendage long and slender, and with the
cutting edge nearly or quite smooth. Setae are in dense fascicles
in anterior parapodia and diminish in number in middle segments.
The subspecies, americana, differs from the stem, C. crosslandi
in that the dorsal cirrus of the first two segments is double, not
single; the ventral cirrus of median segments comes to be single,
and does not continue as a double process. Other differences are
indicated on the chart, below.
The following chart outlines the chief features of the species
of the genus Ceratocephala, with known distributional data.
18
———————————————————— EEE
1952
>
Part 1
>
Vol. 51
ES
CIENC
So. CALIF
BULLETIN,
ACADEMY OF S
poedoypsaspuy
pedoyeaspuy,
pedojaaspuy
SNM [es
-IOp JO aseq 3e 9qoT
ivpnsuviy “suoy VW
SNIILD [BS
-I0p JO aseq ye aqoy
Ivpnsuviy “suoy VW
juasqy
Ired 10t10}sod
uvy} yrede Jopim
pue Josie] 10119}
-uv ‘juosoid F
quasoid F
juasoid fF
s9uo IOTI0}sod
uvy} Jap,euts
IOTLI9}UP ‘fF
UMOUY SB IvfOSu!
“‘oysnory} s|qnog
Gg JUSUZIS Jnoge
ye o[Buls surwioc
-9q ‘SYUIUIBIS 10119)
-ue YSnory} 9pqnoqd
Ja} feaIY}
UMOUY }OU ‘S}USUISaS
8S Ysno1iy} sfqnog
yHoysnoiyy spqnogd
yHOYSnoIyy sf aus
AOL a[ SUIS
BANS JE MRSS JUD UAN [PSS ITA
‘MOI B ULE YIM TA pure A
apis Yous uo
sospl yOYS Z pure ‘7 Jo
ASO (2 RSS INU [RRS IVAN
‘MOI B® ULG YM TA pure A
avypided g ynoqe jo Mor
opBuls & UTM TTA pur ITA
‘MOI B UL GS YIM TA pue A
MOL &
Ey YRS JOUDAN [PAC TLUAN
‘MOIR ULG YIM TA pure A
juasaid s1ay}O
ou ‘ovyjided ¢ WIM A
S qynoge JO MOI puddIS
B pure / ynoqe Jo MOL sno
“UL QGBOT Pur GEE
‘pur[UseI4y) UI9}SI AY
SSO]
IO “SLU} PG “BIUIOFITeS
JIMOT pure UIOYNOG
“SUF OG “vuUlvURdg
‘pur[sy vuos10y
Spuvs [R10] UT “Bolte
-uty YWos utoywMos
DOR]
-Ins 0} “Ul TT] “S9Ip
“uy 3sey Yond Yo
“SUL QOT 0} syydop
‘puvpsuy MON
pul ]-s19quasa jy
sypasog °D
DUDIIAIULD
ipu DISSOLD 2%)
(oTU0JN )
YPUD)]SSOLI “DY
JeAney nsues
apasoqis *D
}SIOH]
apdoqis ‘D
-nuyjuos eB [ITA pue ITA ‘epeury Uo} seq UIIS WTR IY
pedojeaspu ys, jUasqy | oySnosyy efqnoq | ‘Yora suo YM TA pure A ‘adoimy JSOMY}ION maa0] °D
S}JUSUIBOS IOTIOJUV
ul s10ydoi119 sada LIILD [R.QUOA Sslosoqolg AYyRIO'T satoadg jo aueN
[eSIOp FO JoJORIeYD [eruto}so1g jo JoyoRIeyD uO Sassad01g
Rep [RUONNLYSIP pue SONstIo}oVIeYyO osOUDeIP YYWM “pjpYydaz0}DAa_y JO satoadg OF WALYD
SSS ee
a meena, nf AO >
19
BuLLeTin, So, CAtir, ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol, 51, Part 1, 1952
LITERATURE
LITERATURE CITED
lage, Louis and René Legendre
1934. Les Annélides polychetes du genre Iphitime. A propos d'une espéce
nouvelle commensale des pagures, Iphitime paguri, n.sp. Bull. Soc.
zool, Paris, vol. 58 pp. 299-305, 5 figs.
Fauvel, Pierre
1914. Un Eunicien enigmatique Iphitime cuenoti, n.sp. Arch. zool. exp.
gen. Paris, vol. 53, pp. 34-37.
1936. Polychetes Expédition antarctique Belge. Résultats du Voyage de
la gta en 1897-99. Zoologie. Polychétes. Anvers. 46 pp., 4 figs.,
L pl.
Horst, R.
1924. Polychaeta errantia of the Siboga-Expedition. Pt. 3. Nereidae and
Hesionidae. Siboga-Exped. Leyden, vol. 99 (Monogr. 24 Ic), pp.
145-198, 7 pls.
Malmgren, Anders Johan
1867. Annulata Polychaeta Spetsbergiae, Groenlandiae, Islandiae et Scan-
dinaviae hactenus cognita. Oefy. kK. Vetensk. Akad. Stockholm,
vol. 24, pp. 127-235, pls. 2-15.
Marenzeller, Emil von
1902. Siidjapanische Anneliden. Aphroditea, Eunicea. Denkschr. Akad.
Wiss. Wien, vol. 72, pp. 563-582, pls. 1-3.
Monro, Charles C, A.
1933. The Polychaeta Errantia collected by Dr. C. Crossland at Colén in
the Panama region and the Galapagos Islands during the expedi-
tion of the S. U. St. George. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, pt. 1, pp. 1-96,
36 figs.
Okuda, Shiro
1933. Some polychaete annelids used as bait in the inland sea. Annot.
zool. Japon., vol. 14, pp. 243-253, 2 pls.
Rathbun, Mary J.
1925. The spider crabs of America. Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., no. 129, p. 198.
Wesenberg-Lund, Elise
1938. Ophryotrocha geryonicola (Bidenkap) refound and _ redescribed.
Goteborgs Kungl. Vetenskaps- och Vitt.-Samh. Handl., ser. B, vol.
6, pp. 1-14, 11 figs.
1950. Polycheete The Danish Ingolf-Expedition. Vol. 4 (14); pp. 1-92,
10 pls.
20
BULLETIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
DR. JOHN HERMAN
1878 - 1951
In the passing of Dr. John Herman on October 8, 1951, the
Southern California Academy of Sciences has lost a member who
labored long and effectively in the interests of science.
Dr. Herman was a member of the Board of Trustees, a Fellow,
and a Life Member of the Academy. He was one of the members
of the Committee of the Founders Society, which labored inces-
santly to maintain the status of science in the Los Angeles
Museum at a period of time not long past when the future of
that division seemed to be seriously threatened.
Dr. Herman was born in Wilmer, Nebraska, June 7, 1878, the
son of John and Mary Herman. He received the B.S. degree from
the University of Nebraska in 1900, and in 1934 won his D.Sc.
from Charles University, Prague, Czecho-Slovakia.
He served as assayer for the Copper King, Canon City, Colo-
rado, from 1900 to 1902, and thereafter was employed by mining
and smelting interests in Arizona until he opened his own office in
Los Angeles, in 1907, as an assayer chemist and metallurgical
engineer. In 1948 he sold his business to the Smith-Emory
Company.
Dr. Herman had fifteen or more inventions to his credit,
including the Herman screen ball machine. He was V. President
of the Mining Association of the Southwest, and held offices or
memberships in several societies of a like nature.
He was particularly active in the Dana Society, of which he
was a charter member and past President.
As general manager of the Western Mineralogical Exposition,
from 1941 to 1948, he did much to popularize the subject of
mineralogy.
Dr. Herman married, December 16, 1916, Irene Sparks of Los
Angeles, who survives him.
Homer P. Kine Anp J. A. COMSTOCK.
f
if
|
{
BuLLeTIN, So. CALIF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952 |
|
|
BULLETIN of the SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA |
ACADEMY of SCIENCES |
Published by the Academy at Los Angeles, California
Subscription—$3.50 per year
Irree to Life Members and Unlimited Annual Members
of the Academy (Annual Membership lee $5.00)
Address all communications to Dr. Howarn R. Hine
Care of Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7, Calif., U.S. A.
Publications of the Southern California |
Academy of Sciences
The Academy has published to date the following:
PROCEEDINGS, 1896 to 1899. Six numbers—Vol. 1, Nos. 1 to 6. |
MISCELLANEOUS BUISLETINS issued under the imprint of the Agri-
cultural Experiment Station, 1897 to 1907. Ten numbers.
All issues of the above are now out of print.
Bulletin of the
Southern California Academy of Sciences
|
|
Began issue with Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1902. Issued ten numbers in |
1902: nine numbers in 1903, 1904, 1905; three numbers in 1906. Issued |
two numbers annually from 1907 to 1919, both inclusive (except 1908 — —
one issue only). Issued four numbers (January, May, July and October) |
in 1920. |
The 1921 issues are: Vol. XX, No. 1, April; Vol. XX, No. 2, August; |
Vol. XX, No. 3, December.
The 1922 issues are: Vol. XXI, No. 1, March; Vol. XXI, No. 2, September. |
The 19283 issues are: Vol. XXII, No. 1, March; No. 2, July.
The 1924 issues are: Vol. XXIII, No. 1, January-February; No. 2, March-
April; No. 3, May-June; No. 4, July-August; No. 5, September-October; |
No. 6, November-December.
From 1925 to 1951, including volumes XXIV to L, three numbers were |
published each year. These were issued as No. 1, January-April; No. 2, |
May-August; No. 3, September-December, for each volume.
MEMOIRS
Vol. 1, 1938. Vol. 2, Part 1, 1939. Vol. 2, Part 2, 1944. Vol. 3, Part 1
1947: Vol. 3, Part 2, 1949.
BULLETIN, So. CALrrF. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1, 1952
Publications of the Southern California
Academy of Sciences
For Sale at the Appended Prices
To To Non-
BULLETIN Members Members
VoL 8, INT, SOL ae $ 50 1.00
MMe Ge ee 50 1.00
SE GMOMNOO Co es 50 1.00
© "© TL SGT tl 1.50 3.00
RMOTMMRIERI OOM 80 a. 1.00 2.00
MEO ONO ee 15 1.50
SaOMMamETERTONM ss ee 1.50 3.00
Sam OM MTOM ts 2.00 4.00
Sam MEOMNGIG) oe ee 75 1.50
SOONG a ee 1.50 3.00
SUPOMMEEMIESLOS OS eo ee 50 1.00
= 1G), © AL S13 ale Raa sea Se maa 50 1.00
PONMME TOON ee 1.00 2.00
ae) umm S44'7611994 (each). 2s 3 75
DAL STL DB TGS) CRON) as cere ye 3 75
| OS UNOOG Ca ER Oe 3 15
| me GuiemIONETOI7 (each). 2 35 75
| ate 1928) Geach )= 2 BE ee eck. 85 15
| sae umm 999: (each). 35 75
| Maemo mOmTOS 1 (each)... 88
i peeclemnrm 3 1939 (each) 35 15
| eat Meer NOS Om ((each ee a ee 35 5)
| peo Mme ON 9 1934 (each) 35 75
mao Werereal O19 1935 (each)... 35 75
| ao eos 1936 (each). 35 75
me Gumammsle O09) 11937 (each) 2... ee 35 75
Simmel 1998¢Ceach) a 35 75
Bar Sem IONS 1989. (cath). a 35 75
RC OMEMECINOAQ? a 35 15
eae (Fie oO as OA Ce ach) se ee 35 alo
Ser Memes 3) 1040! (each). 35 75
per Ommema 03 1943 (each). 35 75
per orem) (3.1944 (each) 35 15
Gal LO) BY TOI t( Greely) ee 5) .75
| ae) 3 1046 (each) 35 15
mar Gemaml. 3: 1947 (each) 22 ee 35 75
ear Pa Ps ml OA Ou (each) pase ete wk ee 35 sl'5)
. ae SMemp Ie 8 1949.(each i 35 15
eae amen Os O(n (Gach esses ee ee 35 .75
a) () SeenON ALO SI (each et ita ht ee .60 1.25
(Continued on next page)
23
BuLLeTIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 1,
PUBLICATIONS (continued)
1952
To To Non-
MEMOIRS Members Members
Vol: 1, 1988—=paper: cover siccii cede ecesccesasdeeseeasees nee $2.00 $4.00
a ae bound in black fabrikoid .............2...00..... 3.00 5.00
printed on one side of paper.................. 3.00 5.00
printed on one side of page (bound).... 4.00 6.00
Voll 2) Nov 1) 1989=paper Cover ccncceeenceesc ee eee 1.25 2.50
tae bound in black fabrikoid.............. Dio 3.50
printed on one side of page.......... Wath 3.50
2, L944 —paper COVER 2ccessee-ses-ssscesneseeeeeeeee lo 1.50
3, ] 1947 —paper COVeL 2 2ec.c-seee-cee snes ee 1.00 2.00
Hi 2 949—= paper (COVE eee ee 1.00 2.00
Miscellaneous, Publications of Affiliated or
Co-operating Organizations
Lorquinia—Vols. 1, 2 (all published)
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA GEOLOGY AND LOS ANGELES
EFARTHOUAKES, RR. 1. Gill. bound
Southwest Science Bulletin, May 5, 1920 (all published),
chiefly Entomological, 1 color plate...) ee
Check-list of the Recent Bivalve Mollusks (of N. W. Coast of
Am. from the Polar Sea to San Diego), W. H. Dall................
FLORA OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA by Anstruther Davidson
and. George I: Moxley, 452:)pp:, 192302 eee
Reprints:
Check-list of the Lepidoptera of Boreal America. Superfamilies
Sphingoidea, Saturnioidea and Bombycoidea (printed on one
side of page only, to allow of additional notes), Wm. Barnes
and! Hosten El. Benjamins: 192i] sa
The Cacti of the Pyramid Peak Region, Dona Ana County, New
Mexico, 1931. FR, Fosberg) 22. eee
Check-list of the Macrolepidoptera of Canada and the United
States of America by Dr. J. McDunnough, 1938, printed on
white bristol board, one side of page (without index) suitable
for labels. To Academy members, $1.50. To non-members....
A List of the ANTS OF CALIFORNIA with notes on their habits
and distribution. 44 pages, 3 plates, by Arnold Mallis.............
A Check List of the HELICOID SNAILS OF CALIFORNIA, 32
pages, from Henry A. Pilsbury’s Monograph, by Wm. M.
Ingram) {t.-22 nb et ee ee ee es
Contributions from the Los Angeles Museum — CHANNEL
ISLANDS BIOLOGICAL SURVEY. Papers 1 to 33. Bound..
AppreEss ALL INQUIRIES TO
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Care KENNETH E. STAGER)
Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7, Calif., U. S. A.
24
eens bound $1.50, unbound $1.00
2.50
1.00
1.00
2.50
3.00
50
3.00
REPRINTS: Contributors of articles accepted for publication in the
Bulletin should order reprints, if desired, when they return galley proof
| to the Editor. They may be ordered through the Editor at the following
| rates, from the Commonwealth Press, 1507 DeLong Street, Los Angeles,
Calif., the contributor paying for all his reprints.
|
PRIGE LIST OF REPRINTS
(WITHOUT COVERS)
4pp. S8pp. 12pp. 16pp. 20pp. 24pp. 28pp. 32pp.
| sOicopies .2-.. Soa peop. 5.50) DtO25 $1.75 $13.50) $16.00) $17.00
NO Riess ties 2. cS oO JO hOmomh 215-008 Ii25" 20525) 821550
VEO eeaeeaes eon S25 Ss.O0! loe25 7 16125 21.00) 24.50! 26:00
| DOO ees i 2, GOO OGL Iiar2 ope leo 21250" 2475 28.75) 30.50
PO Ong a \oeac-- Capel Ol 2022 aM 2428.50. 33:00). 35.00
OO ie i ts. fon a SOM tiom 22a a 28.00) 32.25) 93125) 139.50
Covers: 50 for $2.00—additional covers 1 Yac each.
California State Sales Tax to be added if delivered within the state.
Che Commonwealth Press, Juc.
Est. 1906
a
—
@ PUBLICATIONS @ CATALOGS
@® FOREIGN LANGUAGE TEXTS
@ COMPLETE GRAPHIC ARTS SERVICE
a tS
PRospect 2233
1507 DeLong Street, Los Angeles 15, California
os sti
5) MEW YORK
Os BOTANICAL
. GARDEN
BULLETIN OF THE
Southern California
Academy of Sciences
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
WoL. 5! May-Avuecust, 1952 Part 2
COMPEENTS
The Lower Cambrian Olenellidz of the Southern
Marble Mountains, California. Joseph F. Riccio
The Prehistoric Avifauna of Smith Creek Cave,
Nevada, With a Description of a New Gigantic
Raptor. Hildegarde Howard
A New Amphipod of the Genus Ceradocus
(Denticeradocus) From Lower California.
J. Laurens Barnard
Two New Species of Olethreutide From California
(Lepidoptera). J. F. Gates Clarke
New Neogzan Water-Striders of the Genus Microvelia
(Hemiptera; Veliide). C. F. Drake and F. C. Hottes....
Issued August 30, 1952
Southern California
Academy of Sciences
OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS
Dr. Louis C. Whieelet......::..:csasrcssosscesseesecoccedind ts seuedaiesueseuenivsicelas sien cae een President
Dr. Sherwin: Fc, WO0Cg.-=555.
ge SPS Sese=
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vole ale bantec elope
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The writer is indebted to Dr. W. H. Easton for his guidance on
this study of the Lower Cambrian Olenellidae and to the Uni-
versity of Southern California for the use of its facilities. It is
gratifying to acknowledge the criticisms and suggestions of Drs.
O. L. Bandy, T. Clements, and K. O. Emery.
GENERAL STRATIGRAPHY
Three lithologic units are recognizable in the rocks assigned to
the Lower Cambrian in the southern Marble Mountains. The
lowermost member, a well-cemented, quartzitic sandstone, rests
nonconformably upon granite of Pre-Cambrian age. The sand-
stone is white to reddish-brown, coarse-grained, commonly cross-
bedded, and ranges from 390 to 450 feet in thickness. No fossils
were found within this member, although vague impressions
which are loosely termed “fucoids” occur in a few places.
The quartzitic sandstone grades upward through a thin tran-
sitional zone into a greenish-gray fossiliferous shale which ranges
in thickness from 30 to 50 feet. It weathers to paper thin flakes
of grayish to reddish color, whereas the fresh shale breaks into
platy fragments 4 to % inch thick. Intercalated in the shale are
reddish-brown quartzose sandstones varying from two inches to
one foot in thickness and from ten to twenty-two feet in length.
It is from the shale member that the fossils were obtained. Asso-
ciated with numerous cephalons and pleurons of trilobites 2re
slickensided surfaces resembling cone-in-cone. These may be
caused by compaction around the fossil fragments during deposi-
tion of the mud. Several of these structures, however, are not
associated with the fragments.
Lying conformably on the shale is a gray massive limestone
ranging from 80 to 120 feet in thickness. Ovoid algal nodules
comprise the greater portion of the limestone.
The three members strike N50W and dip approximately 15
degrees east. Local step-faulting causes changes in dip within
short distances.
MateriaLs Usep For Stupy
Approximately 650 specifically identifiable specimens (Table
I) and 500 non-identifiable fragments were used in this study.
The specimens of trilobites, with only the best being considered,
were tentatively sorted into species and identified from the litera-
ture. Specimens of each species were arranged in linear series
from smallest to largest. These series were studied carefully to
see if any changes took place in the presumed ontogeny shown
by adjacent molts.
Composition Or THE Fauna
All the trilobites studied herein belong to the family Olenel-
lidae, namely, Olenellus and Paedeumias. Associated with the
olenellids are two genera of brachiopods, Micromitra and
Paterina, trails referable to Climactichnites, and a sponge-like
impression.
27
BunLetin, So. Cauur, ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
TABLE [
NuMBER Or SPECIMENS OBTAINED FrRoM THe SHALE MEMBER
Species No. of Specimens
O. bristolensis ( Resser ) 114
O. fremonti Walcott 126
O. insolens ( Resser ) 161
P. clarki Resser 124
P. mohavensis Crickmay "7K
P. nevadensis ( Walcott ) 113
Complete specimens, cephalons, and fragments obtained dis-
play the dorsal configuration regardless of whether the specimens
are casts or molds. No ventral morphologic surfaces were noted.
This lack of ventral surfaces may be due to the peculiar way of
molting the animal had in that only the dorsal surfaces would be
molted. Or possibly their absence may be explained in that the
composition of the ventral portion of the body was such as not
to be preserved. Carapaces of trilobites and the preserved shells
of the associated brachiopods at this locality are invariably com-
posed of chitin. The test of any organism composed of carbonate
would presumably go into solution if the pH of the sea were
under seven. Possibly the ventral surfaces of the trilobites con-
tained the carbonate salts and if so, they would not be found
fossilized.
The majority of the specimens displays a reddish color which
is possibly due to the animals’ natural appearance, but is more
probably assignable to the presence of ferric compounds within
the shale.
The size of the specimens across the cephalic diameter ranges
from 1.5 to 96 mm; the greatest size being in O. fremonti. Cepha-
lons are extremely thin as compared to those of other trilobites.
One specimen which is 2 mm thick can be explained by thickening
within the substance of the cephalon proper after entombment by
a secondary filling of limonite.
Disassociation of the trilobite segments indicates that the fauna
has been transported some indefinite distance to the present site.
Inasmuch as the thoracic segments of Lower Cambrian trilobites
do not have a good interlocking device but butt up against one
another, any motion of the water would tend to disassociate the
segments. A large number of fragments have been deposited in
conjunction with the coarser sediments and now occur along
bedding planes in the lower portion of the quartzose stringers.
28
|
|
BuLLeTin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
The thinness of individual beds, coarseness, and excellent sorting
of the sand grains in the stringers, coupled with the fact that the
zone of stringers can be traced for miles without discovering a
large contemporaneous sandstone body or even appreciable in-
crease in number of stringers indicates that at least that portion
of the fauna associated with the sandstone stringers was washed
into its present site before entombment. Because the shale con-
tains small amounts of sand grains and doesn’t grade into the
sandstone stringers, it may represent swirling muds, possibly eddy
deposition on the floor of a bay, in which trilobite carapaces were
washed to and fro. Thus, the carapaces in the shale may or may
not have been transported considerable linear distances. Inasmuch
as the specimens do not display ventral skeletons, the lack may
be due to decomposition during considerable transportation of
the fauna. It would seem, however, that at least a few of the
specimens should be entombed with the ventral skeletal side pre-
served regardless of the distance transported.
CORRELATION
The character of the sedimentary rocks and of the contained
fauna indicates that the Lower Cambrian members may be cor-
related with those described by Darton in the Providence Range
to the north and also with those of the Highland Range in Nevada
(Clark, 1921, p. 2). According to Walcott (1891, p. 319), Olen-
ellus is found in a thin shale bed lying above a massive quartz
sandstone in the Eureka district of Nevada and in the Big Cotton-
wood section of Utah. The same shale bed was carefully sampled
one mile north of the collecting area but only a meager fauna con-
sisting of two species of Paedeumias was encountered.
SYSTEMATICS
All specimens are deposited in the paleontological collection
of the University of Southern California.
PHyLuM ARTHROPODA
Crass CRUSTACEA
SUBCLASS TRILOBITA
ORDER OPISTHOPARIA
Family Olenellidae Vogdes, 1893
Mesonacis is a junior synonym of Olenellus and the family
therefore becomes Olenellidae. Although the family has been
ascribed to Moberg, Vogdes proposed Olenellidae six years prior
to Moberg’s identical proposal.
Genus Olenellus Hall, 1862
1938. Olenellus. Resser and Howell, Bull. Geol. Soc. America,
vol. 49, p. 217 (contains prior synonymy ).
Genotype. — Olenellus thompsoni Hall, 1862.
Resser and Howell (1938), p. 217) have shown that generic
differences do not exist between Olenellus and Mesonacis. The
presence of rudimentary or post-thoracic segments which Walcott
(1885, p. 328) used to distinguish Mesonacis from Olenellus is
29
Bucieti, So. Canim. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
considered by Resser and Howell not to be of generic importance.
Inasmuch as the writer can only demonstrate the existence of
post-thoracic segments on four specimens of O. insolens and not
in other complete specimens of O. insolens, O. fremonti, and
O. bristolensis, it is unlikely that these segments as treated by
Walcott are of generic importance (PI. 6, fig. 1-3). Moreover,
no generic differences can be distinguished between the speci-
mens studied and “Mesonacis” with regard to the cephalon and
thorax. Consequently, the writer is in accord with the disposition
of the names “Mesonacis” and Mesonacidae as stated by Resser
and Howell.
Olenellus bristolensis (Resser), 1928
Plate 7, figures 1, 2, 5; Plate 8, figures 1-11
1928. Mesonacis bristolensis Resser, Smithsonian Mise. Coll., vol.
81, no. 2, p. 7, pl. 2, figs. 6-8.
This species displays wide variability in shape of the cephalon.
However, the advanced position of the genal spines distinguishes
the species. Intergenal spines are present in young molts at the
latero-posterior rim of the cephalon. A median node is present on
the dorsal surface of the occipital ring.
Olenellus fremonti Walcott, 1910
Plate 7, figure 6
1910. Olenellus fremonti Walcott, Smithsonian Misc. Coll., vol.
53, no. 6, p. 320, pl. 37, figs. 1-2.
1928. Mesonacis fremonti. Resser, Smithsonian Misc. Coll., vol.
81, no. 2, p. 6, pl. 1, figs. 3-9.
The macropleural development of the third thoracic segment
is pronounced but not as much as in O. insolens. No post-thoracic
segments were noted in any of the specimens. Majority of the
specimens representing this species are cephalons.
Olenellus insolens (Resser), 1928
Plate 5, figures 1-13; Plate 6, figures 1-3
1928. Mesonacis insolens Resser, Smithsonian Misc. Coll., vol. 81,
no. 2, p. 8, pl. 2, figs. 1-4.
This species is characterized by the extremely advanced posi-
tion of its genal spines; there being no variability in the point of
origin of these spines. A median node is present on the dorsal
surface of the occipital ring in some specimens. Intergenal spines
are present at the latero-posterior edge of the rim in young molts.
Four specimens display post-thoracic segments.
Genus Paedeumias Walcott, 1910
1910. Paedeumias Walcott, Smithsonian Misc. Coll., vol. 53, no. 6,
p. 304.
1928. Paedumias [sic] Resser, Smithsonian Misc. Coll., vol. 81,
HOM2 pao:
30
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol, 5k Part 2, 1952
2 > )
NUMBER OF CASES
RLTIO OF GLABELLA (IN
FIGURE 2
GLABELLAR RATIOS OF O. FREMONT! AND 9. BRISTOLENSIS
THE HIGHS
IM THE CURVE REPRESENT TWO DISTINCT SPECIES.
Text Figure 2
Ee = ee Se ee ee eee
ANGLE
GENAL
es Se EE
RATIO OF GLABELLA
FIGURE 3
RATIO OF GLABELLAR RATIO TO GENAL ANGLE IN O. BRITOLENSIS
NO CURVE CAN BE REPRESENTED INASMUCH AS THE GENAL ANGLE
VARIES INDEPENDENTLY OF THE GLABELLAR RATIO.
Text Figure 3
31
BULLETIN, So. Cauir, ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
ASES
NUMBER OF
_ = = Le
70 Bu7
GENAL ANGLE
FIGURE 4
GENAL ANGLE OF O. BRISTOLENSIS
THE MAJORITY OF TIIC SPECIMENS HAVE GENAL ANGLES OF 80 TO 90 DEGREES,
FEWER FORMS HAVE AN ANGLE GREATER ~HAN 90 DEGREES THAN HAVE GENAL
ANGLES FROM 44 TO 80 DEGREES.
Text Figure 4
X O. FREMONT
© O. BRIST.9 ENSID
GLABELLA
OF
=
-
eo
z
w
4
o87
RATIO GLABELLA LIN
RATIO OF GLABELLAR RATIO TO LENGTH OF
GLABELLA OF O. FREMONT! AND O. BRISTOLENSIS
TWO SPECIES ARE SEPARATED Of7 BASIS OF THE
GLABELLAR RATIO.
FIGURE 5
Text Figure 5
32
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Genotype. — Paedeumias transitans Walcott, 1910.
Paedeumias differs little from Olenellus except in the position
of the glabella, shape of the hypostoma, and by a median ridge
that crosses the intervening space between the glabella and the
rim. Intergenal spines are present in all species of this genus. The
writer did not find any specimen with post-thoracic segments.
Paedeumias clarki Resser, 1928
Plate 9, figures 1-4 3
1928. Paedeumias clarki Resser, Smithsonian Misc. Coll., vol. 81,
mOn 249, pl. 3, gs. 1-2:
P. clarki is distinguished from P. nevadensis by the shorter
intervening distance between the glabella and the rim and by the
fuller anterior lobe of the glabella.
Paedeumias mohavensis Crickmay, 1933
Plate 9, figures 7-8
1933. Paedeumias mohavensis Crickmay, California Univ., Dept.
Geol. Sci., Bull., vol. 23, no. 2, p. 74, pl. 1, figs. c-f.
This species occurs rarely; only seven small molts were found.
It is unlike any other species of Paedeumias in that the glabella
resembles an hour glass instead of having a tapering shape. The
median ridge between the glabella and rim is extremely small or
inconspicuous. No complete specimen is known of this species.
Paedeumias nevadensis (Walcott), 1928
Plate 9, figures 5-6
1910. Callavia ? nevadensis Walcott, Smithsonian Misc. Coll.,
vol. 53, no. 6, p. 285, pl. 38, fig. 12.
1928. Paedumias [sic] nevadensis. Resser, Smithsonian Misc.
Colle woll si nos 2,3). 9. pl. 3, fs. 3-7.
This species is closely allied to P. clarki. The intervening
distance from the glabella to the rim is longer than in P. clarki.
CEPHALON
Most of the morphological entities of the cephalon indicate
specialization among both Paedeumias and Olenellus. The cepha-
lon is semi-circular in shape in species of both genera, except that
O. bristolensis has a trapezoidal outline due to the advancement
of the genal spines. All the specimens collected show segmenta-
tion of the glabella. Three glabellar lobes plus a large anterior
or frontal lobe are present in front of the occipital ring. Furrows
separating glabellar lobes are continuous in young molts but as
maturity is attained the furrows appear as minute depressions on
either side of the axis. The occipital furrow is clearly defined in
all stages of growth. Increase in width of the anterior lobe of
the glabella and the pushing forward of the anterior lobe of the
glabella in Olenellus are indications of specialization.
33
BuLLetin, So, Canir. ACADEMY OF SCUENCES
Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
FIGURE 6
GLAUELLAR RATIO OF O INSOLENS
Or AOVANCEMENT OF GENAL SPINES KEEPS PACE
willl Tie MATURITY OF THE SPECIMENS
Text Figure 6
LENGTH IN MM
WIDTH IN
FIGURE 7
MOLT STAGES OF O. BRISTOLENSIS
© DAISTOLENSIS MOLTS IN AR ORDERLY PROGRESSION
REGARCLESS OF THE SIZE OF THE INDIVIDUAL
Text Figure 7
LENGTH IN Mia
on =e
20 24 iy
WIOTH IM Ma
4
FIGURE 8
MOLT STAGES OF 0. INSOLENS
POSSIBLE MOLT STAGES ARE SHOWN BY ARROWS,
Text Figure 8
34
BULLETIN, So. CAuir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Eyes of the olenellids are crescentic, with the palpebral lobes
being more or less continuous with the anterior lobe of the
glabella. Walcott (1910, p. 239) has shown that the Mesonacidae
possess normal compound eyes. Oddly enough, not a single eye
surface was observed among the hundreds of specimens studied
herein.
Discussion of the facial suture, cephalic spines, and hypostoma
are taken up independently as they constitute the more important
finds made by the writer.
CEPHALIC SPINES
Three pairs of cephalic spines are known to occur in several
species of the family Olenellidae, namely, Leptoplastus salteri,
Olenellus gilberti, Oleneloides armatus, Elliptocephalus asapho-
ides and Paedeumias transitans (Raw, 1937, p. 582). Raw (1937,
p. 575) differentiates between three types of trilobites on the
basis of development of different primitive cephalic spines to
form the genal spines. Among these types is the metaparial
trilobite which Raw believes is characteristic of the Olenellidae.
The metaparial trilobites are supposed to have rotated the pro-
cranidial spines, which are borne on the antero-lateral margin
of the cephalon near the anterior angles of the cranidium, to the
postero-lateral angles of the cephalon to form the genal spines.
The intergenal spine is thought by Raw to be formed by the
coalescence of the metacranidial spine, which is present at the
postero-lateral edge of the cephalon, and the parial spine located
approximately midway between the procranidial and meta-
cranidial spines.
_In the specimens obtained by the writer, the above cannot be
ascertained except for the presence of the three pairs of spines.
In Paedeumias the genal and intergenal spines are distinct and
occur on or near the posterior border. On several specimens of
Paedeumias, the third pair (the metacranidial spine), located
axially from the intergenal spine, appears as a nodular thickening
rather than as a spine. Apparently the third pair has been
aborted without coalescing with the parial spine. In O. insolens
the genal spines are located on the antero-lateral edges of the
cephalon. Thus, if the genal spines migrated posteriorly as postu-
lated by Raw, there must have been a reversal of migration. No
evidence can be shown that this reversal took place. Raw (1937,
p. 590) believes that the reversion in O. insolens may be attributed
to its giving up the burrowing habit. The writer does not know
of any evidence which can substantiate this. In a specimen of
O. insolens studied herein, (unfortunately subsequently dam-
aged ) the parial and metacranidial spines appeared to be coalesc-
ing but the latter pair was shorter and was probably being
aborted without coalescence with the former pair. Raw (1987,
p. 583), however, only points to the actual posterior migration of
35
BuLLeTIN, So. Carrer. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
the procranidial spine in Leptoplastus salteri, but believes he
is justified in seeking to homologize the cephalic spines of
Paedeumias and Olenellus with the three pairs of Leptoplastus
because they are members of one family. Raw also postulates
that the posterior migration of the procranidial spine carried the
anterior portion of the facial suture towards the genal angle. He
goes on to say, “The sutures, however, in the above named species
are represented by vestiges of the posterior branches only; so
that, of the cranidial spines, only the metacranidial can be ob-
served in relation to an adjoining suture — the posterior branch”
(Raw, 1937, p. 583). The problem of whether or not the an-
terior suture is present will be taken up in a later section.
In the genus Paedeumias a second pair of spines persists as
intergenal spines which are present near the lateral edge of the
posterior rim and close to the genal spines. These occupy the
same position on all specimens studied. Only small molts of
O. bristolensis and O. insolens possess intergenal spines. Length
of the intergenal spines is variable. Some specimens with a large
cephalic diameter have -longer intergenal spines than have those
with a small cephalic diameter. The reverse condition should be
expected. Inasmuch as the spines are aborted, increase in growth
of the cephalon should imply smaller intergenal spines.
Sequence of molts of two species of Olenellus showing pro-
gressive loss of the intergenal spines are shown in Plates 5 and 8.
Of the 161 specimens representing O. insolens, only 13 show
intergenal spines. This feature is present in § molts of O. bristo-
lensis. O. fremonti does not possess intergenal spines in either
early ontogenetic or adult stages. Thus, it seems that intergenal
spines were disappearing in Olenellus. In all specimens of Paedeu-
mias studied herein, intergenal spines persist in all stages of
growth. There seems to be no indication that the intergenal
spines were being aborted.
The presence of intergenal spines is of generic importance in
Paedeumias and also in Oleneéllus, even though the intergenal
spines were disappearing in the latter genus. The intergenal spines
may indicate a relationship of the two genera. If the biogenetic
law is applied to these genera, it is possible to conclude that
presence of intergenal spines in the molt stages is evidence of
their having a common ancestor or that one was derived from the
other.
FactaL SUTURES
Another feature of the Olenellidae concerns the existence of
facial sutures. Walcott clearly figured the course of the facial
suture on Olenellus gilberti. In 1910 he repudiated this drawing
and stated that, “In my hurried study of the Olenellus fauna in
1896 and 1891 I permitted facial suture lines to be represented in
36
BULLETIN, So. CALir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
front of the eye in a specimen referred to O. gilberti on evidence
that now appears to me to be insufficient, as the line may have
been formed by a fracture in the test” (Walcott, 1910, p. 242).
Raw accepted Walcott’s view as to the absence of the anterior
portion of the facial suture, and has attempted to show that the
anterior portion of the facial suture migrated posteriorly along
with the cephalic spines. Bell (1931, p. 17) has observed the
anterior course of the facial suture in Olenellus thompsoni, and
stated that “Since the sutures of the Mesonacidae are advanced
in position and development, their rudimentary or vestigal struc-
ture is due to specialization rather than to primitiveness. They
are, therefore, in a state of symphysis, being in a process of
secondary fushion.”
A number of specimens of Paedeumias and Olenellus obtained
by the writer show a faint line extending forward from the ante-
rior edge of the eye to the frontal rin of the cephalon and extend-
ing posteriorly from the lower third of the eye to the genal angle.
The presence of the anterior facial suture would tend to eliminate
Raw’s line of reasoning in which he postulates that the procra-
nidial spines have evolved to the genal angles carrying the
anterior portion of the facial suture.
Specimens of the Olenellidae possess facial sutures of an
advanced opisthoparian types. They indicate that this family
belongs to the order Opisthoparia.
HypostoMa
Two distinct types of hypostomae were noted: one, on which
the posterior margin is scalloped, and the other, in which the
entire periphery lacks the scalloped edge (Plate 7, figs. 3-4).
The hypostoma of Paedeumias is more or less triangular in
shape with a posterior scalloped margin separated from the main
portion by a furrow which transects the entire surface. There are
twelve scallops, the number remaining constant from specimen
to specimen. A concentric pattern of inosculating ridges is present
on the surface of the hypostoma.
The outline of the hypostoma, as shown by the genus Olenel-
lus, is oval and lacks the scalloped appearance. Its margin is not
separated from the main portion by a furrow, but in its place is
a fold which occurs only on the lateral edges of the hypostoma.
Its surface is similar to that of Paedeumias.
It is evident from the above discussion that the hypostoma is
of generic and not of specific value.
THORAX
In Olenellus and Paedeumias the first fourteen segments are
fully developed. The third segment is enlarged and the fifteenth
possesses a large, long spine. All the segments decrease in size
except the third. Pluerae are straight with sharply curved, long,
tapering ends.
37
Rurt.etrim, So. Carre. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Post-TrTHORACIC SEGMENTS
Four specimens of Olenellus possess post-thoracic segments
(Plate 6, figs. 1-3). The number of these segments varies from
specimen to specimen, the greatest number being seventeen. None
shows the last caudal segment. These segments are similar to the
first fourteen in having pleurae, but are not as spinose nor do
they have axial nodes or spines. Width of the rudimentary seg-
ments is comparable to that of the axial lobe. No distinction can
be made between “axial” and “pleural” lobes because of the lack
of distinct dorsal furows. In cross-section the center portion is
higher in comparison to its lateral extents. The surface of these
segments is granular.
Specimens without post-thoracic segments occur above and
below those displaying this feature. The writer cannot demon-
strate whether or not rudimentary segments existed in all speci-
mens. Absence of these segments may be possibly due to resorp-
tion or more probably they may have been broken off prior to
entombment. However, no solitary post-thoracic segments were
found. Burling believes that the rudimentary segments were
aborted during | the life of an individual. In considering the evolu-
tion of the Mesonacidae he states, “The resorption of segments
posterior to the fourteenth in the Mesonacidae would seem to
indicate that the functioning parts, those necessary for the life of
the individual, were confined to the first fourteen. The finding of
post-thoracic segments would seem to indicate that this resorption
takes place laterally, that is, they become smaller in size before
they become fewer in number” (1916, p. 55).
The appearance of post-thoracic segments is not unique among
Olenellus and Paedeumias. In Elliptocephalus five segments are
present posterior to the anterior thirteen. Wanneria and Holmia
have progressively smaller segments posterior to the first thirteen
and fourteen thoracic segments respectively. Burling (1916, p.
56) states that no suggestion of resorption of the post-thoracic
segments can be seen in the latter two genera.
Tuirp THoRACIC SEGMENT
The enlargement of the third thoracic segment in the Olenel-
lidae appears to be important from a morphological standpoint.
Moreover, the close relationship of Paedeumias and Olenellus is
shown by the fact that in each the third segment is enlarged.
Greatest size of this segment is found in Olenellus, and in O.
bristolensis the pleural portion of the third segment is enlarged
more than in other representatives of the Olenellidae.
As to what the function of the third segment was, the writer
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 5
Figs. 1-13 — Olenellus insolens (Resser ), 4X, Hypotypes, USC nos.
215-1 to 215-13. Showing molt stages with progressive loss of
intergenal spines)... ee ee ee p. 30.
38
Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
TENCES
BuLLETIN, So. Caurr. ACADEMY OF SC
BuLLEeTIN, So. Cauir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
offers no explanation. Further study may yield results of mor-
phologic value. Of the genera in which no suggestion of resorp-
tion of post-thoracic segments occurs (Wanneria, Holmia, and
Callavia), Callavia alone shows a tendency toward an enlarge-
ment of the third thoracic segment. The genera with tendency
toward resorption of post-thoracic segments (Olenellus and Pae-
deumias ) have an enlarged third thoracic segment ( Burling, 1916,
p. 57). Whether there is any relationship between the macro-
pleural development of the third thoracic segment and the pres-
ence of post-thoracic segments cannot be demonstrated at present.
Nopes
All specimens of Paedeumias possess the occipital node or
spine. In Olenellus the presence of the occipital node is lacking
in some specimens. Whether the node is absent due to the mode
of preservation or to variation in the individual cannot be ascer-
tained. When present, the node is very evident. In early onto-
genetic stages no differentiation of the glabellar lobes occurs and
often these lobes retain vestiges of the axial spines. Presence or
absence of occipital nodes in Olenellus may be the distinguishing
character of sex. No proof, however, can be advanced.
Both genera possess axial spines on their first fifteen segments.
In Olenellus, the post-thoracic segments are devoid of any type
of spine or node.
SPECIES VARIATION
Evidences of variations within O. bristolensis exist in that the
genal angle, shape of the cephalon, and the position of the genal
spine vary. Resser (1928, p. 7) states that neither size nor age
of individuals causes variation in the position of the genal spines.
In order to show such variations, a mathematical method was
employed in which a constant could be derived. This constant
was chosen as the glabellar ratio in which measurements were
taken from the tip of the glabella to a line extending from one
genal angle to another and from that line to the end of the occi-
pital ring so that the former was divided by the latter. These
measurements were taken of O. bristolensis and O. fremonti. The
latter species was included because at a casual glance it seemed
that O. bristolensis evolved from O. fremonti by the increase in
genal angle plus the advancement of the genal spines. The ratios
obtained for the species were plotted on three cycle graph paper
against the number of measured specimens, and a curve with two
highs resulted which indicates two distinct species (fig. 2). If
the curve represented by O. bristolensis had shown two highs,
then the variations might be given specific rank.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 6
Figs. 1-3 — Olenellus insolens (Resser), 4X, Hypotypes, USC nos.
215-14 to 215-16. Four specimens displaying post-thoracic
SC GMENES i 2.3. cres eae See eee Err p. 30.
40
S
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENC
Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Plate 6
41
BULLETIN, So. Catir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Inasmuch as the genal angle of O. bristoicnsis varies, a graph
was made in which the degree of angle was plotted against the
number of specimens. The resultant curve showed that the ma-
jority of the specimens have genal angles of 80 to 90 degrees.
Fewer forms have an angle greater than 90 degrees than have
genal angles from 44 to 80 degrees (fig. 4).
To determine if any relationship exists between the size of the
genal angle and the glabellar ratio of O. bristolensis, data were
plotted on three cycle graph paper. The net result was a scatter-
ing of points and no curve could be drawn (fig. 3). It seems, then,
that the size of the genal angle bears no relationship to the
glabellar ratio and that the glabellar dimensions and the genal
angle vary independently of each other. Inasmuch as the data
plotted above were obtained from specimens displaying varying
amounts of genal angle, it was thought that those specimens dis-
playing equal amounts of genal angle might tend to show an equal
rate of dey elopment. Data were plotted on three cycle graph
paper and the result was a scattering of points. No curve could
be drawn. Therefore, regardless of ‘whether the specimens dis-
play varying amounts of genal angle or the same amount of genal
angle, the glabellar ratio ‘and the genal angle vary independently
of each other.
Length of the glabella was plotted against the glabellar ratio
to determine if any correlation exists between the maturity of the
specimens and dimensions of the glabella. Because the position
of the genal spines determines the glabellar ratio as well as one
side of the genal angle, the relationship that would be expressed
in the correlation would tend to show if maturity is a function of
the length of the glabella, genal angle, and position of the genal
spines. Data were plotted for both O. bristolensis and O. fremonti
to ascertain the above and to see if the two highs represented in
fig. 2 presented a true picture. The resultant curve (a scattering
of points ) showed that maturity plays no part in the relationships
expressed above. The points representing each species, however,
did fall into two restricted zones (fig. 5). This indicates that the
specific distinction represented by fig. 2 is correct.
Obviously, the shape of the cephalon is related to the position
of the genal spines. With advancement of these spines, the cepha-
lon takes on a trapezoidal outline. Whether the advancement is
an evolutionary process or a change due to molting is a moot
question. Specimens showing all variations come from a shale
section three feet thick, so it seems probable that it is a change
due to molting and not to evolutionary processes.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 7
Figs..1, 2,5 — Olenellus bristolensis (Resser), 2X, Hypotypes, USC
nos. oe 12 to 214-14. Showing varying shapes of the cephalon
ANG AMIOUMES OF EMA erry ee ate tam jon a0.
Fig. 3 — Hypostoma of Olenellus, 4X, USC no. 900.
Fig. 4 — Hypostoma of Paedeumias, 4X USC no. 899.
Fig. 6 — Olenellus fremonti Walcott, 1X, Hypotype, USC nos. 213-1,
Q1B-2 ene ee ee p. 30.
BuLLeETIN, So. CaLtrr. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
BULLETIN, SO, CALIF, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
In order to see if there were any variation in O. insolens in the
point of origin of the advanced genal spines, the same method of
measurement was employed for 38 specimens as was used for
Q. bristolensis. The resultant curve was a straight line, indicating
that there was no variation in the point of origin of these spines.
This verifies an observation previously stated by Resser (1928,
p. 8). The points which do not fall on an absolutely straight line
are possibly due to the mechanical difficulties in measuring or to
the preservation of the fossils. Numerous duplication of points
occurred (fig. 6). From this it can be inferred that the rate of
advancement of the genal spines keeps pace with the maturity
of the specimens.
Mout STAGES
The determination of the number of molt stages for several
species of Olenellus and Paedeumias was attempted by the writer.
Measurements of the cephalon were taken with a micrometer to
the closest tenth of a millimeter. Width along the posterior border
was plotted on arithmetic graph paper against maximum length
of the cephalon. Thus, if the trilobites have coordinated stages
in molting, points representing molts should fall in groups along
a straight line. Points for all specimens measured did fall on a
straight line but no grouping could be adequately discerned.
Evidently the trilobites did not molt at particular stages but
molted in an orderly progression regardless of the size of the
individual.
Of the 114 specifically identifiable specimens of O. bristolensis
only 51 could be adequately measured for use in this study. The
points for this species fell on a straight line, but not on a line
passing through zero (fig. 7). Evidently, the width of the cepha-
lon increases more rapidly in growth than does the length. In
determining if any relationship existed between the glabellar ratio
and the genal angle of O. bristolensis, it was noted that these
varied independently of each other. However, the length and
width of the cephalon do not vary independently of each other,
inasmuch as the points fall on a straight line. It seems that there
is an unequal rate of growth for some entities of the cephalon
whereas the size of the cephalon is defined by an orderly rate of
growth. No absolute groupings of points to represent molt stages
can be seen in fig. 7 although there are possible groups.
Sixty-one specimens of O. insolens were measured and plotted
on graph paper as was done for O. bristolensis. The points again
fell on a straight line, there being an orderly progression of growth
Figs. 1-8 — Olenellus bristolensis (Resser), 4X, Hypotypes, USC
nos. 214-1 to 214-8. Showing molt stages with progressive loss
of intergenal “Spinés: 226.2. p. 30.
Figs. 9-11 — Olenellus bristolensis (Resser), 4X, Hypotypes, USC
nos. 214-9 to 214-11. Showing varying shapes of the cephalon
and amounts of genal angle.
44
a
32
Vol. 51. Part 2, 19
BuLLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
BuLLeTIN, So, Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
If the groups represent molt stages, there may be a maximum
interval of molting as represented by specimens with a width of
the cephalon from 7 to 16 millimeters. Possible groupings repre-
senting molt stages are shown by arrows. The writer does not
claim that the groupings actually represent molt stages. Possibly
the groupings are due to the lack of measurable specimens for
intervening spaces on the graph.
Data plotted for P. clarki and P. nevadensis showed similar
results that were obtained for the two species of Olenellus (figs.
9-10). Measurements could not be readily taken of O. fremonti
and therefore were not plotted. P. mohavensis is only represented
by seven specimens and so plotted data would not be significant.
CONCLUSION
All indications tend to point to the fact that the Olenellidae
is a specialized family of trilobites. The resorption of one or two
pairs of cephalic spines plus the increase in width of the frontal
lobe of the glabella indicate that the cephalon is specialized.
Presence of the complete facial suture, even though fused, also
points to specialization. The third enlarged segment together
with the post-thoracic *segments indicates additional specializa-
tion and seems to bear out the fact that the Olenellidae were far
advanced in evolution.
Molting and not evolutionary processes accounts for the ob-
served variations in O. bristolensis. The amount of genal angle,
position of the genal spines, and the glabellar ratio vary inde-
pendently of each other. No correlation exists between the above
and the maturity of the specimens. Forms displaying the same
amount of genal angle do not have the same rate of development.
The rate of advancement of the genal spines in O, insolens is
directly correlated with the maturity of the specimens.
Intergenal spines are present in O. bristolensis and O. insolens
and even though these spines abort in early ontogenetic stages
they are of generic value. The presence of intergenal spines in
Olenellus and Paedeumias may indicate a phylogenetic relation-
ship between the two genera.
Inasmuch as the anterior course of the facial suture can be
demonstrated in specimens of Paedeumias and Olenellus, its pres-
ence indicates that the Olenellidae belongs in the order Opistho-
paria.
The two types of hypostoma are distinct from each other and
are of generic and not of specific value.
EXPLANA TION OF PLATE on
Figs. 1-4 — Paedeumias clarki Resser, 2X, Hypotypes, USC nos.
211-1. to°QLl-4: 2 Oe ee ee p. 33.
Figs. 5-6 — Paedeumias nevadensis (Walcott), 2X, Hypotypes,
USG'nos:;219-1; Q12-9. 02 A ee p. 33.
Figs. 7-8 ——Paedeumias mohavensis Crickmay, 3X, Hypotypes,
USE) nos; 2100. Ql Qo soe ee p. 33.
Fig. 9 — Paedeumias sp., 6X, USC no. 901. Showing three pairs of
cephalic spines.
46
Wolk, Bil IPante D4, ilisfere)
BuLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
oo
>
Butietin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Trilobites studied herein do not molt at particular stages but
molt in an orderly progression regardless of the size of the indi-
vidual. Groups of points, which may represent possible molt
stages, fall in a straight line. The straight line indicated that for
LENGTH IN hi”
MOLT STAGES OF P. CLARKI
ey: |
|
FIGURE 9
Text Figure 9
LENGTH IN MM
WIDTH IN MM
FIGURE 10
MOLT STAGES OF P. NEVADENSIS
Text Figure 10
48
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
all species studied the width of the cephalon increases more
rapidly than does the length in growth. In O. bristolensis, there
is an unequal] rate of growth for some morphological entities of
the cephalon whereas its size is defined by an orderly rate of
growth.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bet, G. K., 1931, The Disputed Structures of the Mesonacidae and their
Significance: American Museum Novitates, no. 475, pp. 1-23.
Buruinc, L. D., 1916, Paedeumias and the Mesonacidae, with Description
of a New Species, Having at Least Forty-four Segments, from the Lower
Cambrian of British Columbia: Ottowa Naturalist, vol. 30, no. 5, pp.
53-58.
, 1937, Protichnites and Climactichnites. A Critical Study
of Some Cambrian Trails: Am. Jour. Sci., vol. 44, no. 263, pp. 387-398.
Cuark, C. W., 1921, Lower and Middle Cambrian Formations of the Mohave
Desert: Univ. Calif. Publ. Bull. Dept. Geol. Sci., vol. 13, pp. 1-7.
Darton, N. H., 1907, Discovery of Cambrian Rocks in Southeastern Cali-
fornia: Jour. Geol., vol. 15, p. 470.
Hazzarp, J. D., 1933, Notes on the Cambrian Rocks of the Eastern Mohave
Desert, California: Univ. Calif. Publ. Dept. Geol. Sci., vol. 23, no. 2,
pp. 57-80.
Raw, F., 1937, Systematic Position of the Olenellidae (Mesonacidae): Jour.
Paleo., vol. 11, no. 7, pp. 575-597.
REsseEr, C. E., 1928, Cambrian Fossils from the Mohave Desert: Smithsonian
Misc. Coll., vol. 81, no. 2, pp. 1-14.
Resser, C. E. and Howe t, B. F., 1938, Lower Cambrian Olenellus Zone
of the Appalachians: Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 49, pp. 195-248.
VocneEs, A. W., 1893, A Classed and Annotated Bibliography of the Palaeo-
zoic Crustacea, etc.: California Acad. Sci., Occ. Pap. 4, p. 254.
Riccio, J. F., 1949, Lower Cambrian Fauna of the Marble Mountains, Cali-
fornia: The Compass, vol. 26, no. 4, pp. 354-359.
Watcorrt, C. D., 1885, Paleozoic Notes; New Genus of Cambrian Trilobites,
Mesonacis: Am. Jour. Sci., vol. 29, 3rd ser., pp. 328-330.
, 1891, Correlation Papers, Cambrian: U. S. Geol. Surv.
Bull., no. 81, pp. 13-434.
, 1910, Cambrian Geology and Paleontology: Smithsonian
Misc. Coll., vol. 53, no. 6, pp. 236-420.
49
ButLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
THE PREHISTORIC AVIFAUNA OF SMITH CREEK
CAVE, NEVADA, WITH A DESCRIPTION OF
? A NEW GIGANTIC RAPTOR
By Htwoecarve Howarp
In an earlier paper (Howard, 1935, Condor 37:206-209), I
discussed briefly the occurrence of extinct birds in a cave deposit
in Smith Creek Canyon, White Pine County, Nevada. A new
species of eagle, Spizaétus willetti, was described, and Breagyps
clarki and Coragyps occidentalis were recorded. Later, Stock
(1936, Bull. Southern Calif. Acad. Sci., 35:149-153) described an
extinet goat, Oreamnos americanus, from this cave, and recorded
the occurrence of Camelops, Equus and Ovis.
Smith Creek Cave was originally investigated by the South-
west Museum in the hope of finding evidence of early man.
Two expeditions, sponsored by the Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington, were made in 1934 and 1936. Harrington (1934, Master
Key, 8:165-169) reports that traces of fairly recent Indians were
found in the upper 12 inches of the dust which covered the cave
floor. In the older deposits, of lower levels, however, in which
the interest of the expeditions centered, the only suggestions of
human habitation were occasional bits of charcoal and the fact
that many of the mammal bones were split as if broken to obtain
the marrow. The cave site as described by Harrington lies in a
rugged desert canyon about 1000 feet above Smith Creek, at an
elevation of approximately 6200 feet. At the mouth of the canyon,
less than a mile from the cave, lies the great desert valley of Utah
filled at one time by an arm of Lake Bonneville. In the opposite
direction rises Mount Moriah, topped with pines. Like many
discoveries of prehistoric bone deposits made within the past
several years, the question of age has not been definitely deter-
mined, Harrington suggests that the presence of fish bones in
the deposits may indicate that the accumulation took place at the
time when the lake bed to the east was filled, presumably late in
the last period of glaciation.
The deposits in Smith Creek Cave were composed of exceed-
ingly loose dust, very difficult to excavate and maintain data on
depth. Bird and mammal bones were found at all levels from 1
to 12 feet. The bird bones were turned over to me for study
several years ago, but, as further expeditions were planned, pub-
lication of a complete list of species identified was postponed. In
February of this year (1952) I discovered among the mammal
bones collected on the expeditions, and now housed at the Cali-
fornia Institute of Technology, a very large carpal bone
(cuneiform) of a raptor. The bone had obviously been over-
looked when the other bird bones were sorted, owing to the
large size.
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Compared with the cuneiforms of various known raptors, the
cave bone most closely resembles that of vultures, especially
Teratornis. It is not, however, identical in structural characters
with any species with which it was compared, and it is very
much larger than the largest, measuring 43.2 mm. in greatest
breadth, with a height at the ulnar end of 32.8 mm. and a depth
of 22.8 mm. The same dimensions of the cuneiforms of Recent
California Condor (Gymnogyps californianus) and of Teratornis
merriami (Pleistocene of Rancho La Brea) are: Condor (L. A.
Mus. no. 269), 21.0, 17.0 and 12.7 mm. respectively; Teratornis
(L. A. Mus. no. B414), 30.0, 24.5 and 15.6 mm. respectively.
Although the paleontologist would ordinarily hesitate to describe
a new species on the basis of a single cuneiform bone, in this
instance the distinctiveness of the specimen is so marked that
it seems justifiable. I do not consider it advisable, however, to
name a new genus without further knowledge of the bird. Allo-
cation to the genus Teratornis is therefore made on the basis of
general similarity to Teratornis merriami as indicated below.
Teratornis incredibilis new species
Type. — Cuneiform bone, California Institute of Technology
no. 5067.
Locality AND AGE. — Section 7-F-310 of Locality 251, Smith
Creek Cave, Snake Range, 34 miles north of Baker, White Pine
County, Nevada. Quaternary.
Description. — Resembling Teratornis (family Teratornithide)
as contrasted with Gymnogyps and other members of the family
Cathartide, in (1) long, diagonal, ridgelike ligamental attach-
ment on the side of the bone adjacent to the ulna, and (2) close
proximity of this diagonal ridge to the external prominence; the
ligamental attachment is short, almost papilla-like in the
Cathartide, with a broad space between it and the external promi-
nence. Differing from Teratornis merriami in (1) 43 per cent
greater size; (2) greater pneumaticity; (3) longer and relatively
less peaked external prominence; (4) more prominent ligamental
attachment adjacent to the ulna; (5) relatively greater breadth
of posterior (distal) end.
Obviously the bird was a flier. The cuneiform receives the
attachment of part of the flexor carpi ulnaris muscle (affecting
manipulation of the manus in flight) and provides a groove for
passage of its tendon. The areas concerned with attachment and
passage of this muscle are well developed in the type of the new
species. The implications of the specimen as to the size of this
flying bird justify the specific name applied — incredibilis. The
breadth of the bone suggests a breadth of trochlea of carpometa-
carpus of 24-25 mm.; the size of the ulnar articulation indicates a
height of carpal condyle of the ulna of 33 mm. By comparison
51
BuLLetin. So, Cartier. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Figure {
Figure 2
Plate 10
Figures 1 and 2. Left to right: Cuneiform bones of Teratornis incredibilis
(Type); Teratornis merriami; and Gymnogyps californianus. Fig. 1 ulnar
face; fig. 2 metacarpal face. X approx. 6/7.
with Gymnogyps the wingspread may have been as much as 16-17
feet, if the wing length was proportionate to the size of this one
wing element. The California Condor today has a maximum
spread of 9-10 feet; that of Teratornis merriami is estimated at
11-12 feet.
Although over 648 bird bones from Smith Creek Cave have
now been examined, no other specimens of Teratornis incredibilis
have been found. A thorough search has been made of all osteo-
logical material collected from the cave, mammal as well as bird.
Fifty species of birds have been identified from the avian
material collected from the old deposits of the cave. Possibly still
other species are represented among the bones of ducks and shore-
birds. These forms are not readily separated, and detailed identifi-
cations were not possible on all bones. With the exception of ex-
tinct species, only two of the forms identified do not occur in
Nevada today, Gymnogyps californianus and Strix occidentalis.
Gymnogyps has been recorded, however, from Gypsum Cave,
52
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Nevada, dated at 8,000 to 10,000 years old. The identification of
the Spotted Ow] is based on a single coracoid. The most abundant
species represented are the Sage Grouse, Centrocercus urophasi-
anus (122 specimens ), Prairie Falcon, Falco mexicanus (117 speci-
mens ) and the extinct condor, Breagyps clarki. Breagyps is rep-
resented without doubt by 58 bones; another 32 fragments, plus
34 vertebre and 22 phalanges, probably are of this condor rather
than Gymnogyps. Five fragments are tentatively classified as
Gymnogyps. More than half of the Prairie Falcon bones are of
young birds. Obviously the cave represents the natural breeding
habitat of this species. At least six individual condors (Breagyps)
are represented, one of which was immature. Possibly Breagyps,
too, used the cave as a nesting site at intervals.
Over fifty per cent of the bones represent raptorial species
(353 bones of 16 species, including 8 specimens of 4 species of
owls); 22 per cent are water birds (140 bones of 20 or more
species, the surface-feeding ducks being the most abundant with
104 specimens); and 19 per cent are grouse (125 bones of two
species). The remainder are of passerines (26 bones, of which
17 represent the Raven), swift, nighthawk, and dove (one each).
The good representation of water birds adds credence to Har-
rington’s suggestion (above mentioned ), based on the fish bones
found in the cave, that the old lake bed to the east may have con-
tained water at the time the cave deposits were accumulating.
Presumably the water birds, as well as many of the other species
of birds, were carried to the cave by predators. The abundant
Sage Grouse and Prairie Falcons, as well as the formerly reported
(Stock, loc. cit) horse, sheep, goat and camel all indicate that the
immediate area in the past was much as it is now, a relatively
bare, open land — perhaps then bordering on an interior lake.
Six extinct species occur, represented by at least 67 bones.
Possibly there are more, if the unidentified condor bones are of
Breagyps rather than Gymnogt yps. Two of the six species,
Spizaétus willetti, and Teratornis incredibilis, are peculiar to
Smith Creek Cave. Coragyps occidentalis (2 specimens ) has been
recorded from other cave deposits in California, New Mexico and
Mexico, as well as from the three asphalt deposits of California.
Breagyps clarki has been reported elsewhere only from the
Rancho La Brea deposits of California (its type locality ). Neogyps
errans (2 specimens ) and Anabernicula minuscula (3 specimens )
are also now recognized from the Smith Creek Cave deposits.
Neogyps is known from the Mexico and California Pleistocene;
Anabernicula was first described from Arizona (early Pleistocene )
and later reported from the late Pleistocene asphalt beds of Cali-
fornia and from Fossil Lake, Oregon. Of these extinct forms,
only Breagyps occurs in sufficient abundance to indicate that it
was common in the cave.
53
BuLLetinxn, So. Carir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
It is worthy of note that in addition to the two bones of
Coragyps tound in the deeper levels, two bones of Cathartes aura
(evidently of the same individual bird) were found near the
surface in the cave floor, Both show a state of preservation differ-
ent from the majority of bones found and appear to be of much
more recent deposition. It has been previously indicated by studies
of deposits of different ages at Rancho La Brea (Howard and
Miller, 1939, Carnegie Inst. Wash. Pub. 514, p. 44) that Coragyps
was the dominant form of small vulture in the Pleistocene of
California, but was supplanted by Cathartes in more recent
time. It is now suggested that the same condition existed in the
Nevada area and that the occurrence of Coragyps without
Cathartes in the deeper levels of Smith Creek Cave bears some
significance with regard to the age of the older fauna.
A complete list of the avian species now identified from Smith
Creek Cave follows. Extinct species are marked with an asterisk.
The species represented by a single specimen are so indicated.
Exact numbers of bones of the anseriform species cannot be
determined, although the total of all duck bones is 109, of which
at least 30 represent the teals, and only 5 are of the Aythyini.
Aquila chrysaétos, Corvus corax and Fulica americana are repre-
sented by 30, 17 and 9 bones respectively. Other species vary in
number from 2 to 5 (with the exception of the Sage Grouse,
Prairie Falcon and extinct condor previously discussed). The
passerines were kindly identified by Dr. Alden H. Miller.
List OF SPECIES
Podilymbus podiceps (1) Falco sparverius
Colymbus caspicus Fulica americana
Branta canadensis Rallus, sp. (1)
°Anabernicula minuscula Centrocercus urophasianus
Anas platyrhynchos Pedioecetes phasianellus?
Anas acuta Catoptrophorus semipalmatus
Anas carolinensis Recurvirostra americana (1)
Anas discors? Phalarope, sp. (1)
Mareca americana Capella gallinago? (1)
Spatula clypeata (1) ‘Himantopus mexicanus?
Aythya marila Zenaidura macroura (1)
Aythyini, sp. Bubo virginianus
Melanitta perspicillata (1) Asio flammeus
°Teratornis incredibilis (1) Strix occidentalis? (1)
*Breagyps clarki Aegolius acadica (1)
Gymnogyps californianus? Chordeiles minor (1)
*Coragyps occidentalis Aeronautes saxatilis (1)
*Neogyps errans Nucifraga columbiana? (1)
*Spizaétus willetti (1?) Corvus corax
Aquila chrysaétos Corvus brachyrhynchos
Buteo jamaicensis Pica pica (1)
Buteo swainsoni Turdus migratorius (1)
Buteo lagopus Agelaius, sp. (1)
Circus hudsonius Jay, sp. (1)
Falco mexicanus Fringillide, sp. (1)
Los Angeles County Museum, May 1, 1952
54
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
A NEW AMPHIPOD OF THE GENUS
CERADOCUS (DENTICERADOCUS)
FROM LOWER CALIFORNIA*
By J. LAURENS BARNARD
University of Southern California
Recent carcinological collections made by the research vessel
VELERO Iv along the coast of Lower California showed the pres-
ence of an amphiod genus (Crustacea) not previously reported
from Pacific America. The present material differs greatly from
any other known species of the genus and subgenus Ceradocus
(Denticeradocus), to which this new species belongs, and which
was ably discussed by Sheard (1939).
The writer wishes to acknowledge the many considerations of
Dr. John S. Garth of the Allan Hancock Foundation and the
generous support of Dr. James W. Buchanan, Director of Research
at the Foundation.
Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) paucidentatus, new species
(Plates 11-13)
DEsCRIPTION OF MALE. — Head about as long as first 2 body
segments, lateral lobes separated from lower head angle by a
deep, narrow sinus, eyes moderately large in size, subcircular in
outline.
Antenna | reaching about to end of perzeon segment 7, article
2 of peduncle longer than 1, flagellum shorter than peduncle,
accessory flagellum composed of 5-6 articles.
Antenna 2 shorter than 1, article 5 shorter than 4.
Upper lip evenly rounded below.
Mandible: accessory plate present in both mandibles, spine
row with 7-8 spines, inner edge of palp article 1 acutely produced,
article 3 about one third as long as 2.
Lower lip with inner lobes.
Maxilla 1: inner edge of inner plate heavily setose, outer plate
with 9 spines, apex of palp with 13 slender spines.
Maxilla 2: inner plate with inner edge heavily setose.
Maxilliped: apex of inner plate obliquely truncated, defined
laterally by small cusps, lined with 7-8 plumose sete; outer plate
not reaching to end of palp article 2, inner edge with stout, simple
spines, apex of palp article 4 armed with a spine.
Gnathopod 1: coxal plate acutely produced forward, articles 5
and 6 subequal in length, palm oblique, setose, not defined, article
7 overlapping palm.
Gnathopod 2 of two sorts, one side larger than the other: (1)
large gnathopod with palm oblique, with 2 processes near finger
hinge separated by a narrow sinus, each process armed with 3-4
*Contribution No. 78 from the Allan Hancock Foundation, The University
of Southern California.
55
ButLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
and 5 spines, respectively, from finger hinge, palm defined by a
large, blunt process, behind which is a smaller process; article
7 fitting palm; (2) the smaller gnathopod with the palm convex
and lined with spinules, palmar angle acutely produced.
Plate 11
Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) paucidentatus, new species.
l’aratype, male, 7 mm.
Fig. a, mandible; b, maxilla 1; c, maxilliped; d, maxilla 2; e, lower lip;
h, dorsal teeth of pleon segment 4.
Holotype, male, 8 mm.
Fig. f, posterolateral edge of pleon segment 3, right side; g, dorsal tooth
of pleon segment 4.
Ot
(on)
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Plate 12
Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) paucidentatus, new species.
Paratype, male, 7 mm.
Fig. a, head and antennal peduncles; b, pereeopod 1; c, coxa of pereeopod
2; d, telson, enlarged; e, uropod 2; f, uropod 1; g, uropod 3; h, pleon
segments 2 to 6.
57
BuLteti, So, Cauur. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Parweopod 1 larger than 2.
Perwopods 3-5 successively longer, similar. Lower posterior
corner of article 2 produced downward into a broad lobe, posterior
edge of article 2 serrate, more strongly so in oereanee 5 than
peropod 3.
Uropods 1 and 2 extending the same distance, rami of uropod
| shorter than peduncle; of uropod 2, the inner ramus longer than
peduncle.
Uropod3 long, rami broad, flat, about twice as long as peduncle,
Telson: lobes apically acute, inner edges strongly incised, each
armed with 2 spines, each outer edge with 2 seta.
Pleon segments 1-3 not dorsally serrated; lower posterior cor-
ner of pleon segment 2 acutely produced; lateral posterior edge
of pleon segment 3 with 6-7 large, acute teeth.
Dorsal edge of pleon segment 4 with 1-2 small, acute teeth,
dorsal edge of segment 5 with 1 small tooth.
Femate. — Unknown.
Types. — Holotype, AHF No. 514, male, 8 mm.; paratypes, 2
males, each 7 mm.
Type Locauiry. — “Nameless cove, 12 miles east of Punta
Eugenia, Lower California, shore, under rock. Location of cove:
27° 50’ 00” N, 114° 51’ 30” W. October 31, 1951.
MATERIAL EXAMINED. — The types.
Remarks. — This species is characterized by the paucity of
CONES TON on urosome segments | and 2, urosome segment | hav-
ing 1 or 2 sharp teeth, segment 2 havi ing only 1 tooth. It is also
chametenred by the absence of serrations on pleon segments |]
and 2, the lack of dorsal serrations on segment 3, the paucity of
telson spination, and by the character of the lower posterior corner
of pereeopods 3-5.
The variability of pleon segment 4 dentation makes it difficult
to fit into Sheard’s (1939) key where one must choose between
“pleon segments 4 and 5 with a large medio-dorsal tooth” and
“pleon segments 4 and 5; evenly dentate.” It is probably best to
regard the present species as having a single mediodorsal tooth
on these segments, although one of the paratypes has 2 teeth on
segment 4. In this first category the new species differs from
Ceradocus (Denticeradccus) capensis Sheard (1939) by the dis-
tinguishing characters mentioned above in the first paragraph of
“Remarks.” The species resembles C. (D.) rubromaculatus
(Stimpson ) and C. (D.) sheardi Shoemaker (1948) in the paucity
of telson spination but again differs from them by the aforemen-
tioned characters, with the exception of the telson armature.
Sheard, K. LITERATURE CITED
1939. Studies in Australian Gammaridea (1) The genus Ceradocus. Rec.
Rec Australian Mus., vol. 6, no. 3, pp. 275-295, 8 text figs.
Shoemaker, C. R.
1948. The Amphipoda of the Smithsonian-Roebling Expedition to Cuba
in 1937. Smithson. Misc. Colls., vol. 110, no. 3, 15 pp., 3 text figs.
58
BuLLeTIn, So. Cauir ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Plate 18
Ceradocus (Denticeradocus) paucidentatus, new species.
Paratype, male, 7 mm.
Fig. a, pereopod 3, coxa and article 2 only; c, pereopod 5; d, gnathopod
1; e, gnathopod 2, one side.
Another paratype, male, 7 mm.
Fig. b, gnathopod 2, showing the other form of this appendage, compare
with fig. e.
BuLLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
TWO NEW SPECIES OF OLETHREUTIDAL
FROM CALIFORNIA (LEpmoprera )
By J. F. Gares CLARKE
Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, Agricultural Research
Administration, United States Department of Agriculture
The following two species, received for determination, proved
to be undescribed. Since both require names, they are offered
below.
Eucosma hasseanthi,new species
(Plate 14, Figures 1, 3)
Alar expanse, 24-26 mm.
Labial palpus light ochraceous-buff with light brown mottling
exteriorly on second segment. Antenna light ochraceous-buff
annulated with light brown. Head, thorax and forewing light
ochraceous-buff; thorax and tegula suffused with tawny, especially
anteriorly; forewing with a coarse, but obscure, tawny reticulum;
middle of dorsum with an outwardly oblique purplish-fuscous
blotch extending to middle of wing; in some specimens continuing
to costa as an inwardly oblique transverse fascia; from cos‘a,
slightly before apical third, an outwardly oblique, purplish-
fuscous, transverse fascia extends nearly to termen at vein 4;
ocelloid patch indicated by a few scattered black scales; cilia
concolorous with ground color of forewing and with a narrow,
light brown sub-basal line. Hind wing light brown; cilia light
ochraceous-buff with light brown sub-basal line. Legs light ochra-
ceous-buff; fore and mid-femora and tibiae shaded with tawny;
fore and mid-tarsi brown. Abdomen light ochraceous-buff.
MALE GENITALIA. — Harpe as figured. Uncus reduced; socii
weak, fleshy lobes. Aedeagus short, stout.
FEMALE GENITALIA. — As figured. Signa unequal; one large,
one small.
Type. — U.S. National Museum No. 61472.
TYPE LOCALITY. — Orange, California.
Foop PLANT. — Hasseanthus variegatus ( Wats. ) Rose.
Remarks. — Described from the type male, one male and three
female paratypes all from the same locality. Emergence dates are
1.23. viii.36 (T. W. Hower). Paratypes in the U. S. National and
Los Angeles Museums.
This species is nearly related to both primulana and biplagata.
It differs from primulana by the absence of the apical mark and
from biplagata by the presence of a reticulated pattern and
darker ground color.
60
BULLETIN, So. Catir ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Wolk fall, \Peid: D. ile jeye)
LE
Plate 14
Eucosma hasseanthi, new species: Fig. 1, left harpe; Fig. 3, ventral view of
female genitalia with ovipositor removed.
Sonia comstocki, new species: Fig. 2, left harpe; Fig. 4, ventral view of
female genitalia with ovipositor removed.
61
Buuierin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Sonia comstocki, new species
(Plate 14, Figures 2, 4)
» Alar expanse, 20-24 mm.
Labial palpus white suffused with buff and with a brownish
shade in the brush of second segment; outwardly on second seg-
ment, near apex, a brown spot. Antenna brownish ocherous with
buff annulations. Head, thorax, forewing, legs and abdomen
whitish to buff suffused and overlaid with ochraceous-buff; costal
fold of male about one-third the length of the forewing; from
outer end of costal fold, to apex, a series of short, brown, geminate
markings; ocelloid patch indicated by an outer crescentic and
several inner, irregular, whitish semi-metallic spots and a few
scattered dark brown scales; basal patch faintly indicated in the
more strongly marked specimens; cilia white with a narrow.
dark sub-basal band. Hind wing shining white with a mottling of
ocherous and brown scales; cilia white with a narrow brownish
ocherous sub-basal band.
MALE GENITALIA. — Harpe as figured. Uncus short, weak,
bifurcate. Tegumen truncate, broad. Socii strong, directed ven-
trad, straight. Vesica with a cluster of many slender cornuti.
FEMALE GENITALIA. — As figured.
Type. — U. N. National Museum No. 61471.
Typr Locauiry. — San Felipe Wash., San Diego County, Cali-
fornia.
Remarks. — Described from the male type, six male and one
female paratypes. All are from the same locality, bear the same
date (II. ix. 1938), and were collected by Dr. John A. Comstock.
I take pleasure in naming this species for Dr. Comstock, who
has contributed so much to our knowledge of western Lepi-
doptera.
The genitalia of comstocki are almost identical to those of
vovana but have a smaller clasper and a more sharply defined
anal angle of the cucullus. The neck of the harpe is also narrower
than that of vovana. In the female the anterior edge of ostium is
weak and membranous in comstocki but sclerotized in vovana.
BULLETIN, So. Cauiv. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
NEW NEOGAZAN WATER-STRIDERS OF THE
GENUS MICROVELIA (Hemiptera; VELuD«)
By C. J. Drake and F. C. Horres
Water-striders of the genus Microvelia Westwood are found in
many different kinds of aquatic habitats, and are particularly at
home in tropical and subtropical regions. More than 60 dif-
ferent species have been recorded from the Americas. The present
paper contains the descriptions of two new species from Mexico,
one from Puerto Rico and two from Argentine. On account of
their small size, often two millimeters or less in length, only the
commoner and more widely distributed species are usually found
in collections. The disposition of the types of the new species is
given beneath the description of each species.
Microvelia zillana, sp. new
APTEROUS MALE: Small, rather slender, moderately narrowed
posteriorly, brown, without color markings. Pubescence dense,
brown.
SizE: Length, 1.75 mm.; width at base of abdomen, 0.70 mm.
Heap: Width across eyes, 0.50 mm. Broad, the median line
distinct. Eyes large, reddish brown. Antennz long, rather stout,
dark brown, paler at base, pubescent; formula — I, 20; II, 18;
IIL, 25; IV, 25. Rostrum testaceous, dark fuscous apically.
TuHorax: Pronotum very large, strongly roundly produced
posteriorly, covering rest of dorsal surface of thorax, half as long
as broad (26:52), pits present but rather difficult to see, the
posterior margin broad and very slowly rounded. Legs moder-
ately long, moderately stout, dark brown with coxe, trochanters,
and bases of femora testaceous; femora only a little enlarged, un-
armed, all about equal in thickness. Tarsal segments of both
middle and hind legs about equal in length.
ABDOMEN: Moderately narrowed posteriorly; connexiva wide,
erect, not produced behind. Venter without protuberances, last
two segments flattened and explanate on sides and hind margin,
the explanate sides narrowed and rounded posteriorly and then
jointly rounded with the explanate margin of last ventrite, which
projects over the base of the first genital segment. First genital
segment roundly impressed basally and then raised apically.
MACROPTEROUS FEMALE: Length, 2:30 mm.; width, 1.00 mm.
Pronotum very large, almost triangularly produced behind, with
humeral angles moderately prominent, median longitudinal line
distinct, wider across humeral angles than median length (80:60),
pits more prominent than in apterous form. Hemelytra dark
fuscous with veins a little darker; outer margins fringed with
moderately long brownish hairs; last three abdominal segments
63
BuLLeTIN, So. Catir. AGADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
strongly narrowed and compressed laterally; last ventrite nar-
rowed with sides almost parallel, nearly as long as two preced-
ing segments, impressed a little behind on each side of median
line. Other characters as in male.
Type (apterous male) and ALLoTyPE (macropterous female ),
Mayaquez, Puerto Rico, April 4, 1936, H. D. Tate.
This singular brownish species without color markings may be
separated at once from its allies by the structure of the underside
of the last two ventrites of the male (thickened, flattened, plate-
like, explanate on sides and apex and somewhat semicircular with
apex rather sharply rounded). The abruptly constricted and
laterally compressed last three abdominal segment distinguishes
the female. The peculiar plate-like structure on the apical part
of the male venter is not found in any other American Microvelia.
Microvelia rasilis Drake
Microvelia rasilis Drake, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 6:77-78. 1951.
Six adults and several nymphs, Puebla, Mex., July 20, 1951,
taken near the waters edge under overhanging vegetation in a
large sulfur-water pond, fed by large sulfur springs. This was
the only water-strider found in the sulfur water and about an hour
was spent by the authors finding the specimens. The type series
(4 specimens ) were taken in a lake near Mexico City.
Microvelia pueblana, sp. new
APTEROUS FORM: Moderately large, black with a transverse
band near front margin of pronotum, a small spot on each side
of hind margin of pronotum and a spot on each connexival seg-
ment brown. Legs mostly testaceous with brownish largely on
dorsal surface. Underside of entire body blackish with sides of
connexival segment brown. Pubescence short, brownish black.
Antenne dark brown with terminal segment blackish, the first
two segments beneath mostly testaceous.
Size: Length, 2.40 mm.; width, 0.90 mm.
Heap: Width across eyes, 0.60 mm. Head convex above, finely
transversely rugulose, the median line fairly distinct. Eyes mod-
erately large, brownish. Antennze moderately long, moderately
stout, pubescence interspersed with a few short hairs; segment
I stout, slightly bowed, much thicker than II; Il much stouter
than III, slowly enlarged towards the apex; II very slender; IV
distinctly stouter than III; formula — I, 17; II, 18; III, 18; IV, 28.
Rostrum yellowish brown with apical part blackish, not reaching
to the middle of mesosternum.
THorax: Pronotum very large, strongly produced posteriorly,
covering rest of dorsal surface of thorax, coarsely pitted, with
posterior margin slowly broadly rounded, much wider than long
64
BULLETIN, So. Cauir, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
(64:37). Legs moderately stout, moderately long, clothed beneath
with brownish hairs, all femora moderately incrassate, unarmed;
anterior femora slightly thicker than hind pair; middle femora
feebly thicker than hind pair. Second tarsal segment of both
middle and hind legs a little longer than first.
AspoMEN: Narrowed posteriorly beyond the middle; beneath
convex, without spines or tubercles; connexiva with outer margin
slowly rounded, widest near middle, becoming narrower pos-
teriorly; last ventrite feebly broadly emarginate. Male genital seg-
ments small, largely retracted and not exposed. Female and
winged forms unknown.
Tyee (male), Puebla, July 29, 1951, collected by the authors.
PaRATyPE, | male, Oaxaca, Mex., July 21, 1951, collected by
authors in a small irrigation ditch in a vegetable garden. The
paratype lacks the small color marking on hind margin of prono-
tum and connexival segments; the legs are also darker than in
the type. A female from Alvarado, Mex., July 28, 1951, seems to
be this species, but on account of the more coarsely pitted
pronotum and much larger size, it is not treated as a part of the
type series.
M. pueblana differs from M. verana n. sp. by its larger size and
stouter antenne. M. oraria Drake is a smaller paler species with
the last antennal segment very long.
Microvelia ioana, sp. new
APTEROUS FEMALE: Small, robust, brownish with the greater
part of the last three abdominal segments and a large .spot on
each side of the base of the abdomen testaceous; sides of body
brownish testaceous with sternum and venter blackish; pronotum
tinged with some testaceous.
Size: Length, 2:15 mm.; width, 0.85 mm.
Heap: Width across eyes, 0.62 mm. Head broad, blackish
fuscous, the median line distinct, blackish. Eyes blackish. Antenne
moderately long, rather slender, dark brown with basal segment
largely testaceous, pubescent, with a few scattered longer hairs:
formula — I, 17; II, 15; III, 24; IV, 26.
Tuorax: Pronotum very large, widely and almost truncately
produced posteriorly, covering all of the rest of the dorsal surface
of the thorax, almost rectangular in outline, much wider than
long (40:30), with an irregularly arranged transverse row of pits
dividing the pronotum into two parts, the hind part larger and
coarsely pitted, the front part (save narrow collar) not pitted;
constricted on lateral sides just opposite the wavy transverse line
formed by pits. Sides of entire body with some long, erect, scat-
tered, dark brown hairs. Legs moderately long, moderately stout,
unarmed, the femora slightly thickened and about equal in thick-
ness; tarsal segments about equal in length in both middle
and hind legs.
65
BuLLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
AnpoMeNn: Broad, narrowed a little posteriorly, the last ventrite
much longer than preceding segment; connexiva broad, margined
with brown, strongly reflexed posteriorly; genital segments re-
tracted and very little exposed.
Type (female), Rio de Janeiro, Bras., Dec. 6, 1938, C. J. Drake
( Drake Collection). Male and winged form unknown.
The shape of posterior margin of pronotum, which extends
backwards very broadly with posterior margin subtruncate and
only feebly rounded, distinguishes this insect from its allies. Also,
the hind part of the pronotum back of the transverse wavy line is
distinctly pitted, whereas the narrower front part is impunctate.
Microvelia verana, sp. new
APTEROUS MALE: Small, oblong, narrowed posteriorly, fuscous
black with transverse band on front margin of pronotum, a small
spot at the base and last tergite of pronotum, and the posterior
part of each connexival segment brownish. Legs dark brown
with coxee, trochanters, basal part of femora above, most of under-
side of fore and middle femora, basal half of hind femora both
above and beneath whitish; hind tibia with a narrow basal ring
and most of apical two thirds whitish. Antenne dark fuscous-
brown with large part of basal segment paler.
Size: Length, 1:80 mm.; width, 0.70 mm.
THorax: Pronotum very large, strongly produced posteriorly
so as to cover rest of dorsal surface of thorax, rather coarsely
pitted, much wider than long (54:29), the posterior margin slowly
broadly rounded. Legs rather long, moderately stout; femora
moderately thickened and unarmed, the anterior femora slightly
thicker than the other pairs; anterior tibiae with an apical spur.
Second tarsal segment of hind legs slightly longer than first
(10:12); tarsal segments of middle legs also nearly equal in length
(10:12).
AspoMEN: Moderately narrowed posteriorly with sides feebly
rounded; dorsal surface clothed with very fine, not very long,
inconspicuous, dark hairs. Venter without tubercle or spine; last
ventrite longer than the preceding segment, feebly and broadly
emarginate behind. Last ter gite longer than the preceding seg-
ment, truncate behind. Genital segments largely retracted and
not visible.
Typr (apterous male), Alvarado, Mex., July 28, 1951, taken
by the authors, in a stagnant pool connected on one side with a
small permanent stream.
The fine hairs on dorsal surface of abdomen separate this
insect from other eM species. The antennal formula is —
I, 15; I, 11; II, 22; IV, 27. The connexivum has a reddish stripe
on each side.
66
BuLLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
Microvelia inannana, sp. new
APTEROUS FORM: Very small, above brown or brownish fuscous
with some irregular areas darkened, oblong and narrowed pos-
teriorly (male) or distinctly ovate (female). Entire body beneath
testaceous.
Size: Length (male), 1.50 mm., 1.25-1:50 mm. (female);
width, 0.54 mm. (male) and 0.50-0.62 mm. (female).
Heap: Width across eyes, 0.41 mm. Head above convex, brown
or fuscous with or without a broad stripe on each side of median
line. Eyes moderately large, dark brown, sometimes reddish.
Antenne moderately stout, rather long, dark brownish, paler at
base, pubescent; formula — I, 9; II, 7; III, 10; IV, 15. Rostrum
testaceous, darkened apically, not attaining middle of meso-
sternum.
THoRAx: Pronotum (male) moderately large, produced pos-
teriorly so as to conceal about half of mesonotum, the posterior
margin almost truncate (feebly concave); mesonotum with ex-
posed part about half as long as pronotum. Pronotum (female )
short, scarcely if at all produced posteriorly. Legs rather short,
moderately stout, testaceous with posterior part of femora, the
tibiae and tarsi brown or fuscous; fore and hind femora a little
stouter than middle pair; femora unarmed; hind tarsi straight
in male.
ABDOMEN: Distinctly narrowed posteriorly in male and more
ovate in female; connexiva wider in female than male, not reflexed
in either sex. Sometimes the last three tergites as well as the
median part of metanotum and base of abdomen brownish. First
genital segment in male deeply roundly emarginate behind, above
broad and truncate on hind margin.
Type (male), atLoryPE (female) and 6 female PARATYPES,
Tigre, Buenos Aires, Arg., Dec. 10 and Nov. 20, 1938, C. J. Drake
(Drake Collection ). Winged form unknown.
This tiny species belongs to the M. robusta Uhler group of
species, but is distinctly smaller, and paler in color, with shorter
legs, straight hind tarsi in male and different antennal formula.
The hind tibiz in male of M. robusta, M. puchella Uhler and
M. borealis Bueno are distinctly curved in the male.
67
BuLLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
BULLETIN of the SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY of SCIENCES
Published by the Academy at Los Angeles, California
Subscription—$3.50 per year
Iree to Life Members and Unlimited Annual Members
of the Academy (Annual Membership Fee $5.00)
Address all communications to Dr. Howarp R. Hin
Care of Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7, Calif., U.S. A.
Publications of the Southern California
Academy of Sciences
The Academy has published to date the following:
PROCEEDINGS, 1896 to 1899. Six numbers—Vol. 1, Nos. 1 to 6.
MISCELLANEOUS BULLETINS issued under the imprint of the Agri-
cultural Experiment Station, 1897 to 1907. Ten numbers.
All issues of the above are now out of print.
Bulletin of the
Southern California Academy of Sciences
Began issue with Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1902. Issued ten numbers in
1902; nine numbers in 1903, 1904, 1905; three numbers in 1906. Issued
two numbers annually from 1907 to 1919, both inclusive (except 1908 —
one issue only). Issued four numbers (January, May, July and October )
in 1920.
The 1921 issues are: Vol. XX, No. 1, April; Vol. XX, No. 2, August;
Vol. XX, No. 3, December.
The 1922 issues are: Vol. XXI, No. 1, March; Vol. XXI, No. 2, September.
The 1923 issues are: Vol. XXII, No. 1, March; No. 2, July.
The 1924 issues are: Vol. XXIII, No. 1, January-February; No. 2, March-
April; No. 3, May-June; No. 4, July-August; No. 5, September-October;
No. 6, November-December.
From 1925 to 1951, including volumes XXIV to L, three numbers were
published each year. These were issued as No. 1, January-April; No. 2,
May-August; No. 3, September-December, for each volume.
MEMOIRS
Vol. 1, 1988. Vol. 2, Part 1, 1939. Vol. 2, Part 2, 1944. Vol. 3, Part 1,
1947. Vol. 3, Part 2, 1949.
68
' BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
.
Publications of the Southern California
Academy of Sciences
For Sale at the Appended Prices
To To Non-
ae
BULLETIN Members Members
WOIGMNGRIO04 oe $ 50 1.00
OES IGO a es 50 1.00
FFB I ADS TISCOVER 00 1.00
SE NAPS STU TCG Otc eo eee ee ae eae 1.50 3.00
EW O0S 1.00 2.00
| an) mer en (Cette 8 eee eee VS 1.50
| SOMMMIRSIOUN 2h Ak oe 1.50 3.00
| FE TVD = 7 A TASTE ae an 2.00 4.00
| ISR OMIOIG ee ee 75 1.50
| FTG = ON TSS ast ie age eee a PEI 1.50 3.00
| SOMMEMEIIQO OC ee ee 50 1.00
' soa meeseet Aes) (ion Sn RS he See Ma eI eaok Pay ev eis 50 1.00
| OTL. = OD. CONS a a A eS PR Sea UE 1.00 2.00
GR ST De BAL Be NG (eee) eee .30 te)
eee eal 25 (each )ile ete eile 35 15
ale) tee Ore OO Ge ts eee hei ee 85 U5
Otero eel OO eachinrs. te. Sue ae 85 5
ee rele OS NOOB ( cach) tte es os 35 75
ee Semele e909 (each) on ee TS 35 505
OMe S* Vol (each) Af. ie a 35 75
| ae eel eno O 39s (each) iis: se erie) Ye BS 75
WES pele SOS (Each) ae eee eS .30 75
Somme On Sel O34 (each) Me woe 2s ee eae ae: 35 75
eae teal OL OG5a(each,)irse- e208 ee 35 at)
nar) Meee 23. 1936) (each sa. A see Roto) se
© BB. = IL DR TG (Gero) av) ences ee eee 130 75
EPI 2088 (each). 35 15
aM amos O80 (eich) +. ee 85 15
een 3 pues ORO (Dire ee es ae eyo) 75
aa OMe 3 OAT (each ia). 0.30. SN eS IoD 15
ar Seeman lP Onn 30 | GAD (each) ete ee SS 3 15
Aer MOA Ss (each) wee eee sa ee 35 75
ee eee WGA AN (each) ie ee ee ee 35 15
| eA Ae ee 7 SOA SU Each) ste e cee es do, 35 15
| ea eal: 2) 1946) (each eee 35 75
ar emma lea 3 MO Ar/n (Teac lay) sea eetieenunt nee ee 35 15
weAvparmsle Oh Sul 948) (each) ssc Bae peas ae 35 15
eae) 8 1949, (each). 1 85 15
OMe Ok S050 (each en ee ee 35 75
ot) Neel: (OU Se OIE Keach) eves salts eee Te .60 1.25
(Continued on next page)
69
BuLLeirn, So. CAutur, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 2, 1952
PUBLICATIONS (continued)
To To Non-
MEMOIRS Members Members
Vol. 1, L988—paper 1COV erat siicienstceves coc eve tenses ee $2.00 $4.00
bein bound in black fabrikoid ........................ 3.00 5.00
printed on one side of paper.................. 3.00 5.00
printed on one side of page (bound).... 4.00 6.00
Vol. 2, No. 1, 1989—paper Cover ..........0cc10.:eeccccesssseeene 1.25 2.50
ceca bound in black fabrikoid.............. 2) Od 3.50
printed on one side of page.......... Ugh) 3.50
2 944— amen COVED sciesc-sesee secon eee 75 1.50
3 9 457—paperkCOV er eecesceeseencense eee ee 1.00 2.00
2; U949—paper COVEN ice scceeesseeeseee eee 1.00 2.00
Miscellaneous, Publications of Affiliated or
Co-operating Organizations
Lorquinia—Vols. 1, 2 (all published).......... bound $1.50, unbound $1.00
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA GEOLOGY AND LOS ANGELES
HARE OUWARES Sse ayo Eli] ieee eee ee bound
Southwest Science Bulletin, May 5, 1920 (all published),
chiefly Entomological, 1 color-plate.......2.)..-0. ee
Check-list of the Recent Bivalve Mollusks (of N. W. Coast of
Am. from the Polar Sea to San Diego), W. H. Dall..................
FLORA OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA by Anstruther Davidson
and George Ik, Moxley, 452pp., 1923-2). =o
Reprints:
Check-list of the Lepidoptera of Boreal America. Superfamilies
Sphingoidea, Saturnioidea and Bombycoidea (printed on one
side of page only, to allow of additional notes), Wm. Barnes
and Hoster: He Benjamins 192)
The Cacti of the Pyramid Peak Region, Dona Ana County, New
Mexico 93S Ree) Hosber gin see ee
Check-list of the Macrolepidoptera of Canada and the United
States of America by Dr. J. McDunnough, 1938, printed on
white bristol board, one side of page (without index) suitable
for labels. To Academy members, $1.50. To non-members...
A List of the ANTS OF CALIFORNIA with notes on their habits
and distribution. 44 pages, 3 plates, by Arnold Mallis_.............
A Check List of the HELICOID SNAILS OF CALIFORNIA, 32
pages, from Henry A. Pilsbury’s Monograph, by Wm. M.
Trager. 5s ac 8 eg
Contributions from the Los Angeles Museum — CHANNEL
ISLANDS BIOLOGICAL SURVEY. Papers 1 to 33. Bound..
Appress ALL INQUIRIES TO
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Care Dr. Howarp R. Hit)
Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7, Calif., U. S. A.
70
2.50
1.00
1.00
2.50
$ .50
50
3.00
4 R
-
"4 d
3
; 4 sh
j
i
f
,
5 i
4
ies i
i
.
i
: z
1
ite
1
"1
REPRINTS: Contributors of articles accepted for publication in the
Bulletin should order reprints, if desired, when they return galley proof
to the Editor. They may be ordered through the Editor at the following
rates, from the Commonwealth Press, 1507 DeLong Street, Los Angeles,
Calif., the contributor paying for all his reprints.
PRE LIST OF REPRINTS
(WITHOUT COVERS)
4pn. 8pp. 12pp. 16pp. 20pp. 24pp. 28pp. 32pp.
50 copies ...... Tou Dap) 6.50 $10.25 $11.75 $13.50) $16.00 $17.00
BROOM ger gs. ea Oe Om MOMo 22.75 > O0N 11-25) 2025 21.50
1! 510 0S Saas trea Dees) (13-00!) 15.25 8 18:25) 5 21:00, 2450" 26.00
PAGO ge Fake LOOM ECO! 5:25) | lia: 21.50 24:75). 26:75 ° "30:50
IO MG, ose Swi lewioy wT DOM E2025) 24575; 28:50, 33:00) 435.00
2100 ete aia Panel oO Oto) (22415 28.00" 32225." 37.2500 59.50
Covers: 50 for $2.00—additional covers 1 Yac each.
California State Sales Tax to be added if delivered within the state.
Che Commonwealth Press, Juc.
Est. 1906
oe
@ PUBLICATIONS @ CATALOGS
e FOREIGN LANGUAGE TEXTS
@ COMPLETE GRAPHIC ARTS SERVICE
oe
PRospect 2233
1507 DeLong Street, Los Angeles 15, California
BULLETIN OF THE
Southern California
Academy of Sciences
LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA
WoL. ol SEPTEMBER-DECEMBER, 1952 Part 8
CONTENTS
Notes on the Genus Glena Hulst and
Descriptions of New Species. John L. Sperry
| Dural Blood Vessels of Salamanders.
PENT ITE AMUE ROTI Le ee OO ee
A Key to Nevada Fishes. Ira La Rivers........-....-+---+----------
Discussion of the Colonial Tube-Building
Polychaetous Annelid Dodecaceria
fistulicola Ehlers. Donald J. Reish..........2......-----1----0-----
A Water Cooler for Transporting
Heat Sensitive Animals, Especially Insects.
Sherwin F. Wood and Fae D. Wo008........2.+.------------------=
Issued December 31, 1952
Southern California
Academy of Sciences
OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS a
Dr. Louis C. Wheeler
Dr. Sherwin F. Wood
Mr. Russell S. Woglum
Dr. Howard R. Hill
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce
Dr. John A. Comstock
Mr. Lloyd M. Martin
Miss Bonnie Templeton
Dr. A. Weir Bell
Dr. John A. Comstock
Dr. Howard R. Hill
Dr. Hildegarde Howard
Dr. William L. Lloyd
Dr. H. J. Andrews
Dr. J. Stanley Brode
Mr. Fred E. Burlew
Dr. John S. Garth
Miss Bonnie Templeton
SCIENCE SECTIONS
Section of Agricultural Sciences
Mr. Claude A. Richards, Chairman
Anthropological Section
Miss Ruth Simpson, Chairman
Botanical Section
Dr. George R. Johnstone, Chairman
Section of Earth Sciences
Dr. Hildegarde Howard, Chairman
STANDING COMMITTEES
Finance
Dr. W. Dwight Pierce, Chairman
Sherwin F. Wood, Auditor
Mr. Kenneth E. Stager
Dr. John A. Comstock
Mr. Russell S. Woglum
Program
Dr. Louis C. Wheeler, Chairman
Hospitality
Dr. Howard R. Hill, Chairman
OFFICE OF THE ACADEMY
Dr. SherwinF. Wood |
ADVISORY BOARD
( bs _—
a ' a
im
annem n nee
Dr. Haale King
Mr. Carroll Lang
Dr. Irving Rehman
Dr Re He Swift
Section of H ealth and Sanitatio
Dr. Windell D. Gregg, Chai
Section of Junior | Scientists me 7
Miss Gretchen | Sibley, Chairman a
Section of Physical Sciences =
Dr. Homer P. King, Chairman 7
Section of Zoological Sciences i
Dr. Ross Hardy, Chairman
Publication
Dr. John A. Conistoele Cheeni ‘s
Dr. Hildegarde Howard c?
Dr. A. Weir Bell — Be 4} :
Dr. Philip A. Munz " =
Conservation a
Mr. Carroll Lang, Chairman f +
M embership
Dr. Sherman F. pees ‘Chait
Library
Dr. Howard R. Hi, Chairma m
Los Angeles County Museum, Exposition Park, Los Angeles 7, California a
Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES
Lepidoptera, Geometridae
By Joun L. Sperry, Riverside, California
In 1874, 6th Report Peabody Acad. Sci., 51, Packard described
a Cleorid species from Texas (Belfrage) naming it quinqueli-
nearia and placing it in the genus Cymatophora Hubner. This
species, not too common in collections, has given trouble to the
systematists ever since.
Several years ago the author received, from North Texas, two
males which proved, on comparison with the type in the Museum
of Comparative Zoology, to be this species. Since my friend, Mr.
L. H. Bridwell, who furnished the specimens, has gone to his
reward and it seems unlikely that more material will be available
to the author from that vicinity, the author feels that it may be
worth while to discuss a part of the genus Glena and clarify the
situation insofar as his knowledge allows. To this end the author
has made bold to ask his friends for the loan of material and here
wishes to thank Mr. Carl W. Kirkwood of Summerland, Calif.,
Dr. J. F. Gates Clarke of the National Museum, Dr. Eugene Mun-
roe of the Canadian National Museum, Dr. Frederick H. Rindge
of the American Museum of Natural History, Rev. Edward
Guedet and Dr. Edward S. Ross of the California Academy of
Sciences, Mr. Lloyd Martin of the Los Angeles County Museum,
Mr. Chester A. Thomas of Zion and Bryce National Parks and my
good friend Mr. Louis Schellbach of Grand Canyon National
Park for their kindness in the loan of specimens and slides which
has made this study profitable.
Among the specimens before the author there are five separate
groups, three of which are certainly species, the other two being
very close to quinquelinearia, separable certainly, but having
genitalia which are almost identical. It is possible that interpunc-
tata B. & McD. and the smaller form from the Santa Rita Mts.
are environmental forms of quinquelinearia, however without
definite proof it becomes a matter of personal opinion and the
author has always hesitated to place close relatives in the same
species without definite proof that there they belong. To do so
would be to state, in substance that these rather readily separable
insects will mate freely, the Texas population with the Arizona,
that the females will lay fertile eggs and that the imagos resultant
from the cross matings will be fertile. The author does not have
sufficient information to make this statement and prefers to
separate the insects until breeding experiments may prove the
7
BuLLeETIN, So. CaLur. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
separation erroneous, on the assumption, purely a personal opin-
ion, that a larger number of separable species makes for less con-
fusion than a smaller number of variable species determinable
only by dissection, although it really makes little difference
whether complete information changes a listed form to a species
or a species to a form.
Glena quinquelinearia Packard
The author will not repeat the catalog names, this was done in
an entirely satisfactory manner by McDunnough (Studies in
N. Am. Cleorini, Bull. 18, Ent. Branch, Dept. of Agriculture, Dom.
of Canada, 1920) suffice it to say that the drawing in Packard’s
Monograph is good, that the photograph in the B. & McD. Con-
tributions III,(4) Pl. XXV Fig. 8 and the genitalia P. XXX fig. 4
do not represent this species, as noted by McDunnough (Can.
Ent. LXXVII,66). Packard’s description is good, the ground color
is white but the species seems dark because of the heavy shading
bands basad of the t.a. line and distad of the t.p. on the primaries;
the females are lighter than the males. It is a small species with
an average expanse of 25 mm. The habitat is central Texas.
Glena interpunctata B. & McD.
This species is separable from quinquelinearia by the even,
smoky-gray ground color of the wings and the lack of the black
and white banding dorsally on the abdominal segments; there is
little shading along the lines or in the subterminal areas of the
wings, the discal spots are usually but not always absent or greatly
reduced. There is a constant though slight genitalic difference
which will be mentioned later. It is a larger insect than quin-
quelinearia expanding from 30 to 32 mm. The habitat is the
south-eastern part of Arizona.
Glena kirkwoodaria var. n
In the Santa Rita Mts. of Southern Arizona flies another mem-
ber of the group; it is probably a variety of interpunctata, differ-
ing in its smaller size (25-26 mm) the darker, slate-gray ground
color, the straighter lines with the median merely indicated or
wanting entirely and the presence of distinct discal dots on both
wings.
Holotype ¢ Madera Canyon, Santa Rita Mts., Arizona Aug.
2, 1947, Comstock and Martin collectors and in the Sperry Col-
lection.
Allotype 2 same locality and collectors, July 19, 1947 and in
the Los Angeles County Museum.
Paratypes 4 females same locality and collectors, July 20 to
25, 1947, May 7, 1948 and Aug. 29, 1950 Hill; 1 2 N. of Payson,
Ariz. 7.24.51, Henne and 1 2 Madera Canyon, Ariz. Kirkwood &
Ried, July 15, 1951 and in the collections Henne, Kirkwood and
Sperry.
72
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol} bi) Bart 3, 1952
It gives me pleasure to name this fine insect in honor of my
friend Carl W. Kirkwood, of Summerland, California, able collec-
tor and student of the Lepidoptera, with a consuming desire to
know more and yet more about the insects which he studies. May
he have many years of fruitful work with the insects of the
southwest.
Glena mcdunnougharia sp. n
This is the species pictured by Barnes & McDunnough, 1917,
Contributions to Nat. Hist. Lep. III (4) Pl. XXV f. 8, but not the
genitalia Pl. XXX f. 4; the photograph is excellent and but little
can be added in way of description.
Palpi are short, fuscous; front brown with a gray streak low
on the face; vertex and antennal shaft white; pectinations light
tan from a dark base; collar dark fuscous; thorax white with
Heckings of gray; abdomen gray-white, banded distally on each
segment with a narrow black band edged with white.
Legs light tan. Ground color of the wings white, t.a. line
distinct, from % out on inner margin goes diagonally outward to
the cell where it disappears, median line light from % paralleling
the t.p. line to vein 5; t.p. line heavy, from % out diagonally to
vein 6 thence curving sharply back to costa, from vein 6 to costa
merely indicated, sometimes wanting. Shading of the t.a. line
basad and the t.p. line distad is a light tan brown. There is an
irregular s.t. shade turning outward between veins 6 and 7 and
deepening into a distinct dash at the outer margin. Terminal line
distinct, continuous, fringes gray-white with a median, darker
shade. Discal dots usually not present or minute, occasionally
strong.
Secondaries have t.a. line broad, diffuse, from .4 out on inner
margin straight to median fold; t.p. line curving slightly outward
to vein 6 starting % out on inner margin. Shadings are, a light
fuscous, following t.p. line, a darker subterminal and _ lighter
terminal shade. Terminal line, fringes and discal dots as in pri-
maries. Beneath both wings unicolorous light gray. Expanse 4
29 mm. 2 32. mm.
Holotype ¢ Granite Wells, San Bernardino Co., California
May 24, 1939 Grace H. and John L. Sperry collectors and in the
Sperry Collection.
Allotype ° Same locality and collectors May 25, 1939 and in
the Sperry collection.
Paratypes 18 ¢, same data May 24 and 25, 1939; 1 ¢ Todd's
Lodge, Oak Creek Canyon, Arizona, June 12, 1941, Grace H. and
John L. Sperry; 1 2 same data June 15, 1942; 1 2 Peach Springs,
Arizona, May 29, 1934, Grace H. and John L. Sperry; 1 ? Bryce
Canyon, Utah, July 19, 1949, C. A. Thomas, coll.; 1 2 South Rim,
Grand Canyon, Ariz., June 16, 1941, Louis Schellbach, coll.; 2 4
Ibanpah Mts., Calif., April 29, 1939; 1 ¢ Dividend, Utah, July 1,
73
BuLLeTIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
Tom Spalding; 1 ¢ White Mts., Ariz., May 25, 1934; 1 6 Géila-
Pinal Co. line, Ariz., June 15-20, 1925, O. C. Poling, 1 ¢ 50 mi.
N: of Eureka, Nev., June 21, 1934, J. A. Comstock, 2 ¢ 1 2?
Grace H. and John L. Sperry, from Granite Wells, Calif., May
25, 1939, Dennison, Ariz., May 28, 1934, and Fairview, Ariz.,
July 8, 1985; 1 ¢ Cajon Pass, Calif., Apr. 20, 1939, Guedet;
a) Gund Given Ariz., July, 1931, R. Williamson and 2 8 South
Rim of same, June 14 and 19, 1941, Louis Schellbach and in the
Grand Canyon Museum collection; also the following specimens
in the National Museum collection, 1 3 Bellevue, Wash. Co.,
Utah, 25-6-17, 1 2 same data, July 10, 1917; 1 3, 1 9 Paradise,
Cochise Co., Ariz., ney 8-30, coll. Barnes; 3 ¢ Glenwood Springs,
Colo., June 16-30; 1 2 Jemez Springs, N. M., June, 1916,
coll. Barnes and 1 é isicerton! Utah, 6-6-1913, Tom Spalding;
2 ¢ Eureka, Utah, June 12-14, 1909, Tom Spalding.
These are in the collections of the National Museum, Ameri-
can Museum of Natural History, Los Angeles County Museum,
California Academy of Sciences, Canadian National Museum,
British Museum, French National Museum, Grand Canyon Park
Museum, Bryce Canyon Museum and collection Sperry.
The best distinguishing characters of this species are the
continuous terminal line and the white expanse of the wings.
Since Dr. McDunnough has done most of the preliminary
work in this group of the Geometridae it seems fitting that this
species, the finest of the Glenas, should bear his name. It gives
me fond pleasure to name this beautiful insect for one more
largely responsible for our present knowledge of the North Amer-
ican Geometridae than is any other entomologist, our guide upon
the labyrinthine paths of this difficult family and counselor when
the way becomes hard, my friend Jim.
Glena thomasaria sp. n.
There is still another member of this group found through
northern Arizona and New Mexico and southern Utah. The size,
ground color and arrangement of the lines of the wings are nearly
as in the preceding species with the following distinct differences:
the median line on the primaries starts at the inner margin touch-
ing the t.p. line, diverges slightly as it crosses the wing to the
cell, thence turns sharply away from the t.p. line to the costa.
This line is heavier than in any other member of the group, being
about as dark and wide as the t.p. line, with which it makes a
narrow, irregular V.
On the secondaries the t.a. line is distinct and broad, curving
evenly from inner margin almost to costa. The terminal line is
made up of dots between the veins from 2 to 7. Discal dot wanting
or lost in the median line of primaries wanting or minute in
74
BULLETIN, So. CALtir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Voli si Bart Blo 52
secondaries. Fringes white. The male genitalia are pictured in
the Barnes & McDunnough Contributions, 1917, Vol. III, No. 4
Pl. XXX, fig. 4.
Holotype é South Fork of Little Colorado River, White Mts.,
Ariz., June 25, 1947, Grace H. and John L. Sperry, collectors,
and in the Sperry collection.
Allotype 2 Chavez, N. M., July 2, 1935, Grace H. and John L.
Sperry, collectors, and in the Sperry collection.
Paratypes, 1 ¢ same collectors, South Fork of Little Colorado
River, Ariz., June 25, 1947; 3 6 Vernon, Apache Co., Ariz., July,
1936, Guedet Coll.; 1 ¢ Grand Canyon, Ariz., July, 1931, R.
Williamson, coll., 1 ¢ N. Rim of same, July 12, 1939, Schellbach;
1 ¢ Simpson's Ranch, 5 miles east of La Jara, Sandoval Co., New
Mexico, July 20, 1950, T. Cohn, P. Boone and M. Cazier; 2 2
Bryce Canyon, Utah, July 14, 1949, C. A. Thomas, coll.; 2 2
South Fork of Little Colorado River, White Mts., Ariz., June
20-25, 1947, Grace H. and John L. Sperry, collectors. These are
in the U. S. National Museum, Am. Museum of Nat. History,
Canadian National Museum, Los Angeles County Museum, Cali-
fornia Acad. of Sciences, Bryce and Grand Canyon Museums and
collection Sperry.
It gives me great pleasure to name this interesting species in
honor of Mr. Chester A. Thomas of Zion and Bryce National
Parks, an excellent entomologist in his own right and a friend of
long standing to Grace and the author, he has done much to
further the knowledge of the New Mexican and Southern Utah
Geometridae.
This completes the quinquelinearia complex as represented
in the author's collection, although there are at least two South
American species which undoubtedly belong in this genus. There
is yet another species which, coming from North Texas and resem-
bling pexata Swett belongs in the genus.
Glena minor sp. n.
Palpi short, 1% times the diameter of the eye, dark fuscous
brown, flecked with white at the tips, thin scaled. Front black-
brown with white line low on the face, antennae fuscous, the
pectinations black at the base, vertex, collar, thorax white, flecked
with fuscous scales, abdomen same, with dorsal fuscous bands
distally on each segment. Legs outwardly dark gray-brown, in-
wardly creamy white. The male hind tibia is swollen, with strong
hair pencil. Both wings are heavily irrorate with fuscous gray
atoms, gathered into shade bands beyond the t.p. lines.
Primaries: there are three broken indefinite lines starting at
black spots on the costa. T. a. line from % out goes at right angles
to costa to cell, thence curving back past the outer edge of the
fovea in the 4 to inner margin '/, out. Median line merely indi-
cated by the largest costal spot at nearly %, a spot at junction of
75
BuLLetin, So. Canim. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 8, 1952
cell and vein 2 and a diffuse line from cell to inner margin at °/,.
T.p. line from spot on costa st % weak or nearly wanting except on
the veins where it is distinctly toothed outwardly, subparallel to
outer margin goes to inner margin at %; three irregular shade
bands in subterminal area, darkest opposite the cell, no lines
evident; tiny terminal spots between the veins from 1 to 8 in 4,
in 2 these spots are heavy. Fringe gray, discal dash obscure, in
median line.
Secondaries: t.a. line a broad, irregular curved band from }
on costa to /; out on inner margin; t.p. better developed than on
primaries, heavily toothed on the veins, subparallel to outer mar-
gin *% out, the three subterminal shades also are heavier than on
primaries as are also the terminal triangular dots between the
veins. Fringe as in primaries. Discal spot distinct.
Beneath fuscous gray, with discal spots evident, secondaries
lighter than primaries. Expanse ¢ 27 to 30 mm. female 28 mm.
to 30 mm.
Holotype ¢ Montague Co., Texas, May 12, 1941, L. H. Brid-
well, coll. and in the Sperry collection.
Allotype 2 same locality and collector, Sept. 30, 1940 and in
the Sperry collection.
Paratypes 1 6 Forestburg, Texas, July 15, 1941, L. H. Brid-
well coll. 1 2 same data, Aug. 20, 1941; 1 2 Montague Co., Tex.,
June 22, 1940; 1 2 Montague Co., Tex., Aug. 28, 1940, all collected
yale H. Bridwell. 1 é Hinton, Okla., July 25, 1937, Standish-
Kaiser; 1 2 Montague Co., Tex. Aug. 28, 1940, L. H. Bridwell,
in the U. S. and Canadian National Museums.
This species is probably closest to pexata Swett. It is consid-
erably smaller and much more heavily shaded. The ground color
of the wings is darker both above and below. The 2 genitalia
separate the species readily.
It gives me great pleasure to name this fine Glena in honor
and in fond memory of my friend, Arthur Jacob Minor, 1886-1950,
student of the natural sciences, philosopher, mathematician with-
out a peer and friend to all the little creatures of the woods and
fields. Probably my best friends, he has gone to his reward and in
passing has left to me, until death do us part, his dearest treasure.
The ¢ genitalia in the quinquelinearia group are relatively
simple, the uncus is short, hollow, truncated, with the edges
seeming to form a notch. The tegumen is broad, the costal arm of
the valve is finger-like, curved and covered, for over % of its
length from apex to base, with stiff, colorless bristles. The sacculus
is produced in a flat, chitinized pencil to nearly the length of the
costal finger, the tip swollen roughly spoon shaped and armed
with dark curved spines. The aedeagus is short and blunt, rather
broad and straight and the vesica is armed with a brush of many
fine short bristles and a long heavy, hollow spine, curved back
76
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
upon itself at the open base. This latter part of the organ is
deciduous and so not too useful as a diagnostic character.
In quinquelinearia the arm of the sacculus reaches about %
of the way to the tip of the costal finger, the spoon-like sacculus
tip is heavily armed with perhaps 20 long, dark, curved spines
curving to a point at the apex; the gnathos is equilaterally trian-
gular, toothed on the rounded edge with tiny cornuti and rough-
ened dorsally. The base of the costa makes a chitinous point where
the transtilla joins. The brush of spines on the vesica are heavy
and dark.
In interpunctata B. and McD. the sacculus arm reaches to
within % of the way to the tip of the costal finger, the spoon-like
end is armed with about twice the number of spines which are
much shorter than those of the preceding species. The gnathos
is narrower with a dorsal ridge, the costa runs smoothly into the
transtilla and the brush of bristles on the vesica is weak.
In kirkwoodaria sp. n. the brush of bristles on the vesica is
heavier than in interpunctata otherwise the ¢ genitalia is much
like interpunctata.
In thomasaria sp. n. the whole organ is more heavily chitinized
and narrower than the others and the sacculus arm is heavily
spined for most of its length. This is pictured in the B. and McD.
contributions, III (4) Pl. XXX f. 4.
The ¢ genitalia are similar with reasonably good separating
characteristics throughout this group. In quinquelinearia the 8th
segment is sclerotized, the ostium almost membranous, ductus
bursae short, tripling in width dorsally as it enters the bursa,
thence slightly expanding for a distance of about 7 times this
diameter, thence angling ventrally and expanding into the bursa
proper.
The organ looks exactly like a sock with heel and toe inflated,
the signum in the heel. The ductus seminalis is small, rising ven-
trally from the bursa close to the junction with the ductus bursae.
In quinquelinearia the 8th segment has two narrow, smooth
edged, ribbon-like patches of darker schlerotization, the ostium’s
semicircular plate is so weak it is scarcely discernible, the signum
is a heavy, half-moon shaped, chitinous pocket, heavily spined
inwardly, with perhaps 18 spines. The sock leg is broad and the
foot long.
In interpunctata the 8th segment is heavily chitinized, the
ribbon is broader and the edges thereof irregular, the signum is
more heavily spined with from 23 to 25 spines, the sock leg is
narrowed below the ductus bursae and the foot is short with the
toe shrunk well back toward the instep.
In kirkwoodaria the ostium is membranous, the signum nar-
rower but still heavy, otherwise as in interpunctata.
In mcdunnougharia the 8th segment is lightly chitinized, the
ostium membranous, the signum very short, rectangular and
id,
BuLtLetin, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51,-Part 3, 1952
chunky with a few heavy spines, perhaps 8 or 10, the sock has a
well developed heel and an extended toe, the leg is narrow.
— In thomasaria the 8th segment has two broad, ovate chitinous
patches, the ostium is membranous, the ductus likewise and short,
the bursa expanding rapidly below into an ovate organ with no
trace of the sock shape. The signum is large and heavy, with long
spines, the ductus seminalis rises ventrally from the bursa copula-
trix, far removed from the ductus bursae and is large, at least five
times the diameter of the other members of the group.
In the case of pexata and minor the author is not fortunate
enough to possess a ¢ specimen of pexata which seems to be
rather a rare specimen in collections, however, from the photo-
graph in McDunnough’s studies in N. Am. Cleoriinae Pl. III f. 11
it would seem that in minor the sacculus arm is longer and more
heavily spined both at tip and centrally, that the aedeagus in
minor is narrower and the long spine which is bent back upon
itself is about twice as long and heavy in pexata as it is in minor.
In the female genitalia there are, on either side of the vaginal
opening, sack- like organs, in pexata oval and heavily and darkly
chitinized inwardly, in minor these are elongate and lightly chiti-
nized. In pexata the signum is heavily spined, large and almost
circular, in minor this organ is narrow, much smaller, shaped like
a peach stone and heavily spined.
GLENA, Hulst
Wy
minor, 8p ° The
Plate 15
All figures a ; approximately # 3 natural size
78
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
DURAL BLOOD VESSELS OF SALAMANDERS
By WiLu1aM A. Hinton
(Department of Zoology, Pomona College)
Gaupp 99 distinguishes three brain membranes in the Frog:
1. An outer periosteal or parietal dura closely applied to the bony
walls inclosing brain and spinal cord.
2. A strong fibrous membrane, the “visceral dura” separated from
the former by an interdural space with the endolymphatic sacs,
hypophysis and part of the paraphysis within this space.
3. The pia-arachnoid which is closely applied to the brain and
spinal cord and bearing many blood vessels.
One of the earliest papers on the meninges and their blood
vessels in salamanders was by Rex ’92 on Triton and Salamandra.
Gage 93, in the brain of Diemyctylus (Triturus) viridescens
speaks of three brain membranes, the pia, arachnoid and dura.
The last lines the cranial cavity and sends off—“an almost complete
investment for the supraplexus, a somewhat partial one for the
hypophysis; filling a large space caudad of the more spongy part
of the metaplexus; surrounding the protrusion of the endolym-
phatic sacs into the cranial cavity and surrounding their ganglia.”
According to Gage the grosser vascular supply to the brain of
Triton as given by Rex 92, agrees with Diemyctylus.
The meninges of Necturus according to Kingsbury 95 and Am-
bystoma according to Herrick 35 are much as described by Gage.
O'Neill 98, describes two membranes in Salamandra, a dura mater
in two layers and a primary vascular coat. The dura on the out-
side is largely a tough connective tissue membrane which splits
in a few places to form two layers surrounding interdural spaces.
The outer layer next the bones of skull and spinal cord is the peri-
osteal layer, the inner nearer to the brain is the neural layer. The
inner or primary vascular coat with its blood vessels corresponds
to the pia as usually described. Sterzi 01 in Salamandra and Molge
recognizes a periosteal membrane and a menix primitiva, with no
differentiation of dura. In Ambystoma Herrick ‘35 and °48 de-
scribes a well-defined pachymenix externally of the much more
delicate pia-arachnoid. He follows Kappers °25, who applies the
word “dura” only to the inner visceral or neural dura of Gaup.
This membrane, as Herrick found for Ambystoma is unevenly de-
veloped over parts of the central nervous system of salamanders.
It quite completely covers the endolymphatic sacs, nodus vascu-
losus and hypophysis. Apparently the only connection with the
outer or peritoneal membrane is where the space is bridged by
nerve roots or blood vessels. This inner dura is frequently joined
to the arachnoid-pia by connective tissue strands. The spinal cord
is also usually quite definitely inclosed in a tough dural membrane.
Sometimes this is closely applied to the pia, in others it loosely
incloses it—a condition which may be partly due to differences
of preparation, but not all.
19
BuLLeTIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
In a general study of the vascular supply to the brains of tailed
\mphibia, it was found that the superficial or dural vessels were
frequently either not seen at all or poorly demonstrated. Injected
preparations often left them unaffected or only partially shown.
So erratic was the appearance of these superficial vessels of brain
and spinal cord that one might almost conclude that there was
great individual variation. To some degree this is true but much
of the differences encountered are due to incomplete injections
and the ease with which these outer membranes may be injured
in dissections. Often times natural injections gave a clearer
picture than any other. It was found also that certain forms had
many blood vessels outlined with dark pigment, sometimes the
arteries were sharply outlined at other times the veins.
Most salamanders are largely nocturnal in their habits and
usually in these which avoid the light but little pigment is de-
veloped in the walls of the blood vessels. Some members of the
genus Ambystoma seem less nocturnal than many—especially A.
longidactylum where even the internal arteries are well pig-
mented and easily followed. Triturus, especially the eastern form
T. viridescens is more diurnal. In it the dural vessels, especially
the veins, are well outlined.
The two cerebral hemispheres are both inclosed in a common
sheath of the inner dural membrane which in most parts of brain
and cord are only lightly connected with the pia beneath. At
several places the membranes and blood vessels are in close asso-
ciation — at the nodus vasculosus and in the dorsal region of the
fourth ventricle. At other places a few small vessels run from one
level of membrane to another — probably a few arteries of small
INDEX TO FIGURES
NV—nodus vasculosus, SO—sinus obliquus, JS—jugular sinus.
Plate 16. Brain of Triturus torosus. 1. ventral view. 2. dorsal view. Dural
vessels shown, network of the nodus vasculosus and sacculus endolym-
phaticus and plexus of the fourth ventricle somewhat diagramatic. With
the exception of these areas no vessels are shown but those of the true or
inner layer of the dura.
Plate 17. 1. Brain of Triturus viridescens from below showing dural vessels.
2. Brain of T. viridescens from above showing only dural vessels except
at the nodus vasculosus and region of the sacculus endolymphaticus and
region of the fourth ventricle. 3. A part of the spinal cord of Salamandra,
dorsal side. The central dark line is a vessel in the deeper membranes, the
rest are dural vessels. 4. A part of the spinal cord of Salamandra, ventral
view showing large lateral dural veins and central deeper artery.
Plate 18. 1. Dural vessels on the dorsal side of the cerebral hemispheres of
Cryptobranchus. 2. Superficial doral or periosteal vessels at the junction
of vertebrae. 3. Periosteal dural layer of blood vessels in the region of two
adjacent vertebrae. A view looking down upon the floor of the vertebral
cavity after removal of the spinal cord. 4. Similar view as the last at the
base of the brain showing blood vessels in the periosteal layer of the dura.
80
BuLLetin, So. Catur. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
size enter the dura from both the pia and from the peritoneal or
outer layer of the pia. Most of the larger vessels which break up
into coarse networks in the dura are veins. One or several large
veins from the coarse network on the ventral side of the brain
pass about to the dorsal side and enter the cephalic end of the
nodus vasculosus. From here the blood reaches the region of the
fourth ventricle to leave the skull by way of the jugular sinus on
each side. Small veins enter the chorioid plexus of the fourth
ventnclé from the medulla and spinal cord not usually by any
large vessels of the dura but from a coarse network. Plate 16; 1 and
2. Plate 17; 1 and 2. Plate 18; 1.
Ventrally in some but not in all, parallel veins near the ventral
margin of the spinal cord pass towards the medulla. Plate Me, 94.
These lar ger vessels so well marked in Triturus and Salamandra
are apparently not found in all salamanders. They are connected
to the chorioid plexus of the fourth ventricle by a few small vessels
but most of the blood from these many channels leaves the spinal
cord by way of paired almost segmental vessels. The dorsal side
of the spinal cord may or may not have a few large veins near
the middle line, but many have merely a network of rather small
vessels, or segmental extensions from below.
Roofe °35, In Ambystoma speaks of the drainage of the dura
from the spinal cord as chiefly into a ventral spinal vein — a condi-
tion which I have found in some but not in all. In the region of
the hypothalamus there are long anastomosing vessels between
the veins of the hemispheres and the plexus of the fourth ventricle.
According to Roofe in the dura, ventral to the hemispheres many
small irregular anastomosing loops are drained by laterally. placed
veins which run to the lateral processes of the saccus vasculosus.
He also mentions three medially placed veins which run from
the forward ventral surface of the dura in the region of the
cerebral hemispheres. Similar veins to these I have found to be
quite variable. A usual pattern was; one or several large veins
which enter the nodus vasculosus, along with deeper ones. These
large superficial channels receive numerous branches from both
the dorsal and the ventral sides of the cerebral hemispheres. The
nodus vasculosus by this means receives more blood than the
sinus obliquus or the saccus endolymphaticus.
The outer dural layer or so-called periosteal membrane has an
irregular network of blood vessels which are only slightly related
to the inner dural. In the dorsal spinal cord area these networks
may be especially developed at the junctions of vertebrae, the
arteries which supply the region coming from outside the verte-
brae. On the ventral side are extensive irregular networks, these
become especially marked under the base of the brain. Plate
18; 2-4.
BULLETIN, So. CaLir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
SOME CONCLUSIONS
1. It seems that Gaup’s suggestion of two layers of the dura
in amphibians is a valuable one, the outer being a periosteal mem-
brane, the inner a dense fibrous coat which may be quite vascular.
2. The development of these two layers apparently is differ-
ent in different forms, but the outer or periosteal layer is quite
distinct from the other both in form and position and probably
in function; the inner or true dura is related to the brain, the
outer to the bones.
Plate 17
83°
BuLLetin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
3. The general form of the dural vessels differs greatly but
a common appearance is to have one or two strong veins draining
both dorsal and ventral sides of the cephalic portion of the brain
into the nodus vasculosus.
4. The deep or true dural vessels of the spinal cord may
concentrate into a median vessel in some cases or there may be
parallel ventro-lateral vessels which run the length of the chord
with almost segmental exits along the spinal cord. In any case
much of the venous blood passes forward to join that of the
sinus jugularis.
5. The arterial supply to the inner or true dura is not marked.
MORE IMPORTANT REFERENCES
Dempster, W. T. 1930.
The morphology of the amphibian endolymphatic organs.
Jour. Morph., v. 50, pp. 71-126.
Gage, S. P. 1893.
The brain of Diemyctylus viridescens, from larval to adult life and compari-
sons with the brain of Amia and Petromyzon.
Wilder Quarter-Century Book, pp. 259-313, Ithaca, N. Y.
Gaupp, E. 1899.
Ecker und Wiedersheim’s Anatomie ses Frosches. Abt. 2, Auf. 2.
Braunschweig.
Kingsbury, B. F. 1895.
On the brain of Necturus maculatus. Jour. Comp. Neurol., v. 5, pp. 139-203.
Herrick, C. J. 1935.
The membranous parts of the brain, meninges and their blood vessels in
Amblystoma. Jour. Comp. Neurol. v. 61, pp. 297-346. -...........-......- 1948.
The brain of the tiger salamander. Univ. Chicago Press. O’Neill, H. M. 1898.
Roofe, P. G. 1935.
The endocranial blood vessels of Amblystoma tigrinum.
Jour. Comp. Neurol., vol. 61, pp. 257-293.
Sterzi, G. 1901.
Ricerche intoro all’anatomia comparata ed all’ontogenesi delle meningi e
considerazioni sulla filogenesi. Atti del Reale Instuto Veneto, vol. 60, pp.
1101-1372.
Bunterin, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
A KEY TO NEVADA FISHES
By Ina La Ktivers
University of Nevada, Reno
The following pages represent the fourth revision of a key to
the fishes of Nevada which the author first used for a class several
years ago. Few publications, taxonomic or otherwise, exist which
are concerned with the Nevada fauna, although the fishes of many
adjacent regions such as California, Utah and the Pacific North-
west have been comparatively well worked out. At the time the
first draft of the key was laid out, few specimens existed in the
University Biology museum with which to work, and heavy reli-
ance was place -d on the pertinent literature. Certain publications
have been indispensable in keying out Great Basin species:
Schultz, 1936 (Pacific Northwest); Hubbs, Hubbs & Miller, and
Miller, 1932-present (Nevada); Tanner, 1936-present (Utah,
Nevada ); and Curtis, 1949, Murphy, 1941, and Neale, 1931 (Cali-
fornia) are the most important of the available recent papers in
any consideration of the Nevada fish fauna. The definitive work of
Hubbs and Miller has been a greater contribution toward our
knowledge of the fishes of Nevada than any other single concerted
effort, and it is mainly through their activities that we now know
the fauna of the State so comparatively well.
In contrast to the recent poverty of the University Biology
museum in terms of Nevada fish specimens, some beginning has
been made toward a representative collection in the past three
years; largely through the efforts of Mr. Thomas J. Trelease, Jr.,
chief of the Nevada Fish and Game Commission’s Division of
Fisheries, and those of numerous University students, it is now
possible to find nearly every recorded Nevada species of fish in
the University collection.
The difficult and controversial problems involved in attempts
to stabilize common names of fishes will again be evident in some
of the names used in this paper. The recent checklist of Nevada
{shes (La Rivers & Trelease, 1952) was the first concerted attempt
to es‘ablish an official list of names for the State, but it was recog-
nized at the time that some of the names used were not appro-
priate or satisfactory for certain reasons. “Bonytail” is obviously
not a good designation for a genus in which some of the forms
have a pencil-shaped caudal peduncle (—“bonytail” ) while others
possess a short, thick caudal peduncle. In other cases, the current
desire to apply common names to subspecific entities often results
in such an involved and cumbersome terminology that nothing
but verbiage is achieved. Accordingly, some changes in the com-
mon names will be noted over those employed in the Nevada
56
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Voli ole Part '3)1952
checklist, and attempts to name many of the subspecies have
been abandoned.
Special thanks are due Dr. Robert R. Miller of the University
of Michigan for looking over and annotating the second and third
mimeographed drafts of the key and suggesting numerous im-
provements and additions from his considerable experience with,
and knowledge of, Nevada fishes. Whatever inaccuracies that
remain are attributable solely to the author.
Key To Nevapa Fisurs
Pelvic fins thoracic or jugular in position (i.e., moved forward
from their usual position near the anal fin), always pres-
ent, typically with 1 spinous and 5 soft rays each (re-
duced to 1 spinous and from 3 to 4 soft rays in Cottide );
AlitenOrmrays Oldorsal fin’spinous. iT
Pelvic fins abdominal in position, lacking entirely in some of the
Cyprinodontidz; no spinous rays in fins, except in catfish
andeimeroducedicarp and goldfish ==). a 10
lig Body lacking true scales, often covered with prickles
(Order Scleroperodea, Family COTTID; Lahontan,
Columbia and Bonneville drainage systems ); one species,
the Smooth Sculpin, with two Nevada subspecies...
nce seston ee (Cottus bairdi Girard 1850)__.2
—— Body uniformly covered with scales (Order Percomor-
phodea, Families PERCIDA® and CENTRARCHIDE;
all introduced, mostly from the eastern United States );
CHMMESIDE CLES Hor St nna hl ee ae elle Ts Pane 3
2(1). No spines (at most, only a tubercle or two) below single
spine at preopercular angle (Lahontan and Columbia
CWSUGIINS )) eeaket Nau SRS Faieenols peice amp sees eel oem ete alr 2
ee Cottus bairdi beldingi Eigenmann & Eigenmann 1891
—— One or two spines below the single spine at preopercular
aMclemenonnevilley system): eke eee
POE. Cottus bairdi semiscaber (Cope) 1871
3(1). Two dorsal fins present (Family PERCID:; introduced
into the West originally from the eastern U. S.); the
WelllowsPerch) 2! Perca flavescens (Mitchill) 1814
—— Only one dorsal fin present (in Micropterus, the Black-
bass, the dorsal fin has a deep-to-moderate notch between
the anterior spinous and the posterior soft portions )
(Family CENTRARCHID-®; all introduced); seven
SOS CHS aS aa ar Sr teat Eee ae ag Se eee oe +
4(3). Anal fin spines 5 or more in number (Crappie and Sacra-
mento Perch ) 2-0 eee 5
—— Anal fin spines 3 in number (Blackbass and Sunfish)...
87
BuLLeTIn, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
a9 HARD SPINES SOFT RAYS
é MUN hy, ZD>
,@ OPEN rales SPLIT none BB
|
CTOP [OF HEAD) FIN
BARBEL
PAI
MAXILLARY _ OR
CAUDAL
MANDIBLE -— FIN
PREOPERCLE-~—
BRANCHIOSTEGALS ~~
/ = ANAL
J PEGTORAL PELVIC N
PHARYNGEALS
FIN \
FIN \
\ —»
4 \ %
“SCALE (<=;
NOTCH =~
¢ : x
TEETH PAPILLAE =~
“HEEL THORACIC SUCKER
eee LOWER LIP
STANDARD LENGTH
|
Plate 19
5(4). Dorsal fin spines 12 to 13 in number; dorsal fin base much
longer than anal fin base; gillrakers short (introduced
from California); the Sacramento Perch...
i see oe a AS Archoplites interruptus (Girard) 1854
—— Dorsal fin spines 6-8; dorsal fin base subequal to anal fin
base (i.e., both about the same length); gillrakers long
and slender (introduced into the West from the eastern
U. S.); two species of Crappie (Genus Pomoxis )-........... 6
6(5). Length of dorsal fin base about equal to distance from
origin of dorsal fin (front end) to the eye; dorsal fin
spines usually 7 to 8 in number; mandible shorter than
pectoral fin; maxillary (including supramaxillary )
shorter, reaching posteriorly to about a vertical line from
posterior edge of eye pupil; body speckled; the Black
Crappie Pomoxis nigromaculatus (LeSueur ) 1829
—— Length of dorsal fin base much less than distance from |
origin of dorsal fin to eye; dorsal fin spines usually 6 in
number; mandible about equal in length to pectoral fin;
maxillary (including supramaxillary ) longer, extending
posteriorly to about a vertical line which is as near pos-
terior edge of eye as it is to posterior edge of eye pupil;
body banded: the White Crappie. =e
Fan SIE ok: SNe Pomoxis annularis Rafinesque 1815
88
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol bite Rantio lo 52
10.
11(10).
Scales small, 58 or more in the lateral line; body depth
about % of the standard length (originally introduced
from the Eastern U. S.); two species of Blackbass (Genus
Micropterus ) 8
Scales large, 53 or less in the lateral line; body depth usu-
ally about of standard length (originally introduced
from the East); two species of Sunfish (Genus
HUCHAC TIES) pee 2 8 a 133912 Ns eke lh 9
Dorsal fin almost divided into two fins, the shortest spine
of the notch less than half as long as the longest spine;
upper jaw (maxillary) extending behind hind margin of
eye in adults (measured with mouth closed); from 58 to
69 scales in the lateral line; cheek scales in 9 to 12 rows;
themmarcemouthy Blackbassis = 00s. ae eee
pars, a Micropterus salmoides (Lacépede ) 1802
Dorsal fin less deeply notched, the shortest spine at the
emargination being more than % the length of the longest
spine; upper jaw extending beyond middle of eye pupil
but not to hind margin of eye; from 68 to 81 scales in the
lateral line; cheek scales in 14 to 18 rows; the Smallmouth
Blackibass' =. Micropterus dolomieui Lacépede 1802
Pectoral fins short and rounded, their length about %
that of the standard length; mouth large, the upper jaw
or maxillary reaching behind front edge of eye (in adults,
the upper jaw is two or more times the width of the
eye ); usually lacking any definite isolated black spot on
dorsal fin rays, except for a darkening at ray bases; the
Green Sunfish ........... Lepomis cyanellus Rafinesque 1819
Pectoral fins long and pointed, their length about 4 that
of the standard length; mouth small, the maxillary not
reaching the front edge of eye (in adults, the maxillary
is but slightly longer than the width of the eye ); possesses
a prominent black isolated spot on dorsal fin rays; the
Bluegill Sunfish... Lepomis macrochirus Rafinesque 1819
Head with scales (Order Cyprinodontodea, Families
PCECILIID and CYPRINODONTID®; the former
introduced from southeastern U. S., the latter native );
seven species and three subspecies of Mieco
Sjommimedtielay eyavel Ptnyeyie) a eee ee
Blea] sept iva Somes eee 19
Anal fin of male unlike that of female, being modified
into a long, narrow reproductive organ; third anal ray
unbranched (Family PC*CILIIDAE; introduced from
HewSOULeast)pathe: Mosquitos hiss
Gambusia affinis (Baird & Girard) 1853
89
BULLETIN,
So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
\nal fin of male not modified as above for reproduction,
but similar in shape to that of the female; third anal ray
(counting the rudiments ) branched (Family CYPRINO-
DONTID AS; native to Nevada); six species and three
subspecies of Springfish and Pupfish Bale,
Jaw teeth tricuspid; pelvic fins present or absent (Sub-
family Cyprinodontine; southern Nevada); two species
and one subspecies of Pupfish (Genus Cyprinodon )_.13
Jaw teeth bicuspid or conical; pelvic fins always absent
(Subfamily Fundulinz; southern Nevada); four species
and two subspecies of Springfish (Genera Crenichthys
and Empetrichthys ) 2-2 nc re 15
Pelvic fins absent; caudal fin lobate; body dwarfed (con-
fined to Devil's Hole, Ash Meadows, Nye County,
Nevada, now a part of the Death Valley National Monu-
ment); the Devil Pupfish 2 ee
soiep gore es ~.......Cyprinodon diabolis Wales 1930
Pelvic fins usually present, occasionally lacking on one
side, rarely lacking on both sides; caudal fin rounded or
truncate; body generally normal-sized, rarely slightly
dwarfed (confined to the Amargosa River system of
Nevada and California); one species, the Amargosa
Pupfish, with two Nevada subspecies. (Cyprinodon ne-
vadensis Eigenmann & Eigenmann 1889)... 14
Pectoral fin rays usually 17 (this subspecies has, on the
average, more scales between the dorsal and pelvic fins,
around the peduncle, and around the body, and more
preopercular pores, than the following subspecies )
(found only in Ash Meadows, Nye County, Nevada)
ge ERAN Cyprinodon nevadensis pectoralis Miller 1948
Pectoral fin rays usually 16 (see top couplet) (found
only in Ash Meadows, Nye County, Nevada) __...............-..
rere es Cyprinodon nevadensis mionectes Miller 1948
. Jaw teeth bicuspid; jaws equal in length (i.e., the lower
jaw not projecting forward beyond the upper jaw ); lower
pharyngeal teeth conical; intestine markedly coiled
(White River region of southeastern Nevada); two spe-
cies of Springfish (Genus Crenichthys) __...-.-.------- 16
Jaw teeth conical; jaws unequal in length, the lower jaw
projecting forward beyond the upper jaw; lower pharyn-
geal teeth molarlike; intestine merely S-curved (south-
ern Nye County, Nevada); two species and two sub-
species of Springfish (Genus Empetrichthys )............ i
90
BULLETIN
, So. Cartier. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES - Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
16(15).
Lateral dark spots in two series (confined to isolated
remnants of the once continuous Pleistocene White River
system of eastern and southern Nevada); the White
River Springfish Crenichthys baileyi (Gilbert) 1893
Lateral dark spots in a single series (known only from
the Railroad Valley system directly west of White River );
themkarlnoad: Valley) springiish <5. see ee
neroetenk ie rr Crenichthys nevade Hubbs 1932
. Lateral scales usually 30 or less in number; downward
slope of snout quite marked so that mouth lies below
the plane of longitudinal section; (occurs only in Ash
Meadows, Nye County, Nevada); the Ash Meadows
Springfish Empetrichthys merriami Gilbert 1893
Lateral scales usually 31 or more; downward slope of
snout distinctly less abrupt so that the mouth lies ap-
proximately on the plane of longitudinal section (known
only from Pahrump Valley, Nye County, Nevada); one
species, the Pahrump Springfish, divided into three
subspecies (Empetrichthys latos Miller 1948 )....18
. Confined to Manse Ranch Spring, Pahrump Valley, Nye
(COTE, INI nee ee renee
Empetrichthys latos latos Miller 1948
Confined to Pahrump Ranch Spring, Pahrump Valley,
Nye County, Nevada
eee ee Empetrichthys latos pahrump Miller 1948
Confined to Raycraft Ranch Spring, Pahrump Valley,
Nye County, Nevada
Empetrichthys latos concavus Miller 1948
Body scaleless; dorsal and pectoral fins each with a strong
spine (Order Ostariophysodea, Family AMEIURID@;
all originally introduced from the Eastern U. S.);
AL syoverorves) Oi (CRNGtIS Oe eee een eee 20
Body with scales; none with pectoral fin spines, and only
two species with dorsal fin spines (Trout, Carp and
Suckers ) 23
Se ee el
. Tail fin forked; two species of catfish (Genus Ictalurus ) 21
Tail fin square or convex; two species of bullheads (Genus
Ameiurus ) 2
a eS re Se OSE DO On Deo San Re Sap OSS S SS Sa See ae SOUS tt
. Anal fin rays from 25 to 32 in number; the Channel Cat-
fish
Anal fin rays from 19 to
fish
Ictalurus punctatus (Rafinesque ) 1818
22 in number; the White Cat-
Ictalurus catus (Linneeus ) 1758
. Anal fin rays from 21 to 22 in number; pectoral fin spine
with strong barbs on posterior edge (appreciable in all
specimens except old adults by the following test — grasp
Oil
BULLETIN,
So. Cauire. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
the spine in the plane of the fin between thumb and fore-
finger, hold tightly, and pull outward; if the grasp holds,
it is this species ); inter-radial membranes of anal fin not
black; the Brown Bullhead... eee
Ameiurus nebulosus (LeSueur) 1819
Anal fin rays from 17 to 20 in number; pectoral spine
without strong, definite barbs on posterior edge; inter-
radial membranes of anal fin jet black; the Black Bull-
Hea etatt.tent Ae, Ameiurus melas (Rafinesque ) 1820
23(19). Two dorsal fins present, the second one a small, fleshy
24 (23).
26(25).
appendage near the tail; branchiostegal rays 6 or more
(Order Isospondylodea, Family SALMONIDAS; both
native and introduced species of Trout, Salmon and
Whitefish): nine: species....222). ee 24
Only a single dorsal fin present; branchiostegal rays 3
(Order Ostariophysodea, Families CYPRINIDA® and
CATOSTOMIDA#, Carp and Suckers, respectively;
mostly native species ); 25 species and 4 subspecies......32
Mouth small, the maxillary process not extending behind
the eye in adults, usually ending before or just at anterior
edge of eye; jaw teeth weak; scales in fewer than 105
oblique lines on sides (Subfamily Coregoninze of the
family SALMONID 26
Anal fin short, 9-12 rayed (rarely 13); gillrakers 20 or
less on first gill arch; branchiostegals 10-20; dorsal fin
black-spotted; 6 species of Trout and Charr, both native
and introduced (Genera Salmo and Salvelinus ) 27
Gillrakers comparatively short and few in number, 19-28
on the first gill arch (rarely 29) (originally ascended the
92
;
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Voly 5p Part 3, 1952)
28 (27).
tributaries of the Snake River in northeastern Nevada —
Owyhee, Salmon, Bruneau and Jarbridge rivers; planted
unsuccessfully in west-central Nevada ); the King Salmon
Mae ee. Oncorhynchus tshawytscha (Walbaum ) 1792
Gillrakers comparatively long and numerous, 30-50 in
number on the first gill arch (11 to 24 plus 20 to 26) (a
subspecies of the Red or Sockeye salmon, Oncorhynchus
nerka (Walbaum) 1792, introduced into Nevada from
the Pacific Northwest ); the Kokanee Red Salmon............
save Oncorhynchus nerka kennerlyi (Suckley ) 1861
Species with light spots, white or gray, on a darker back-
ground; often with red spots on sides; with over 190
scale rows crossing the lateral line; vomer boat-shaped,
the shaft depressed and without teeth (introduced and
native species); three species of Charr (Genus Salve-
EROS ) «AN NM NE ORC eo ee MRD Ra RERUN aR eb OE rene 28
Species with dark spots on a lighter background; fewer
than 190 scale rows crossing the lateral line; vomer flat,
its toothed surface plane, teeth on vomerian shaft in
alternating rows or in one staggered row, those on the
shaft placed directly on surface of bone, not on a free
crest (introduced and native species); three species of
Abou CGEMUSHOMLNIO)). on) alien 30
Vomer with a raised crest extending backward from the
head of the bone, this crest armed with strong teeth;
species gray-spotted, without red spots; fins not markedly
bright-edged; the tail prominently forked in adults( in-
troduced from the Great Lakes); the Lake Trout ...........
warts ee Salvelinus namaycush (Walbaum) 1792
Vomer without a raised crest which extends backward,
the head of the bone toothed; species red-spotted in life,
the lower fins with bright silver edgings; tail weakly
Home Cita naCL Unt Sieee ae wt Vs (Noda ee Le 29
. Back unspotted, but strongly mottled with olive and
black (ie., the spots run together creating a mottled
effect); dorsal and caudal fins finely mottled; body
stouter, the head heavy (introduced from the Eastern
lees) the astern, Brook Trout =
Salvelinus fontinalis (Mitchill) 1815
Back not mottled, but with light spots like those on the
sides of the body, only smaller and paler; dorsal and
caudal fins unmarked and clear; body slimmer (native to
the West Coast, ranging into the Nevada tributaries of
the Snake River); the Dolly Varden Trout..................
a eee Sea Salvelinus malma (Walbaum) 1792
93
BULLETIN,
30( 27).
31(80).
3223).
So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 8, 1952
Red dash of color on the dentary (between lower jaw and
isthmus) evident in life; no red spotting on flanks; verte-
bree from 58 to 62 in number (usually 60-61); dorsal rays
9-11 (usually 10); anal fin rays 9-11; maxillary process
in adults extending behind the eye, measuring about 1.6
to 2.25 into the head; hyoid teeth (those behind the patch
of teeth on tip of tongue) usually present, but few and
scattered (our one native trout, originally occurring
throughout the entire Lahontan drainage system, and
phenomenally abundant in the Pyramid-Truckee-Tahoe
system; a subspecies of the Cutthroat or Blackspotted
Trout, Salmo clarki Richardson 1836); (the Lahontan
Cutthroat Trout) 2.220020 22
Salmo clarki henshawi Gill & Jordan 1878
No red dash of color on the dentary present in life; dorsal
fin rays 10-13 (usually 11-12); maxillary process on adults
shorter; hyoid teeth always absent (two introduced
SPECIES) | 2.20.) gteciekese renee ee 51
Vertebree from 56 to 59 in number (usually 57-58 ); body
color brownish-yellow usually with a few red spots on
sides; spotting scarcely developed on tail (caudal) fin;
adipose fin of young individuals orange, without dark
margining or spotting (originally introduced from
Europe; two subspecies of the Brown Trout, Salmo trutta
fario and S. t. levenensis have been introduced and mixed
so completely in hatchery practice that they are no
longer distinguishable as separate entities in this coun-
try ); the Brown Trout... Salmo trutta Linneeus 1758
Vertebree 59-65 (usually 63); color gray-to-blue above,
the reddish lateral band usually but slightly interrupted
by faint parr marks on adults; no red spotting on flanks;
spotting well-developed on tail fin; adipose fin of young
specimens olive, with black margining or spotting (in-
troduced into Nevada from the Pacific Coast; many of
the numerous subspecies of the Rainbow Trout, Salmo
gairdneri Richardson 1836, have been mixed with each
other, and the Cutthroat, by hatchery practice); (the
Southcoast Rainbow rout) 2 2. eens
Hel ai eaten eit SNL Salmo gairdneri irideus Gibbons 1855
Origin (front end) of anal fin from 1% to 2% times as far
from tip of snout as from base of tail fin; tail fin rays 18
in number (16-branched), pharyngeal teeth numerous,
in a single row, arranged like the teeth of a comb; mouth
usually directed downward, excessively protractile and
suckerlike, with or without papillose lips (Family
94
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
33 (32).
35(34).
36(35).
CATOSTOMID4A®; all species native to the area); nine
MPEClesHOmOUCKerss. 8s Lee. 33
Origin of anal fin from 1 to 1% times as far from tip of
snout as from base of tail fin; tail fin rays usually 19
(17-branched ); pharyngeal teeth few, in from 1 to 3
rows, not comb-like; mouth not especially directed down-
ward, lacking papillose lips (Family CYPRINID/:; all
but two species native to the area); 16 species and 7
subspecies of Carp, Chub, Dace, Shiners, Minnows.
Cn Seer eS ie a, ek et aS NE eat: 4]
Nuchal (neck) region with a high, sharp-edged hump,
formed by the greatly enlarged and expanded interneural
vertebral spines; the hump is largest in adult specimens
(native to the Colorado River ); the Humpback Sucker...
se Xyrauchen texanus (Abbott) 1860
Nuchal region without such a sharp-edged hump, at most
merely with an upslope on the otherwise smoothly curv-
ing dorsal outline; various species of Suckers... 34
Mouth semi-terminal, the lower jaw oblique, the lips
thin, lacking papillae (known only from Pyramid Lake,
western Nevada, with related species in Klamath Lakes,
Oregon and Utah Lake, Utah ); the Cui-ui Sucker (Indian
pLOmunciation Koo-ee-you-ee))
sce cic a ae ae Chasmistes cujus Cope 1883
~~
Mouth inferior (i.e., opening directly downward), lips
thick with many papillae; common Suckers... 35
With a distinct notch at the corner of the mouth; edge
of jaw inside the lower lip with a hard cartilaginous
sheath; upper lip recurved; a small flap or “scale” of skin
present at the base of each pelvic fin (in axil) (native to
the area ); two species of Mountainsucker (Genus Panto-
SEOUS )) 3h eis ARG TEES La hee need Anantara ee se ere 36
Without a distinct notch at corner of mouth between
upper and lower lips, although occasionally a very slight
indentation occurs in some individuals; upper lip not re-
curved but nearly flat; edge of jaw inside lower lip with-
out a hard cartilaginous sheath, the sheath, if present,
being rather flexible; small flap or “scale” of skin absent
from pelvic fin axil (native to the area); five species
of common Suckers occurring in various parts of the
Creat Basine (Genus Catostomus == 37
Fontanelle (space between parietal and frontal head
bones) open; more than 35 scales in front of the dorsal
95
> hand +=
3/( 00).
38 (37 )
39(38).
40 (37).
41(32).
}
So. Carre. ACApEMY OF SCLENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
fin (common throughout the Lahontan drainage system
of western Nevada): the Lahontan Mountainsucker..
Pantosteus lahontan Rutter 1903
Fontanelle closed: less than 35 scales in front of dorsal
fin: (restricted to the relict White River system of east-
ern Nevada): the White River Mountainsucker........
Pantosteus intermedius (Tanner ) 1942
Body scales very small to moderately large, about 80 to
115 along the lateral line; three species of common
GUGK ELS co. ccocerecdeccececcceceest-eeaccwotecsaneoucssccles eae ee 38
Body scales very larg ge, . about 60-80 along the lateral line;
two species of common Suckers..............0 a. 40)
Lower lips not deeply incised, allowing several trans-
verse rows of papillee to cross the midline between the
incision and the forward edge of the lower jaw (lateral
scales 92-114, dorsal fin rays 11-14; found in the Columbia
River and its tributaries, including those in Nevada ); the
Columbia Finesscaled Sucker....Catostomus columbianus
ever Sa Whe Karat ate (Eigenmann & Eigenmann) 1893
Lower lips deeply incised, usually allowing room for
only one row of papille to cross the midline... 39
Dorsal fin rays from 10 to 12 in number; caudal peduncle
thick and broad, its least depth about 12 times into body
length; lips moderate-sized for the genus (the com-
monest sucker of the Lahontan system of western
Nevada); the Tahoe Sucker... EE
sae cee ees Catostomus tahoensis Gill & Jordan 1878
areal fin rays 13-15; caudal peduncle very slim and
narrow, its least depth about 16 times into body length;
lips conspicuously enlarged (occurs in the Colorado
River); the Flannelmouth Sucker.
prea ooo See Catostomus latipinnis Baird & Girard 1853
Dorsal fin rays from 12 to 15 in number, usually more
than 12; lobes of lower lip long and full, extending back
to below the nostrils, their length (from tip of upper
lip ) more than one-half the depth of the caudal peduncle
(Columbia-Snake rivers system); the Columbia Coarse-
scaled Sucker... Catostomus macrocheilus Girard 1856
Dorsal fin rays 11-13; lobes of lower lip short, not extend-
ing back to below nostrils, their length (from tip of upper
lip) about one-half, or less, the depth of the caudal
peduncle (occurs in tributaries of the Bonneville drain-
age system in extreme eastern Nevada); the Utah Sucker
Wer eane ees ee Catostomus ardens Jordan & Gilbert 1881
A spine, usually serrated, developed at front of the dorsal
and anal fins; dorsal fin very long, with more than 12
96
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Volmolem bantam lose
42(41).
43 (41).
. Species with only a single row of pharyngeal teeth, the
soft rays, the anterior rays much longer than posterior
rays; inner border of pelvic fins not adhering to the body
(two introduced Old World species) ..............0-..2---.- 42
A smooth double spine developed at front of dorsal fin,
the posterior half of the double spine smaller and fitting
into a longitudinal groove in the back of the larger an-
terior half; dorsal fin shorter, with less than 10 soft rays,
the anterior rays less distinctly set off from posterior rays
by length; inner border of pelvic fins adhering to the
body (two peculiar minnows of the Southwest)... 43
No spines of any kind developed in dersal or anal fins
(certain species occasionally have the first simple ray
of dorsal or anal fins or both hardened in very old indi-
viduals, but it is not a sharp spine); dorsal fin shorter,
with less than 12 soft rays; inner border of pelvic fins not
adhering to the body (majority of the, chub, dace
shiners, minnows, etc., comprising the family Cyprinide
in Nevada, all native); 12 species and 7 subspecies.__.44
Barbels in two pairs on upper jaw; more than 32 scales
in the lateral line (except in the “mirror” or “leather”
varieties ) (originally introduced into Europe from Asia,
and from Europe into America, and now widespread in
Nevada in suitable slow and standing water ); the Asiatic
(CB Dsl cisses ae eae ere Cyprinus carpio Linnaeus 1758
Barbels lacking; less than 30 scales in the lateral line (in-
troduced into both Europe and the Americas from Asia
as an ornamental species, and occasionally becomes
established in the wild, when it reverts to its original
Olive coloration); the common Goldfish............................
acne Carassius auratus (Linneeus) 1758
Maxillary barbels present; body scaleless (an occasional
individual has a few scales on the back and elsewhere )
(known from the Virgin River of extreme southern Ne-
vada, and elsewhere in the Colorado River system ); the
NVoundhne 2 Plagopterus argentissimus Cope 1874
Maxillary barbels absent; body covered with small scales
(occupies portions of the disrupted Pleistocene White
River system of eastern and southeastern Nevada); the
NiihitemRiversSpinedace 120 Mi) sc) te eile ee
Lepidomeda vittata Cope 1874
lesser or outer row never developed................-....-------.--- 45
Species with two rows of pharyngeal teeth, the lesser or
outer row occasionally lacking on one side.................. 48
Scales in the lateral line numbering 100 or more; pharyn-
geal teeth 6/6 or 6/5; intestine about 7 times the body
97
16( 45),
So. Cau. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 8, 1952
length (one collection in the vicinity of Reno, Nevada,
has contained an individual of the Sacramento Blackfish
and hybrids presumably between this species and the
Lahontan Tui Chub [Siphateles bicolor obesus|, the for-
mer apparently introduced with sunfish from the Sacra-
mento Valley during fish rescue work; original distribu-
tion, the Sacramento River system); the Sacramento
Blackfish Orthodon microlepidotus (Ayres) 1854
Scales in the lateral line 90 or less; pharyngeal teeth 5/5
or 5/4: intestine not more than 3 times the body
length soeddeesdad) icc 46
Horny sheaths covering the lips of both jaws (confined
to the type locality of Soldier Meadows, Humboldt
County, Nevada, in warm waters ); the Soldier Meadows
Dace _Eremichthys acros Hubbs & Miller 1948
- A horny sheath covering only the lip of the lower jaw
{7( 46).
48 (44).
(this horny sheath is an external covering not to be con-
fused with the small cartilaginous plate on the upper jaw
of this species, a plate which is not visible externally, but
is covered by the fleshy upper lip) (a member of the
Columbia River system fauna); the Chiselmouth............
_Acrocheilus alutaceum Agassiz & Pickering 1855
Horny sheaths lacking on both jaws..........022.- 47
Scales in the lateral line larger, less than 65; maxillary
smaller, not reaching anterior edge of eye; intestine
longer, about equal in length to the standard body
length; pharyngeal arch uniformly and smoothly rounded
in the vicinity of the “heel” (one of the commonest
forms in the Lahontan drainage system, a subspecies of
the more widespread Tui Chub, Siphateles bicolor
(Girard) 1856; (the Lahontan Tui Chub).............-.---....-
riage a a ele pe oie Siphateles bicolor obesus (Girard) 1856
Scales in the lateral line smaller, more than 65; maxillary
larger, reaching posteriorly to about the anterior edge of
the eye; intestine shorter, only about one-half the stand-
ard length; pharyngeal arch with a quite prominently
developed “heel” which breaks the otherwise smooth
contour of the pharyngeal bone (confined to the type
locality of Warm Springs, Clark County, Nevada, in
warm water); the Moapa Dace...) ===
saa at oe Moapa coriacea Hubbs & Miller 1948
A barbel usually present on the posterior angle of the
maxillary process, small but seldom obsolescent except
in very young individuals (up to 50% of specimens in
any given population may lack barbels, hence the neces-
sity of extensive collections in determining these forms )
98
BULLETIN,
So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
52(50).
. Pharyngeal teeth subconical,
Vols ple seantes el 9a2
(occurs over the entire state); 4 subspecies of the
Speckled Dace, Rhinichthys nubilus (Girard) 1856 in
Nevada
Barbels always lacking (remainder of the family Cypri-
FAUUGIES )) hk REPEL Seles aot tee Sa em ieee ON) ohne SEN 50
. Rivers Salmon, Jarbridge, Bruneau and Owyhee, the
Snake River tributaries of northeastern Nevada; (the
Smakemruver Speckled Dace )i. 2.) sai ee eae
PMR 0 Rhinichthys nubilus carringtoni (Cope) 1871
Rivers Humboldt, Truckee, Carson, Walker and asso-
ciated lakes (— Lahontan system) of western Nevada;
(ies ahontany Speckled; Dace): ees ee
ee Rhinichthys nubilus robustus (Rutter) 1903
Amargosa River system of southwestern Nevada — south-
eastern California; (the Amargosa Speckled Dace )........
2) Rhinichthys nubilus nevadensis Gilbert 1893
White River system of eastern and southeastern Nevada;
GlemVViniteuiiver: Speckled Dace) = a1) =o eee
“tape ea re Rhinichthys nubilus velifer Gilbert 1893
scarcely hooked, sharp-
edged, the lower limb of the pharyngeal bone greatly
elongated; body long and pike-like (Genus Ptycho-
CMOULS,) i Le LAN A NRE A OK Ns Insel ee oll
Pharyngeal teeth compressed, close-set, strongly hooked;
pharyngeal bone of the usual form; body not elongated
mG, Os] EA aT CESS aE aa a Veter eee Oa 52
. Scales in the lateral line numbering from 73 to 86 (occurs
in the Columbia River system ); the Columbia Squawfish
Sie rn Ptychocheilus oregonense (Richardson) 1836
Scales in the lateral line numbering about 90 (a member
of the Colorado River system); the Colorado Squawfish
oct cL ie eee Ptychocheilus lucius Girard 1856
An acessory “scale” or flap of skin present in the axil
(base) of the pelvic fin; caudal peduncle short and rela-
tively stout, from 10-11 times into body length; sides
with a deep orange-to-red broad band in adults of both
sexes (native to the area); two species of Redshiners
(@emuswhichardsonius) ii eye ee ee eee 53
No accessory “scale” or flap of skin present in pelvic fin
axil; caudal peduncle varying from about the proportions
of Richardsonius to a slender, pencil-like structure:
adults without the above coloration (native to the area );
iyouspecies Of Gila (Genus) Gila) 55
. Rays of anal fin numbering from 8 to 9, rarely 10; body
comparatively slender (Lahontan drainage system ); the
ws)
So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
Lahontan Redshiner ....1......0....0-0.42020-:4. fistulicola Ehlers. Hartman, 1944, Allan Hancock Pacific
Exped., vol. 10, p. 262. Tomales Point, Calif.
D. pacifico (Fewkes ). Rioja, 1944, Am. Inst. Biol. Mexico, vol. 15,
pp. 143-4. Guaymas, Mexico.
D. fistulicola Ehlers. Hartman and Reish, 1950, Oregon State
Coll., Monograph Ser. p. 34. Coos Bay, Oregon.
D. fistulicola (Fewkes). Berkeley and Berkeley, 1952, Canadian
Pacific Fauna. 9b(2) Polychaeta Sedentaria, p. 33.
Material examined. — Fossil: “Serpula” saxistructoris Howell
and Mason, holotype (Princeton University Paleontological Col-
lections no. 42821), from Pleistocene at Dead Man’s Island, San
Pedro, Calif., and Dodecaceria fistulicola Ehlers (University of
Southern California Paleontological Collections no. 785, also in
the Allan Hancock Foundation annelid collections ) from Upper
Miocene in the Santa Margarita formation on the east spur where
the power line crosses Gypsum Canyon, Branch Mountain Quad-
rangle, San Luis Obispo County, Calif. The latter was collected
by a field geology class of the University of Southern California
in July 1948.
The Santa Margarita specimen was originally approximately
rectangular, measuring 115 mm in length, 70 mm wide, and 45
mm thick. The surface is perforated by numerous holes and by
portions of broken tubes ( Pl. 20, fig. 1) of variable length in which
the worm formerly lived. The specimen was sectioned (PIl.. 20,
fig. 2) to study the tubes. Twenty measurements of tube diameter
range from 1.05 to 2.0 mm with a mean of 1.4 mm. Secondary
deposition occurred in many of the tubes which partially or com-
pletely filled the opening (PI. 20, fig. 2, arrow). Measurements
of the original diameters of 20 tubes range from 1.4 to 24 mm
with a mean of 1.85 mm. Five counts show an average of 28
tube openings per square centimeter.
Dall (1909) described ?Serpula octoforis from the “Miocene”
[Pliocene] of Fossil Point, Coos Bay, Oregon. but did not furnish
measurements of the tubes. Packard (1942), at Dr. Olga Hart-
mans suggestion, considered Dall’s species to be identical with
the recent Dodecaceria fistulicola Ehlers, and suggested that
“Serpula” saxistructoris Howell and Mason also apparently is
identical.
Measurements by the author of the holotype of “S.” saxistruc-
toris, show that 20 tube openings range in diameter from 1.5 to
2.4 mm with a mean of 1.9 mm (pl. 20, fig. 3). The average of
five counts is 25 tube openings per square centimeter.
106
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
Recent: Littoral regions including San Mateo County, Half
Moon Bay, Portuguese Bend (collected by Dr. Olga Hartman)
all in California, Cape Arago, Oregon (collected by Mr. Fred
Ziesenhenne ), and from South Africa (collected by Prof. J. H.
Day). All specimens are deposited in the Allan Hancock Foun-
dation annelid collection.
Measurements were made of specimens from California, Ore-
gon, and South Africa. For each specimen the diameters of 20
openings were determined and the number of tubes in five unit
areas counted. The results are as follows: Portuguese Bend, range
1.0 to 1.7 mm, mean 1.4 mm, 25 openings per cm°*; San Mateo Co.,
range 1.25 to 2.0 mm, mean 1.6, 26 openings per cm*; Half Moon
Bay, range 1.65 to 2.4 mm, mean 2.0 mm, 25 openings per cm’;
Cape Arago, range 0.6 to 1.05 mm, mean 0.9:-mm, 27 openings
per cm’; and South Africa, range 0.75 to 1.5 mm, mean 1.1 mm,
specimen too small to determine the number of openings per
square centimeter.
Remarks. — Size and spacing of the tubes are the only char-
acters available for comparison. Length of tubes does not seem
to be significant because colonies contain individuals in various
stages of development. Measurements and counts of the fossil
specimens fall within the ranges of the recent ones and there
seems to be no justifiable reason for concluding that more than
one species is represented. Plate 20, fig. 4 shows a recent colony
that grew under favorable conditions.
Distribution. — Fossil: Miocene of the Santa Margarita for-
mation, San Luis Obispo County, Calif., Pliocene of Fossil Point,
Coos Bay, Oregon, and Pleistocene of Dead Man’s Island, San
Pedro, Calif. Recent: Reported from British Columbia to South-
ern California, Gulf of California, Chile, New Caledonia, Palau
Islands, Ryukyu Islands, French Indo China, Northern Australia,
and South Africa.
LITERATURE CITED
Dall, William H., 1909. The Miocene of Astoria and Coos Bay, Oregon.
U. S. Geol. Survey Prof. paper 59, pp. 1-278, 23 pls.
Ehlers, Ernst, 1901. Die Polychaeten des magellanischen und chilenischen
_Strandes. Fests. Ges. Gottingen. vol. for 1901, pp. 1-232, 25 pls.
Howell, Benjamin F. and John F. Mason, 1937. A reef-forming serpulid from
the Pleistocene of San Pedro, California. Bull. Wagner Free Inst. Sci., vol.
12, pp. 1-2, 2 figs.
Packard, E. L., 1942. The status of supposed fossil cirratulids from the
Pacific coast. Jour. Paleontology, vol. 16, p. 778.
Weaver, Charles E., et al, 1944. Correlation of the marine Cenezoic forma-
tions of Western North America. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., vol. 55, pp.
569-598, 1 pl.
107
So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
\ WATER COOLER FOR TRANSPORTING HEAT
SENSITIVE ANIMALS, ESPECIALLY INSECTS
By Suerwin F. Woop anv Far D. Woop’
Los Angeles City College and 1015 North Alexandria Avenue,
Los Angeles 29, California
Since 1930, the writers have been collecting cone-nosed bugs
(Triatoma and Paratriatoma) in search for natural infections of
Trypanosoma cruzi Chagas in Southwestern United States. Sev-
eral hundred specimens have succumbed to heat shock or exposure
after being removed from coo! burrows of rodents (Neotoma) or
protected retreats in human abodes and placed in collecting
cartons (Wood, 194la).
During summer trips into Arizona, New Mexico, and Texas
(Wood and Wood, 1938; Wood, 1941b), many bugs were saved
by draping wet towels over hardware cloth baskets containing
collecting cartons of insects. Some of these were successfully
brought through the Colorado desert at night in this way. Usually,
these preparations did not protect first instar nymphs and some-
times many adults and larger nymphs died from heat exposure.
Therefore, it became necessary to devise some more efficient
means of protecting the insects from lethal exposure to heat and
dryness.
During the summer of 1949, the senior author designed the
water cooler illustrated in Plate 21 for protecting live animals,
especially Triatoma, from heat shock and exposure. The cooler
was assembled by Denny G. Constantine.
The film can base of the cooler is 30.5 cm. in diameter and 8.5
cm. deep. The inverted aluminum cake pan measures 23 cm. by
4 cm. The hardware cloth cylinder encircling the cake pan is
23.5 em. across and 21 cm. high. The cooler lid measures 29 cm.
by 6 cm. The bottom of the film can is covered with a layer of
absorbent cotton 1 cm. thick plus circles of absorbent cotton inside
the inverted cake pan. A continuous band of absorbent cotton
3 cm. thick encircles the burlap covered hardware cloth cylinder
inside the film can. Two layers of burlap, with a separating,
sewed in layer of absorbent cotton, cover the hardware cloth
circular frame for the lid. This lid covers the larger burlap covered
hardware cloth cylinder which fits tightly over the inverted cake
pan. Complete saturation of the cotton and burlap produces
effective cooling for three hours or more at high temperatures.
* The writers are indebted to the California Forest and Range Experiment
n and Division of Zoology at Davis, University of California, for use of
ties at the San Joaquin Experimental Range, O’Neals, California.
108
BULLETIN, So. Catir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 8, 1952
TTT]
it
aad
N
NS
N
N
oom
2 oo oa os a
jmgaaa
W/ Fi
[|
Plate 21
This is accomplished by pouring water on to the cake pan until
covered and allowing it to stand for five minutes. The sides and
top are soaked under a stream of water. The lid and large cylinder
dry out first but if these are sprinkled every two hours, maximum
effectiveness of the cooler is maintained.
One thousand four hundred and seventy-one experimental
insects have been successfully transported during high tempera-
tures without loss of a single specimen in the cooler illustrated.
Sixteen Triatoma rubida uhleri nymphs (1 fifth, 3 third, 9 second
and 3 first instars) were collected July 16, 1949, twelve miles
southwest of Congress Junction, Yavapai County, Arizona, with
the aid of Denny Constantine and John McManus. The bugs
were carried through the Colorado desert to the Mountaineer
Mine north of Blythe in Riverside County on July 16th and then
to Los Angeles on the afternoon of July 17th. The Fahrenheit
maximum and minimum temperatures for both days at Blythe
were 112° and 81°. Maximum temperature for July 17th at
stations near the route traveled were: Indio 107°, Palm Springs
112° and Beaumont 100°.
2 All Fahrenheit temperatures are from U. S. Weather Bureau data.
109
1h EeTIN So. CALI ACADEMY OIF SCIENCES Vol. Sie Part 3, 1952
On July 1, 1950, 241 bugs were carried in the cooler on the
floor of the rear seat of a sedan from Los Angeles to the San
JGaquin Experimental Range at O’Neals, California. The approxi-
mate midpoint of this route is Bakersfield with afternoon protec-
tion necessary either way if high temperatures prevail. The
maximum temperatures at Bakersfield and Fresno were 115° and
109°, respectively. There were 140 Triatoma protracta (24 adults
and 15 fifth, 10 fourth, 3 third, 5 second and 83 first instar
nymphs ), 52 Triatoma rubida uhleri (12 adults and 40 nymphs of
various instars), 10 Triatoma longipes (1 adult and 9 first instar
nymphs), and 39 Paratriatoma hirsuta (7 adults and 5 fifth, 16
fourth, 4 third and 7 second instar nymphs).
On June 19, 1951, 414 bugs were taken from Los Angeles to
O’Neals with maximum temperatures at Bakersfield and Fresno
of 93° and 88°, respectively. There were 326 Triatoma protracta
(43 adults and 10 fifth, 9 fourth, 4 third and 260 first instar
nymphs ), 47 Triatoma rubida uhleri (3 adults and 44 nymphs of
various instars ), 2 Triatoma longipes (1 third and 1 second instar
nymphs), 12 Paratriatoma hirsuta (10 adults and 2 fifth instar
nymphs ), and 27 Cimex pilosellus of various instars in the cooler.
On September 8, 1951, 800 bugs were transported in the cooler
from O’Neals to Los Angeles with maximum temperatures along
the route as follows: Bakersfield 95°, Sandbergs 93°, and San Fer-
nando 102°. In this group were 495 Triatoma protracta (15 adults
and § fifth, 97 fourth, third and second, and 375 first instar
nymphs), 109 Triatoma rubida uhleri (4 adults and 31 fifth, 4
fourth and 70 third, second and first instar nymphs), 2 Triatoma
longipes (1 fourth and | third instar nymphs ), 1 first instar nymph
of Paratriatoma hirsuta and 193 Cimex pilosellus (mostly nymphs
of various instars ).
Three types of bug containers were used in these experiments,
heavy cardboard mailing tube collecting cartons with screen
windows, glass jars (60 mm. x 90 mm. or smaller) with perforated
metal lids ordinarily used in laboratory culture, and _ plastic
boxes. The plastic boxes’ were of three sizes, 50 x 50 x 20 mm.,
50 x 25 x 20 mm., and 25 x 25 x 20 mm. The use of plastic boxes
increases the carrying capacity of the cooler for experimental
insects where isolation is essential. Care is necessary to avoid
sunlight on the plastic boxes which otherwise allow ample air
circulation for these bugs.
The “49 insects were confined to the screened cardboard car-
tons while the ‘50 specimens were in glass jars and screened col-
lecting cartons. For the June 51 specimens, 353 were in glass jars
and 61 were in plastic boxes. Five hundred nineteen of the
* Obtainable from R. P. Cargille, New York 6, New York.
110
BULLETIN, So. Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
September 51 specimens were in glass jars and 281 were in plastic
boxes.
Additional animals successfully transported on July 17, 1949,
from the Mountainer-Mine were 2 Arizona house bats, Myotis
v. velifer, 2 Mexican free-tailed bats, Tadarida mexicana, | desert
Yuma bat, Myotis y. yumanensis and 18 desert brown bats,
Eptesicus fuscus pallidus. These bats were inside cloth bags in
the cooler which rested on the floor of the rear seat of a sedan
with forward vents and all windows open thus exposing it to a
floor draft of hot air.
On September 8, 1951, while traveling from O’Neals to Los
Angeles, this cooler plus a cardboard box containing 6 Mus
musculus (white mice ), 1 Peromyscus truei gilberti with 2 nursing
young, and 1 female Triatoma protracta in a collecting carton
were carried in the inside rear corner of an open luggage trailer
with tarpaulin cover to protect the animals from the sun. The
cardboard box was perforated for aeration and the rodents were
confined to 130 mm. square hardware cloth cages on a layer of
sawdust. The water saturated cooler contained 800 live bugs.
The position of the containers in the trailer was such that a con-
stant flow of air circulated about the cardboard box and cooler.
The cooler was dampened once during the trip at Bakersfield.
The bugs in the cooler survived the trip. The 6 white mice were
alive on arrival in Los Angeles but the female Peromyscus and
one young and the female Triatoma were dead even though the
Peromyscus were alive when checked at Bakersfield.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Wood, S. F. a
194la. A method of collecting and transporting cone-nosed bugs. Bull.
Brooklyn Ent. Soc. 36(3):137-139, 1 fig. in text.
1941b. New localities for Trypanosoma cruzi Chagas in southwestern
United States. Am. Jour. Hyg., Sec. C, 34(1):1-18, 7 figs. in text.
Wood, F. D and Wood, S. F.
1938. On the distribution of Trypanosoma cruzi Chagas in southwestern
United States. Am. Jour. Trop. Med. 18(2):207-212, 1 fig. in text.
SUE
Buttemin, So. Carur, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 3, 1952
BULLETIN of the SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY of SCIENCES
Published by the Academy at Los Angeles, California
Subscription—$3.50 per year
Free to Life Members and Unlimited Annual Members
of the Academy (Annual Membership Fee $5.00)
Address all communications to Dr. Howarp R. Hii
Care of Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7, Calif., U. S. A.
Publications of the Southern California
Academy of Sciences
The Academy has published to date the following:
PROCEEDINGS, 1896 to 1899. Six numbers—Vol. 1, Nos. 1 to 6.
MISCELLANEOUS BULLETINS issued under the imprint of the Agri-
cultural Experiment Station, 1897 to 1907. Ten numbers.
Allissues of the above are now out of print.
Bulletin of the
Southern California Academy of Sciences
Began issue with Vol. 1, No. 1, January, 1902. Issued ten numbers in
1902: nine numbers in 1903, 1904, 1905; three numbers in 1906. Issued
two numbers annually from 1907 to 1919, both inclusive (except 1908 —
one issue only), Issued four numbers (January, May, July and October) °
in 1920.
The 1921 issues are: Vol. XX, No. 1, April; Vol. XX, No. 2, August;
Vol. XX, No. 3, December.
The 1922 issues are: Vol. XXI, No. 1, March; Vol. XXI, No. 2, September.
The 1923 issues are: Vol. XXII, No. 1, March; No. 2, July.
The 1924 issues are: Vol. XXIII, No. 1, January-February; No. 2, March-
April; No. 3, May-June; No. 4, July-August; No. 5, September-October;
No. 6, November-December.
From 1925 to 1952, including volumes XXIV to 51, three numbers were
published each year. These were issued as No. 1, January-April; No. 2,
May-August; No. 3, September-December, for each volume.
MEMOIRS
Vol. 1, 1938. Vol. 2, Part 1, 1939. Vol. 2, Part 2, 1944. Vol. 3, Part 1,
1947. Vol. 3, Part 2, 1949.
112
PR SS erie.
BULLETIN, So.
Cauir. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol.
ol, Part 321952
Publications of the Southern California
BULLETIN
Vol. 3, No.
Academy of Sciences
For Sale at the Appended Prices
—
CO
bo
i)
—
ee
PHS
ee
Geel 92/4 (each) =e
OO 5a (each) fete -5 sees
m=
(doy
bo
(o>)
TRS PA (Gee) a) ease = rete ae i eee
By TG pekes: (evel ny) ae a ee
NGO 9M (each) ee eerste Ese aie
Sel Sita Geach) eee eked eee eee
O32 Cea ny) eee see eee eet ae ae
MOSSE (each) ates eee eee ee
NO S4i (each) ees ee
N93 55 (Keach) ieee ws ee ee
LO S6R Geach!) ae ee Saat
MO Sim Keac hy) eee eee eee
NOS Se (each) ee een
1G 39s Ceachi) oe soe eens
LOAN (each) eee ee ee
NG49s Gea hy) hie i eee eee
N9431(each) Ba Sie eee eee
NOAA (Gach) eee aa. ol ee alee
QA a (Kec lay) esata care ee ets
GAGE (each) ee a eee
NG AGF eae ly) eee cee ee ee ee
NGA SR Cea ht) Meeeccee eae enenee
1949 Geach) Mt. ene ae
9508 (each) Mes eee ee ae
INO 51e (ea chi) es eee eae
NG SOM (eac hil) a. ee eee
(Continued on next page)
pppprpppy)
Po 9 w 99 ¢
oy PpNPNyNNyNNNNHNLP
G2 99 Co Go 69 Go oo Go Go Go Bo Go
wo bo
Fan ea ee se ee ee oe SS
bo
A)
113
To To Non-
Members Members
$ .50 1.00
00 1.00
00 1.00
1.50 3.00
1.00 2.00
15 1.50
1.50 3.00
2.00 4.00
75 1.50
1.50 3.00
.50 1.00
00 1.00
1.00 2.00
35 15
35 75
35 75
35 15
35 75
35 15
35 75
35 75
35° 15
35 75
RSr) 75
35 15
35 15
35 75
35 15
35 15
35 15
35 15
35 75
35 15
35 15
35 75
35 15
35 75
35 15
35 15
.60 1.25
.60 1.25
Buttetin, So, Cater, ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. 51, Part 8, 1952
PUBLICATIONS (continued)
To To Non-
MEMOIRS Members Members
Vol. 1, ISGS—paper, COVER meen cose ses. ce-..sieetencnnssstmananel Nerves $2.00 $4.00
ee ae “ bound in black fabrikoid........................ 3.00 5.00
printed on one side of papet.................. 3.00 5.00
<> sleds “printed on one side of page (bound)... 4.00 6.00
Vol. 2, No. 1; 19S89—paper Cover nc: -tc ie caeceeeeceeeereneeeee 1.25 2.50
<= bound in black tabmkoidiceee IAS) 3.50
& printed on one side of page.......... 75 3.50
G. 1944—paper COVEN 2.2.2 cae scesccnceee aeons 75 1.50
3; 1, 1947—paper COVER <.2/.21200.--2.sy ecu 1.00 2.00
= 2 W949—paper COVER <.icccci--cccseese donee sete 1.00 2.00
Miscellaneous, Publications of Affiliated or
Co-operating Organizations
Lorquinia—Vols. 1, 2 (all published ).......... bound $1.50, unbound $1.00
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA GEOLOGY AND LOS ANGELES
EARTHQUAKES, RR... Hill 2.2 bound 2.50
Southwest Science Bulletin, May 5, 1920 (all published),
chiefly Entomological, 1 color plate.....-2....22...22...2-cssececeseeeeneeeees 1.00
Check-list of the Recent Bivalve Mollusks (of N. W. Coast of
Am. from the Polar Sea to San Diego), W. H. Dall... 1.00
FLORA OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA by Anstruther Davidson
and George Lu. Moxley, 452 pp., 1923). 2 eee 2.50
Reprints:
Check-list of the Lepidoptera of Boreal America. Superfamilies
Sphingoidea, Saturnioidea and Bombycoidea (printed on one
side of page only, to allow of additional notes), Wm. Barnes
and Poster Hi. Benjamin, lOl7e = eee $ .50
The Cacti of the Pyramid Peak Region, Dona Ana County, New
Mexico, 1931. FE. R. Hoshers. = eee wp)
Check-list of the Macrolepidoptera of Canada and the United
State of America by Dr. J. McDunnough, 1938, printed on
white bristol board, one side of page (without index) suitable
for labels. To Academy members, $1.50. To non-members.... 3.00
A List of the ANTS OF CALIFORNIA with notes of their habits
and distribution. 44 pages, 3 plates, by Arnold Mallis.............. 00
A Check List of the HELICOID SNAILS OF CALIFORNIA, 32
pages, from Henry A. Pilsbury’s Monograph, by Wm. M.
Ingram 22... ce ee 510)
Contributions from the Los Angeles Museum — CHANNEL
ISLANDS BIOLOGICAL SURVEY. Papers 1 to 33. Bound.. 3.00
AppRESS ALL INQUIRIES TO
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Care Dr. Howarp R. Hi.)
Los Angeles Museum, Exposition Park,
Los Angeles 7; Calif., U. S. A.
114
Bulletin, Southern California Academy of Sciences
Vol. LI
mi oS2:
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
A Key to Nevada Fishes............ 86
A New Amphipod of the Genus
Ceradocus (Denticeradocus)
from Lower California............ 55
A New Genus and Species as-
sociated with Orchids from
Mexico (Lepidoptera; Chry-
Senos CS)) eee ee et il
A New Strepsipterous Parasite
of Membracid® ........................ 4
A Water Cooler for Transport-
ing Heat Sensitive Animals,
especially Insects —...........0...... 108
Acrocheilus alutaceum Agassiz &
EUG CE Tel Sete ee cen Ree 98
Ameiurus melas (Rafinesque)...... 92
Ameiurus nebulosus (Le Sueur)... 92
Amphipod
Archoplites interruptus (Girard). 88
Bats
Blood vessels
Carassius auratus (Linneus) ...... 97
Catastomus ardens Jordan &
Gilbert
Catastomus columbianus BE. & E. 96
Catastomus latipinnis Baird &
Girard
Catastomus macrocheilus Girard.. 96
Catastomus tahaensis Gill &
OIG] EN oa ee a ee oS Te 96
Ceradocus (Denticeradocus)
paucidentatus Barnard _.......... 55
Ceratocephala crosslandi ameri-
Calliawilantmiany ss =e 16
Chasmistes cujus Cope............-------- 95
Chiyjsaugida = 1
Crinescuniloselltrs pee 110
Cina iidise sos oe eee oe 104
Colonial tube building poly-
cheetous annelid —........... 103
Coregonus williamsoni Girard...... 92
Cottus bairdi Girard _._.............. 87
Cottus bairdi beldingi B. & E..... 87
Cottus bairdi semiscaber (Cope) 87
Crenichthys baileyi (Gilbert) ... 91
Crenichthys nevadze Hubbs.......... 91
Cyprinodon diabolis Wales.......... 90
Cyprinodon nevadensis H. & E..... 90
Cyprinodon nevadensis mionectes
METS recaps tens lee hela a see 90
Cyprinodon nevadensis pectoralis
SW GON ep eanent ted aN ie cine op eae It 90
Cyprinus carpio Linneeus.............. oii
Discussion of the Colonial Tube-
building Polychetous Annelid
Dodecaceria fistulicola Ehlers 103
Dodecaceria fistulicola Ehlers...... 103
Dural blood vessels of salaman-
ders
Empetrichthys latos Mil-er .......... 91
Empetrichthys latos concavus
Miller
Empetrichthys latos latos Miller... 91
Empetrichthys latos pahrump
Miller
Empetrichthys merriami Gilbert. 91
Eptesicus fuscus pallidus.......-...-.... 111
Eremichthys acros Hubbs &
SW EDU Ken panei geese ween a ce nS 98
Eucosma hasseanthi Clarke........ 60
Fishes of Nevada.......................... 86
EXO S'Sini] ao 105 Cl |S eee ee ee cee 54
Gambusia affinis (Baird & Girard) 89
Gila atraria (Girard) —................ 100
Gila robusta elegans
Baird & Girard.................2........ 101
Gila robusta jordani Tannev........ 101
Gila robusta robusta
Baird & Girard................00........ 100
Gila robusta seminuda
Cope & Yarrow...............222.--.---- 101
Glena interpunctata B. & McD... 72
Glena kirkwoodaria Sperry ...... 72
Glena mcdunnougharia Sperry.. 73
Glena minor Sperry _................... 75d
Glena quinquelinearia Packard... 72
Glena thomasaria Sperry .......... 74
Herman, Dr. Jcohn.......................... 21
Ictalurus catus (Linneus)._......... 91
Ictalurus punctatus (Rafiinesque) 91
Iphitime and Ceratocephala
(Polychetous Annelids)
Iphitime loxorhynchi Hartman. 11
Lepidomeda vittata Cope .............. 97
Lepomis cyanellus Rafinesque.... 89
Lepomis macrochirus
IRENE OAESONWE | cessococcesococcecsscceosoecssoos 89
Ioysanretidiaoew 222 ko eee eee 9
ate
pty
Membracid parasite ~.................. 4
Membracixenos, new genus........ 5
Membracixenos jordani Pierce.. 5
Micropterus dolomieui Lacépede 89
Micropterus salmoides
(eacepede) i eo ee 89
Microvelia inannana
Wrakeveés HOttes:--------- 67
Microvelia ioana
DrakencarlOUUCS = 65
Microvelia pueblana
Draken cplOulese 64
Microvelia rasilis Drake _.............- 64
Microvelia verana
DralkenacpElOULeSh2 ee 66
Microvelia zillana
DRakenensHlOCheS 63
Moapa coriacea Hubbs & Miller 98
MAUS TIUSGULIIS ee 111
Myotis velifer velifer -........-.....---- 111
Myotis yumanensis yumanensis.... 111
IN(GienG ce eens Ss Lon a ee) 13
New Neogeean Water-striders of
the genus Microvelia____...........- 63
Notes on the Genus Glena Hulst
and Descriptions of New
SDCCICS pete ees ee ee 71
@lenellii dees eee 25
Olenellus bristolensis (Resser).... 30
Olenellus fremonti Walcott —__... 3
Olenellus insolens (Resser) .......- 30
Olethrewtidcey=s 60
Oncorhynchus nerka kennerlyi
(Sui@H en) > = ees 93
Oncorhynchus tschawytscha
(@QWiallibaninn) ee 93
Orchidwinsects: 1
Orthodon microlepidotus (Ayres) 98
Pezdeumias clarki Resser _.........- 33
Pzxdeumias mohavensis Crickmay 3
Pzedeumias nevadensis (Walcott) 33
Pantosteus intermedius (Tanner) 96
Pantosteus lahontan Rutter -....... 96
Paratriatoma hirsuta ---...---.----------- 110
Perca flavescens (Mitchill)—...... 87
Peromyscus truei gilberti-----..-..----- 111
Plagopterus argentissimus Cope... 97
Pomoxis annularis Rafinesque ... 88
Pomoxis nigromaculatus
(ILE) SUSAR) ate eee 88
Patosay newa eens eee 1
Potosa rufofascialis Capps.......... i
Ptychocheilus lucius Girard _........ 99
Ptychocheilus oregonense
(Richardson) 99
Rhinichthys nubilus (Girard) ...... 99
Rhinichthys nubilus carringtoni
(COpe)o tetas ee a ee 99
Rhinichthys nubilus nevadensis
Gilbert? aS 2 ee nae 99
Rhinichthys nubilus robustus
(Rutter) ee ieee 99
Rhinichthys nubilus velifer
Gilbert 20 ee eee 99
Richardsonius balteatus
@ichar.dson) i. 100
Richardsonius balteatus
hydrophlox (Cope) ..........-.-.------ 100
Salamanders eeen mene 79
Salmo clarki henshawi
Goul Ce ORG WN cae 94
Salmo gairdneri irideus Gibbons.. 94
Salmo trutta Linnzus
Salvelinus fontinalis (Mitchill).... 98
Salvelinus malma (Walbaum) ... 93
Salvelinus namaycush
(@QWaalllbaiimn)) een 93
Siphateles bicolor obesus (Girard) 98
Smith Creek cave fossil birds... 54
Sonia comstocki Clarke... 62
Spissistylus festinus (Say) -.... 5
Strepsiptena i eee 4
Teratornis incredibilis Howard 51
The Lower Cambrian Olenel-
lide of the Southern Marble
Mountains, California
The Prehistoric Avifauna of
Smith Creek Cave, Nevada,
with a Description of a New
GiganticeRapto. 50
Driatoma longipes =--- 110
Triatoma protracta .....------------------- 110
Triatoma rubida uhleri -.......--...----- 109
DMO DUES S tg ee eee ai a ee 25
Two new Species of Olethreu-
tide from California... 60
Wiel a3 Sikes as eee 63
Water: cooler 2.2232 ae 108
Xyrauchen texanus (Abbott)... 95
New varieties, species, genera and families indicated in bold face type.
INDEX OF AUTHORS
IBlanciamann, (Obey see ese eeceee acne
Toes Vell Vepraay AVS seer
FENG tS vy Oye sch a ees
Howard, Hildegarde ~...................
Kaine? EVO MTC Yee ress oo eee 21
WawERUvid Ste lla esa eee eee 86
IPNEIACE, WAV ID Aa Oth 4
Reishy Donal dese 103
Ricciow JOSephe he 25
Soe, DION Wp nape eccoeccccctecse 71
WiOOds Hales D) see eee 108
WAWVorexel, SUNG WAG, NS Speco teeccccs
REPRINTS: Contributors of articles ad cned for publication in the
Bulletin should order reprints, if desired, when they return galley proof
to the Editor. They may be ordered through the Editor at the following
rates, from the Commonwealth Press, 1507 DeLong Street, Los Angeles,
Calif., the contributor paying for all his reprints.
PRICE JEISh OF REPRINTS
(WITHOUT COVERS)
4pp. 8pp. = 12pp. 16pp. 20pp. 24pp. 28pp. 32pp.
LoS eee slo $5.75 $8.50 $10.25 $11.75 $13.50 $16.00: $17,00
Re A 50 THOM NOM Se 1215 5 Na:OOm lak2ou 202507 1S0)
Asp 25 925 VSO IS25 9 ees) Alte) wALsfo) Zr (0/0)
GOON OOM mia: 251) lives 2-50) 245/50 28:75) S050
ey ey Gripe 2475) W500. 20.25. 24'75." 28.50). 33.00) 35.00
‘ HeaOw 14350) 9.75: 22075. 28.00) 32.25. 437.25 . 39:50
: 50 for $2.00—additional covers 1 Y2c each.
< California State Sales Tax to be added if delivered within the state.
2 f es es.
~-
es
he Commonwealth Press, §uc.
Est. 1906
oe
@ PUBLICATIONS @ CATALOGS
@ FOREIGN LANGUAGE TEXTS
@ COMPLETE GRAPHIC ARTS SERVICE
ie A
PRospect 2233
1507 DeLong Street, Los Angeles 15, California
Ly
‘
“a
-
]
~A
‘
.
‘
*
i)
Pick,
|
ie
ee
STN
~ 3 5185 00296 82%
Ss ae eR SA a eS hl te ee ge en ee ee eR ee
Smee ma a ae NT ERE OID A ORO ARS OE APT Ni
ag 3 Seek te
gare gs ene N Pra poem geet ee eel
A AT pn OO gaa
A) Pn th cl Nhe Re Oath a
LOT Pe ee Di Ta Ai eels CR ea ll Rin nen Poco Paglia et